JP7205585B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there have been proposed gaming machines intended to enhance the interest of players by executing various effects.

JP 2007-252534 A

However, the gaming machine described above is required to be more interesting.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes a predetermined determination based on ball entry means into which a game ball can enter and the game ball entering the ball entry means . a determination means capable of providing a privilege, a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, a first game state in which the privilege is likely to be granted, and the first game A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which it is more difficult to give the privilege than a state, an effect executing means capable of executing a effect, and a specific effect being executed by the effect executing means. and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period of time, wherein the effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect indicating that the first game state is set during execution of the specific effect. The suggestive effect can be executed when the determination game based on the determination is being performed in a state in which the specific period is set, and a state in which the specific period is not set. Alternatively, when the determination game is not performed while the specific period is set, the game is not executed, and the game based on the determination is performed when the specific period is set. When a standby effect that can be set when not executed is executed, it is not executed. and the suggestive effect is not executed during the period during which the special effect is being executed, and the specific effect is executed after the period during which the special effect is being executed ends. is set to continue .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, there is a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a determination means capable of executing a predetermined determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entrance means. a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a first game state in which the privilege is likely to be granted; and the privilege more than the first game state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which it is difficult to provide a game state, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, and a specific period during which a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means is set. and a specific period setting means, wherein the effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect indicating that the first game state is set during execution of the specific effect, and The suggestive effect can be executed when the determination game based on the determination is being performed in a state where the specific period is set, and when the specific period is not set or when the specific period is not set. When the determination game is not performed while the period is set, it is not executed , and is set when the game based on the determination is not performed when the specific period is set. The game machine enters a ball into the ball-entering means and executes a special A performance can be executed, the suggestive performance is not executed during the period during which the special performance is executed, and the specific period is continuously set after the period during which the special performance is executed ends. Since it is enabled to be executed when it is being executed, there is an effect that interest can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board and the operation unit. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the operating unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface and a board surface lower unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a board surface lower unit. (a) is a front view of a base member, a first outlet, a second outlet, a lower left plate member, and a lower right plate member, and (b) is a base member taken along line XVb-XVb in FIG. 15(a). and a cross-sectional view of the left lower plate member. It is a front perspective view of a vertical movement unit. It is a back perspective view of a vertical movement unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a vertical movement unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the up-and-down motion unit; It is a front view of a vertical motion unit. It is a front view of a vertical motion unit. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the compound action unit; Fig. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the compound action unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion and contraction effect device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion and contraction effect device. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a front view of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. (a) and (b) are front views of a rotating arm member and a rotating crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from a standard horizontal line of a projection part. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a sliding operation unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit; FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting unit; FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit; It is a front exploded perspective view of a production|presentation member and a 2nd drive device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rocking|swiveling angle of the production|presentation member with respect to the rocking|swiveling angle of a transmission member. 4 is a front view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of a tilting motion unit and a sliding motion unit; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a second embodiment. 4 is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring; FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission member and a torsion spring in a third embodiment. (a) is a back perspective view of a transmission member in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a back perspective view of a moving contact member. (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member, and (c) and (d) are top views of the transmission member. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the main-body member of the production|presentation member typically. 4 is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of a compound action unit according to the fifth embodiment; It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. It is a front view of a compound action unit. (a) is a partial front view of a rotating arm member in a sixth embodiment, (b) is a partial top view of the rotating arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. ) is a partial front view of the rotating arm member. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a switching device. (a) and (b) are front views of a compound action unit. (a) and (b) are front views of a tilting motion unit according to a seventh embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a special symbol reserved ball storage area, a special symbol reserved ball execution area, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing a first winning type selection table, and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing a second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table, It is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for big hits, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a (normal) variation pattern table for loss, and (d) is a (probable variation) variation pattern for loss It is the figure which showed the table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing contents of a ball-entering effect selection table in the first control example; 2 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a work RAM of a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a correction information table in the first control example. be. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing set coordinates of a display area in the first control example; (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the power is turned on in the first control example. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a display data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. It is an example of a timing chart of the variable display mode during the time saving game in the first control example. (a) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during time saving in the first control example. (a) to (b) are examples of display modes displayed on the third symbol display device during time saving in the first control example. It is a timing chart in which the time production in the first control example is set. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing stop setting processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing time setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing an advance notice selection process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production|presentation management process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 9 is a flow chart showing specific time effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing a ball-entering effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing advance notice command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing a ball entry effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a specific time effect command process to be executed. (a) is a flowchart showing an effect mode change command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by . 8 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect information correction processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) to (b) are explanatory diagrams of control of the stepping motor in the first control example. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing whether or not detection by the slide position detection sensor is possible for each positional relationship between the slide position detection sensor and the light shielding plate. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor and the sensor shielding portion when the effect member is at the origin position; (a) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor and the sensor shielding portion when the effect member swings leftward when viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor and the sensor shielding portion when a swing motion is performed in the viewing right direction; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in a second control example; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in a second control example; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario table defined in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the second control example; (b) is an operation scenario table in the second control example; FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the included slide motion table, and FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the tilting motion table contained in the motion scenario table in the second control example; be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an initial operation table included in the operation scenario table in the second control example, (b) is a ROM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing defined contents of a defined swing region table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of a slide operation and the directions in which the production member can be swung in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps for a swing motion and the number of operation steps for a slide motion in a second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing origin return processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; 9 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing character product operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing execution command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing additional operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing tilt direction setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing abnormality detection processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing slide operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the third control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM of an audio ramp control device in a third control example; (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a RAM in the audio ramp control device in a third control example; 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a timing effect selection table defined in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a pressing period table defined in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an opening difficulty level 3 table included in the pressing period table in the third control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the sub-display device during the timing effect, and (b) is an example of the display content when the player successfully presses the frame button during the timing effect. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the player fails to press the frame button in the timing effect, and (b) is a case where the high difficulty level effect mode is selected as the timing effect. 3 is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the sub-display device in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the display contents of the sub-display device when the player has achieved the quota in the timing effect, and (b) is a sub-display when the player has not achieved the quota in the timing effect. It is the figure which showed the display content of a display apparatus. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a change in the aspect of the variable effect in which the timing effect is set in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example. 10 is a flow chart showing timing effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing middle stage setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing end stage setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing notification mode setting processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example, and (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit in the fourth control example. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating a lighting state in which the visual quality deteriorates when the rotating member rotates at a low speed in the fourth control example; FIG. FIGS. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a lighting state with good appearance when the rotating member is rotating at a low speed in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of lighting control when the rotary member is in a high-speed rotation state in the fourth control example. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing lighting control processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing low-speed processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing rotational speed identification processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing acceleration processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing high-speed processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the rotary lighting unit is in the retracted position in the fourth control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine when the rotary lighting unit is in the extended position in the fourth control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a pressing period and a display mode in a modified example of the third control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between pressing periods and songs when normal pressing periods are set in a modification of the third control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between pressing periods and songs in a modification of the third control example when pressing periods with later timings are set. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the timing effect selection table specified in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the modified example of the third control example, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the modified example of the third control example FIG. 10C is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between effects and obtainable points, and FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a pressing period table defined in the ROM of the sound lamp control device. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an audio ramp control device in a modified example of the third control example; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in a modified example of the third control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a successful process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing timing processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in a modified example of the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing offset setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in a modified example of the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing middle stage setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the modified example of the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing end stage setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the modified example of the third control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing notification mode setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the modified example of the third control example; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are connected to the game board. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of 13 .

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below. The first variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the lower board unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. The types of jackpots determined here include jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot), and jackpot C (2R probability-variable time-shorter jackpot). The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the "16R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a special pattern high probability state (probability variable state) after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds and a time saving state of normal patterns, "2R A jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds is followed by a high-probability state (probability variable state) with special patterns, but a short-time state with normal patterns is not given. In addition, "16R time saving jackpot", after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, moves to a low probability state of special symbols, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations) Time saving state It is a big hit.

In addition, the "high probability state of special symbols (probability variable state)" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a so-called probability fluctuation state (probability variable state), in other words, a special game state It is a game state that is easy to shift to. The high-probability state (variable probability state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Special symbol low probability state" refers to the time when it is not a variable probability state, and the state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the state where the jackpot probability is lower than the variable probability state. In addition, the time-saving state of normal symbols (during time-saving) refers to a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbols) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 is a game state that is neither the probability changing state of the special symbols nor the time-saving state of the normal symbols (the state in which neither the special symbol jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) winning probability is increased). ).

During the time-saving state of the normal design, not only is the probability of winning the normal design (second design) increased, but the time at which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is also changed, compared to the normal state. and a long open time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the time-saving state, the balls are likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the time saving state of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened more than during normal times. In addition, during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the electric role is the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and one hit. At least one of the number of times the object 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time are not set. 2 symbols) may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays a normal pattern (second pattern) triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 12-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three pattern rows, upper, middle and lower, are displayed. is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops displaying the "○" symbol after the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for variable display of normal symbols (second symbols) is set so as to be shorter during probability variation or during time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the time-saving state of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols (second symbols) is performed in a short time, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time-saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 .

In addition, during the time saving state, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one time, etc. If the state is easy, the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for variable display of normal symbols (second symbol) is set shorter than during the normal state during the time saving state of the normal symbols, even if the probability of winning the normal symbols is constant regardless of the game state. Alternatively, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal pattern (second pattern) winning lottery is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of normal symbols (second symbols) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment. 37B and part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes. On the other hand, an electric accessory 640a is provided in the second winning hole 640, and it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a normally (when it is not during time saving), so that the game ball can enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加is in a difficult state.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a , so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by winning in the first prize opening 64, there are many chances of winning a big lottery. It is advantageous for the player to aim to be.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and opens the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the second prize winning port 640 in addition to the state.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a first specific prize winning port 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second variable winning device 650 having a circular shape of about the same size as the other winning ports 63, 64, 640 is placed substantially in the center. A specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the normally closed specific winning holes 65a and 650a are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific prize winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b ( See FIG. 15, only the outline is shown). The first specific prize winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the front side by driving the large opening solenoid 65b to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the first specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. The closed state and the state of the closed state are alternately repeated.

Specifically, the second variable prize winning device 650 has a triangular opening and closing plate in front view disposed on the left side of the second specific prize winning opening 650a, and is driven to open and close to the left with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. and a large open solenoid (not shown). The second specific prize winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big hit, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the left by driving the small opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the second specific prize winning port 650a, and the open state and the normal state are formed. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to win the ball in the second variable winning device 650 by hitting left, thus eliminating the trouble of switching between hitting left and hitting right each time the game state changes. can do.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area. Triggered by a ball entering the specific winning openings 65a and 650a while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the game is opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a and 650a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, and may be, for example, below the first prize winning opening 64.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 314 and a second outlet 315 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out hole 314 or the second out hole 315 (not shown). guided to the road. The first out port 314 is arranged on the lower left side of the first prize winning port 64 , while the second out port 315 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64 . That is, the second out port 315 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

Therefore, the ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end of the game area (the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73) on the right side of the first winning hole 64 (the right side in FIG. 2) is the inner rail 61 Or it flows down along the slope of the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area is located on the left side of the first winning port 64 in front view. The ball that has reached it flows down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 100) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side as a front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205 to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include a vertical driving motor 431 , an opening/closing driving motor 466 , and other driving motors 531 , 561 , 631 , 661 , and 751 .

Various drive motors (the vertical drive motor 431, the open/close drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, and 751) will now be described. These various drive motors are composed of, for example, known stepping motors, and are provided in plurality in association with the respective roles installed in the pachinko machine 10 in order to operate the respective roles. These various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of steps of rotation, the direction of rotation (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotation speed is sent from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver). to output A control IC (motor driver) drives various corresponding drive motors based on the output command. As the motor control IC (motor driver), a single IC that can set operations for a plurality of drive motors may be adopted, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor drivers) may be provided. may be configured to operate the drive motors corresponding to different accessories respectively. When using a motor control IC (motor driver) that can set the operation for multiple drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps, etc., includes information for specifying the type of drive motor. and output it.

Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described using the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the up-and-down drive motor 431 based on the set command, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is operated each time one step of operation is executed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that the execution has been executed is output. This execution signal allows the MPU 221 to grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). This step counter is provided for each accessory, and is a counter that counts how many steps each accessory has moved from the origin (retreat) position. That is, with the origin (retraction) position as the position of step 0, the value is updated by 1 each time an execution signal is received from the control IC. More specifically, the value is incremented by 1 each time the accessory moves one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retreat) position to the end point (projection) position. Also, the value is decremented by 1 each time one step is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (projection) position to the origin (retraction) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the action position of each role based on the value of the step counter.

Here, the origin position refers to a specific arrangement set for each accessory, and is the position to which the character moves when returning to the origin when the power is turned on. Specifically, each accessory is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is at the origin position. If the origin sensor is not turned on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor turns on. The accessory is varied until it is detected (that is, various drive motors are driven). This origin position is the reference position for the action of each accessory. The step counter described above is reset to 0 when the accessory returns to the origin position (that is, when the origin sensor detects that it is on). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

Next, an example of control of various drive motors (vertical drive motor 431 in this case) by a motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the explanation easier to understand, a stepping motor that rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one turn in four steps) will be described as an example. It is configured so that the rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once per step.

First, FIG. 135(a) is a diagram showing an overview of the up-and-down drive motor 431 which is a stepping motor. The up-and-down drive motor 431 is configured such that when excitation control data is sent from the sound lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC, the portion corresponding to the excitation control data is excited. Specifically, excitation is performed by the motor control IC according to excitation control data composed of four-digit binary numbers corresponding to "A, B, C, D" shown in FIG. 135(a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, and D) of the vertical drive motor 431 is "1", it is excited, and the excitation control data is "0". is not excited. For example, if the excitation control data is "1100", A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. This excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The sound lamp control device 113 also includes an excitation counter that is used to select and set one excitation control data from a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135(b)). is provided. This excitation counter can be updated by 1 in the positive direction starting from "0". It's becoming Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, each part is immediately excited based on the excitation control data (that is, the vertical drive motor 431 operates without time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Additionally, the excitation counter can be updated in the negative direction as well. That is, the value can be updated in the order of "0"→"3"→"2"→"1"→"0" starting from "0". When updating in the negative direction, the direction of rotation of the up/down drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the positive direction. The direction (positive direction or negative direction) in which the excitation counter is updated and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of character whose action is to be set. Note that the maximum value of the excitation counter changes according to the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once per step (that is, it takes 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter is updated in the range of "0" to "359". A loop counter.

Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the vertical drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 135(b). FIG. 135(b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between an excitation table defining excitation control data and the state of the vertical drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135(b), the excitation control data is defined for each value of the excitation counter in the excitation table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(b), as the sequence data corresponding to the up/down drive motor 431, excitation control of "1100, 0110, 0011, 1001" in the order of excitation counters "0" to "3" is performed. Data are specified for each. When the sequence data "1100" corresponding to the excitation counter value "0" is set, the vertical drive motor 431 is excited at positions A and B. When "0110", which is the sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value "1", is set, the positions B and C of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of . Further, when the sequence data "0011" corresponding to the excitation counter value "2" is set, the positions C and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, and the excitation counter value is "1". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from Further, when the sequence data "1001" corresponding to the excitation counter value "3" is set, the positions A and D of the vertical drive motor 431 are excited, so that the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of . Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the up/down drive motor 431 rotates clockwise by 90 degrees each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the up/down drive motor 431 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

As described above, the control of the vertical drive motor 431 has been described using a simplified operation model. It can be rotated by 1 degree each time it is updated). That is, when varying each accessory, the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 by the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be varied, and by setting the excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter each time the excitation counter is updated, Each role can be changed accurately.

Thus, in this embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotational speed, rotational direction, and number of rotational steps specified by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize various performance actions using the role item.

In addition, a unique action pattern is set for each role object according to the production. This operation pattern defines a command to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

Further, in this embodiment, whether or not the various drive motors have completed their operation based on the command set for the motor driver is determined based on the number of steps in which the various drive motors have operated. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of times of reception of the execution signal output from the motor driver each time one step of operation is set by the motor driver, it is determined whether the operation set for each drive motor has been completed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to measure the elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors, and determine whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed based on the elapsed time. .

Here, the control of the up/down driving motor 431 and the opening/closing driving motor 466 that are cooperatively controlled in this embodiment will be described. Details will be described in the first control example described later, but in this embodiment, the vertical motion unit device (falling role) 400 is used as an effect (falling role scenario) in which the vertical motion unit device (falling role) 400 moves. The lens member 460 and the door member 470 are driven by the up-and-down drive motor 431 to move downward in the front view (falling direction). In the production (dropping accessory scenario), the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the downward direction (falling direction) when viewed from the front, and then the door member 470 is opened by the opening/closing driving motor 466. Not directed and provided.

The sound lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment controls the opening/closing drive motor 466 for opening and closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is executed in the effect (falling accessory scenario). On the other hand, control (energization stop control) is performed so that excitation is turned off for all positions A to D (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is off, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening/closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, the up-and-down drive motor 431 is driven to move the slide member 450 in the falling direction.

Here, in the present embodiment, the above-described torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated in the door member 470 . As a result, when the slide member 450 is moved in the downward direction (falling direction) in front view without driving the opening/closing drive motor 466 to open the door member 470, the inertial force acting on the door member 470 moves the door. Member 470 can be in an open state. That is, when the door member 470 and the slide member 450 have finished moving in the downward direction in front view (that is, when the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 are arranged at the projecting positions), the door member 470 moves downward in the front view. A directional inertial force (that is, a force that tends to continue to move downward when viewed from the front) acts to open the door member 470 . Therefore, power consumption for driving the opening/closing motor 466 can be reduced.

If the inertial force generated in the door member 470 due to the movement of the slide member 450 is insufficient to open the door member 470, the open/close drive motor 466 may be driven to open the door member 470. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 along with the movement of the slide member 450, the drive torque of the opening/closing drive motor 466 can be reduced. 466 can be made smaller.

In addition, switching between opening the door member 470 by driving the opening/closing motor 466 and opening the door member 470 without driving the opening/closing motor 466 may be performed according to the effect pattern. For example, when a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, the opening/closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470. On the other hand, when a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, the door member 470 is opened and closed. The door member 470 may be opened without driving the opening motor 466 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the performance pattern with a high degree of expectation.

Further, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not moved in the falling direction, that is, when the inertial force does not act on the door member 470, torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state ) is configured to provide sufficient torque to keep the door member 470 closed. Therefore, even during a period in which the falling accessory scenario is not executed, there is no need to excite the opening/closing drive motor 466 to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state, and power consumption can be reduced. If the torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is insufficient for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet may be attached to the tip of the door member 470. Such provision may be configured to reduce the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state.

On the other hand, when an effect (falling accessory scenario) in which the door member 470 is not opened is executed, excitation control is performed so that the opening/closing driving motor 466 for opening and closing the door member does not rotate. Specifically, by continuing to energize the corresponding portion (A to D) based on the current excitation counter in the excitation table (FIG. 135(b)) for a certain period of time, the opening/closing drive motor 466 is stopped. A torque to maintain the position (so-called holding torque) is generated to maintain the closed state of the door member 470. As a result, the sliding member 450 is not opened even though the door member 470 is not opened. It is possible to reliably prevent (suppress) the door member 470 from being opened by the momentum (inertial force) when the door member 470 is moved in the falling direction.

If the above-described opening/closing control of the door member 470 and the opening/closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening/closing control do not match, the effect to be executed thereafter may be changed.

Specifically, when an effect based on a falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is being executed, the opening/closing drive motor 466 is controlled to be energized and stopped, and then the door member 470 is opened. The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 becomes visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the characters "Super Hot" displayed on the third pattern display device 81 through the lens member 460. - 特許庁By visually recognizing the display of the third pattern display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the display can be made more impressive to the player.

On the other hand, when the door member 470 is not opened even though the opening/closing drive motor 466 is controlled to be deenergized, even though the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "hot". In this case, the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, but the door member 470 is not opened. Therefore, in this effect, the fact that the door member 470 has not been opened although the opening/closing drive motor 466 has been controlled to stop being energized is detected by an origin sensor or the like capable of detecting the state of the door member 470. In this case, After that, the effect is changed so that the third pattern display device 81 does not display the characters "Extremely Hot". As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the characters "Extremely Hot" are not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be made to recognize that the effect of not opening the door member 470 has been executed. , it is possible to avoid giving the impression that the above-described problem has occurred. In this case, the occurrence of the problem may be notified to the employee by lighting a specific LED or notifying the hall computer through an external output terminal.

In addition, as a scenario for dropping the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical motion unit device (dropping accessory) 400, a scenario in which it moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position in one motion, and a scenario in which a plurality of motions (for example, two degrees) from the retracted position to the extended position. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened after that, even if the door member 470 is opened by the second operation, two It is possible to make the player feel that the door member 470 is moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position by the action, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

Further, the driving speed of the vertical driving motor 431 is changed to change the inertial force acting on the door member 470 depending on the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened. It may be configured as Specifically, in a falling accessory scenario in which the door member 470 is opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is increased, while the door member 470 is opened. In the falling accessory scenario, the driving speed of the vertical driving motor 431 is slowed down so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. Thereby, the opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. It is not limited to changing the driving speed of the vertical drive motor 431 according to the scenario of the falling accessory. The drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 may be changed by and.

In addition, switching between opening the door member 470 by driving the opening/closing motor 466 and opening the door member 470 without driving the opening/closing motor 466 may be performed according to the effect pattern. For example, when a performance pattern with a high degree of expectation is executed, the opening/closing motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to reliably open the door member 470. On the other hand, when a performance pattern with a low degree of expectation is executed, the door member 470 is opened and closed. The door member 470 is opened without driving the opening motor 466 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened in spite of the performance pattern with a high degree of expectation.

An RTC (real time clock) 292 is connected to the input/output port 225 in this embodiment. This RTC 292 is used as a timekeeping means for measuring time, and is provided with a dedicated internal power source (battery in this embodiment), so it can keep time even when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10. can continue. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, by setting the same time (for example, the current time) in the clock means and manufacturing it, it is possible to obtain the same time information in the plurality of pachinko machines 10. .

By configuring in this way, apart from the normal effect, regardless of the game status of each pachinko machine 10, a special mode effect (time production) can be executed synchronously by a plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加In addition, at a specific time (every one minute after the start of the time presentation) in the period during which this time presentation is executed (displayed) (hereinafter referred to as the time presentation period), a specific time presentation suggesting the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. Specifically, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is a total of 4 countdown characters (“3”, “2”, “1”, “0”) for 3 seconds each (12 seconds in total). After being displayed, a character image (image of a girl, etc.) is displayed for 8 seconds in a total of 20 seconds of performance, and the display (performance) mode is set according to the elapsed time after the performance is started. For example, at the start of the effect (0 seconds after the start of the effect), a display (effect) mode is set in which "3" is displayed as a countdown character. In addition, a display (effect) mode is set in which "1" is displayed as a countdown character when 6 seconds have passed since the start of the effect. In this specific time effect (countdown effect), when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state and not a time-saving state (so-called variable latency state), the characters of the countdown ("3, 2, 1...") is displayed in red (it is displayed in black if it is not in the latent probability variable state). Details will be specifically described in the first control example.

Here, the game state is a probability variable state and not a time saving state (so-called latent probability variable state) is a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, and the state of the game that is easy to shift to the special game state (that is, the game It is a favorable situation for those who On the other hand, since the latent probability variable state is not a time saving state, the winning probability of normal symbols is the same as the normal state, and as described above, when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state There are many, and it is in a state where it is difficult to win a prize in the second prize opening 640.例文帳に追加In this case, similarly to the normal state, the ball is shot toward the first prize winning port 64 without the electric accessory 640a so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"). ), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the first winning hole 64 . In this way, the latent probability variable state has the same operation (game method) as the normal state, except that the probability of winning a big win is increased as an internal state of the pachinko machine 10, so the player can feel that the current game state is the same. It is difficult to distinguish whether it is in the normal state or in the latent probability variable state. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the latent probability variable state, the same effect as in the normal state is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is difficult to determine from the displayed effect whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability variable state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the specific time effect that is executed when there is a latent probability variable state during the time effect period, the displayed countdown characters ("3, 2, 1 ...") are usually It is displayed in a different color (red) than the state. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game state is the latent probability variable state, which is an advantageous state for the player, in the specific time presentation. As a result, the player can be interested in the performance content of the specific time performance, and the player's interest can be improved.

In order to improve the accuracy of time keeping by the time keeping means (RTC), correction means (GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting the time information from the outside may be provided.

In addition, the time information is corrected each time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) by correction means (for example, GPS or radio clock) for correcting the time information from the outside. good too. As a result, even without providing a dedicated internal power supply (battery in this embodiment), every time power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started), the time information by the clock means can be updated. , the manufacturing cost and maintenance cost of the clocking means (exchange cost due to deterioration of the internal power source, etc.) can be reduced. The correction of the time information by the correcting means is not limited to each time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time the pachinko machine 10 is started), but may be performed periodically (for example, every hour).

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

Here, display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 will be described. The third pattern is composed of main patterns of numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 described later is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "jackpot A" or "jackpot C", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of odd numbers "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are stopped and displayed. will be In addition, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which even-numbered "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" main symbols are aligned.

The display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. It is a sub-display area Ds for displaying characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 during each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64, and the small area Ds2 , and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of pending balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the second winning hole 640. is.

On the actual display screen, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the secondary display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and reserved symbols are displayed corresponding to up to four reserved balls for each of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the same reserved design (design) is used for the special design 1 and the special design 2, but this is not the only option. The pattern 2 may be configured to be displayed as a white square pattern).

Thereby, the reserved balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily identified and displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the held ball entering the second winning hole 640 is displayed differently depending on the winning type of the normal symbol, the player can easily discriminate that the held ball is generated after winning for a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., a notice effect display such as character display and characters, etc. Display of the number of fluctuations, etc. are displayed as appropriate. Further, when the reserved pattern is not displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or Ds3, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the number of reserved balls may be displayed in four divided areas. It may be displayed in a manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) that differs by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

A sub-display device 690 is also connected to the display control device 114 . The sub-display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) having a resolution different from that of the third pattern display device 81 . Specifically, the resolution of the third pattern display device 81 is (800 horizontal pixels (pixels)×600 vertical pixels (pixels)), and the resolution of the sub-display device 690 is (400 horizontal pixels (pixels)×vertical 300 pixels (pixels)) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above. Alternatively, the resolution of the sub-display device 690 may be higher than that of the third pattern display device 81 . Further, the display system that can be employed as the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 is not limited to the system using the liquid crystal panel, but any system display (for example, PDP system, CRT system, organic EL method, MEMS shutter method, etc.) may be adopted.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. Display control is performed using one piece of image data (image data with a resolution of 1200 horizontal pixels (pixels)×600 vertical pixels (pixels) in this embodiment) including images to be displayed respectively. A part of the image data corresponding to the resolution of the third pattern display device 81 (an area of 800 horizontal pixels (pixels)×600 vertical pixels (pixels)) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, Image data corresponding to the resolution of the remaining sub-display device 690 (area of 400 horizontal pixels (pixels)×300 vertical pixels (pixels)) is displayed on the sub-display device 690 . The remaining data (area of 400 horizontal pixels (pixels)×300 vertical pixels (pixels)) is unused.

This makes it easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are out of sync. It is possible to suppress the problem that occurs.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 12. FIG. First, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7, the structure for accommodating the units 300 to 700 in the rear case 210 will be described.

5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the action unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the action unit 200 as seen from the front. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which the compound action unit 500 is attached to the rear case 210 .

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the operation unit 200 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211, and one side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 6) is open. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, so that the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The motion unit 200 includes a vertical motion unit 400, a compound motion unit 500, a tilting motion unit 600, and a sliding motion unit 700, which are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 210, and configured as one unit.

Specifically, the compound action unit 500 is arranged in the upper right portion of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). In the state shown in FIG. 7, the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 are arranged below the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 . In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 7, the up-and-down motion unit 400 is arranged in a stacked state on the front side of the compound motion unit 500 and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

As described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined action unit (for example, the combined action unit 500) is arranged in a layered state in which another action unit (for example, the vertical action unit 400) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, when viewed from the front, a given action unit can be shielded by another action unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made of a light-transmissive material and the player can visually recognize the action units arranged on the back side of the game board 13, a predetermined action unit The player can see only the required part of the screen, and the other parts can be shielded from the player by another action unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other motion units on the assumption that the entirety of the effect member will be visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, outlines of the operation modes of the vertical movement unit 400, the compound movement unit 500, the tilting movement unit 600, and the sliding movement unit 700 will be described. 8 to 10, FIG. 5 to FIG. 7 will be referred to as needed.

8 to 10 are front views of the operating unit 200. FIG. 8 shows the state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical motion unit 400 is arranged in the extended position, and FIG. The formed state is shown in FIG. 10, in which the tilting unit 600 is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction.

As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical motion unit 400 moves the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2). ).

As shown in FIG. 9, the compound action unit 500 is arranged in the projecting position where the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) projects downward, and the front plate member 546 is positioned at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, 2), and the retracted position where the rotating arm member 550 is retracted upward, and the front plate member 546 is positioned in the opening 211a of the rear case 210. and a retracted state (see FIG. 5). In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 10, the tilting motion unit 600 moves to the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. It is movable between positions. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting motion unit 600 is retracted to the right outside of the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and is visually recognized by the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, the front of the third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2).

Note that FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened and the internal sub-display device 690 is visible. That is, when the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) viewed through the opening 211a and the sub-display inside the tilting motion unit 600 are displayed. Both the effects displayed on the device 690 and the effects can be visually recognized by the player.

These operation units 400 to 700 are formed to be independently operable, and are arranged in a superimposed (stacked) state as described above. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time even if the operating member projects inwardly of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. As shown in FIG. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 10, each of the motion units 400 to 700 can be operated individually, and these motions can be combined, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 11, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the compound action unit 500 is in the extended state, the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the vertical action unit 400 are arranged in the extended position, and the door member 470 is arranged. form an open state.

As shown in FIG. 11 , the front plate member 546 of the compound motion unit 500 is visible through the lens member 460 of the vertical motion unit 400 . As will be described later, the lens member 460 is formed with a magnifying lens processing, so that the front plate member 546 is enlarged.

11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the compound motion unit 500 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved to the vertical motion unit 400. 39), the front plate member 546 can be seen in its normal size. As a result, it is possible to switch between a state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in a normal size and a state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 11), thereby improving the presentation effect.

FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. 12, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the compound action unit 500 is in an extended state, the tilting action unit 600 is arranged in the retracted position and is in a tilted state, and the tilting action unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are in a state of being tilted. A state immediately before the abutment is shown. By further tilting the tilting motion unit 600, the tilting motion unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the compound action unit 500 clockwise in front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect as if the tilting action unit 600 is applying force to the compound action unit 500. (By associating the actions of the units, more complex production can be performed). Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board surface 13 and the board surface lower unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, in the lower part of the game board 13, a receiving opening 13a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and through which the board surface lower unit 300 is inserted.

FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the board lower unit 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the board surface lower unit 300 includes a base member 310 that is internally fitted and fixed in the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13, and a first out port that is disposed on the lower left side of the base member 310 when viewed from the front. 314, a lower right plate member 330 disposed on the lower right side of the base member 310 in front view and guiding the ball to the second outlet 315, and a lower left plate fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front. A front cover member 340 in which the member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 are pivotally supported by an insertion shaft 343 is mainly provided.

The base member 310 includes a plate-like main body portion 311 having a shape substantially equivalent to the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and having a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a, and a front side of the main body portion 311. A decorative front plate portion 312 formed in a thin plate shape in a covering manner, a movable effect member 313 attached to the substantially central portion of the decorative front plate portion 312 in the width direction, and a movable effect member 313 formed on the left side of the movable effect member 313 when viewed from the front. and a second outlet 315 which is a rectangular hole formed on the right side of the movable effect member 313 in front view.

The movable effect member 313 includes a rotating effect member 313a which is arranged at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13 and rotated by a driving device (not shown). Here, when the outlet is provided at the lower edge of the widthwise center of the game board 13 , the movable effect member 313 cannot be arranged at the lower edge of the widthwise center of the game board 13 . In this embodiment, the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 are provided at positions spaced apart from the center of the game board 13 to the left and right, without providing the outlet at the lower edge of the center in the width direction of the game board 13. Thus, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the movable effect member 313 at the center lower edge in the width direction of the game board 13 .

The shapes of the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a) is a front view of the base member 310, the first outlet 314, the second outlet 315, the lower left plate member 320 and the lower right plate member 330, and FIG. ) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 310 and the left lower plate member 320 along line XVb-XVb of FIG. Note that FIG. 15( a ) shows the outer shape of the front cover member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nails formed above the first outlet 314 and the second outlet 315 .

The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. As compared with the first out port 314, the second out port 315 has a shorter length in the width direction. The reason for this will be described later. Further, a guide rib 315 a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner side surface of the second outlet 315 . The guide ribs 315 a can suppress the resistance applied to the ball when the ball flowing into the second out port 315 bounces high and collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315 . In addition, the flow of the balls discharged from the second outlet 315 can be arranged in the front-rear direction, and variations in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

A buffer rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320, which will be described later, is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15(a)). As a result, even in this embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the effect of suppressing the rebound of the ball falling on the left lower plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, the closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the higher the drop height of the ball. On the other hand, since the buffer rib 322 is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the more the buffer rib 322 bends, thereby improving the cushion effect of softening the impact of falling. You can increase the degree.

Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling ball will be described. For example, if a ball that lands on the buffer ribs 322, 332 falls to a high height, but the frequency of the ball reaching that position is extremely low, even if the bounce of the ball is not intentionally suppressed, other balls may be prevented from being ejected. may not be If the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, 332 is increased even in this case, the space in the game area is unnecessarily suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is set not only based on the drop height of the ball, but also in relation to the drop height and the frequency with which the ball lands at that position.

As shown in FIG. 15, the ball flowing down above the buffer ribs 322, 332 starts to flow down paths c1, c2, then passes through a plurality of branches b1 to b10 and reaches the landing areas z0 to z4. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the probability of the sphere flowing down the paths c1 and c2 is equal (1/2), and the probability of branching to the left and right at the branches b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). explain. It is assumed that the sphere never flows down from the upper right.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z0 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 and reach the route c11. The path to the branch b5 can be reached from the path c1 via the branch b1 or from the path c2. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the path c11 and the ball reaches the landing area z0 is 1/8 (=1/2×(1/2)^2) of the ball flowing down from the path c1, Since it is represented by the sum of the probability 1/4 (=1/2.times.1/2) of the ball flowing down from the path c2, it is 3/8 ("^" means exponentiation). That is, each probability is the product of the probability 1/2 that the ball flows down the paths c1 and c2 and the number obtained by multiplying 1/2 by the number of branches b1 to b10 that the ball passes through until it reaches the landing area z0. is represented by

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z1 will be explained. In order to reach the landing area z1, flow down the left side at branch b3 to reach path c15, flow down the left side at branch b4 to reach path c16, or flow down the right side at branch b6 to path c14. or flow down the right side at the branch b7 to reach the route c13.

Up to the branch b3, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c15 is 1/16 (= 1/2*(1*2)^3). Up to the branch b4, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is conceivable, and since there are four branches before the sphere reaches the path c16, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c16 is 1/32. (=1/2*(1*2)^4). Also, up to branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from path c1 is considered, and since there are three branches before the sphere reaches path c14, the probability of the sphere reaching path c14 is 1/16. (=1/2*(1*2)^3).

Up to the branch b7, both the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 and the path c2 are conceivable. May exist. There are two branches before the sphere flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability of the sphere reaching the path c13 is the probability of the sphere flowing down from the path c1 being 3/32 (=1/2*(1/2)^4+1/2*(1/2)^3), It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability 1/8 (=1/2×(1/2)̂2) of the ball flowing down from the route c2.

Here, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z1 is the total sum of the probability that the ball reaches the paths c13 to c16 described above, so it is 12/32.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the ball reaches the landing area z2 can be represented by the probability that the ball reaches the path c12, which is equal to the probability that the ball that reaches the branch b7 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z2 is 7/32.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the path c17, or flow down the left side at the branch b10 to reach the path c18.

Up to the branch b9, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are 6 branches before the sphere reaches the path c17, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c17 is 1/128 (= 1/2*(1*2)^6). Also, up to the branch b10, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and since there are seven branches before the sphere reaches the path c18, the probability of the sphere reaching the path c18 is 1/256. (=1/2*(1*2)^7).

The probability that the ball reaches the landing area z3 is 3/256 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the ball reaches the paths c17 and c18 described above.

The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 and reach the path c19. It is assumed that all the balls flowing down the right side of the branch b10 flow down along the path c19. The probability that the ball reaches the path c19 is equal to the probability that the ball that reaches the branch b10 reaches the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z4 is 1/256 (=1/2×(1×2)̂7).

From these facts, the ratio of the balls reaching the landing areas z0 to z4 is (z0:z1:z2:z3:z4)=(96:96:56:3:1). This ratio correlates with the damping ribs 322,332.

For example, when the landing area z1 and the landing area z3 are compared, although the heights of the balls falling on the landing areas z1 and z3 are the same, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is higher in the landing area z3. less than z1. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z1. That is, even if the bounce of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as in the landing area z1, there is little possibility that the ejection of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z3. Therefore, in the landing area z3, by making the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 smaller than in the landing area z1, the arrangement position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered.

For example, when the landing area z2 and the landing area z4 are compared, although the ball falling distance to the landing area z4 is longer than the ball falling distance to the landing area z2, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the ball reaches the landing area z2. That is, even if the bounce of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as in the landing area z2, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed in the landing area z4. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 is made smaller than in the landing area z2, so that the position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered.

In the above description, the probability of branching of the spheres b1 to b10 is equal to the left and right (1/2). It is possible to adjust the probability of branching. For example, by making the interval between the nails in the flow path through which the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the sphere flows down along the arrow on the right side at the branch b1 is greater than 1/2. can do. In the other branches b2 to b10, the branch probabilities of the sphere can be similarly adjusted.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the frequency with which the balls reach the paths c11 to c19, and the degree of freedom in designing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

Further, the buffer rib 322 is formed such that the upper surface is inclined downward toward the rear (see FIG. 15(b)). Thereby, the ball flow to the first out port 314 can be made faster.

Returning to FIG. 14, description will be made. The left lower plate member 320 includes a long plate-like main body portion 321, buffer ribs 322 each having a thin plate extending in the front-rear direction, and buffer ribs 322 that are continuously arranged in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321, and the buffer ribs. A connecting front plate 323 formed in a manner to connect the front surfaces of 322, a stepped portion 324 formed so as to protrude upward at the left end of the main body portion 321 when viewed from the front, and extending from the stepped portion 324 to the left when viewed from the front. and a shaft support hole 326 drilled in the front-rear direction at the right end of the main body 321 when viewed from the front.

The cushioning rib 322 is a portion through which the ball heading for the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the rebound of the vertically falling ball in the vertical direction. That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of a thin plate continuously arranged in the left-right direction, when it collides with a falling ball, it bends in the thickness direction, so that the impact of the collision can be softened. Also, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer ribs 322, the ball gets stuck between the buffer ribs 322 and is braked. In addition, the buffer rib 322 has a height and an aspect ratio that increase toward the right in front view (inward in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2)).

The connecting front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer ribs 322 by connecting the buffer ribs 322 .

The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for vertically dropping the ball that has flowed down from the ball flow rail portion 325 . As a result, it is possible to suppress the load in the left-right direction from being applied to the cushioning rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the buffer rib 322 from bending in the left-right direction due to the load in the left-right direction.

That is, since the cushioning rib 322 is formed of a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, there is a risk that it will break when a load is applied in the left-right direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 , which has a lateral velocity and may apply a lateral load to the buffer rib 322 , moves up and down from the stepped portion 324 to the buffer rib 322 . It is formed in a manner of falling in the direction. As a result, the position at which the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be shifted to the right in the width direction as the speed of the ball in the left-right direction increases.

Therefore, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be reduced toward the left (outer side) in the width direction. Therefore, the more to the left in the width direction of the buffer rib 322, the less likely it is that the ball will be bent due to the load in the left-right direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer ribs 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer ribs 322 are arranged in comparison with the case where the buffer ribs 322 have the same length in the width direction. You can lower the position.

Here, while the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 is kept constant in the left and right positions in the width direction (in a state where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322), the lower surface of the game board 13 is It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed in the . However, in this case, the arrangement position of the stepped portion 324 becomes higher, and the arrangement position of the ball flow rail portion 325 which is inclined downward toward the stepped portion 324 also becomes higher. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) is increased, and the game area is restricted.

On the other hand, the greater the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322, the greater the effect of reducing the momentum of the ball (deceleration effect). Therefore, the cushioning rib 322 is formed in a manner that increases the aspect ratio from the vicinity of the stepped portion 324 toward the center of the game area.

In addition, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed with the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 up to this side of the step portion 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step portion 324 (there is a curve halfway in the left-right direction of the buffer rib 322). maximum height) is also conceivable. However, in this case, the ball that has reached the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling leftward. As a result, the ball tends to stay in the landing area z1, making it difficult to discharge the ball smoothly.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 varies little, the ball that reaches the landing area z1 easily rolls left (toward the landing area z2). move. Therefore, since the ball can be flowed to the landing area z2 before it stays in the landing area z1, the ball can be discharged smoothly.

In addition, the step portion 324 has a function of damming the ball flowing down above the buffer rib 322 and flowing leftward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from rebounding beyond the lateral width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front cover member 340 (see FIG. 13).

The shaft support hole 326 is a portion through which the insertion shaft 343 of the front cover member 340 is inserted and supported.

The lower right plate member 330 includes a long plate-shaped main body portion 331, a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331, and thin wall portions extending in the left-right direction. A connecting front plate 333 formed to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 recessed downward at the right end of the main body portion 331 in front view, and a right side from the recessed portion 324 in front view. It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extending from the main body portion 331 and a pivot hole 336 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left end portion of the main body portion 331 when viewed from the front.

The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body portion 331 is connected to the main body portion 321, the buffer rib 332 is connected to the buffer rib 322, the connection front plate 333 is connected to the connection front plate 323, the ball flow rail portion 335 is connected to the ball flow rail portion 325, and the shaft support hole 336 is connected to the shaft. Since the technical idea is common to each of the support holes 326, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted.

The cushioning ribs 332 are formed to have shorter left and right widths than the cushioning ribs 322 . As a result, the lateral width of the second outlet 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second outlet 315 can be lowered relative to the first outlet 314. It is possible to secure the installation space for the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 (the installation position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is regulated. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the second out port 315 in the front view, so that when the opening/closing plate is opened, the balls flow into the first specific prize winning port 65a, When the opening/closing plate is closed, the ball falls vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second out port 315 from the upper right in the front view. In other words, a non-flow region is formed in the upper right portion of the second out port 315 where the ball is restricted from flowing down.

Therefore, the direction in which the ball flows down to the lower right plate member 330 is limited to falling in the vertical direction and flowing down from the width direction (from the ball flow rail portion 335) (flowing down from the oblique upper right direction is restricted). . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball obliquely from the upper right, the direction in which the ball bounces can be restricted, and the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed, and the formation width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, the installation space for the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

The concave portion 334 is a depression for causing the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 335 to bounce. Therefore, the formation width of the concave portion 334 is set to a width that allows the ball to be placed without coming into contact with the adjacent buffer ribs 332 .

The ball that has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recessed portion 334 , bounces off when it contacts the upper surface of the recessed portion 334 , and falls onto the buffer ribs 332 . This prevents a load from being applied to the buffer rib 332 from the width direction, thereby preventing the buffer rib 332 from breaking.

The concave portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 are inserted. This makes it easier to use a fastening tool such as a screwdriver when screwing a fastening screw into the fastening hole B to fasten and fix the lower board unit 300 to the game board 13 . That is, the recessed portion 334 has both the effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from breaking and the effect of facilitating fastening and fixing of the base member 310 .

The front lid member 340 includes a plate-like main body portion 341 having a first winning port 64 formed at the top, an opening 342 formed at the center of the main body portion 341 and allowing the rotation effect member 313a to be visually recognized, and a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336 .

The body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the side wall portion limits the direction in which the ball flows down. That is, a ball that collides with the main body portion 341 from the right side cannot penetrate leftward, while a ball that collides with the main body portion 341 from the left side cannot penetrate rightward.

The insertion shaft 343 is a portion that is inserted through the shaft support holes 326 and 336 . Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is slightly smaller than that of the shaft support holes 326 and 336 .

Next, the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 21. FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical motion unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical motion unit 400. FIG. 16 and 17 illustrate a state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position.

18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a vertical groove portion 414 which is recessed from the back side to the front side on the right side in rear view and which is vertically extended. , a rotating crank member 420 that rotates around a connecting hole 413 of the base member 410 , a driving device 430 that generates driving force for the rotating crank member 420 , and a base member 410 to which the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 420 . and an arm member 440 that swings around a shaft portion 412, and an arm member 440 that is disposed on the opposite side of the vertical groove portion 414 of the base member 410 and is formed to be slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swinging motion of the arm member 440. A slide member 450, a lens member 460 suspended from a slide hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 and slidably movable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the swing of the arm member 440, and the lens member 460 and a pair of door members 470 pivotally supported respectively.

The base member 410 includes a main body portion 411 formed in a plate-like shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a cylindrical support hole 442 of an arm member 440 protruding from the right end of the main body portion 411 toward the front side. A shaft portion 412 to be supported, a connecting hole 413 drilled circularly in the front-rear direction to connect the rotating crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432, and formed on the right side of the main body portion 411 in rear view from the rear side to the front side. An upper and lower groove portion 414 in which a depression extends in the vertical direction, and recessed portions 415 which are depressed from the front to the back side on both left and right outer sides of the upper and lower groove portion 414 are mainly provided.

The vertical groove portion 414 is a portion in which the expansion and contraction effect device 540 of the compound action unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). As will be described later, the compound action unit 500 suppresses the swinging angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 as the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves toward the reduced state. Collision with the left and right inner surfaces is prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion in which the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

The rotary crank member 420 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 421 and a sliding projection portion 422 that projects from one end of the main body portion 421 toward the front side in a columnar shape and that is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 . , and an engaging portion 423 that engages with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 to disable relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420. As shown in FIG.

The driving force of the driving device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440 by inserting the sliding protrusion 422 into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotating it, and the arm member 440 swings about the shaft portion 412 . .

The driving device 430 includes a vertical driving motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a driving gear 431a rotationally driven by the vertical driving motor 431, a transmission gear 432 meshing with the driving gear 431a, A fitting portion 432 a formed on the front side of the transmission gear 432 with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting hole 413 and having an inner side surface fitted with the engaging portion 423 of the rotating crank member 420 is mainly provided. .

The fitting portion 432a is a portion having recesses having a cross-sectional shape in which circular shapes are arranged at each vertex of a triangle. are engaged so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the body portion 411 of the base member 410 is sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420, and as described above, relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 is disabled. , the transmission gear 432 and the rotary crank member 420 rotate synchronously. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432 .

The arm member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in the shape of an elongated bar, a shaft support hole 442 drilled in the base end side (right side in front view) and pivotably supported by the shaft portion 412, and a base end side. A sliding hole 443 is drilled as an elongated hole on the rocking end side, which is the opposite end of the lens member 443, into which the sliding protrusion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the sliding protrusion 422 of the rotating crank member 420 is inserted. and a hole-like insertion portion 444 with a bottom.

The shape of the inserting portion 444 is set so that the rotating crank member 420 can rotate once while the sliding protrusion 422 is inserted through the inserting portion 444 . Therefore, the arm member 440 can swing regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 420 .

The slide member 450 includes a rectangular plate-like body portion 451, a slide guide portion 452 extending rearward from both left and right ends of the body portion 451 and guided by the concave portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable, and a body portion. 451 , a central guide concave portion 453 which is a vertically extending depression formed in the front at the center portion in the width direction of the lens member 451 and into which the sliding projection portion 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted; 454, which is a depression formed on the front surface of the lens member 460 and extends in the vertical direction, in which the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460 is guided.

The lens member 460 includes a plate-like main body portion 461 having a circular opening formed in the center, a magnifying lens 462 formed with a magnifying lens processing to be fitted into the opening of the main body portion 461, and a central portion of the main body portion 461 in the width direction. Sliding protrusions 463 protruded from the upper end to the back side and are inserted into the slide holes 443 of the arm member 440 so as to be vertically slidable, and both ends in the width direction of the main body 461 are protruded to the back side and slidable. A stable slide portion 464 that is vertically slidably inserted into the both end guide recessed portions 454 of the member 450, and a lower shaft portion 473 and an upper side shaft portion 473 of the door member 470 that are axially rotatably disposed on the lower left side of the main body portion 461 in front view. It mainly includes a pair of rotating cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an opening/closing driving motor 466 that rotates the pair of rotating cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown).

The movement operation of the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 . FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. 20 illustrates the closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical motion unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

When the arm member 440 swings from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the extended position (see FIG. 20), the lens member 460 pivotally supported in the slide hole 443 on the swing end side of the arm member 440 slides. A moving protrusion 463 (see FIG. 18) is slidably moved in the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450 . The lens member 460 is vertically guided by the both end guide recesses 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is vertically guided by the recesses 415 of the base member 410. The member 460 is slid vertically.

Returning to FIGS. 18 and 19, description will be made. The door member 470 is configured by dividing a circular plate into two upper and lower parts. A lower shaft portion 473 that protrudes rearward from the lower end of the main body portion 471 and is inserted into the rotary cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relatively; It mainly includes an upper shaft portion 474 that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into the rotating cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to rotate relative to the lens member 460 .

The lower body portion 471 includes a guide protrusion 471a protruding from the side surface of the upper body portion 472 that contacts the upper body portion 472, and the upper body portion 472 has the side surface that contacts the lower body portion 471. It has a receiving recess 472a recessed into it. By fitting the guide protrusion 471a and the receiving recess 472a, the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 can be positioned relative to each other in the closed state. In addition, in this embodiment, since the guide protrusion 471a protrudes in a tapered shape, the guide protrusion 471a can be reliably fitted into the receiving recess 472a.

The operation of door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 21 illustrates an open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is arranged at the extended position.

The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by rotation of the rotating cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. As shown in FIG. The pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening/closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), so that the door member 470 is moved from the closed state (see FIG. 20) to the open state (see FIG. 21). , the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung outward (opposite directions). Further, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inward relative to each other.

As a result, compared to the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is covered by swinging a single cover member, the time for swinging the lower body portion 471 and the upper body portion 472 can be halved.

Next, the compound action unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. FIG. The compound action unit 500 swings the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 9) to arrange the expansion and contraction effect device 540 on the front side of the third pattern display device 81. is a unit. Further, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is formed so as to be swingable around the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510 .

22 is a front perspective view of compound action unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of compound action unit 500. FIG. 22 and 23 illustrate a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, which is the end position formed outside the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

24 is a front exploded perspective view of compound action unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a rear exploded perspective view of compound action unit 500. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the compound action unit 500 is a unit that performs an effect by causing a telescopic effect device 540 to slide and swing. a rotating plate 520 formed to be rotatable around a first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510; An expansion and contraction effect device 540 which is fixed and formed so as to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the rotating plate 520 , and one end is connected to the expansion and contraction effect device 540 and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510 . A rotating arm member 550 that forms the telescopic motion of the telescopic effect device 540 by a swinging motion together with a second driving device 560 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate a driving force of the rotating arm member 550, and the second A rotating crank member 570 that transmits the driving force of the driving device 560 to the rotating arm member 550, and a mechanical portion on the rotating shaft side such as the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 that are fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510. and a front cover 580 for blindfolding.

The base member 510 includes a rectangular plate-shaped body portion 511, a columnar first shaft portion 512 protruding forward from the lower center in the width direction of the body portion 511, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of arcuate holes 513 drilled along the center arc, and first through holes 514 drilled adjacent to the second arcuate holes 513b of the three rows of arcuate holes 513. and a columnar second shaft portion 515 projecting forward from the main body portion 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft portion 512 and the right end portion of the main body portion 511, and a second shaft portion 515 adjacent to the second shaft portion 515. A second through-hole 516 to be drilled, a cylindrical third shaft portion 517 projecting forward from the lower right end portion of the main body portion 511 in a front view, and an edge of the main body portion 511 to be bent forward. and a folded wall portion 518 that is formed.

The first shaft portion 512 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522 of the rotating plate 520 and serves as the rotating shaft of the rotating plate 520 . Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520 .

The arcuate hole 513 includes a first arcuate hole 513a, a second arcuate hole 513b, and a third arcuate hole 513c from the side near the first shaft portion 512 .

The first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c are long holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotary plate 520 is inserted and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520. As shown in FIG. As a result, the load applied to the first shaft portion 512 when the rotating plate 520 is rotated can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are provided for connecting the collar and the body portion 521. placed in between (passed through before fastening of the collar);

The second arcuate hole 513b is a long hole in which the arcuate rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 is arranged and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first driving device 530 is arranged in the opened portion. As a result, the meshing portion between the driving motor 531 of the first driving device 530 and the circular arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotating plate 520 can be arranged in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511, so that the thickness of the compound action unit 500 can be reduced. The lengthwise dimension (the dimension in the front-rear direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes through which the driving gear 532 of the first driving device 530 and the driving gear 562 of the second driving device 560 are inserted, respectively.

The second shaft portion 515 is a columnar portion to which the lid portion 575 of the turning crank member 570 is fastened and fixed on the front side thereof, and which serves as the central axis of rotation of the main body portion 571 . Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft portion 515 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the body portion 571 of the turning crank member 570 .

The third shaft portion 517 is inserted through the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 and serves as the central axis of rotation of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 of the rotating arm member 550 . A torsion spring 517a is wound around the third shaft portion 517 to generate an urging force to move the rotating arm member 550 toward the retracted position.

The torsion spring 517 a is formed in such a manner that arm portions extend from both ends of a coil portion wound around the third shaft portion 517 . One arm is fixed to the lower right portion of the bent wall portion 518 (near the first stopper portion 518a) in front view, and the other arm on the opposite side of the one arm is engaged with the rotating arm member 550. It is locked to the stop portion 555 .

The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a second stopper portion 518b formed on the left side of the first shaft portion 512. and a third stopper portion 518c formed in the .

The first stopper portion 518 a is a portion that restricts the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 . That is, when the rotating arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it abuts against the first stopper portion 518a and stops descending.

As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is arranged below the third stopper portion 518c. Since the lower surface of the rotating plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), the rotating plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the direction of rotation toward the second stopper portion 512b. can be done. That is, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 described later is formed such that the maximum angle of the clockwise swing when viewed from the front is larger than the swing of the counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

The rotary plate 520 includes a fan-shaped body portion 521, a shaft support hole 522 circularly drilled in the thickness direction at the root portion of the body portion 521, and a width slightly larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522. A rail receiving groove 523 linearly recessed in the front surface of the portion 521; a plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525, and an arc-shaped rack protruding from the rear surface of the main body 521 in an arc centering on the shaft support hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion. 526 and .

The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522 . Therefore, the rotating plate 520 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 .

The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is fastened and fixed. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is changed depending on the posture of the rotating plate 520 .

The expansion/contraction stopper 524 is a portion that abuts against the inner surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction and regulates the movement width of the slide plate 544 . Formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523, and by contacting the inner side surfaces of the slide plate 544 on both sides, the slide rail 545 is prevented from receiving a load in the direction perpendicular to the expansion/contraction direction, and durability is improved. can be achieved.

The insertion shaft 525 is a portion that is inserted through the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 513c. Further, a collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first arcuate hole 513a and the third arcuate hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip, so that the rotating plate 520 is connected to the base member 510 so as not to be pulled out.

The arc-shaped rack 526 is inserted through the second arc-shaped hole 513 b of the base member 510 and meshed with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 . Since the meshing portion between arc-shaped rack 526 and first driving device 530 is formed in a region including the thickness portion of base member 510, the dimension in the thickness direction of compound action unit 500 can be suppressed.

The first driving device 530 mainly includes a driving motor 531 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and a driving gear 532 inserted through the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and rotated by the driving motor 531 .

Next, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion/contraction effect device 540. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the expansion and contraction effect device 540 includes a main body member 541 forming a skeleton, and a pair of rotating arm members 550 which are fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the main body member 541. A first guide member 542 and a second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 are arranged so as to be axially slidable along the extending direction. and a slide plate 544 connected to the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, one end of which is fitted in the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed; A front plate member 546 fastened and fixed to the front plate member 546; and a decorative member 548 whose 548b is movably formed in front of the main body member 541 .

The main body member 541 includes a plate-like main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a columnar protrusion 541b protruding toward the back side from the central portion in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and the back of the protrusion 541b. A first raised fastening portion 541c protruding on the left side of the view, a second raised fastening portion 541d protruding on the right side of the protrusion 541b in the rear view, and a top left portion of the main body portion 541a in the rear view. It mainly includes a protruding guide fastening portion 541e and fastening holes 541f formed in plurality (three locations in this embodiment) on the front side of the main body portion 541a and in which the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The projecting portion 541 b is a portion that is inserted through the circular arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the diameter of the protruding portion 541b is slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface of the arcuate hole 554. As shown in FIG. Further, since the projecting portion 541b is inserted through the arcuate hole 554, the main body member 541 can be interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 by swinging.

The first raised fastening portion 541c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. As shown in FIG. The reason why the second raising fastening portion 541d is separated in the vertical direction by a longer distance than the first raising fastening portion 541c is that it is arranged at a position that does not interfere with the rotating arm member 550 . Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation locus of the rotation arm member does not pass through the lower left portion of the main body member 541 in front view (see FIGS. 37, 40 and 44). Therefore, it is possible to widen the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541d compared to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and it is possible to improve the rigidity of the second raised fastening portions 541d.

The guide fastening portion 541e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and a portion to which the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 is guided when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in an extended state. That is, even if the projecting portion 541b is not guided by the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the guiding fastening portion 541e is guided by the upper surface of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated upward. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 and the expansion/contraction effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

The fastening hole 541f is a through hole in which the fastening portion 546b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

The first guide member 542 includes a fastening plate portion 542a that is fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back surface regulation portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 542a that is one step higher toward the back side. 542b, a guide rail portion 542c protruding from both left and right sides of the rear surface regulating portion 542b to the rear surface in a wall shape, and a portion of the upper end portion of the rear surface regulating portion 542b protruding toward the rear surface. and an auxiliary fastening portion 542e that extends from the rear restriction portion 542b and is fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541e.

The rear restricting portion 542b is a portion disposed on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arc-shaped hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the rear surface. be.

The guide rail portion 542c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is expanded and contracted.

The insertion hole 542d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably formed with respect to the first guide member 542. As shown in FIG.

The second guide member 543 includes a fastening plate portion 543a that is fastened and fixed to the second raising fastening portion 541d, and a rear restriction portion that extends upward from a position on the upper surface of the fastening plate portion 543a, which is one step toward the rear side. 543b, a guide rail portion 543c protruding from the left and right sides of the rear surface regulating portion 543b toward the rear surface in a wall shape, and a portion of the upper end portion of the rear surface regulating portion 543b projecting toward the rear surface. and an insertion hole 543d.

The rear restricting portion 543b is a portion disposed on the rear surface of the rotating arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the protrusion 541b from falling out of the arc-shaped hole 554 when the rotating arm member 550 moves to the rear surface. be.

The guide rail portion 543c is a portion that guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544d of the slide plate 544 and suppresses the deviation of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is expanded and contracted.

The insertion hole 543d is a hole through which the slide rod 544e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. Since the inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, the slide plate 544 is slidably formed with respect to the first guide member 543. As shown in FIG.

The slide plate 544 includes a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a recessed portion 544b formed with a wide recess extending vertically on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and a recessed portion 544b. Both end recessed portions 544c formed with recesses extending in the vertical direction on the left and right front surfaces, and rail receivers protruding in a semicircular shape toward the front side at the upper and lower ends of the both end recessed portions 544c. portion 544d, a cylindrical slide rod 544e extending vertically inside the recessed portions 544c at both ends, an effect assisting wall 544f projecting toward the front in the vertical center of the main body portion 544a, Stopper portions 544g projecting toward the rear surface are mainly provided at both left and right ends of the recessed portion 544b.

The recessed portion 544 b is a portion that guides the slide plate 544 with respect to the expansion stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 . Therefore, the width of the inner side surface of the concave portion 544b is formed slightly larger than the width dimension of the elastic stopper 524. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portions 544c on both ends are portions for accommodating protrusions into which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. As a result, the protrusions in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed can be guided from the outside.

The rail receiving portion 544d is a portion that is accommodated in the guide rail portions 542c and 543c of the guide members 542 and 543, respectively. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 can be prevented from wobbling with respect to the slide plate 544 .

The slide rod 544e is a cylindrical rod inserted through the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543. As shown in FIG. As a result, the guide members 542 and 543 are slidably formed in the direction in which the slide rod 544e extends (vertical direction in FIG. 26).

The effect assisting portion 544f is a portion that is brought into contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decorative member 548 to move the decorative member 548 when the telescopic effect device 540 is in the extended state. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be changed.

The stopper portion 544g is a portion that abuts against the extension stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and defines the vertical movement end of the slide plate 544. As shown in FIG.

Slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini-rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotating plate 520 , and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the concave portion 544 b of the slide plate 544 .

The front plate member 546 is a presentation part that can be visually recognized by the player, and includes a plate-shaped main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 when viewed from the front, and It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b that protrudes in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of shaft support portions 546c that protrude from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back side.

The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and is fastened and fixed by screwing through the fastening hole 541f.

The shaft support portion 546c is a portion that slidably supports the connecting slide member 547. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the diameter of the shaft support portion 546c is formed to be slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the long sliding hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547. As shown in FIG.

The connecting sliding member 547 has a main body portion 547a formed in a plate shape, a pair of sliding elongated holes 547b formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction and bored in the front-rear direction, and bored in the vertical direction. A pair of insertion holes 547c are mainly provided.

The sliding elongated hole 547b is a portion through which the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is formed slightly larger than that of the pivot portion 546c. A collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding elongated hole 547b is fastened and fixed to the tip of the shaft supporting portion 546c, so that the connecting sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so that it cannot be pulled out. be. The insertion hole 547c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

The decorative member 548 includes a main body portion 548a which is formed in a plate shape and to which the connecting sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from below, a front hanging portion 548b which is formed to hang downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a. and a rear hanging portion 548c formed by hanging downward on the rear side of the .

When the connecting sliding member 547 moves with respect to the front plate member 546, the front hanging portion 548b covers the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and is visually recognized apart from the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43). 37) can be formed. As a result, the appearance of the stretchable effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rear hanging portion 548c is a portion that abuts against the production auxiliary wall 544f of the slide plate 544 due to the expansion and contraction operation of the expansion and contraction production device 540. is moved relative to the front plate member 546 .

Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, description will be made. The rotating arm member 550 includes a main body portion 551 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 552 drilled in one end of the main body portion 551 in the front-rear direction, and the shaft support hole 552 being adjacent to the shaft support hole 552 . An irregularly-shaped long hole 553, which is a special-shaped bottomed long hole, is formed on the back side of the main body 551, and the other end opposite to the one end is formed on the front side. An arc-shaped hole 554, which is an arc-shaped elongated hole with a bottom, is protruded toward the rear side in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 552 of the body portion 551, and the tip thereof is bent into a hook shape, and the other arm portion of the torsion spring 517a is engaged. It mainly includes a locking portion 555 that is engaged.

The shaft support hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft portion 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 , so that the rotating arm member 550 can rotate around the third shaft portion 517 .

The deformed long hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed long hole 553 will be described later.

The arcuate hole 554 is a long hole through which the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 554 is formed slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541b. Also, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 matches the arc formed by the projecting portion 541b when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is swung around the first shaft portion 512 in the expanded state (FIGS. 37 to 39). ).

In addition, the arc-shaped hole 554 is open at the tip of the other end of the rotating arm member 550 and has a tip portion 554a that widens at the tip.

The second driving device 560 is a device that generates a driving force to rotate the rotating crank member 570 , and is inserted through a driving motor 561 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510 . and a drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by a drive motor 561 .

The drive gear 562 meshes with transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570 . Accordingly, when the driving gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

The rotating crank member 570 is a member that transmits a driving force to the rotating arm member 550. The rotating crank member 570 has a ring-shaped body portion 571 pivotally supported by the second shaft portion 515, and the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 571 is engraved. A transmission gear tooth 572 provided, a regulating head portion 573 formed in a manner to cover the front side of the transmission gear tooth 572, and the center of the main body portion 571 are located eccentrically and protrude toward the front side. It mainly includes a projecting portion 574 and a lid portion 575 formed with a diameter larger than the inner diameter of the main body portion 571 and fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft portion 515 .

The transmission gear tooth 572 meshes with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 . Thereby, the driving force of the driving motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570 .

The restriction head portion 573 prevents the drive gear 532 from being displaced toward the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572 . As a result, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be optimized.

The sliding protrusion 574 is a portion that is inserted through the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 . That is, the relationship between the sliding projection 574 and the shape of the rotating arm member 550 determines whether or not the driving force is transmitted.

The lid portion 575 is a portion for arranging the main body portion 571 on the base member 510 so that it cannot be pulled out.

28 to 31, the relationship between the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. First, referring to FIGS. 28(a) and 29(a), the shape of the deformed long hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 will be described.

28(a) and 29(a) are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570. FIG. Note that FIG. 28(a) illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 29(a) illustrates a state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position. 28(a) and 29(a), the deformed long hole 553 and the sliding protrusion 574 are shown by hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are shown by imaginary lines. be done.

As shown in FIG. 28( a ), when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding protrusion 574 and the straight line of the rotating crank member 570 An upward perpendicular state is formed in which the straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the shaft support hole 552 is perpendicular to each other.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the extended position, the straight line connecting the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the rotating crank member 570 and a straight line connecting the rotation axis of and the shaft support hole 552 are perpendicular to each other. Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise in a front view from the downward orthogonal state described above.

The deformed elongated hole 553 includes a transmission groove portion 553a to which the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding projection portion 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall portion 553c connected from the lower end of the transmission groove portion 553a, and a selection wall portion 553d connecting the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. Prepare.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the transmission groove portion 553a is a concave groove extending linearly to the left from the sliding projection portion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotary crank member 570 to move from an upward perpendicular state to a downward perpendicular state, and the formation width of the inner peripheral surface thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding protrusion 574. formed large. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 while the sliding protrusion 574 moves in the transmission groove 553a.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b is a sliding projection about the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in the upward orthogonal state. It is a wall portion formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574 . That is, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotary crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotary arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotary crank member 570 is transferred to the rotary arm. Not transmitted to member 550 .

Note that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the first non-transmission wall portion 553b moves. The direction is toward the axis of rotation of the pivot crank member 570 . Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b, the load applied to the sliding projection 574 due to the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is reduced by the rotation of the rotating crank member 570. directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmission wall portion 553b, rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the second non-transmission wall portion 553c extends from the lower wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is arranged at the overhanging position. It is a wall formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding protrusion 574 centering on the rotation axis of the member 570 . That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the downward perpendicular state (the state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29A), The rotating crank member 570 idles with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550 .

It should be noted that when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. be done. Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 29(b)), the load applied to the sliding projection 574 by rotating the rotating arm member 550 is directed toward the axis of rotation of the pivot crank member 570 . Therefore, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is prevented.

The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed of a smooth curved surface that connects the right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b in front view and the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c in front view. It is formed above the curve extending from the transmission wall portion 553b.

The selection wall portion 553d is arranged to face the right portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance from the second non-transmission wall portion 553c increases toward the left end portion of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), the sliding protrusion 574 crosses the first non-transmission wall portion 553b to the second non-transmission wall portion 553b. In the margin D (see FIG. 32(b)) before reaching the wall portion 553c, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550, and rotation is not restricted. In other words, the driving force is not transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is not restricted by the sliding protrusion 574 either.

The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is It is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the forming angle between the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 necessary to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other and the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is , the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the second non-transmitting wall 553c are in contact with each other. Therefore, depending on whether the sliding protrusion 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall portion 553c or along the selection wall portion 553d, the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 with respect to the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is determined. You can change the speed.

Returning to FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, description will be made. 28 to 31 are front views of the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 in chronological order. In FIG. 28(a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. Rotating states are shown in order, the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the turning crank member 570 are shown with hidden lines, and the front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are shown with imaginary lines. .

In FIGS. 28 to 31, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is detected by a position detection sensor (not shown) in its vertical expansion/contraction posture, and stops swinging in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the swinging of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is prevented by the resistance between it and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25).

In the state shown in FIG. 28(a), the rotating crank member 570 is perpendicular to the upward direction. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position vertically downward by a distance h1 from the protrusion 541b. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in an upward orthogonal state, the projection 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 28(a) (rotated counterclockwise by angle T1 from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a))), The sliding protrusion 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2<h1) (FIG. 28(b)). ) see). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) to the counterclockwise angle T2 (T2≈180 degrees>T1 )), the sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 (transmission area), enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the projection 541 moves to the reference position. It reaches a state where it is arranged at a position vertically above the horizontal line O by a distance h3 (h3<h2) (see FIG. 29(a)). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From the state of FIG. 28(c), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (rotated counterclockwise from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T3 (T3>T2). 29(b), the sliding projection 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 29(b) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

29(a) and 29(b), when the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the sliding projection 574 is directed toward the rotating shaft of the rotating crank member 570 to move toward the second position. It is pushed by the non-transmitting wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b).

Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. However, if the performance speed of the rotating arm member 550 is set to a high speed just before reaching the extended position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is reduced. If it is slowed down, the performance effect cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated to the state of FIG. 29(b) without being stopped in the state of FIG. The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state of FIG. 29(a) (the protrusion 541 can be stopped at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3). As a result, the speed of the rotary crank member 570 is maintained until the rotary arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotary crank member 570 changes from the state shown in FIG. 29(a) to the state shown in FIG. 29(b). 570 can be slowed down. Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, it is possible to improve both the performance effect of the rotating arm member 550 and the durability of the second driving device 560 .

From the state of FIG. 29(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) to the counterclockwise angle T4 (T4≈270 degrees>T3 )), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed long hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 30(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

That is, while the rotary crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. maintained. In this embodiment, the length for which the rotating arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture and the protrusion 541b is maintained in the same position is set to the period during which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated 1/4 turn. It need not be limited to that. The length over which the front plate member 546 remains in the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553. FIG. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than in the present embodiment, the length of the front plate member 546 that continues to be arranged in the lower position can be made longer than in the present embodiment.

From the state of FIG. 30(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated counterclockwise from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T5 (T5>T4). ), the sliding projection 574 pushes up the selection wall portion 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the projection 541 is arranged at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3). (See FIG. 30(b)). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

That is, when the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the selection wall portion 553d and the sliding projection portion 574 are brought into contact with each other, so that the rotating arm member Driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission area).

From the state of FIG. 30(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (rotated counterclockwise from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 28(a)) by an angle T6 (T6>T5). ), the sliding protrusion 574 enters the region facing the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b of the deformed long hole 553, and the protrusion 541 moves vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h2). A spaced position is reached (see FIG. 31). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ).

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. The state of 28(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission region).

When rotating the rotating arm member 550 counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. . In this case, the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, thereby restricting the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG.

Here, as a method for stopping the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, stopping the rotating crank member 570 is conceivable. However, if the performance speed of the rotating arm member 550 is made high until just before reaching the retracted position and the rotating crank member 570 is suddenly stopped, a load is applied to the second driving device 560, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 slows down. If you set it to , you will not be able to improve the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotating crank member 570 to the state of FIG. can be done. As a result, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and then the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state shown in FIG. 31 to the state shown in FIG. 28(a). can be made Therefore, it is not necessary to suddenly stop the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both an improvement in the effect of the telescopic effect device 540 interlocked with the rotating arm member 550 and an improvement in the durability of the second drive device 560 .

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, by rotating the rotary crank member 570 once in the same direction, the rotary arm member 550 can be reciprocated from the retracted position to the extended position.

28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b is aligned with the reference horizontal line in half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically above O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3<h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained vertically above the reference horizontal line O for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period, and the protrusion 541b is maintained at the position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 during the subsequent 1/4 period of the rotation period. is vertically moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction) can be doubled.

Here, in the retracted position of the rotating arm member 550, the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28(a)), and the rotating arm member 550 extends. In the position, the pivot arm member 550 and the pivot crank member 570 can form a downward orthogonal state (see FIG. 29(a)). From the state of FIG. 29(a), the downward orthogonal state can be formed by rotating the turning crank member 570 clockwise by a predetermined amount.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by half (180 degrees) in order to swing the rotating arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position. Therefore, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotary arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28(a) to FIG. 29(a) ) can be made equivalent to the time required for swinging from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29(a) through FIG. 31 to FIG. 28(a)).

32 to 35, the relationship between the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 will be described. 32 to 35 are front views of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 illustrating the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 in chronological order. 32 to 35 illustrate a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by hidden lines and extend and contract. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541b of the effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In FIG. 32(a), the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), and in FIGS. The states in which the member 550 and the rotating crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount are illustrated in chronological order.

In the state shown in FIG. 32(a), the rotating crank member 570 is perpendicular to the upward direction. In this case, the projecting portion 541b is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 32(a) (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a))), the sliding The projecting portion 574 moves through the area facing the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 32(b). During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the protrusion 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

When rotating the rotating arm member 550 counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 32(b), the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, so that the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. be. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32(b).

From the state of FIG. 32(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12>T11). 33(a), the sliding projection 574 is slightly separated from the inner peripheral surface of the deformed long hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin D between the state of FIG. driving force is not transmitted to (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4<h1).

From the state of FIG. 33(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13>T12). ), and as shown in FIG. 33(b), the sliding protrusion 574 abuts against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 which swings downward under the action of gravity. be. That is, from the state of FIG. 33(b) to the state of FIG. 34(a), the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area). In the state of FIG. 33(b), the projecting portion 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h5 (h5<h4).

From the state of FIG. 33(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T14 (T14≈90 degrees>T13). is rotated), the sliding protrusion 574 is housed in the right end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3. The state (see FIG. 34(a)) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is brought into contact with the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Here, the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32(b) to 34(a) and the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. Although the rotating direction of the moving crank member 570 is different, the rotating region (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

In this case, in the rotation of the rotary crank member 570 shown in FIGS. While the surfaces are not in contact, no driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmitting region). , the driving force is transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission region).

Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed depending on the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 . As a result, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to form two effects of the rotating arm member 550. FIG.

That is, in this embodiment, when the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32(a) and FIG. When rotated, the rotating arm member 550 swings in a free fall dependent on gravitational acceleration until the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 (non-transmission region). On the other hand, when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the rotary arm member 550 is swung at a speed dependent on the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 (transmission region).

As a result, even when the rotation speed of the rotary crank member 570 is constant, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, the rotary crank member 570 can be rotated in the same phase. Variations in the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

Further, since the variation in the swing speed of the rotating arm member 550 is increased by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (formation of the clearance portion D), the mode of transmission of the driving force to the rotating arm member 550 can be changed. It is possible to eliminate the need for other members such as a changeover switch for changing, and reduce the member cost.

In this embodiment, the allowance D is formed on the pivot hole 552 side of the rotating arm member 550 . Therefore, compared to the case where the clearance portion D is formed on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 with respect to the rotating shaft of the turning crank member 570, the sliding protrusion 574 can move through the clearance portion D for a predetermined distance. The downward movement distance of the protrusion 541b can be lengthened. Therefore, it is possible to conspicuously change the operation of the rotating arm member 550 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is changed while suppressing the formation range of the allowance portion D of the rotating crank member 570 .

From the state of FIG. 34(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15>T14). ), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 34(b) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

When the rotating arm member 550 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. pushed. In this case, since the movement of the sliding protrusion 574 is restricted, the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the rotating arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 34(b).

From the state of FIG. 34(b), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward perpendicular state (see FIG. 32(a)) clockwise by an angle T16 (T16≈180 degrees>T15). 35(a), the sliding protrusion 574 slides against the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the state shown in FIG. 35(a) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not arranged in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 , so that the sliding projection 574 is idly rotated with respect to the rotating arm member 550 , and the sliding projection 574 moves to the rotating arm. Driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

From the state of FIG. 35(a), the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 32(a)), it is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17>T16). ), the sliding protrusion 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission region), and the protrusion 541 is arranged at a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2>h3) (FIG. 35 (b)) is reached. That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

Here, when the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 and the swinging of the rotating arm member 550 are always interlocked, it is difficult to shift the start timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 . . Therefore, when starting the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a driving device with a large driving force is required, and there is a risk that the driving device will become large.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the start timings of the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 34(b) to the state shown in FIG. 35(a), only the rotary crank member 570 is rotated until the state shown in FIG. 35(a) reaches the state shown in FIG. 35(b). By interlocking with the rotating crank member 570, the rotating arm member 550 can be started.

As a result, since the momentum of the rotating crank member 570 can be used to start the rotating arm member 550, the driving force required for the second driving device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the size of the second driving device 560 can be reduced.

When the rotary crank member 570 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35(b), the sliding projection 574 is moved through the transmission groove 553a to reach the state shown in FIG. 32(a). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are arranged in the moving direction of the sliding protrusion 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding protrusion 574 to the rotating arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the rotating arm member 550 is swung.

From these facts, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise at a constant speed as shown in FIGS. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically above the horizontal line O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3<h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained vertically above the reference horizontal line O for a period of 1/4 of the subsequent rotation period by a distance h3. It is moved upward from a position separated by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3). As a result, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the protrusion 541b (the moving speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction) can be doubled.

Further, the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is partially accelerated by gravitational acceleration when moving downward, while the speed always follows the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 when moving upward. be done. As a result, the mode of speed change of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540) can be changed according to the moving direction of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540).

With reference to FIG. 36, the change in the distance of the protrusion 541b (extension effect device 540) from the reference horizontal line O when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described.

FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28(a)). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the horizontal axis indicates the swing angle increasing rightward from the upper orthogonal state of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) as the left end, and the vertical axis indicates the swing angle. shows the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b.

In FIG. 36, the curve CC1 indicates the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise, and the distance when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise is indicated by the curve CC1. A curve CW1 indicates the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the projection 541b. Curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusion 541b shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, respectively. A curve CC2, which is obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1, is illustrated by an imaginary line. By comparing the curves CC1 and CW1, as described above, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the upward and downward speeds of the protrusion 541b moved vertically by the rotating arm member 550 can be changed. can be done.

As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, the sliding protrusion 574 does not rotate until it contacts the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)). A dashed line indicates the case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged at the retracted position as a curved line CW2. Note that this corresponds to the case where the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) for swinging the rotating arm member 550 upward is set to be large. In this case, the period during which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position can be made longer.

In the curves CC1 and CW1, in the angular range N1 in which the distance of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) from the horizontal reference line O remains unchanged, the turning crank member 570 and the turning arm member 550 ( (see FIG. 28(a)), a non-transmission region is formed in which the driving force is not transmitted. The width of the angular range N1 can be adjusted by adjusting the width of the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)).

In addition, on the curve CW1, the angle until the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) abuts on the deformed long hole 553 of the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) In the range N2, a non-transmission region is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 where the driving force is not transmitted. In addition, the width of this angular range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28(a)).

As shown in FIG. 36, between the angle T11 and the angle T14 and the angle T4 and the angle T6 where the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) is arranged in the same phase, the curve The shapes of CW1 and the curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 obtained by horizontally reversing the curve CC1 do not overlap).

That is, when the rotating crank member 570 (see FIG. 28(a)) rotates between the angle T4 and the angle T6 so as to lift the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)), the angle 11 to angle T14, the curve is gentler than that in the case where the rotating crank member 570 rotates in such a manner that the rotating arm member 550 is pushed down.

This is because the sliding protrusion 574 (see FIG. 28(a)) abuts the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553 on the curve CW1 and the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 28(a)) 28(a)) is rotated, and at curve CC1, the sliding protrusion 574 comes into contact with the selection wall portion 553d (see FIG. 28(a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553, and the rotating arm member 550 is rotated. It depends.

Returning to FIG. 28(a), description will be made. As described above, in the deformed elongated hole 553, the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centered on the shaft support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small). The right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the shaft support hole 552 at an angle larger than the forming angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1. be.

In this case, when the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swinging of the rotating arm member 550 necessary to correspond to the amount of change changes. That is, when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d are in contact with each other and the distance between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount, the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 is , the swinging amount of the rotating arm member 550 when the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the second non-transmitting wall 553c are in contact with each other.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotary crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, depending on the rotation direction of the rotary crank member 570, the rotary crank member 570 may be arranged in the same phase. The moving speed of the protrusion 541b can be changed.

Although FIGS. 28 to 35 illustrate the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated in one direction, it is also possible to reverse the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 halfway. The timing for reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is the state in which the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first non-transmitting wall portion 553b (for example, FIG. 28(a), FIG. 31, FIG. 32(a)). and FIG. 32(b), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position), or a state where the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (for example, FIG. 29(a), 29(b), 34(b) and 35(a), the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position).

In this case, since the rotating arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotating crank member 570 in the rotating direction, the resistance applied from the rotating arm member 550 to the rotating crank member 570 when the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed is reduced. can be suppressed. Further, in this embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged in the retracted position and the state in which it is arranged in the extended position. It is possible to facilitate the control of reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 when the moving arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position or the extended position.

By reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the variation of the reciprocating motion of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 in the vertical direction can be increased.

For example, from the state in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 28(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated half a turn counterclockwise (see FIG. 29(a)), and then rotated. A case in which the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position is exemplified by reversing the direction of rotation of the moving crank member 570 and rotating it clockwise by half a turn (see FIG. 28(a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 .

In this case, the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 during half the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570 to a distance h3 (h3<h1) from the reference horizontal line O. ) moves down to a position separated by ). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) from 0 degrees to 180 degrees on the horizontal axis. Next, the projecting portion 541b extends from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1>h3) from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation period of the rotary crank member 570. move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis extending from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

As a result, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 moves downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and moves upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). can be the same as the period of

Further, for example, from the state where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 32(a)), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by 1/4 turn (see FIG. 34(a)). Next, the direction of rotation of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, and the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position by rotating the rotating crank member 570 counterclockwise by 1/4 turn (FIG. 32). (a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding protrusion 574 moves on the side where it approaches the shaft support hole 552 .

In this case, the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 moves from a position vertically above the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 during a quarter of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570 to a distance h3 (h3) from the reference horizontal line O. It moves downward to a position spaced apart by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along a curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) from 0 degrees to 90 degrees on the horizontal axis. Next, the projecting portion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1>h3) from a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3 in a period of 1/4 of the rotation period of the rotating crank member 570. Move up to position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) with the horizontal axis extending from 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

Accordingly, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3), and is moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The moving period can be the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened compared to the case where the sliding protrusion 574 is moved on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 552 .

Further, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves downward, it can be partially free-falled (from the angle T11 to the angle T13), while the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves upward. In that case, it is always moved at a speed along the rotation speed of the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, even when the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the telescopic effect device 540 ( degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from angle T11 to angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

Next, the difference in swing angle due to the difference in the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state will be described.

37-39 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 37 to 39 illustrate the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the expanded position). 37 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. A state in which the projection 541 is moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 39 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 29(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position spaced upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h3.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the stretched state is formed in an arc around the first shaft portion 512 and rotates. Along the extending direction of the arcuate hole 554 of the arm member 550 . In other words, the arcuate hole 554 extends along the swing locus of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not arranged to face the swing direction of the protrusion 541b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not work as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b. Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b depends on how the swinging of the rotating plate 520 is regulated. That is, the rotating plate 520 can swing until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c. The protrusion 541b can swing until it abuts against the stopper portion 518b, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ2 when viewed from the front.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39 , when the protrusion 541b is swung leftward in front view at the swing angle θ2, the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 . In this case, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion/contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550, and the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550, the first lifting fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 are connected to the rotating arm member. By disposing so as to be able to engage with 550, the projection 541b and the arcuate hole 554 can be aligned. That is, it is possible to prevent the expansion/contraction effect device 540 from moving in the expansion/contraction direction independently of the rotating arm member 550 .

As a result, the length of the rotating arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the problem that the protrusion 541b cannot return to the arcuate hole 554. FIG. As a result, the arrangement area of the rotating arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement area of other movable members can be secured accordingly. Moreover, the material cost of the rotating arm member 550 can be reduced.

Further, when the rotating arm member 550 swings in a state in which the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 shifts, and the protrusion 541b becomes circular. It becomes difficult to return to the arcuate hole 554, and malfunction may occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding protrusion 574 abuts against the deformed elongated hole 553, thereby preventing the pivoting arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

In addition, the movement trajectory of the point farthest from the rotation axis of the sliding projection 574 (the point farthest from the rotation axis) is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 that contacts the sliding projection 574. (see FIG. 39), the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the attitude of the rotating arm member 550.

Here, for example, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 29(a)). )), the protrusion 541b is separated from the arcuate hole 554, and then the protrusion 541b returns to the arcuate hole 554 before the rotating crank member 570 is arranged in the state shown in FIG. think of. After the projecting portion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554, even if the rotating crank member 570 is further rotated and the rotating arm member 550 swings to the state shown in FIG. However, there is no malfunction such that the magnetic tape cannot be returned to the arcuate hole 554 .

In this case, when swinging the rotating arm member 550 and the telescopic effect device 540 respectively, the rotating crank member 570 is controlled to stop or start according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554. It is not necessary and rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 can continue. In other words, it is only the timing of swinging of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 that needs to be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control burden of the complicated operation of swinging the telescopic effect device 540 and the rotating arm member 550 at different timings.

In addition, in this embodiment, a proboscis portion 554a that widens the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 toward the opening end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554 is formed. As a result, positional deviation (positional deviation in the direction of expansion and contraction of the expansion and contraction effect device 540) when the protrusion 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554 can be largely tolerated, and the first raising fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e A large clearance with the rotating arm member 550 can be ensured.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state between the expanded state and the contracted state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the extended state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the expansion/contraction effect Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

40-42 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 40 to 42 illustrate a case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (a case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged between the extended position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the expanded state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b changes depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

40 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. 42 shows a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state in FIG. 40 .

The posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 illustrated in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 due to the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has both the function of changing the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546, as will be described later. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

As shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state have a radius of curvature are the same on the upper side, but the radii of curvature and postures are different from each other. Since the swing locus of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at the forming angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swinging of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42). .

As shown in FIG. 41 , when the rotating plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the protrusion 541 b does not contact the circular arc hole 554 . That is, since the rotating plate 520 is allowed to swing until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c, the protrusion 541b is allowed to swing up to a swing angle θ3 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (angle θ3= angle θ1).

As shown in FIG. 42 , when the rotating plate 520 is rotated clockwise in front view, the projection 541b is brought into contact with the first stopper surface 554b of the arcuate hole 554 . In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e abuts against the upper side surface of the rotating arm member 550, and the state change of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction is prevented. movement is stopped.

That is, the rotating plate 520 is not swung until it abuts against the third stopper portion 518c, and the projection 541b is swung clockwise up to a swing angle θ4 (angle θ4<angle θ2). . Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction. Thus, by varying the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540, the variation of the swing angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be increased. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e abuts on the body portion 551 of the rotating arm member 550. As shown in FIG.

Next, the swing angle when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state will be described. By swinging the rotating arm member 550 clockwise from the state where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 40), the protrusion 541b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the expansion/contraction effect Device 540 creates a contracted state.

43-45 are front views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 43 to 45 illustrate the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state (the case where the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swing trajectory of the protrusion 541b is shorter than when the expansion/contraction effect device 540 forms the intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the locus of swinging of the protrusion 541b changes depending on the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction.

43 shows a state in which the projection 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is arranged on the vertical line of the first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510, and FIG. A state in which the projection 541 is moved counterclockwise is illustrated, and FIG. 45 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 is moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. The posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the posture of the rotating arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28(a). Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is arranged at a position separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven in conjunction with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 due to the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arcuate hole 554 has both the function of changing the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b and the function of interlocking the rotating arm member 550 and the front plate member 546 together. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 forms the contracted state and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 are different from each other. The central axis of the radius of curvature is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the swing locus of the protrusion 541b is below the protrusion 541b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arcuate hole 554 is arranged above the arcuate hole 554. FIG. In this case, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arcuate hole 554 intersect at a forming angle α2 (angle α2>angle α1), and the arcuate hole 554 acts as a stopper to stop the swinging of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

As shown in FIG. 44 , when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the protrusion 541b is brought into contact with the second stopper surface 554c of the arcuate hole 554 . In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the projecting portion 541b can swing counterclockwise up to a swing angle θ5 when viewed from the front. (angle θ5<angle θ1=angle θ3).

As shown in FIG. 45 , when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in front view, the projection 541b is brought into contact with the third stopper surface 554d of the arcuate hole 554 . In this case, the rotating plate 520 does not swing until it comes into contact with the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can swing clockwise up to a swing angle θ6 when viewed from the front (angle θ6<angle θ4 <Angle θ2). Therefore, the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b can be changed according to the state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 in the expansion/contraction direction. Thereby, the variation of the swing width of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be increased.

Here, the formation angle α2 between the movement locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 in the reduced state is formed to be larger than the formation angle α1 between the movement locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 in the intermediate state. be.

In the relationship between the swing locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the projection 541b is swung across the arc-shaped hole 554. is minimized. On the other hand, regarding the relationship between the swing locus of the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degrees (see FIGS. , and the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be made smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1<formation angle α2 ).

As described above, the expansion and contraction state of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is changed, so that the swinging angle of the protrusion 541b is changed. The stopper surface 554 c and the third stopper surface 554 d) function as stoppers that regulate the swing angle of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 . As a result, the inner circumferential surface of the arcuate hole 554 can also be used as a portion for regulating the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion/contraction state of the expansion/contraction effect device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the space for arranging the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

Further, the stopper that regulates the swinging angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by arranging the rotating arm member 550 at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is arranged on the front side of the third pattern display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the third pattern display device 81 even when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position. can be prevented. As a result, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the retracted position, other members can be arranged on the front surface of the third pattern display device 81. The overhang space of the support member 720) can be secured.

In addition, the circular arc-shaped hole 554 of the rotating arm member 550 functions as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 540, and the second drive of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by swinging the rotation arm member 550. and a function as a transmission device that transmits the driving force of the device 560 and causes the expansion and contraction effect device 540 to perform an expansion and contraction operation. As a result, functions can be consolidated and the number of parts can be reduced.

The tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. FIG. The tilting operation unit 600 is a unit that swings (tilts) the effect member 620 (see FIG. 12), and the sliding operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilting operation unit 600 in the horizontal direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700. FIG. 46 and 47 illustrate a state in which the support members 720 (see FIG. 47) of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700 are arranged at the retracted position.

48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. FIG. 48 and 49, the tilting unit 600 is not disassembled for easy understanding.

The slide operation unit 700 has a base member 710 formed in the shape of a plate elongated in the left-right direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 with one end fastened and fixed so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. a support member 720, a slide rail 730 having one end fastened and fixed to the support member 720 and the other end to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed so as to be vertically extendable; A connecting member 740 formed slidably on the rear rail portion 716 of the main body portion 710 and pivotally supported by the pivotal support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and a driving force for moving the support member 720 in the left-right direction are generated. It mainly includes a driving device 750 and a rear cover member 760 formed on the rear side of the driving device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710 .

The base member 710 is a member that forms the skeleton of the slide operation unit 700, and includes a slide plate 711 formed to be slidable in the left-right direction and to which the support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the rear side, and a rear view of the base member 710. A shaft support hole 712 having a circular cross-section and being recessed in the lower left portion for supporting the fixed shaft portion 753a, and a shaft support hole having an elongated recess shape extending in the left-right direction at the lower right portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear. 712 and a slide shaft support hole 713 in which a moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and a locking portion 725 of a support member 720 formed to be vertically swingable by a solenoid. a lever member 714 for restricting the movement of the base member 710; a front rail portion 715 protruding from the upper end portion of the base member 710 toward the front side in a downward arc shape in cross section and on which the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 rolls; A rear rail portion 716 recessed from the rear side of the rail portion 715 in an arcuate cross-section through which the insertion plate portion 741b of the connecting member 740 is inserted, and the pivot hole 712 and the lower left portion of the base member 710 in the rear view are vertically aligned. A slide origin detection sensor 717 is disposed at a position on the right side of the shaft support hole 712 , and a slide shaft support hole 713 is located at the lower right portion of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear and is vertically aligned with the slide shaft support hole 713 . and a slide origin detection sensor 718 disposed at a position on the left side of the shaft support hole 713 .

Since the lever member 714 restricts the lateral sliding movement of the strut member 720 fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711, the driving force of the driving device 750 when maintaining the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position is not required. can be done.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting motion unit 600 is moved along the forming direction (arc track) of the front rail portion 715 and the rear rail portion 716, the support member 720 connected to the tilting motion unit 600 can move left and right. Sliding movement in the direction can occur under the action of gravity loaded on the tilting motion unit 600 . For example, when the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting motion unit 600 is oriented obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715 . Therefore, even if the movement direction of the support member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the lateral direction along the movement direction of the slide plate 711, the support member 720 may be moved by gravity. In this embodiment, when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it engages with the engaging portion 725 of the support member 720, and the lateral movement of the support member 720 is restricted. is unnecessary, the strut member 720 can be maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

The slide origin detection sensor 717 is used to detect whether or not the strut member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position) of the slide movement. The slide origin detection sensor 717 has a pair of a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, the light emitting unit is arranged to irradiate light from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 toward the front side, and the light emitting unit is arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting unit can be received (detected). A light-receiving part is arranged with a gap of 10 mm on the front side of the . Although the details will be described later, when the support member 720 movable in the horizontal direction is moved to the origin position (retracted position), the lower end of the support member 720 is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717. configured to be located. Therefore, when the support member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position), the lower end portion of the support member 720 shields the light from the light emitting unit toward the light receiving unit. As a result, it is determined whether or not the strut member 720 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position) by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 to the light receiving portion is blocked. can be discriminated.

The slide position detection sensor 718 is used to detect whether or not the strut member 720 is arranged at the extended position for sliding movement. The slide position detection sensor 718 has a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion having the same positional relationship as the slide origin sensor 717 . Although the details will be described later, when the laterally movable support member 720 is moved to the extended position, the lower end of the support member 720 is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718. is configured as Therefore, when the strut member 720 is arranged at the protruding position, the lower end portion of the strut member 720 shields the light traveling from the light-emitting portion to the light-receiving portion. By determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide position detection sensor 718 to the light receiving portion is blocked, it is possible to determine whether or not the strut member 720 is arranged at the extended position. can be done.

The strut member 720 includes a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 which is continuously connected to the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 in the left-right direction and drilled in the front-rear direction. A first fastening portion 722 through which a screw to be fastened and fixed is inserted, and a second fastening portion that is vertically connected to the left end portion of the main body portion 721 in the front view and drilled in the front-rear direction to fasten and fix the slide rail 730. 723 and a slide hole 724 which is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the continuous direction of the second fastening portion 723 and which is formed on the right side of the main body portion 721 when viewed from the front; A hook-shaped engaging portion 725 that protrudes upward from the lower end portion and engages with the lever member 714, and a lower cover portion that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the main body portion 721 and in which the belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between the main body portion 721 and the main body portion 721. 726, a rolling portion 727 protruding from the back side of the lower end portion of the main body portion 721 and formed to roll on the inner peripheral surface of the slide concave portion 764 of the back cover member 760; and a coil spring 728 that hangs downward and forward and is connected to the hooked portion 617 of the base member 610 at its lower end.

The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support member 720 so as to extend and contract in the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723 .

The slide hole 724 is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portion 723, and is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can prevent the vertical movement of the tilting operation unit 600 from shifting in the horizontal direction (relative rotation of the tilting operation unit 600 with respect to the support member 720).

The lower lid portion 726 has a tooth profile extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile has a shape that meshes with the tooth profile formed on the inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 of the driving device 750 . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the strut member 720 from slipping on the belt 755 of the driving device 750 .

Further, the lower lid portion 726 is provided with a shielding portion 726a for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 on the lower surface side. The shielding portion 726a has a rectangular shape that is oblong in the sliding direction (horizontal direction) of the support member 720 (and the tilting motion unit 600), and the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the movable direction is equal to that of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718. is formed thinner (approximately 1 mm) than the gap (approximately 10 mm) between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. The shielding portion 726a is movable between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 by moving the support member 720 in the left-right direction. When the strut member 720 (and the tilting motion unit 600) is at the origin position (retracted position), the shielding portion 726a is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide origin. Light emitted from the light-emitting portion of the detection sensor 717 to the light-receiving portion is blocked. Further, when the support member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is in the extended position, the shielding portion 726a is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718, thereby detecting the slide position. Light emitted from the light-emitting portion of the sensor 718 to the light-receiving portion is blocked. Accordingly, when it is detected that the light receiving portion (or light emitting portion) of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded by the shielding portion 726a, it is determined that the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the origin position (retracted position). can be discriminated. Further, when it is detected that the light receiving portion (or light emitting portion) of the slide position detection sensor 718 is shielded by the shielding portion 726a, it can be determined that the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the extended position. can.

The rolling portion 727 is inserted into the slide concave portion 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing frictional resistance and suppressing tilting in the front-rear direction around the lower end portion of the support member 720 . be able to.

The coil spring 728 is a biasing force that moves the tilting motion unit 600 upward. Since the biasing force from the coil spring 728 is constantly applied to the tilting motion unit 600, the tilting motion unit 600 is prevented from falling downward due to gravity.

The connecting member 740 is pivotally supported by a triangular plate-like main body member 741 rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 and by a rolling shaft 741c projecting from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 rolling on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715. a front cover member 743 arranged in a manner such as a front rail portion 715; and a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 that is moved.

The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and has a circular recess formed in the upper end portion from the rear surface, and a shaft rotatably supported by the shaft support protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 . A support portion 741a, an insertion plate portion 741b which is a plate-like member protruding from the lower end portion toward the front side and is slidably inserted through the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and an insertion plate portion extending from the shaft support portion 741a. It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c projecting in a columnar shape toward the front side from positions symmetrical with respect to the perpendicular drawn to 741b, and on which the upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported.

Since the insertion plate portion 741 b is inserted through the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710 , the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716 . Therefore, the tilting unit 600 pivotally supported by the pivotal support portion 741 a is also formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716 .

The rolling shafts 741c are formed as a pair at positions symmetrical with respect to a vertical line drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741c are brought into contact with the arc-shaped front rail portion 715 via the upper rolling portion 742, the load ( A force normal to the arc) passes through the pivot 741a. Therefore, the connecting member 740 can stably hold the pivotal support protrusion 612 of the tilting unit 600 .

The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741 a and contacts the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 . That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715 , the upper rolling portion 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 is slid can be reduced, and the driving force required for the slidable movement can be suppressed.

The lower rolling member 744 has its lower half rotatably fitted around the lower portion of the front cover member 743 and its upper end abuts against the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715 , the lower rolling portion 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting member 740 and the front rail portion 715 during the sliding movement can be reduced, and the driving force required for the sliding movement can be suppressed.

Thus, in this embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 , and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 . As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 are sandwiched between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing frictional resistance.

Here, the tilting motion unit 600 may tilt in the front-rear direction because the center of gravity is formed upward as described later. In this case, the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 between the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744. , can generate resistance. This makes it easier to maintain the posture of the tilting motion unit 600 .

The front cover member 743 is pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741c of the connecting member 740 so that the upper rolling member 742 cannot be pulled out.

The driving device 750 includes a driving motor 751 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force for sliding the support member 720, a driving gear 752 pivotally supported by the driving motor 751, and A shaft fixed gear 753 meshed with a belt 755 wound thereon, and a shaft moving gear 754 spaced apart from the shaft fixed gear 753 and around which the belt 755 is wound and a rotary shaft 754a slidably formed. , a belt 755 wound around the fixed shaft gear 753 and the fixed shaft gear 754 and moved by the rotation of the fixed shaft gear 753, and a coil that generates an urging force to move the fixed shaft gear 754 away from the fixed shaft gear 753. and a spring 756 .

The fixed shaft gear 753 includes a fixed shaft portion 753a which is a cylindrical member serving as a rotating shaft and is inserted through the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710 . In addition, the shaft moving gear 754 includes a moving shaft portion 754 a which is a cylindrical member serving as a rotation shaft and is inserted through the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710 .

The fixed shaft gear 753 and the movable shaft gear 754 are formed as gears having the same shape. The inner peripheral surface of the belt 755 is formed with a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 . As a result, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the amount of rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755 .

One end of the coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-shaped portion formed on the right side of the slide shaft support hole 713n of the base member 710 when viewed from the rear, and the other end is fixed to a case that covers the axial movement gear 754. . As a result, an urging force can be generated to move the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712 , and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755 , so that the belt 755 can move between the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 753 . Dropping off from the gear 754 can be prevented.

The rear cover member 760 is a member that covers the driving device 750 on the rear surface of the base member 710, and includes a main body portion 761 formed in a box shape with an open front side, and a fixed shaft portion 753a on the bottom surface of the main body portion 761. A recessed portion 762 that is a receiving recess, a moving recessed portion 763 that is a recess that extends in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and receives the moving shaft portion 754a, and a laterally extending portion that receives the rolling portion 727. and a slide recessed portion 764 which is a recess.

The slide recessed portion 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on its upper and lower inner surfaces. It suppresses the frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the support member 720 and suppresses the tilt of the support member 720 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the strut member 720 tilts in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 abuts against either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide concave portion 764 . As a result, tilting of the strut member 720 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Next, the tilting motion unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. FIG. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting motion unit 600. FIG.

The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-shaped base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, a box-shaped effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotably supported by the base member 610, A first driving device 630 that generates a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the first driving device 630 to the effect member 620, and a contact with the transmission member 640 for transmission. It mainly includes a torsion spring 650 that generates a biasing force to move the member 640, and a second driving device 660 that generates driving force to open and close the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620. .

The base member 610 includes a body portion 611 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape to which the slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed, and a columnar support portion of the connecting member 740 protruding from the front side of the body portion 611 . A shaft support projection 612 on which 741a is supported, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the shaft support projection 612. and a first shaft support hole 613 formed vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613. A biaxial support hole 614, an auxiliary member 615 formed on the back surface of the main body 611 and inserted vertically slidably through the slide hole 724 of the support member 720, and an insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted. 616, a hook-shaped hook-shaped portion 617 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 611 toward the rear side, and a pair of a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion arranged on the upper left portion of the rear surface of the main portion 611. and a tilt origin sensor 618 .

The second shaft support hole 614 is provided with a lower receiving plate portion 614a projecting from the lower edge toward the front side with an arcuate cross section. The rotation of the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is guided by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. In addition, the lower receiving plate portion 614a is formed with a lateral width having a length substantially equal to the outer diameter of the tubular portion 642 (see FIG. 53(a)).

By inserting the auxiliary member 615 into the slide hole 724 , tilting of the base member 610 in the horizontal direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be smoothly slid in the vertical direction.

The hook-shaped portion 617 is a portion on which one end of the coil spring 728 is hooked and a biasing force is applied.

The effect member 620 and the second driving device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second driving device 660. FIG. A sub-display device 690 disposed inside the effect member 620 is shown in imaginary lines, and FIGS.

The effect member 620 is a box-shaped member in which the sub-display device 690 is arranged, and includes a rectangular plate-shaped body member 621 and a body member 621 extending forward from the top and bottom of the body member 621 to cover the body member 621. an upper and lower cover member 622 that can be bent in a manner, and left and right cover members 623 that are plate-like members attached from both sides of the upper and lower cover members 622 and form a rectangular box shape with an open front together with the upper and lower cover members 622; A first curtain member 624, which is a member for opening and closing the front opening and is connected to the fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 and moved, and a member for opening and closing the front opening together with the first curtain member 624. A second curtain member 625 moved by being pulled by the first curtain member 624, a cylindrical swing shaft portion 626 protruding from the lower back surface of the main body member 621, and a position on the lower left side of the back surface of the main body member 621. and a sensor shielding portion 627 arranged at a position for shielding the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilt origin sensor 618 to the light receiving portion when the production member 620 is arranged at the origin position. , the center of gravity position G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (at a higher position) than the swing shaft portion 626 . The center of gravity position G is formed on a straight line passing through the sliding shaft portion 621a and the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

The main body member 621 includes a columnar sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 51) that is vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 and protrudes toward the rear side. The slide shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted through the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the driving device 660. .

The left and right cover members 623 are provided with slide grooves 623a which are formed in groove shapes on the inner side surfaces and in which the slide projections 625c of the second curtain members 625 are slidable.

The slide groove 623a is connected to curved grooves formed in an arc shape at the upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 is slid along the shape of the slide groove 623a such that linear movement and curvilinear movement occur in sequence.

The first curtain member 624 is a member that swings vertically about the opening/closing shaft 664 of the second driving device 660. A fitting portion 624b that protrudes in the left-right direction from an end portion of the 624a and is fitted into a fitting hole 665a of the second driving device 660 so as not to rotate relative to the fitting portion 624b, and one end near the fitting portion 624b is a main body portion. A connecting member 624 c pivotally supported by 624 so as to be able to swing and having the other end connected to the connecting protrusion 625 b of the second curtain member 625 .

The second curtain member 625 is a member that is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction. A connecting protrusion 625b projecting in the left-right direction from an end portion and connected to the other end of the connecting member 624c, and a slide groove of the left-right cover member 623 projecting outward in the left-right direction from near the bent portion of the main body portion 625a. and a slide protrusion 625c inserted through the 623a.

The second drive device 660 includes a drive motor 661 fastened and fixed to the back side of the production member 620, a drive gear 662 pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear meshed with the drive gear 662 to A pair of transmission gears 663 that rotate in opposite directions, and an opening/closing shaft that is inserted through the transmission gears 663 so as not to rotate relative to each other and is rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a shaft support mechanism (not shown). 664 and transmission members 665 fixed to both ends of the pair of opening/closing shafts 664 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

The transmission member 665 has a fitting hole 665a into which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. As a result, the first curtain member 624 swings up and down around the opening/closing shaft 664 .

Returning to FIGS. 50 and 51, description will be made. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 having a drive shaft inserted through an insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a screw gear-shaped worm 632 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631 . , and a helical gear-shaped worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 .

The worm 632 is formed with a double thread. In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 that meshes with the worm 632 is about 20, so the worm wheel 633 makes one rotation while the worm 632 makes ten rotations. As a result, the rotation angles of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be significantly reduced when the drive motor 631 is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution.

The worm wheel 633 has a locking projection 633a that protrudes from the center of the rotation shaft, is inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610, and is locked to the tubular portion 643 of the transmission member 640 so as not to rotate relative to it. Prepare. Structurally, the transmission of driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 actively rotates, the force 632). As a result, the load applied to the drive motor 631 when the worm wheel 633 is stopped can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped while the power of the drive motor 631 is turned off, so that the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53(a) and 53(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 53(a) and 53(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and for the description of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650, refer to FIGS. 50 and 51 as appropriate. do. FIG. 53(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642. In this state, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 exerts a Balanced in the swinging direction. FIG. 53(b) shows a state in which the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view from the inverted state of FIG. 53(a) by a predetermined amount, and the effect member 620 is swung by a predetermined amount.

The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and has a main body portion 641 that is formed in the shape of an elongated rectangular rod, and one end of the main body portion 641 that moves forward and backward. A cylindrical portion 642 extending in the axial direction and engaging the locking projection 633a of the first driving device 630, and a length extending in the axial radial direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the body portion 641. Sliding holes 643 drilled as holes, contact portions 644 spaced apart on both sides of the body portion 641 in the swinging direction, and the contact portions 644 and the front side surface of the body portion 641 are connected. and a wide arcuate rear arcuate plate portion 646 connecting the abutting portion 644 and the back side surface of the body portion 641.

As shown in FIG. 53 , the abutting portion 644 , the front arcuate plate portion 645 and the rear arcuate plate portion 646 are arranged in a manner surrounding the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 650 from dropping (separating) from the transmission member 640 .

The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported in the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked to the locking projection 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first driving device 630 so as not to rotate relatively. be.

The sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is inserted through the sliding hole 643 . Accordingly, when the transmission member 640 is swung about the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is moved. is slid through the slide hole 643 (slid in the axial radial direction), the effect member 620 is swung about the first shaft support hole 613 .

By swinging the effect member 620 in this way, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated in the minimum unit of the control resolution of the first driving device 630 can be suppressed. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear is also conceivable. However, in this case, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53(a)), which is the minimum unit of control resolution, is shown larger than the actual angle P0 for ease of understanding. The movement amount X1 by which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 shifts in the left-right direction from the inverted state increases as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 moves away from the swing shaft portion 626 when rotated in the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the more the center of gravity G of the production member 620 is separated from the swing shaft portion 626, the more difficult it becomes to adjust the position of the center of gravity G of the production member 620, and the center of gravity G of the production member 620 is arranged directly above the swing shaft portion 626. It becomes difficult to stop the production member 620 in the inverted state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the production member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620 . The length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642, which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640, is the length from the sliding shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626, which is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. formed short compared to .

Therefore, even if the effect member 620 is elongated in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0 (see FIG. 53(a), which is the minimum unit of resolution of the control of the first driving device 630, can be understood). (The angle is shown to be several times larger than the actual angle P0 in order to facilitate can be done. Therefore, the production member 620 can be easily stopped in an inverted state in which the center of gravity G of the production member 620 is arranged directly above the swing shaft portion 626 that is the swing shaft.

In addition, as a method for swinging the production member 620, gear teeth are formed on the production member 620 on an arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626, and a gear meshing with the gear teeth is rotated by a drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 is conceivable. However, in this case, the greater the swing range of the effect member 620, the larger the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed in the lateral direction of the effect member 620 is required. Therefore, when the effect member 620 is formed in a narrow shape in the swinging direction, the gear teeth on the circular arc protrude from the effect member 620, which interferes with the effect of the effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the effect member 620 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 has a cylindrical portion 642 that is a swing shaft and a swing shaft portion 626 that is a swing shaft of the effect member 620 . , and is connected to the swing shaft portion 621a at the center of the effect member 620 in the left-right direction. Since the production member 620 swings following the transmission member 640, the formation range of the transmission member 640 with respect to the swing range of the production member 620 can be suppressed near the center of the production member 620 in the left-right direction. As a result, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 640 from protruding from the effect member 620, and the design flexibility of the effect member 620 can be improved.

The lower surface of the sliding shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 . As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is applied not only to the swing shaft portion 626 but also to the transmission member 640 . That is, the force opposing the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swing shaft portion 626 but also from the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 . Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points, the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, and the radial force applied to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be suppressed. .

Here, since the inverted state shown in FIG. 53(a) is the normal state for the effect member 620, the transmission member 640 is swung and after the predetermined amount of swinging from the inverted state, it can quickly return to the inverted state. is desirable.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53(b), when the transmission member 640 is swung counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. is rocked at a rocking angle φ2 (φ2<φ1).

That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is made smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 that swings by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)).

Further, in the present embodiment, an elongated slide hole 643 is formed in the axial radial direction of the transmission member 640, and the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted through the slide hole 643. As shown in FIG. The transmission member 640 and the production member 620 have different swing axes, and the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 has a shorter swing radius than the sliding shaft portion 621a of the production member 620. Therefore, the transmission member 640 As is oscillated, the sliding shaft portion 621a moves away from the oscillating shaft of the transmission member 640. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53(a)) is swung by a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( The arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in FIG. 54(b) is shortened.

That is, the arm length of the transmission member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state. can be made smaller as it approaches the inverted state compared to the case of . Therefore, without changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 631, the operation speed of the production member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position, while the operation speed of the production member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the production member 620 is turned upside down. (It is possible to easily control the stop of the effect member 620 in a state in which the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is arranged vertically above the first shaft support hole 613).

Referring to FIG. 55, by changing the arm length from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the tubular portion 642 of the transmission member 640, the effect member 620 swings with respect to the swing angle of the transfer member 640. A change in angle will be described.

FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). 55, the rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53(a)) that is the rotation shaft of the effect member 620, and the rotation shaft M2 is the tubular portion 642 that is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640. (See FIG. 53(a)). Straight lines a1 to a4 schematically represent the arrangement of transmission member 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from rotation axis M2. Straight line a1 passes through rotation axis M1, and straight lines a2 to a4 are straight lines a1 and is formed in such a manner that the formation angle of is sequentially added by 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by the adjacent straight lines a1 to a4 are 15 degrees each.

An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53(a)) centered on the rotation axis M2 is illustrated by arc SR1, and the arm length R2 centered on the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54(b)). A circular arc drawn with a radius equal to is illustrated by arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn centering on the rotation axis M1, and has a radius of the arm length R1 plus the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2.

These arcs assume loci of connecting positions between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53(a)). In the present embodiment, a sliding shaft portion 621a (see FIG. 53(a)) as a connecting position protrudes from the effect member 620, and the connecting position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . In addition, when the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transmission member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, a long hole is formed in the effect member 620 in the axial radial direction, and the transmission member 640 is connected to the hole. A case is assumed in which the shaft inserted through the long hole protrudes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P10, the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P11, and the intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P12. is illustrated.

Similarly, the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P20, the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P21, and the intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P22. The intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P30, the intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P31, and the intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P32. The intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is indicated by the intersection point P40, the intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is indicated by the intersection point P41, and the intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is indicated by the intersection point P42. The intersection point P10 and the intersection point P11 are arranged at the same position, and the intersection point P40 and the intersection point P42 are arranged at the same position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, an angle A10 forms an angle between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20. The angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 is indicated by the angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is indicated by the angle A12. be done.

Similarly, an angle A20 forms between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30. The angle A21 forms the angle between the straight line passing through the axis of rotation M1 and the intersection point P22, and the angle A22 forms the angle between the straight line passing the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32. An angle A30 forms an angle between a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40. and the angle A31 forms an angle A31, and the angle A32 forms an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angles of the effect member 620 .

Here, the ratio of (distance between rotation axis M1 and rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is (1:2.32:2.54) in this embodiment. When the angles are actually measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung from the straight line a4 to the straight line a3, the swing angle of the performance member 640 is the largest when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. , the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR2 (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

Angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung from the straight line a3 to the straight line a2, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is It is less than the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angles A22 and A20 is smaller than the difference between angles A20 and A21 (angle A20 is closer to angle A22 than to angle A21).

Angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, when the transmission member 640 is swung from the straight line a2 to the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is It surpasses the case where the transmission member 640 and the production member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between angles A12 and A10 is greater than the difference between angles A10 and A11 (angle A10 is closer to angle A11 than angle A12).

From these, by setting the trajectory of the connection position of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) to the arc SR0, for example, when the transmission member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the degree of freedom in adjusting the angular velocity of 620 can be improved. That is, the angular velocity when the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a4 is close to the angular velocity (high speed side) when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is arranged on the straight line a1. The angular velocity at the time of arrangement can approach the angular velocity (low speed side) when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 is the circular arc SR1.

Also, when calculating the ratio of each angle, the ratio of angle A22/angle A32 is 0.98, and the ratio of angle A12/angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21/angle A31 is 0.98 and the angle A11/angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the trajectories of the connecting positions of the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) are the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transmission member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at a constant speed. In this case, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 is as small as 1 to 2%.

On the other hand, the angle A20/angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10/angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the trajectory of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53(a)) is an arc SR0 (an arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transmission member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when swung toward the state can be set to 3 to 5%. That is, compared to the case where the trajectories of the connecting positions are circular arcs SR1 and SR2 (circular arcs centered on the rotation axis M2), the reduction ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 contacts the lower end portion of the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, so the force due to the self weight of the effect member 620 is applied to the swing shaft portion. 626 and the cylindrical portion 642 are hung vertically downward. Therefore, since the weight of the effecting member 620 does not generate a force component in the direction of swinging the effecting member 620, the posture of the effecting member 620 can be maintained in an inverted state even if the power of the first driving device 630 is cut off. can be done. Thereby, durability improvement of the 1st drive device 630 can be aimed at.

In addition, since the force due to the weight of the production member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swing shaft portion 626 and the tubular portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to facilitate maintenance of the attitude of the production member 620 in the inverted state.

The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring that generates an urging force in the direction of unwinding the coil portion 651 (the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640) as the transmission member 640 swings. A coil portion 651 wound around, an urging arm portion 652 extending along both side surfaces of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 in the swinging direction, an end portion of the coil portion 651 and an end portion of the urging arm portion 652. and a connecting arm portion 653 that connects between the tubular portion 642 and the swing shaft portion 626 .

The coil portion 651 is formed with an inner diameter approximately three times as large as the diameter of the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 . Therefore, when the urging arm portion 652 is swung and a load that causes the coil portion 651 to shrink in diameter is generated, the amount of deformation of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 are deformed. can be suppressed from concentrating on

The urging arm portion 652 is surrounded by the body portion 641 , the contact portion 644 , the front arc plate portion 645 and the rear arc plate portion 646 of the transmission member 640 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the biasing arm portion 652 from dropping (separating) from the transmission member 640 .

In addition, the biasing arm portion 652 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower receiving plate portion 614a on the plane on which the transmission member 640 swings. Therefore, a biasing force pushing back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 arranged in the swinging direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion arranged on the opposite side of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 is generated. 652 is prevented from moving by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. Thereby, the torsion spring 650 is formed to be able to generate a biasing force in the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swinging direction of the transmission member 640 .

A bent portion 653 a bent to the opposite side of the transmission member 640 is formed at the connecting portion of the biasing arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 . In this case, as will be described later, the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650, thereby extending the bent portion 653a (see FIG. 54(b)). As a result, the contact position between the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 becomes farther from the cylindrical portion 642, and the moment applied to the transmission member 640 from the torsion spring 650 is increased. can be done.

Referring to FIG. 54, changes in the urging force generated by torsion spring 650 to push back transmission member 640 will be described. 54(a) and 54(b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 54(a) and 54(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and FIG. refer.

54A, the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 54(b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 54(a), and the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. An extended state is illustrated.

In the state of FIG. 54( a ), a biasing force that pushes back the transmission member 640 is generated in the biasing arm 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 when viewed from the front. This biasing force is the sum of the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651 and the biasing force originating from the bent portion 653a.

That is, in the state of FIG. 53B, the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the left bent portion 653a in the front view of the pair of bent portions 653a. At the portion 652 , only the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651 is generated as the biasing force for pushing back the transmission member 640 .

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54(a), in addition to the biasing force originating from the coil portion 651, the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 originating from the bent portion 653a also generates a biasing force. Therefore, the spring constant of the biasing arm portion 652 can be increased. The deformation of the urging arm portion 652 starting from the bent portion 653a is shorter than the deformation starting from the coil portion 651, so that the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640 is reduced. The urging force generated by hitting can be made larger.

In the state of FIG. 54(b), the bent portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, so that the angle formed by the urging arm portion 652 and the connecting arm portion 653 is widened. As a result, the contact position length L1, which is the distance between the contact position of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical portion 642 in the state of FIG. 54(b), the contact position length L2 is separated from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640, as compared with FIG. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, the arm length of the torsion spring 650 that pushes back the transmission member 640 is lengthened, so that the moment loaded from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, when the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially the same between the state of FIG. 54(a) and the state of FIG. the moment applied can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to push back the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 .

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 pushing back the transmission member 640 is small as long as the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (effect member 620) from the retracted position is small, and is large when the swing angle is large. Indeed, it is elastically increased, and is increased more than the elastic increment from the state of FIG. 54(a). Therefore, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 required when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54(b)) is determined, the torsion spring only elastically increases , the biasing force can be set smaller when the swing angle is small (a soft spring can be used).

As a result, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the operating speed of the production member 620 at the start of swinging is decelerated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650, and it is possible to speed up the operating speed of the production member 620 at the start of the operation. .

54(a) as a boundary, the biasing force is increased by an amount equal to or more than the elastic increment. The deceleration acceleration of the production member 620 can be increased. As a result, the timing to start decelerating the production member 620 can be delayed between the swinging motions of the production member 620 . Therefore, it is possible to increase the swing angle at which the production member 620 is swung in a high-speed state, and the production effect of the tilting motion unit 600 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 56, the sliding motions of the tilting motion unit 600 and the sliding motion unit 700 will be described. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. FIG. In FIG. 56, the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 56, a connecting member 740 connecting the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700, which are formed to be slidable in the vertical direction, is formed to be movable in the extension direction of the front rail portion 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting motion unit 600 is applied to the connecting member 740, when the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the tilting motion unit 600 moves along the front rail portion 715 due to the force of gravity. urged in the direction of Therefore, it is conceivable to fix the driving device 750 in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 at the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be vertically swingable, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, it engages with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720 to move the support member 720 left and right. Sliding movement in the direction is restricted.

As a result, it is possible to mechanically maintain the tilting motion unit 600 at the retracted position. It can be maintained in the retracted position. Therefore, durability of the driving device 750 can be improved.

By swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the driving device 750 from the state in which the tilting motion unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved, and the tilting motion unit 600 can move in the left-right direction. can be slid to

As shown in FIG. 56 , when the tilting motion unit 600 is placed at the retracted position in an inverted state, the shaft support portion 741 a of the connecting member 740 is placed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting motion unit 600 .

Here, since the direction of sliding movement of the tilting motion unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. always has a vertical component.

Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting motion unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 are misaligned in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting motion unit 600 . This is the same when the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the opposite direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pivot 741a of the connecting member 740 is arranged vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied from the connecting member 740 to the tilting motion unit 600 and the center of gravity G Formed on the same line. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the coupling member 740 in the direction of rotating the tilting motion unit 600 , and stabilize the posture of the tilting motion unit 600 .

Next, referring to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of tilting motion unit 600 on the sliding motion of sliding motion unit 700 will be described. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. FIG. Note that FIG. 57 illustrates a state in which the effect member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600 is swung to the state of FIG. 54(b).

As shown in FIG. 57 , when the effect member 620 is swung counterclockwise in front view, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side of the connecting member 740 in front view. Therefore, the leftward acceleration in the front view applied to the connecting member 740 is increased.

In this case, the drive force required to slide the tilting unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, so the drive motor 751 of the drive device 750 can be downsized.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a tilting motion unit 2600 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the contact surface of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is a flat surface. 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641a that abuts against the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

58(a), 58(b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. 58(a), 58(b) and 59, the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 58(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 58(a). 59 shows a state in which the transmission member 2640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front, and the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. In FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further swung counterclockwise in front view from the state in FIG. 58(b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 58(a)), the body portion 2641 is pressed against the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, causing the body portion 2641 to move. A torsion spring 650 generates an urging force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 swings and the urging arm portion 652 is deformed, the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced and deformed by the connecting arm portion 653 connected to the urging arm portion 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the biasing force for swinging the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the contact position ( The tip position of the urging arm portion 652 ) is changed by the swinging of the transmission member 2640 . That is, the more the transmission member 2640 is oscillated, the more the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is moved toward the distal end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side closer to the slide hole 643).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the lower surface of the abutting portion 2641a is in contact with the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 642, when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise in the front view. , the urging arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the distal end side of the body portion 2641 by the abutting portion 2641a.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the transmission member 2640 is swung in a state where the movement of the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted by the contact portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, the base side (bending portion 653a side) of the biasing arm portion 642 is moved downward by the amount that the biasing arm portion 642 is restricted from moving toward the tip side of the body portion 2641 . As a result, the connecting arm portion 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 increases).

That is, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state of FIG. 59 can be increased compared to the case without the abutting portion 2641a. As a result, the degree of change in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (increase rate of the biasing force with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) can be increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 compared to the state shown in FIG. can be done. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the urging force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed and the starting speed of the transmission member 2640 is increased. By increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 non-linearly (more than the elastic change), it is possible to obtain a sufficient biasing force to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a tilting operation unit 3600 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

In the first embodiment, the contact surface of the body portion 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width. 3641 has an inclined side surface 3641a on the side surface that contacts the tip of the torsion spring 650 in such a manner that it becomes wider toward the tip side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

60(a) and 60(b) are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. 60(a) and 60(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are illustrated by imaginary lines. 60(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 60(a). A state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined amount when viewed from the front is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is pushed. A torsion spring 650 generates an urging force for swinging in the direction of returning to the inverted state.

When the transmission member 3640 swings from the state shown in FIG. 60(a) to the state shown in FIG. , the contact position between the body portion 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm portion 652) is changed by the swinging motion of the transmission member 3640. FIG. That is, as the swinging angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)) increases, the tip of the biasing arm 652 moves toward the tip of the main body 3641 (the side closer to the slide hole 643). ).

Therefore, the tip portion of the biasing arm portion 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641 a of the main body portion 3641 . That is, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, the torsion spring 650 undergoes deformation due to the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640. . In this case, since the width of the transmission member 3640 increases toward the distal end of the transmission member 3640, the greater the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 from the inverted state (see FIG. 60(a)), the more the inclined side surface 3641a. The deformation of the torsion spring 650 due to the expansion of the width of the transmission member 3640 is increased. Therefore, as the swing angle of transmission member 3640 increases, the rate of increase in the biasing force generated by torsion spring 650 (change in biasing force of torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of transmission member 3640) can be increased.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a tilting operation unit 4600 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described. A moving abutment member 4647 having a width shorter than that of the portion 644 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 61(a) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61(b) is a rear perspective view of a moving contact member 4647. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 61(a), illustration of the moving contact member 4647 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the front circular arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 has guide holes 4645a which are arranged symmetrically at intervals shorter than the intervals at which the contact portions 644 are arranged and which are drilled in the front-rear direction. Prepare. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole that guides the pair of rear projections 4647b of the movable contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), the moving contact member 4647 includes a main body portion 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear projections protruding from both ends of the main body portion 4647a to the rear side. It mainly includes a portion 4647b and a front projection portion 4647c projecting from approximately the center of the main body portion 4647 toward the front side in a hemispherical shape.

One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front protrusion 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (FIGS. 62(c) and 641b). See FIG. 62(d)). In order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the coil spring 4648 is omitted in FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), 62(a) and 62(b).

The rear protrusion 4647b is a portion that is inserted through the guide hole 4645a of the transmission member 4640 from the front side. possible length) is projected. In addition, the rear protrusion 4647b is formed to be inclined at an angle that makes contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 in a plane (line) (see FIG. 64(b)). As a result, the load applied to the biasing arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) compared to the case where the biasing arm 652 and the rear protrusion 4647b are in contact with each other at a point, and the biasing arm 652 durability can be improved.

The front protrusion 4647c is a portion of the production member 4620 that contacts the body member 4621 (see FIG. 63). It is moved away from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(c)), or the moving contact member 4647 approaches the front circular arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62(d)). Since the tip of the front protrusion 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, the front protrusion 4647c can be easily lifted onto the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

62(a) and 62(b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62(c) and 62(d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. FIG. 62(a) and 62(c), the state in which the moving contact member 4647 is separated from the front circular arc plate portion 4645 is shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(d). 4647 is shown in close proximity to the front arc plate portion 4645, respectively.

FIG. 63 is a schematic front view of the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620. FIG. The transmission member 4640 that forms an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is in a center state 4640C, and the state in which the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view is a counterclockwise swing state 4640L. The clockwise rocking state 4640R as seen from the front is illustrated by imaginary lines. Also, in the center state 4640C, the counterclockwise swing state 4640L, and the clockwise swing state 4640R, the illustration of the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 4645, and the rear arc plate portion 646 is omitted for easy understanding. .

The body member 4621 has a clearance opening 4621a drilled in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the escape opening 4621a is a region where the front protrusion 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view (center state 4640C and counterclockwise swing). 4640L).

When the front protrusion 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the relief opening 4621a in a front view, the front protrusion 4647c is inserted through the relief opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648 to move the transmission member 4640. body portion 641 (see FIG. 62(c)). On the other hand, when the front protrusion 4647c does not overlap with the escape opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front protrusion 4647c contacts the side surface of the main body member 4621 of the production member 4620 on the back side, and the moving contact member 4647 is brought close to the body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62(d)).

That is, the rear protrusion 4647b of the moving contact member 4647 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the urging arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise in front view from the inverted state. be Therefore, when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise from the inverted state as viewed from the front, the urging arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated more than when it is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It is possible to increase the rate of increase in the biasing force applied (the degree of increase in the biasing force with respect to the swing angle).

64(a) and 64(b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. 64(a) and 64(b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and for ease of understanding, the main body portion 4647a of the moving contact member 4647 is shown. Illustration is omitted. 64(a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64(b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64(a). A state is illustrated in which the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise by a predetermined amount from the front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left side in the front view is in contact with the rear protrusion 4647b.

As shown in FIG. 64B, while the swinging angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, it is possible to contact the biasing arm portion 652 from the side opposite to the body portion 641 of the transmission member 4640 (contact portion 644 side). By doing so, it is possible to increase the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in front view.

As a result, the biasing force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise when viewed from the front is improved while the starting speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise when viewed from the front is increased. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect member 4620 from colliding with the inner surface of the back case 210 .

That is, when the tilting operation unit 4600 is arranged at the retracted position and the effect member 4620 is turned upside down, the inner surface of the rear case 210 is brought close to the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the production member 4620 is vigorously swung from the counterclockwise swung state (see FIG. 57) toward the inverted state, the production member 4620 cannot be decelerated, and the back case 210 There is a risk that the effect member 4620 will collide with the inner surface of the.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear protrusion 4647b projects (see FIG. 62(d)) at the timing when the production member 4620 swings clockwise from the inverted state, and the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is released. can be increased. As a result, the effect member 4620 is fully moved when the effect member 4620 is tilted clockwise in the front view from the inverted state while maintaining a high operating speed when the effect member 4620 is tilted in the counterclockwise direction in the front view from the inverted state. can be slowed down to

In addition, the rear projection 4647b is pushed back at the point of contact between the rear projection 4647b arranged on the opposite side of the transmission member 4640 in the swinging direction and the biasing arm 652 (counterclockwise in FIG. 64(b) when viewed from the front). ) exerts a biasing force. As a result, compared to the case where the transmission member 4640 is pushed back only by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 (the right side in FIG. 64(b)), the transmission member 4640 is pushed back with a greater biasing force. can be pushed back. On the other hand, it is also possible to improve the biasing force generated by the biasing arm portion 652 arranged on the side close to the transmission member 4640 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position where the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652, which are arranged on the side opposite to the side close to the transmission member 4640, abuts to the lower receiving plate portion 614a. , the distance from the lower receiving plate portion 614a to the bent portion 653a is short. In this case, it is easy to move the bent portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as the fulcrum, but the reverse is difficult (there is a difference in the distance from the fulcrum to the point of action). because there is).

Therefore, the biasing force generated by the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 on the left side in the front view caused by the contact between the contact portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 is generated by the deformation of the torsion spring 650 as a whole. That is, when the urging arm portion 652 on the left side in front view and the rear projection portion 4647b are brought into contact with each other, the bending portion 653a on the left side in front view is bent to the left side in front view (the inner diameter of the coil portion 651) with the lower receiving plate portion 641a as a fulcrum. ) causes deformation of the connecting arm portion 653, the coil portion 651, and the biasing arm portion 652 on the right side in front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is deformed to reduce the inner diameter, a biasing force is generated in the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 toward the side of increasing the inner diameter of the coil portion 651. The biasing force of the biasing arm portion 652 on the rocking direction side of 4640 to push back the transmission member 640 can be improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a compound action unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, when the rotating arm member 550 is arranged at the extended position, the second non-transmitting wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570. However, in the rotating arm member 5550 of the fifth embodiment, the non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is provided with a recessed portion 5556 that is recessed in the direction away from the rotating crank member 570 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

65 to 68 are front views of a compound action unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. 65, the state in which the rotating arm member 5550 is arranged at the extended position and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged near the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. 65, the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the first concave portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c. However, in FIG. 67, the state in which the rotary crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state in FIG. A state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state and the sliding protrusion 574 is accommodated in the two recessed portions 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is illustrated. be.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68 , the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c of the compound action unit 5550 has a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570. As shown in FIGS.

The recessed portion 5556 has an arc-shaped first wall portion 5556a (approximately 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the left side when viewed from the front, and an arc-shaped (approximately 1/4 of the circular shape) formed on the right side when viewed from the front. and a second wall portion 5556b having a shape that allows the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 to slide. That is, the recessed depth of the recessed portion 5556 from the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is made equal to or less than the radius of the sliding protrusion 574, and the connecting portion between the recessed portion 5556 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is smooth. Formed from a curved surface.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the turning crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the recessed portion 5556 that is the first from the left end of the second non-transmitting wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding projection portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. Crank member 570 creates a non-transmitting state.

66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding protrusion 574 is moved to the first recess from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. It is pressed against the second wall portion 5556b of the installation portion 5556, and the rotating arm member 5550 is again swung (pushed down) to the extended position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the second wall portion 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding projection portion 574, thereby swinging the rotating arm member 5550. The driving force of the second driving device 560 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 5550 via the rotating crank member 570 .

Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 Crank member 570 forms the transmission.

When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. The rotating arm member 5550 is swung until it comes into contact with the sliding protrusion 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the turning crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall portion 5556a of the recessed portion 5556 second from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is rotated while being slid by the sliding projection portion 574. The moving arm member 5550 is swung.

67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the rotating arm member 5550 is merely swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second driving device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding protrusion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a. Crank member 570 creates a non-transmitting state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the sliding projection 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a in a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise. A non-transmitting state is formed between the moving crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550, and when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member are arranged. 5550 and a communication state is formed.

Note that if the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall portion 5556a and the second wall portion 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view, when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the first wall portion 5556a, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged to face each other. A non-transmitting state is formed between the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 when the sliding protrusion 574 is arranged to face the second wall portion 5556b. be.

As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the rotating arm member 5550 is moved between the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the extended position without switching the swinging direction of the rotating crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion in which the swing arm member 5550 is swung between the two positions, the width of the swing arm member 5550 is small in the vicinity of the extended position (the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the position U1 and the position U2). A rocking rocking motion can be formed.

This makes it possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to swing, which is difficult to achieve by switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 . That is, it is also possible to cause the rotating arm member 5550 to perform a swing motion with a small width near the extended position by repeatedly switching the driving direction of the driving device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the rocking motion depends on the switching speed of the driving direction of the driving device 560 . In addition, even if the driving direction of the driving device 560 is switched while the speed of the swinging motion of the rotating arm member 5550 is high, the inertia of the driving device 560 and the rotating arm member 5550 is large, and the driving direction cannot be switched instantaneously. , there is a possibility that the time required for switching the driving direction becomes long.

On the other hand, in the swinging operation of the rotating arm member 5550 in the vicinity of the protruded position in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570, so the time required for switching the driving direction is unnecessary. can do.

Further, the operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (upward swinging motion) of the rotating arm member 5550 depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. The operating speed of the clockwise swinging motion (downward swinging motion) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 . Therefore, by increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570, the swinging speed of the rotating arm member 5550 near the extended position can be increased.

As a result, it is possible to achieve both an increase in the speed of the swing motion near the overhanging position of the swing arm member 5550 and a reduction in the switching time of the swing direction.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a compound action unit 6500 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the rotating arm member 550 of the compound action unit 500 is integrally molded, but the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . By relatively rocking the two members, the attitude of the arcuate hole 554 formed at the other end is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

69(a) and 69(c) are partial front views of the rotating arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 6550 is a partial top view of arm member 6550. FIG. In addition, FIG. 69(a) illustrates a state in which the tip of the tip end swinging member 6556 is directed upward in the first posture, and FIG. The state in which the second orientation is formed is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69(a), the rotating arm member 6550 is connected to a main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end of the main body portion 6551. It mainly includes a tip end swinging member 6556 and a switching device 6590 that is fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the body portion 6551 and that switches the attitude of the tip end swinging member 6556 . An arc-shaped hole 6554 is formed in the tip end swinging member 6556 .

The main body portion 6551 has a pivot hole 6551 a drilled in the front-rear direction at the other end thereof and serving as the center of swing of the tip swing member 6556 .

The tip end swinging member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end on the side connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 in the front and rear, and a shaft support hole 6556a is drilled as the swing center of the tip end swinging member 6556. , a shaft support rod 6556b which is a bar material inserted through the shaft support hole 6556a thereof and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip end swing member 6556, and an extension extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arc-shaped hole 6554. and a sliding shaft 6556c that protrudes in the front-rear direction from the end of the part and is connected to the guide elongated hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

The arcuate hole 6554 has a return portion 6554a projecting from the upper inner surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the projection portion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect member 6540, and when sliding from the tip side of the arc-shaped hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, while sliding in the opposite direction. It is a left-right asymmetrical protrusion that increases the sliding resistance when it is moved.

70(a) and 70(b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. FIG. 70(a) shows a pushed-up state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70(b) shows a pushed-down state in which the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down with respect to the switch member 6592. is illustrated. The pushed-up state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(c), and the pushed-down state corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 69(a).

The C-shaped member 6591 includes a long plate-shaped body portion 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the moving columnar portion 6592a can be inserted is drilled in the center, and an inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the hole drilled in the body portion 6591a. A cylindrical guide portion 6591b, which protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has grooves formed on the inner peripheral surface thereof, extends downward from both ends of the main body portion 6591a in the longitudinal direction and is arranged to face the main body portion 6551 in the front-rear direction. and a guide elongated hole 6591d which is an elongated hole through which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is guided.

The grooving formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591b is for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the moving cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592. As shown in FIG. The C-shaped member 6591 is switched between a pushed-up state and a pushed-down state each time it is pushed in the direction of being pressed against the switch member 6592 by this groove processing. It should be noted that other members such as a spring member that forms the biasing force necessary to form the knock mechanism are not shown. 71).

The switch member 6592 includes a moving cylindrical portion 6592a having a protrusion protruding from the outer peripheral surface that is inserted into the cylindrical guiding portion 6591a and can move in a groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guiding portion 6591a. and a fixed plate portion 6592 b that is rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 .

Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative positions in the axial direction are switched while the tubular member and the columnar member guided on the inner peripheral side of the tubular member rotate relative to each other. That is, if the cylindrical member and the columnar member do not rotate relative to each other, it becomes difficult to switch the relative positions in the axial direction.

On the other hand, the moving columnar portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved toward the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70(a)), the moving cylindrical portion 6592a can rotate relative to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. and the knock mechanism works.

Therefore, the fixed plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591 can be switched between the pushed-up state and the pushed-down state without relatively rotating. Therefore, it is possible to switch the state of the switching device 6590 between the push-up state and the push-down state while maintaining the state in which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip end swinging member 6556 is inserted through the guide elongated hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. can.

71(a) and 71(b) are front views of the compound action unit 6500. FIG. FIG. 71(a) shows a state in which the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position and the switching device 6590 is pushed up, and FIG. The device 6590 is shown depressed. In addition, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is arranged at a position swung to the left end of the swingable range.

As shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in a state where the rotating arm member 6550 is arranged at the extended position, the front view clock of the telescopic effect device 540 is changed. The maximum rotation angle can be switched.

That is, when the switching device 6590 forms the push-up state (see FIG. 71(a)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect member 6540 is brought into contact with the upper inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 Swing angle is limited.

At this position, the inner side surface of the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper, and even when the swing speed of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be operated in the arrangement illustrated in FIG. 71(a). It can be stopped suddenly (the moving locus RI of the projecting portion 541b is brought into contact with the return portion 6554a).

On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms the depressed state (see FIG. 71(b)), the protrusion 541b of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a (the protrusion 541b The movement trajectory RI is not in contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541b is released from the tip 554a of the arc-shaped hole 6554 to the outside.

Therefore, the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 swings clockwise in front view until the rotary plate 520 contacts the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71(b)). At this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 swings at a high speed, the expansion/contraction effect device 540 can be suddenly stopped.

As a result, it is possible to form a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) for effecting a sudden stop of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 by swinging the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 clockwise in a front view. variations can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 is switched by swinging the expansion/contraction effect member 6540 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that the tubular guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 moves from the upper right portion of the main body member 6541a to the right when viewed from the front. It is generated by being pushed by the push-in portion 6541a extending in the direction. Therefore, since the second driving device 560 that causes the expansion and contraction effect member 6540 to swing is also used as the driving device that swings the tip swinging member 6556, the number of driving devices to be provided can be reduced.

Further, in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b), the swinging range of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swinging member 6556. FIG. In this case, since the swing angle is slight, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the change.

Here, when the rotating arm member 6550 can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 71), assuming that the swinging angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the rotating arm member 6550, Expectations for the operation of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 are diminished, and attention to the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the tip swing member 6556 swings at a small angle to change the swing angle of the expansion and contraction effect device 6540, making it difficult for the player to notice the change. can. As a result, expectations for the operation of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be enhanced, and the attention degree of the expansion/contraction effect device 6540 can be improved.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a tilting operation unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, an elongated slide hole 643 is formed at the end of the transmission member 640, and the effect member 620 is supported in the slide hole 643 so as to be guided. The tilting operation unit 7600 in the form has a shaft support hole 7643 formed at the end of the transmission member 7600 , and the effect member 620 is supported in the shaft support hole 7643 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

72(a) and 72(b) are front views of the tilting motion unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. 72(a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7643 of the transmission member 7640 is arranged vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. A state in which the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. In FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the production member 620 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the rear side thereof are visible. , and the illustration of the torsion spring 650 and the pivotal support projection 612 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 72( a ), the base member 7610 has a slide hole 7613 drilled in the front-back direction vertically below the second pivot hole 614 of the main body 611 . The sliding hole 7613 is an elongated hole through which the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is slidably supported in the slide hole 7613 .

The transmission member 7640 has a shaft support hole 7643 formed in the end opposite to the end of the main body 641 where the tubular portion 642 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 is a portion that swingably supports the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the slide shaft portion 621a.

The oscillating motion of the effect member 620 is caused by the transmission member 7640 oscillating about the second shaft support hole 614 due to the rotation of the driving motor 631 of the first driving device 630 (see FIG. 51).

In this embodiment, the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, so that when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 moves along the swing locus of the transmission member 7640. (the sliding shaft portion 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641). On the other hand, since the swing shaft portion 626 is inserted through the slide hole 7613 , the swing shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610 when the transmission member 7640 swings.

Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72(b), when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (effect swing angle φ72<transmission swing angle φ72). dynamic angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is oscillated in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 , the oscillating angle of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than the oscillating angle of the transmission member 7640 . Thereby, the accuracy of adjustment of the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transmission member 7640 swings from the inverted state by the transmission swing angle φ71 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. explain.

A connecting line J1 illustrated in FIG. The imaginary connecting line J2 has the same length as the connecting line J1, and the swing shaft portion 626 is arranged above the slide hole 7613 from a line drawn in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 641 through the tubular portion 642. This line is drawn to the center of the swing shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 72(a)). Note that the virtual angle φ73, which is the swing angle of the virtual connecting line J2, is the same as that of the first embodiment when the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed above the slide hole 7613. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 that swings as the transmission member 640 swings by the transmission swing angle φ71.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), the effect swing angle φ72 is smaller than the virtual angle φ73. The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller than in the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung in the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the amount of swinging of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be adjusted. can improve the accuracy of

<First control example>
Next, control examples in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. FIG. In the first control example, control processing (processing related to game control such as display effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, the display image that is used when the power is turned on is controlled so as to be corrected and used during normal presentation. As a result, a common display image can be used at the time of power-on and at the time of normal presentation, so that the capacity of the character ROM 234 (see FIG. 79) in the display control device 114 can be saved.

In this control example, in the effect in which a specific role object (extendable effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is moved, the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 display It is controlled to correct the content of the production to be performed. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, for example, the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed on the sub-display device 690 in an effect in which a specific accessory moves. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display contents.

In this control example, the inertial force is used to open the door member 470 attached to the vertical motion unit (dropping accessory) 400 . Although the details will be described later, after the door member 470 associated with the up-and-down motion unit 400 is moved, the opening/closing drive for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is performed in an effect in which the open state of the door member 470 is formed. Control is performed so that the motor 466 is not excited (energization stop control). Then, when the door member 470 associated with the vertical motion unit (falling accessory) 400 finishes moving in the falling direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force generated in the door member 470 . In this manner, the door member 470 can be opened without driving the opening/closing drive motor 466, so power consumption can be reduced.

In this control example, an advance notice effect indicating the degree of expectation that the variable display will result in a big win is displayed in the variable display. This advance notice effect includes an effect including a display mode (countdown) similar to the specific time effect suggesting the gaming state described above. Specifically, there is a countdown notice effect in which an image (image of a girl, etc.) indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed after the countdown characters (“3, 2, 1 …”) are displayed. include. A specific time effect (countdown effect) that suggests a game state, which is an effect including such a display mode (countdown), and a countdown notice effect that is one effect of a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. If it is executed redundantly, the player may be confused.

Therefore, in this control example, when a countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) as a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit, the same kind of display is continued until the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed ends. A specified time effect (countdown effect), which is a effect including a mode (countdown), is restricted (avoided) from being executed. As a result, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the time effect period, the specific time effect (countdown effect) including the same type of display mode (countdown) as the countdown notice effect is not executed (displayed). Execution (display) can be restricted (avoided). As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of confusing the player due to the duplication of effects including the same type of display mode (countdown) during the time effect period.

In this control example, the ball-entering effect displayed based on the ball entering the winning hole is sequentially displayed in each area from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the intervals at which game balls enter a winning hole are short, the period for displaying the ball-entering performance can be lengthened, and the player can easily visually recognize the ball-entering performance. be able to.

It should be noted that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or by combining the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example>
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. FIG. In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 102). Then, the updated value is stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203 as appropriate. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b each consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is displayed in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. are stored respectively. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 102).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number counter C1 If the value coincides with the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special It is divided into two types, one for the period when the pattern is in a high probability state. That is, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)) is composed of a first winning random number table for low probability and a first winning random number table for high probability. The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The first winning random number table 202a for special symbol low probability and the first winning random number table 202a for special symbol high probability are provided in ROM 202 of main controller 110. FIG.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that will result in a loss, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is lost.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there is one random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot when the probability of a special symbol is low. (See FIG. 75(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/400".

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a kind of special symbol loss, although it is not a special symbol jackpot, there is provided a loss type (small win) in which a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened. When this small win occurs, the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined time (until 0.2 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won), and then closed twice. Repeated. That is, the same opening/closing operation as in the case of the jackpot C (2R probability variable time-saving no jackpot) is performed. When the probability of a special symbol is low, two random numbers (decision values) of "10, 11" are defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)) as small winning random numbers (decision values). Among the total number of random numbers of 400, the total number of small winning random numbers is 2, so the probability of small winning of the first special symbol is "2/400".

In addition, since the small hit is a kind of loss, the game state is not changed before and after the small win. For example, if a small hit occurs during the probability variation state of the special symbol, the probability variation state of the special symbol continues even after the end of the small hit, and the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol ), the normal state continues even after the end of the small win. As described above, this small win is the same as the case where the opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a is the 2R probability variable short time no jackpot, so it becomes a small win in the normal state, and the opening and closing of the specific winning hole (large opening) 65a. A player who visually recognizes the action can be made to expect that the 2R probability variable time-saving no jackpot has been achieved. Therefore, every time a small win is made in the normal state, it is possible to expect that the state has shifted to a probability variable state of special symbols that are more advantageous than the normal state, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state ( suppression). In addition, even if a special pattern does not result in a big win, the opening and closing operation of the specific prize winning port 65a is executed in part of the loss (small win), thereby increasing the opportunity for the player to win prize balls. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being excessively disadvantageous due to the player having too few balls in the normal state or the like.

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 10 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot. )). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 10 among the total number of random numbers of 400, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/40". Also, as the random number value (determined value) for the small win, only "10" is defined in the first win random number table 202a (see FIG. 75(a)). Among the total number of random numbers of 400, since the total number of random number numbers to be a small win is 1, the probability of a small win is "1/400".

The reason why the probability of getting a small hit at the time of high probability of special symbols is lower than that at the time of low probability of special symbols is that the number of rounds is large at the time of high probability of special symbols, and A jackpot (16R jackpot in which the action of opening the specific winning port 65a for a long period of time is repeated 16 times until 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won) is achieved, and a large number of prize balls can be won. This is because the game is played with anticipation, and even a small win is only annoying. In other words, in the normal state, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the 2R probability variable time-saving non-jackpot may be achieved by becoming a small win (it may shift to an advantageous probability variable state after the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a). However, if it is already in a variable state, you can hardly get a prize ball, whether it is a small hit or a 2R variable short-time jackpot, and the current state (variable state) is simply maintained. is. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the probability of becoming a small hit becomes low in the high probability state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game in the high-probability state of the special symbols.

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the value provided in the ROM 202 The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75(b)). Specifically, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) is selected, and when it is "40 to 79", the jackpot B (16R Time-saving jackpot) is selected, and when it is "80 to 99", jackpot C (2R probability variable with time-saving no jackpot) is selected.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75(b)) are set to three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, but not limited thereto, four types. The above jackpot types may be selected, or two types or less, for example, only one jackpot type may be selected. In addition, the types and ratios of the jackpot types selected for the special symbol 1 jackpot and the special symbol 2 jackpot may be set differently.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of reach, the final stop symbol stops at a symbol other than the reach symbol. ” (for example, the range of 90-99) and “Completely out of reach” (for example, the range of 0-89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used by the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is narrow, 0 to 79, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first winning hole 64. table is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. there is

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a large winning variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76(b)) and a losing (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76(c)). and a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76(d)) are set at least. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to this, a variation pattern table and the like in the time saving game state are set.

First, with reference to FIG. 76(b), the variation pattern table for big win 202d1 will be described. FIG. 76(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202d1. The large winning variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a large winning is set. Various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set as variation patterns of the jackpot. For each variation pattern, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as the determination value.

Specifically, for the variation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), "0 to 50", for the variation pattern of various super reach (60 seconds), "51 to 179", various special reach (90 seconds ), “180 to 198” are set as determination values of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set is selected as a big hit. Select from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 76(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 for loss is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is loss is set. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete failure is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", failure reach is set.

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time and a long failure (10 seconds) with a long variation time are set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for outlier reach, "0 to 149" for different normal reach (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for different super reach (60 seconds), and special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for each type (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and obtains it from the lost (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1.

FIG. 76(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (variable probability) variation pattern selection table 202d3. This deviation (probability variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol to be a deviation when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This deviation (probable variation) variation pattern selection table 202d3 differs from the aforementioned deviation (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2 in that the set value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is different.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the variation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of probability variation, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Further, in this control example, a variation pattern selection table for time reduction (not shown) is provided in the variation pattern table 202d. This time saving variation pattern selection table is a data table for selecting a special symbol variation pattern when the game state is the time saving game state. The time saving variation pattern selection table is defined so that the variation pattern of 0.6 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. This 0.6-second variation pattern is composed of a period of 0.125 seconds in which the symbols and the like are variably displayed and a period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbols and the like are statically displayed. Thus, in the time-saving game state, one variable display is completed in a short time (0.6 seconds), so that the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game in the time-saving game state can be improved. Also, by setting the period in which the symbols are variably displayed to be a very short period (0.125 seconds), it is possible to give the player an impression that the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is very good.

Returning to FIG. 73, the description is continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. , is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 75(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number set as the hit set by the second random number table (see FIG. 75(c)), it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), when the probability of normal symbols is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern low probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. In , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability mode, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 is obtained. At , the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning hole 64 . A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 102).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, contents of ROM 202 and RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 205c, and the variation pattern table 202d. Since the contents of each table provided in ROM 202 are as described above with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

74, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. At least a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a variable probability flag 203g, a time saving medium counter 203h, a jackpot flag 203i, a counter buffer 203y, and other memory areas 203z. are doing.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and includes one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is obtained in accordance with the starting winning, a jackpot lottery with original special symbols is started. Separately, from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is conducted is predicted (estimated). In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information to store the special symbols 1 or 1 in the RAM 233. Of the special symbols 2, the corresponding special symbols are stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. , predict various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize. It should be noted that this prediction (prefetch) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the game state (normal game state or probability variable game state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . As a result, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbols corresponding to the starting prize.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1 ) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to second holding area). 4 areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number N1 of holding variable display in special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls of the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). This special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, the detailed description is omitted. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 by the process of S510 in FIG. 96, and is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 93). In addition, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of holding variable display in special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93, S511 in FIG. 96 reference).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number (standby number of times) up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. 1 is added up to (see S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of variable display in the normal symbol is reserved) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 99: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the variable probability flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The variable probability flag 203g has an initial value set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variable variable time short no jackpot) When it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to determine whether the game state is a definite variable state in the special symbol 1 variation start process (see FIG. 95) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (see FIG. 94) (S403 in FIG. 95, FIG. 94, S303), and is set to OFF when the next jackpot game is started (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 variation start process (FIG. 94, S208), the value of the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the second for high probability time Based on the per random number table 202a, while the special design lottery is performed, if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, based on the first per random number table 202a for low probability time, the special design lottery is performed. will be

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state, and when the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is greater than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special pattern time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols. This time-saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 when the jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot) is executed at the start timing of the ending production (that is, the end timing of the jackpot game) by the jackpot control processing (of FIG. 103). S1215 reference). Then, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is during the time saving in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 98), and in the special symbol variation process, it is decremented by one each time the variation time elapses. (See S222 in FIG. 93). In addition, when the value of the counter 203h during time saving is larger than 0 and the variable probability flag 203g is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state and time saving state of special symbols.

The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state by the jackpot control processing (Fig. 103, S1206) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The small hit flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit has occurred. When the small winning flag 203j is turned on, a small winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the big winning control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.例文帳に追加

The time saving flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state (ordinary symbol high probability state). If the value of the time saving flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol time saving state, and if the value of the time saving flag 203k is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (normal symbol low-probability state). This time-saving flag 203k has an initial value set to OFF, and in the jackpot control process, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (the end timing of the jackpot game) based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) , is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, in order to determine whether or not the game state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98) (see S708, S715, S719 in FIG. 98), the next jackpot game is started. is set to off (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), both the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to ON, and the time saving game is given along with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the jackpot C (2R probability variable with short time no jackpot), although the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON, the time reduction flag 203k remains OFF, and only the probability variable game is given. The reason why the time saving flag 203k is provided separately from the time saving middle counter 203h is that the time saving state of the normal design given by becoming a big hit A (16R probability variable big win) continues at least until the next big win. be. In other words, the period of the time saving state varies depending on the timing of the big win, so the time saving period is indefinite and the number of times cannot be set for the counter 203h during the time saving. Therefore, the time saving state of the fixed number (100 times) set after the end of the jackpot B is counted by the counter 203h during the time saving, while the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot A is set by the time saving flag 203g. It is configured. As a result, the time saving state of the normal symbol can be determined more accurately.

Here, in the probability variable game (probability variable state of special symbols), the probability of winning a big hit by a special symbol lottery executed based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 is set to a high probability. It is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a probability variation game unless it is suggested that it is a probability variation game by changing the performance mode. . On the other hand, in the time-saving game, since the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a time-saving game. .

Therefore, if the player is given a time-saving game along with a probability-variable game based on the jackpot A (16R probability-variable big hit), it can easily recognize that it is a probability-variable game, but the player can easily recognize that it is a probability-variable game. Jackpot) when only the probability variation game is given based on, it becomes difficult to recognize that it is a probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). As a result, the player needs to guess whether the game state is normal game or variable probability game, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, since a small win is provided in which the same opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a as in the case of the big winning C is performed, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is performed in two rounds. is executed, it is not necessarily the jackpot C. Therefore, every time two rounds of opening and closing motions are executed, the player can expect a big win C, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced.

The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 102) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 100) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). The ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a ball-entering effect selection table 222b.

Since the variation pattern selection table 222a is already known, it will be briefly described. Based on the content (variation time, variation type (reach, loss, etc.)), more detailed variation contents are determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode is determined from a plurality of types by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The ball-entering effect selection table 222b is a table that defines the effect contents of the ball-entering effect executed based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 during the time-saving game. Here, the ball-entering effect is a effect that is executed in a mode according to the number of fluctuations until a big win, in order to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win. More specifically, every time a winning information command is received from the main control device 110 during the time-saving game, a jackpot is stored in the reserved ball from the stored contents of the winning information storage area 223a updated based on the winning information command. Whether or not there is a corresponding reserved ball, and if there is a reserved ball corresponding to the big win, the number of fluctuations until the big win is determined, and the performance is executed in a manner according to the number of fluctuations until the big win. be done.

One ball-entering effect is executed in one of the display areas obtained by dividing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 into four. is displayed, a ball-entering effect corresponding to a new ball-entering can be displayed in a different display area. That is, every time the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the ball entry effects are sequentially displayed in the four display areas provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and four types at maximum are displayed. are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time.

The entering effect selection table 222b is defined in association with the number of fluctuations of the effect content of the entering effect until a big win is achieved. This ball-entering effect selection table 222b is referred to when it is determined that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 640 during a time-saving game in the ball-entering effect setting process (see FIG. 115), which will be described later. It is used to select the effect content of the effect (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

As for the types of ball entry effects, there are six types of ball entry effects from level 0 ball entry effects to level 5 ball entry effects (see FIG. 78). A high-level entry performance is selected. As a result, the player can predict the number of times until the big win (expectation of the big win) by discriminating the level of the ball-entering performance, so that the player's interest can be improved.

The display image of the ball-entering effect in this control example includes a comment portion displaying a comment corresponding to the level (e.g., "Hurry up", "Chance?", etc.) and a display of a predetermined pattern (e.g., "Star"). It is composed of a level suggesting part for suggesting the level of the current ball-entering effect by the number, and the display mode of each part (comment part and level suggesting part) is set according to the level of the ball-entering effect. As comments to be displayed in the comment section, a plurality of comments corresponding to the level of the ball-entering effect are specified, and selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, in the level suggesting portion, the number of "star" symbols corresponding to the level of the ball-entering effect (that is, the number of fluctuations until a big win is achieved) is displayed. For example, the level 0 notice effect has 0 "stars" (see 81a in FIG. 89(a)), and the level 1 notice effect has 1 "star" (see 81b in FIG. 89(b)). In the level 2 advance notice effect, two "stars" are displayed (see 81c in FIG. 89(b)). This allows the player to easily determine the level of the ball-entering effect that is being executed. On the other hand, in the comment portion, comments selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i are displayed, so that the variation of the display mode in the ball-entering effect can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. It should be noted that the number of fluctuations up to the big win may be suggested only by the comment section without providing the level suggesting section. As a result, the level of the ball-entering effect can be guessed only from the display of the comment portion, so that the display content of the ball-entering effect can be more focused.

Here, with reference to FIG. 78, detailed contents of the entering effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the entering effect selection table 222b. As described above, the ball-entering effect selection table 222b defines the effect contents of the ball-entering effect for suggesting the number of fluctuations until a big win in association with the number of fluctuations until a big win.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations up to the big hit based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is greater than 4, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. If not, it is defined that the level 0 ball-entering effect is selected. In addition, when the number of fluctuations up to the big win based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is four times, that is, the lottery result of the big win of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth reserve of the winning information storage area 223a. In this case, it is stipulated that the level 1 ball-entering effect is selected.

Similarly, if the number of fluctuations up to the big win based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3 times, the level 2 ball entry effect is performed, and if it is 2 times, the level 3 ball entry effect is performed once. If , the level 4 ball entry effect is selected, and if it is 0 times (the variation results in a big win), the level 5 ball entry effect is selected. In this way, by executing a different level of ball-entering effect according to the number of fluctuations up to the big win, the player can be made to predict the number of fluctuations up to the big win. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display effect while playing the game, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description is continued. FIG. 77(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, an effect At least a time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power-off flag 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to fourth area for special symbol 1, first area to fourth area for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning in the main control device 110 when the starting winning is achieved. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is the area number in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 or the special pattern 2. The (first to fourth) areas are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 1 that is reserved in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of 4 times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1607 in FIG. 107). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

In addition, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect of the special symbol 2 reserved in the main controller 110 is up to 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. With the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the number of reserved balls is added by entering the second winning hole 640, and the special symbol 1 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The only difference is that it is used to display the reserved ball number pattern of the pattern 2, and the other is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the number of pending ball symbols corresponding to the value of the number counter 223 c in the small area Ds 1 of the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c synchronizes with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. , its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Also, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variable effect is performed so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled.

The display area counter 223f is used to specify the display area for displaying the above-described ball-entering effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is divided into four (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, fourth area 81d), and for each display area It is configured to be able to display separate ball-entering effects. The display area counter 223f determines the display area for displaying the current ball-entering effect from among these four display areas (first area 81a to fourth area 81d, see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). used for This display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the sound lamp control device 113 is activated, and is repeatedly updated within the range of 1 to 4 in the ball-entering effect setting process (see FIG. 115), which will be described later.

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, but when a new ball-entering effect is selected, the new ball-entering effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the value of the display area counter 223f. is controlled to be displayed in the display area of Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, the display of the ball-entering effect is set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Also, when the value is 2, it is set in the second area 81b of the third pattern display device 81, and when the value is 3, it is set in the first area 81c of the third pattern display device 81, and the value is 4. If there is, it is controlled to be set in the first area 81 a of the third pattern display device 81 . The value of the display area counter 223f is updated by 1 in ascending order, and after reaching the maximum value of 4, it returns to 1 when it is further updated. Different display areas (first area 81a, second area 81b, third area 81c, fourth area 81d) can be displayed simultaneously (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Since a plurality of different ball-entering effects can be displayed at the same time, display effects can be diversified.

The effect time storage area 223g is an area for storing the start time of the above-described time effect. Based on the start time of the time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223g and the current time acquired from the RTC 292, the time effect that is executed periodically (5 minutes every hour) and the time effect A specific time effect that is executed at a specific time during execution (every one minute from the start of each time effect until five minutes has passed) is executed (see FIG. 91). This performance time storage area 223g is set in the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. , information indicating the start time of the time effect and the specific time effect is relatively set with reference to the power-on time. Specifically, when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00, the first time presentation is at 9:55, 55 minutes after the time when the power was turned on (9:00). is set as information indicating the start time of Then, the times (10:55, 11:55, . . . ) every hour from the start time of the first time effect are set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. Also, every 5 minutes from the start time of each time production (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57... ) is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00, etc.) five minutes after the start time of the time effect is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

In this control example, it is set to execute each time production (time production, specific time production) based on the time when the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and each time production is performed regardless of the time when the power is turned on. You may make it set the start time of (time production|presentation, specific time production|presentation). For example, 00 minutes past the hour may be set as the start time of the time presentation. As a result, even if the power-on time is shifted when powering on a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the start time of the time performance is not shifted, and the time performance is executed in synchronization with the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加can do.

The effect mode storage area 223h is an area in which information indicating the current effect period is stored, and based on the information in the effect mode storage area 223h, an effect corresponding to the effect period is selected and executed (displayed). . In this control example, in addition to the above-mentioned time performance period, when it is determined that a big win will occur after the end of the time performance period (retained winning information is a big win or a variable display that becomes a big win) is being executed), and a normal game period which does not correspond to either the time presentation period or the time presentation extension period are set. For the sake of simplification of the following description, the normal game period is indicated as production mode A, the time production period as production mode B, and the time production extension period as production mode C. In the presentation mode storage area 223h, as information for identifying these three presentation modes, when presentation mode A is set, the value indicating presentation mode A, "00H", is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223h. , and when production mode B is set, "01H", which is a value indicating production mode B, is stored, and when production mode C is set, a value showing production mode C A certain "02H" is stored. By storing information corresponding to the performance period (performance mode) in the performance mode storage area 223h in this way, it is possible to easily identify which performance period the current performance period is.

The avoidance flag 223i determines whether or not a countdown notice effect including a countdown display mode is to be executed (displayed) as a notice effect (time notice effect) to be executed (displayed) during the time effect period (production mode B). is a flag used to When the avoidance flag 223i is ON, it indicates that the countdown notice performance is executed (displayed) as the time notice performance, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the countdown notice performance is not executed (displayed). When the avoidance flag 223i is ON, the specified time effect (countdown effect), which is the effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), is restricted (avoided) from being executed (displayed). Thus, when the countdown notice performance is executed as the time notice performance, the performance (display) can be restricted (avoided) so that the specific time performance (countdown performance) is not executed (displayed). As a result, it is possible to prevent an effect including the same kind of display mode (countdown) from being performed redundantly during the time effect period, and to suppress the problem of confusing the player.

This avoidance flag 223i is turned on when the countdown notice effect is selected as the notice effect (time notice effect) selected in the case of effect mode B (time effect period) in the notice selection process (see FIG. 111). It is set (see S2007 in FIG. 111). Then, when the variable display in which the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) ends, the setting is turned off.

It should be noted that, instead of providing such an avoidance flag 223i, it is also possible to select and execute an effect with a different display mode for the normal notice effect and the timed notice effect. Specifically, the countdown notice effect is selected in the normal notice effect, but the countdown notice effect may not be selected in the time notice effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the duplication of effects including the same type of display mode (countdown) during the time effect period.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selection of various effects (variation patterns, advance notice effects, etc.) and various lotteries in the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the main processing ( 106), it is repeatedly updated in the range from 0 to 198.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there has been a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to ON before the power-off process is executed (see S1518 in FIG. 106). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has passed. Therefore, in the start-up process (FIG. 104) of the audio lamp control device 113, if the power-off flag 223y is ON (see 1308: Yes in FIG. 104), the power-off flag 223y is set to ON for a certain period of time. (100 milliseconds) before the audible lamp controller 113 wakes up, that is, there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not deleted, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the deletion of only part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 104). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a time-lapse timer that measures the presentation time. are doing. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 107) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command. In addition, the clock timer measures the elapsed time from the start of an effect such as a variable effect. Based on the elapsed time measured by the clock timer, various controls (setting of actions of various characters, development of effects, etc.) are performed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and accesses to the defective data block are avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 should be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read out the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed after the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Furthermore, the NAND flash memory 234a is provided with a correction information table 234a3 (see FIG. 79). This correction information table 234a3 contains data (hereinafter referred to as correction information) is stored (see FIG. 80(b)). In this control example, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is reduced by using and displaying the power-on image in effects other than when the power is turned on. However, if the power-on image is used and displayed in the same display mode (position, size) for each effect other than when the power is turned on, the visibility of each effect may be impaired. Therefore, by using the correction information table 234a3, the power-on image is corrected to an appropriate display mode (position, size) for each effect other than when the power is turned on. The time image is used for display.

The power-on image consists of three types of images, and it is possible to correct the display mode (position, size) for each of the various power-on images. Here, three types of images (hereinafter referred to as various power-on images) forming the power-on image will be described. The power-on image includes a power-on main image, which is an image for notifying the player or the like that initialization processing is being performed upon power-on, and a first special symbol or a second special symbol. and a title image at power-on, which is an image for allowing players, etc., to easily identify the model of the pachinko machine 10. It is These various power-on images are displayed on each display device (third pattern display device 81, sub-display device 690) in a predetermined display mode (position, size) when power is turned on. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

This correction information table 234a3 is referred to in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) or the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), and the correction information corresponding to the currently executed (displayed) effect is stored in the correction information storage area 233m. stored in The correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m is referred to when generating the drawing list (see FIG. 87) in the drawing process (see FIG. 134), and is used to set the display mode of various power-on images. Detailed information (display availability, display position (coordinates) or size (enlargement ratio)) is corrected based on the correction information. As a result, various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on variation image, and power-on title image) can be displayed in a corrected manner.

Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. This correction information table 234a3 stores correction information corresponding to each effect of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, and power-on title image), and correction information for normal effects is stored. Information, correction information for demonstration production, correction information for extending and retracting accessory movement, and correction information for tilting accessory movement are provided at least.

As the correction information for each effect, for each image type of the power-on image, correction information corresponding to whether display is possible (on or off), correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount, and correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio. is stipulated. The correction information corresponding to whether to display (on or off) is a value for determining whether to display the corresponding image, and when the value is on, the corresponding image is set to be displayed. (corrected), and when the value is off, the corresponding image is set (corrected) to be hidden. The correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount is for correcting the display position (coordinates) of the corresponding image. It is set (corrected) so that it is displayed at the moved position (coordinates) based on the corresponding correction information. Furthermore, the correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio is for correcting the size (enlargement ratio) of the corresponding image, and this enlargement is performed in the lower right direction with the upper left corner of the corresponding image as the origin (reference point). It is set (corrected) so that the image is enlarged (or shrunk to the upper left) based on the ratio.

The correction information for normal effect is correction information used when the initialization process at the time of power-on is completed and the pachinko machine 10 performs a normal game. Further, the correction information for the demonstration effect is correction information used when the demonstration effect is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the stretchable role object is correction information used when the effect (stretchable role object scenario) in which the stretchable effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the tilting role object is correction information used when an effect (tilting role object scenario) in which the effect member 620 in the tilting operation unit 600 moves (tilting role object scenario) is executed (displayed).

Specifically, in the correction information for the normal effect, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are set to OFF, and the power-on variation image is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (-600, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are corrected so that they are not displayed, and the power-on variation image is displayed at the position (coordinates) ) to (-600, -450), the image is corrected to be displayed in the same size. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, but by this correction, the power-on fluctuation image displayed in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on is changed to the normal effect. If it is, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 83(a)).

Further, in the correction information for the demonstration effects, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are set to OFF, and the power-on title image is set to ON. The amount of correction of the coordinates of the title image at power-on is set to (-700, 0), and the enlargement ratio is set to x2 (two times). As a result, when the demonstration effect is executed, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are corrected so that they are not displayed, and the power-on title image is displayed at the position (coordinates) when the power is turned on. ) to (-700, 0), it is corrected so that it is displayed in double size. Specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, by this correction, the power-on title image that was displayed in the center of the sub-display device 690 when the power was turned on is replaced with the demo effect. is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 83(b)).

Here, the demo effect is when the next variable effect associated with the ball entering the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. , is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

Further, in the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory, the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are set to OFF, and the variation image at power-on is set to ON. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on variation image is set to (200, -450), and the enlargement ratio is set to ×1 (same magnification). As a result, when the effect (extendable character scenario) in which the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable is executed, correction is made so that the main image at power-on and the title image at power-on are not displayed. The power-on variation image is corrected so that it is displayed in the same size at a position (coordinates) shifted by (200, -450) from the position (coordinates) displayed when the power is turned on. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. With this correction, when the normal effect is executed, the power-on fluctuation image displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to When the stretchable accessory scenario is executed, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the sub display device 690 .

Further, the correction information for tilting accessory movement is set to the same information as the correction information for normal effect. As a result, when an effect in which the effect member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600 is movable (tilting accessory scenario) is executed, the display mode (position , magnitude) are corrected.

Thus, when an effect other than when the power is turned on is executed, the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images is corrected based on the correction information in the correction information table 234a3 corresponding to the effect. displayed. As a result, various power-on images can be used and displayed in each effect other than when the power is turned on, so the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since various power-on images can be corrected and displayed in an appropriate display mode (position, size) for each effect, various power-on images can be used without impairing the visibility of each effect. can be displayed.

It should be noted that correction may be made such that the positions where various power-on images are displayed are moved in conjunction with the actions of the characters that are moved in each presentation. Specifically, correction information for various power-on images corresponding to the elapsed time in one presentation is defined. For example, when an effect is being executed in which the power-on fluctuation image is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the tilting motion unit 600 gradually slides (moves) from right to left. and In this case, by sliding the power-on changing image to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the power-on changing image is slid and displayed at a position not behind the tilting operation unit 600. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 from making the power-on fluctuation image difficult to see. That is, the player can clearly see the power-on fluctuation image. Further, when the power-on fluctuation image is moved to the area where the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed, it is moved to the sub-display device 690 built in the tilting operation unit 600. The coordinates may be set so that they are displayed as With this configuration, the variation image at power-on can be moved and displayed without impairing the visibility of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The object to be moved and displayed is not limited to the power-on fluctuation image, and may be the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol, or a symbol such as a character. There may be.

Also, when moving various power-on images, they may be moved back and forth between the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 . In this case, when an image is displayed across the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, the resolutions of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are different. is adjusted (converted) using a scaler (for example, a video scaler). As a result, the range in which various power-on images can be moved can be expanded.

Further, correction information may be set so that various power-on images can be moved when the power is turned on. In this case, the correction information to be used when the power is turned on should be read together with the program in the first program storage area which is read first when the power is turned on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on, an origin return operation is executed for moving various accessories to the origin position. Therefore, there is a timing when the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 become difficult to see because various accessories are moved by the return-to-origin operation. Therefore, by correcting the display position (coordinates) of various power-on images according to the movable state of various accessories, it is possible to easily see various power-on images even during the return-to-origin operation of various accessories. can be

Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 87) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display control device 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b, a third pattern area 235d, and a power-on title image area 235f.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image area 235f from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area. 235a, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 (see FIG. 116).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the display areas of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 and the power-on image displayed in the display areas will be described. First, FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between an image drawn by the display control device 114 and the display areas of the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a third symbol display device 81 and a sub display device 690, and the images displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) are fixed. Control for updating every period (eg, 20 milliseconds) is performed by the display controller 114 .

Specifically, the display control device 114 updates (renders) image data of 1200 horizontal pixels (pixels)×600 vertical pixels (pixels) at regular intervals (for example, 20 milliseconds). By setting these image data to each display device, the image displayed on each display device (the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690) is updated at regular intervals. Image data corresponding to each pixel (picture element) is composed of three data, data corresponding to R (red), data corresponding to G (green), and data corresponding to B (blue). there is The data of each color consists of, for example, 8 bits, and the gradation (level) of each color can be set in 8-bit increments (that is, 256 levels). That is, one of 256 levels of values from "00H" to "FFH" can be set as the set value for each color.

Each pixel provided in each display device is provided with an area capable of emitting red, an area capable of emitting green, and an area capable of emitting blue, and image data is set therein. By doing so, the gradation (level) of each color can be set. In addition, each pixel (pixel) constituting each display device is sufficiently fine, and one pixel (pixel) is composed of an area capable of emitting red, an area capable of emitting green, and an area capable of emitting blue. It is difficult to distinguish between regions with the naked eye. Therefore, with the naked eye, it looks like a color obtained by synthesizing these three colors.

Image data set for each pixel will be described with a specific example. For example, if the data for R is FFH (255 gradations) and the data for the other colors are 00H (0 gradations), the pixel for which the image data is set is red with the maximum gradation (maximum level). is displayed (the pixel appears red with the maximum gradation). Also, if the R data and G data are each 80H (128 gradations) and the B data is 00H (0 gradation), 128/255 gradation red and 128/255 gradation green As a result of synthesizing , the pixels for which the image data is set are displayed in yellow with the maximum gradation. Furthermore, if the R data, G data, and B data are all FFH (255 gradations), all three colors R, G, and B are set to the maximum gradation (255/255 gradations). , and as a result of synthesizing these three colors, the pixel set with the data is displayed with a white appearance. On the other hand, if the data of the three colors are all 00H, all the three colors are non-displayed, and as a result, the pixels to which the data are set appear black.

In this way, the display color of each pixel (picture element) that constitutes the display screen of each display device can be expressed in 256 levels of each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). A vivid image can be displayed on the device. In this control example, each pixel is configured to have a region capable of emitting red, a region capable of emitting green, and a region capable of emitting blue. You may change it in the range which can be expressed. For example, three colors of yellow, cyan, and magenta may be used instead of three colors of red, green, and blue. In addition to red, green, and blue, each pixel may be provided with a region capable of producing yellow, and 8-bit data corresponding to yellow may be added to the image data. By adding a region capable of developing yellow, the color expression can be made more vivid. In particular, it is possible to vividly express a color (for example, gold) that contains a large amount of yellow components and is frequently used in display effects and the like, so that the interest in the display effects can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 81, coordinate data is associated with the display data of each pixel (picture element) that constitutes the image data. Here, the coordinate data is data for specifying data setting positions (setting pixels) in each display device. In this embodiment, a range of 0 to 1200 can be specified as the horizontal coordinate, and a range of 0 to 600 can be specified as the vertical coordinate.

In the oblong rectangular area shown in FIG. 81, the coordinates of the upper left corner are defined as origin coordinates (0, 0), and the coordinates of the lower right corner are defined as (1200, 600). Further, image data defined within a rectangular area having four points of coordinates (0, 0), (800, 0), (0, 600), and (800, 600) as vertices is the third pattern display. This is an area (third pattern display area) defining an image to be displayed on the device 81 . Each coordinate is set so that the arrangement of each pixel (picture element) data in this area and the position where the image data is actually set in the third pattern display device 81 match.

On the other hand, image data defined within a rectangular area having four vertices (800, 0), (1200, 0), (800, 300), and (1200, 300) is sent to the sub display device 690. This is an area (sub-display device area) in which an image to be displayed is defined. Furthermore, the remaining rectangular area with the four points (800, 300), (1200, 300), (800, 600), and (1200, 600) as vertices is a spare area (unused area), Image data in this area is not used for display.

In this way, the display control device 114 in this control example draws the image data to be set in the third pattern display device 81 and the image data to be set in the sub-display device 690 as one image data, Whether to display on the third pattern display device 81 or on the sub-display device 690 is changed according to the coordinates of the image data. This makes it easy to synchronize the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, and the images (effects) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690. ) can be prevented from being misaligned. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to this, and the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 may be drawn separately.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, a power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Here, the main image at power-on is defined as image data of 450 horizontal pixels (pixels)×200 vertical pixels (pixels), and the power-on variation image is defined as image data of 100 horizontal pixels (pixels)×100 vertical pixels (pixels). , and the title image at power-on is defined as image data of 200 horizontal pixels (pixels)×50 vertical pixels (pixels). To simplify the explanation of the display positions (coordinates) of various power-on images, when indicating the display positions (coordinates) of various power-on images, the upper left corner of the image data of various power-on images is The coordinates of pixels are typically indicated (indicated). For example, the main image at power-on in FIG. is the image data displayed in the In this case, (100, 50), which is the coordinates of the pixel in the upper left corner of the image data of the power-on main image, is representatively indicated (indicated) as the display position (coordinates) of the power-on main image. , and the display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is expressed as (100, 50).

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on title image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on title image area 235f. Next, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235. The remaining image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . As a result, the display control device 114 first displays the power-on title image using the image data stored in the power-on title image area 235g. The display position (coordinates) of the power-on title image is (900, 100), and the power-on title image is displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 690 (see FIG. 82(a)).

Next, the display controller 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. The display position (coordinates) of the power-on main image is (100, 50), and the power-on main image is displayed in the center of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 82(a)). While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Here, since the sub-display device 690 has a display screen resolution lower than that of the third pattern display device 81, the image data set for displaying an image on the sub-display device 690 is the third pattern display device The amount of data is smaller than that of image data for displaying an image on 81 . Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image to be displayed on the sub-display device 690, which has a small amount of data for displaying the image (the title image when the power is turned on), is first stored in the resident video RAM. It is possible to shorten the time from when the is input to when the image is displayed.

After that, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 receives the third symbol display device 81 A power-on fluctuation image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position ((600, 450) coordinates) of the screen, and a power-on fluctuation image with an "×" pattern at the same position as the "○" pattern. are alternately displayed during the fluctuation period (see FIGS. 82(b) and (c)). Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed to stop the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加.

Furthermore, by immediately displaying this power-on fluctuation image on the third symbol display device 81, even if the power supply is once cut off due to a power failure or the like during execution of the game and then restored, the game that was being executed before the power failure can be restored. Since the fluctuation or the result of the fluctuation can be immediately confirmed by a simple fluctuation performance, the dissatisfaction felt by the player can be reduced.

A simple character image or the like may be provided as the image displayed when the power is turned on, and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the performance even in the simple variable performance displayed when the power is turned on, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the simple character image used here may be the character image used in the sub-display device 690 during normal rendering. As a result, character images with a small data capacity displayed on the sub-display device 690 can be shared and used without newly providing a simple character image. The transfer time of the image to the video RAM 235 for use can be shortened.

Furthermore, the images transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 . As a result, even in the simple performance executed from when the power is turned on until the normal game can be started, the variation of the performance can be sequentially increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. can be done.

Also, when transferring an image to the resident video RAM 235, the image is transferred so that the resolution is lowered by a known image compression technique, and then the image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is decompressed. may Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub-display device 690 . As a result, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the sub-display device 690 with a low resolution can display the image without discomfort. can be shortened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, display screens during the normal effect and during the demonstration effect will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during a normal effect, and FIG. 83(b) is a display of the third symbol display device 81 during a demonstration effect. It is a schematic diagram which showed the screen typically.

During normal presentation, the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image are displayed with (-600, -450) based on a correction information table 234a3, which will be described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image when the power is turned on are (600, 450), the power-on fluctuation image is displayed at the position (0, 0) during the normal effect (Fig. 83(a)). )reference). This power-on fluctuation image is used as an image showing the fluctuation result of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) during normal production.

Also, during the demonstration effect, the display coordinates of the title image at power-on are displayed with (-700, 0) based on a correction information table 234a3, which will be described later. Since the display position of the power-on title image when the power is turned on is (900, 100), the power-on title image is displayed at the position of (200, 100) during the demonstration effect (Fig. 83(b)). )reference).

Returning to FIG. 79, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 changes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing object buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and a effect mode flag 233r.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. Or if it is one of the jackpot C, the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory 640a is released and the ball wins the second prize. If it becomes easier to enter the opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 85) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. Such a configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 86). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 86).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

As in the case of the display data table, "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image). This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S4805 in FIG. 132(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118B). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2809 in FIG. 118(b) S2810) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S4701 in FIG. 132(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 132(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f one by one, the MPU 231 draws an image for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 87), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 87) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 118(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 87), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, display setting processing ( Each time step S2803 in FIG. 118B) is executed, the timer counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether the image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by initial setting processing (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 118B) is executed (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The correction information storage area 233m is an area in which the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 described above is stored. Image, variation image at power-on, title image at power-on) are displayed after being corrected in display mode (position, size). The correction information storage area 233m stores initial values for all image types when the audio lamp control device 113 is powered on (display enable/disable is ON, coordinate correction amount is (0, 0), magnification is x1 (same size). )) is set, various power-on images are displayed at the initial positions (see FIG. 82) when the power is turned on. Then, the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the game state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information for the normal effect is set in the correction information table 234a3 (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

The special effect correction flag 233n is correction information (stretchable role object It is a flag for determining whether or not the correction information for movement or tilting accessory movement) is set in the correction information storage area 233m. If the special effect correction flag 233n is ON, it indicates that the correction information for moving the telescopic accessory or for moving the tilting accessory is set in the correction information storage area 233m, and if it is OFF, the telescopic role It shows that the correction information for object movement or tilting accessory movement is not set in the correction information storage area 233m. When the special effect flag 233n is ON, in the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), the correction information for the normal effect or the demo effect is not set in the correction information storage area 233m (see FIG. 131). S4602: No). As a result, even though the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed, the expansion/contraction accessory set in the correction information storage area 233m is movable. It is possible to prevent the correction information for use or tilting accessory movement from being rewritten to the correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131). As a result, the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images is displayed even though the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the trouble that the display mode (position, size) corresponds to the normal performance or the demonstration performance, and to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused.

This special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON when the correction information for the telescopic accessory movement or the tilting accessory movement is set in the correction information storage area 233m in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). (See S3205 in FIG. 121). Then, it is set to OFF when the variable display (effect) is stopped (see S4101 in FIG. 126(b)). That is, when the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is stopped to move, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to OFF. By setting the special effect correction flag 233n to OFF, it becomes possible to set the correction information for the normal effect or the demonstration effect in the correction information storage area 233m by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (see FIG. 131). 131 S4602: Yes). In this way, since the correction information corresponding to the effect can be set in the correction information storage area 233m, various power-on images can be displayed after being corrected in a display mode (position, size) suitable for each effect. can be done.

The back image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. The back image change flag 233p is set to ON when a back image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S4001 in FIG. 126(a)). Then, it is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The effect mode flag 233r is a flag that is set and referred to for determining the current effect mode (effect period), and the rear image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. This effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126(a)), based on the value of the set effect mode flag 233r, described later Back image data is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4911 in FIG. 133). Thereby, the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90, the ball-entering effect executed during the time-saving game of this control example will be described. This ball-entering effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the variation display during execution (fluctuation) will result in a big win based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning hole 640 . FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball-entering effect is executed. In the time-saving game in this control example, the variable display based on the second special symbol is 0.6 seconds (the period of 0.125 seconds in which the symbols etc. are variably displayed and the period of 0.475 seconds in which the symbols etc. are stopped and displayed and end with ). In this case, if the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed in one display area based on the execution of the variable performance, the variable performance will end in a short time (0.6 seconds) (that is, the display of the degree of expectation for a big win will be It ends in 0.6 seconds), so it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation of a big win.

Therefore, in this control example, the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed in order in the four areas from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. While displaying the ball-entering effect in the area 81a, the next ball-entering effect can be displayed in the second area 81b. This makes it possible to lengthen the display period of the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win, and to provide a game machine that makes it easy for a player to recognize the degree of expectation for a big win, that is, to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In addition, the ball-entering effect indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is also performed when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640 even when the holding of the second winning hole 640 is the upper limit (4 in this control example). (So-called, the ball-entering effect is displayed even at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the holding of the second winning hole 640 is the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640, thereby playing the game. It can improve the interest of the person.

In addition, the ball entry performance that indicates the degree of expectation for a big hit is a performance corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Specifically, as will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until a big win is achieved, control is performed so that a ball-entering effect with a high degree of expectation for a big win (a high-level ball-entering effect) is achieved. As a result, the level of ball-entering effect (degree of expectation for a big win) gradually increases, so that the player can gradually have a premonition of the arrival of a big win, and the player's interest can be improved.

A specific description will be given with reference to FIG. First, after the jackpot game is over, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state, and if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the fluctuation is based on the oldest winning ball among the reserved balls. A variation 1 is initiated. Here, if there is no prize winning information of the jackpot in the winning prize information of each reserved ball, the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is undecided (greater than 4). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640, the level 0 ball entry effect is selected as the ball entry effect based on the ball entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when the first ball enters the second winning hole 640 (the lottery result is lost) during the execution of the variation 1, the ball entering effect of level 0 is the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. , and the number of held balls of the second special symbol changes to 4 (see FIG. 89(a)).

Then, when the variation 1 ends, the variation 2 based on the reserved balls is started, and the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. If the second ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the execution of variation 2 (lottery result is a big win), the number of remaining variations until the big win is four. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640, the level 1 ball entry effect is selected as the ball entry effect based on the ball entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 1 entering effect is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is changed to four.

Then, when the variation 2 is completed and the variation 3 based on the retained balls is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit is reduced to 3 times. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640, the level 2 ball entry effect is selected as the ball entry effect based on the ball entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when the third ball enters the second winning hole 640 (the lottery result is lost) during the execution of variation 3, the ball entering effect of level 2 is displayed in the third area 81c of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 89(b)), and the reserved design of the second special design changes to 4. Furthermore, when the fourth ball enters (overflows) into the second winning hole 640 during the execution of variation 3, the number of remaining variations until the big win is three. In this case, the level 2 ball-entering effect is selected as the ball-entering effect based on the ball-entering effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the level 2 ball-entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81 d of the third display device 81 .

Next, when the variation 3 ends and the variation 4 based on the retained balls is started, the number of retained balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining variations until the big hit is reduced to 2 times. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640, the level 3 ball entry effect is selected as the ball entry effect based on the ball entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). However, if the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the execution of the variation 4, the variation 4 is finished without newly displaying the ball-entering effect.

When the variation 4 ends, the variation 5 based on the held ball is started, the number of held balls of the second special symbol is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit is reduced to 1. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640, the level 4 ball entry effect is selected as the ball entry effect based on the ball entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 during execution of this variation 5, a level 4 ball entering effect is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90(a)). ), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3.

Then, when the variation 5 ends, the variation 6 based on the reserved ball of the winning prize information of the jackpot is started, the number of the reserved balls of the second special pattern is reduced to 2, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot is 0 times (the relevant variation is reduced to a jackpot). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning hole 640, the level 5 ball entry effect is selected as the ball entry effect based on the ball entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the execution of this variation 6, the ball entering effect of level 5 is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 90(b)). ), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases to 3. After that, when the fluctuation of the fluctuation 6 is completed, the jackpot game is executed.

Thus, in this control example, the type of ball-entering effect is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win. It is possible to recognize in advance that it will be, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, since the level of the ball-entering performance gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the big win, the player can gradually get a sense of the arrival of the big win, and the player's interest is enhanced. can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the variation time of one variation effect in the time saving game is shortened (0.6 seconds), thereby improving the rotation rate (efficiency) of the game. However, since the variable time is short, the variable effect executed (displayed) during the variable time is also short. As a result, if the game balls are not continuously entered into the second winning hole 640, the variable performance is not continuously performed (that is, the period during which the variable performance is not executed (displayed) becomes longer), and the game becomes boring. There is a risk of becoming. Therefore, in this control example, based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed. As a result, the player can be made to want the game ball to enter the second prize winning port 640, and the game can be played so that the game ball continuously enters the second prize winning port 640, so that the variable performance is performed. It can be displayed continuously, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In this control example, the ball-entering effect is performed according to the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed, or the above-described ball-entering effect may be executed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations up to the big win. As a result, it is possible to provide a case where a big win is achieved without foreseeing the arrival of the big win, thereby making the game unexpected and enhancing the interest of the player.

Further, in this control example, the above-described ball-entering effects are displayed in order from the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the ball-entering effect based on one ball-entering is continuously displayed until four game balls newly enter the second prize-winning hole 640, and the game balls enter the second prize-winning hole 640. Even if the ball-entering interval is very short, the time for displaying the ball-entering effect can be secured, and the problem that the player cannot visually recognize (recognize) the ball-entering effect can be suppressed. Note that it is also possible to determine an area where the ball-entering effect is not displayed, and preferentially use and display the area where the ball-entering effect is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to ensure a longer time during which the ball-entering effect is displayed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the second winning hole 640 is held as the upper limit, and furthermore, even when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 (so-called overflow), it is configured to perform a ball entry effect. ing. As a result, even if the holding of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, the ball entering effect is displayed based on the entry of the ball, so that the holding of the second winning opening 640 becomes the upper limit for the player. Even if the game is held, the player can be made to want to continuously enter the game ball into the second winning hole 640, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, since the ball-entering effect is displayed more than the number of time-saving games provided, it is possible to make the player feel that many time-saving games are being provided.

In this control example, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but this is not the only option. is not. For example, they may be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed, or when there is prize winning information for a big win. As a result, the order of displayed ball-entering effects can be changed, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored early.

Also, the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big win. For example, when the expectation of a big win is low, the ball entry effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. should be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation based on the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is no longer necessary to see the details of the ball-entering effect displayed in , the burden on the player can be reduced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 91, each production period (each production mode) set up in this example of control is explained. In this control example, as described above, the normal game period (production mode A), which is the period during which the normal production is executed (displayed), and the production period that is set periodically (5 minutes every hour) There is a time production period (production mode B), which is a period in which a special mode production (time production) according to the elapsed time is executed (displayed), and at the end of the time production period (production mode B) After that, there is provided a time performance extension period (performance mode C) that shifts to when it is determined that a big win is made (when the reserved winning information is a big win or when a variable display for a big win is being executed). .

FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing each effect period (normal game period, time effect period, time effect extension period) in this control example. As described above, in this control example, the information indicating the start times of the normal game period (production mode A) and the time production period (production mode B) is set in the production time storage area 223g. This rendering time storage area 223g is stored in the RTC 292 (clock means) by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. ), based on the time information (information indicating the power-on time), the information indicating the start time of the normal game period (production mode A) and the time production period (production mode B) is set. . Each effect period is set based on the information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223g.

Specifically, in the effect time storage area 223g, information indicating the time 55 minutes after the power-on time is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. As a result, the time effect period (effect mode B) is set 55 minutes after the power-on time. A normal game period (production mode A) is set for 55 minutes after the power is turned on. Since the time effect period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time five minutes after the start time of the time effect is set as the information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A). As a result, when 5 minutes have elapsed from the start time of the time production, the normal game period (production mode A) is set. In this way, the information indicating the start time of the presentation time storage area 223g is set so that the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time presentation period (5 minutes) are set repeatedly, and five minutes is played every hour. time production period (production mode B) is set.

Here, when five minutes of the time presentation period elapses, it is determined whether or not a special pattern that is a big hit as a result of winning/failure determination is set in the reserved memory stored at that point of time or the special pattern during variation. Then, when it is determined that a jackpot is set, a time performance extension period (performance mode C) is set with the time until the variation ends. In this case, the normal game period (production mode A) is set when the time production extension period (production mode C) ends.

Further, when the remaining time of the time production period (production mode B) becomes 3 seconds or less, the third pattern display device 81 regardless of whether or not to shift to the time production extension period (production mode C) thereafter. is switched to an indication display mode suggesting the end of the time presentation period. By switching to this sign display mode, the variable display of the third symbol that has been executed (displayed) until then (regardless of whether it is a big hit or a loss) is changed to a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. variable. Specifically, it is scaled down and displayed continuously in the lower right part of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 . Then, irrespective of the variable display that has been executed (displayed) until then, the third symbol indicating the loss is stopped and displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the third symbol indicating the pseudo loss). pattern is displayed). Here, the third symbol, which is pseudo-stopped in the precursor display mode, is displayed with a slight sway to notify that it is not completely stopped. In this way, by switching to the omen display mode and displaying it as if the third pattern were stopped and displayed, other pachinko machines 10 also seemed to stop and display the third pattern at the same timing. can let As a result, the same display mode can be used for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the end of the time presentation period, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, even if the variable display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the display mode is similarly changed to the omen display mode. can be switched. As a result, the display mode is switched to the omen display mode regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed (displayed), so that the display mode at the end of the time presentation period is the same display mode for the plurality of pachinko machines 10. can do.

In addition, in the portent display mode, the display mode in which the variable display of the third symbol that has been executed (displayed) up to that point is varied, and the display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize is not limited to the above-described one. For example, it may be displayed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to recognize that the variable display of the third symbol is displayed, or it may not be displayed at all. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the display of the third pattern that simulates the detachment, and the effect of making the third pattern appear as if it were stopped can be strengthened.

Furthermore, at the timing when the time production period (production mode B) ends (that is, at the timing of whether or not to shift to the time production extension period (production mode C)), " After the characters "Super School of Fish Time" are displayed, the characters (notification mode) "End?" are displayed. After that, when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set, the characters "super school of fish time extension!" background image is displayed again. Note that an effect that is executed (displayed) during the time effect extension period is called an extended effect.

When the time production extension period (production mode C) is entered, the variable display of the third pattern, which has been changed (reduced) to a display form that is difficult for the player to see, is changed to the precursor display form. It is displayed in a variable (enlarged) display form that can be visually recognized again (easily) (see FIG. 83). When the variable display of the third pattern is changed (enlarged) to a display form that can be visually recognized (easily) again, the player is informed (displayed) as if a new special pattern has started to be changed. (Hereinafter referred to as re-variation production). As a result, in changing (enlarging) the variable display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see in the omen display mode, to a viewable (easy) mode again, It can be varied (enlarged) without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is a period until the end of the variation display for the big win (that is, until the big win game is started). In the time production extension period (production mode C), the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the time production extension period (production mode C) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the jackpot game is started. The remaining time until is displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

In this embodiment, when the time production extension period (production mode C) is set, if the reservation memory that will be a big hit is set, or if the fluctuation that will be a big hit has already started (during fluctuation ). Therefore, the transition to the extended period of time production (production mode C) means that the player is notified of a big win. Here, in the time performance period, the same performance is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and the performance whether or not to shift to the time performance extension period (performance mode C) is displayed at the same timing. . As a result, by shifting to the time production extension period (production mode C), other (surrounding) players can also determine that the pachinko machine 10 will be a big hit (that is, the surrounding players will be able to Since it is possible to notify that it will happen), the gambling spirit of other (surrounding) players can also be aroused.

On the other hand, when the time production period (production mode B) ends and the normal game period (production mode A) is set, "super school of fish time ends!!" characters are displayed. This display is displayed in the portent display mode until the variable display of the third symbol changed to the display mode that is difficult for the player to see is stopped. Then, from the next change, the reduction display of the third pattern is canceled and the third pattern is changed and displayed in the normal size. By configuring in this way, even when the time production period (production mode B) ends and the time production extension period (production mode C) does not occur after that, switching to the sign display mode makes it difficult to see. The changed variable display can be stopped without making the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, when the remaining time of the time production period (production mode B) becomes 3 seconds or less, and the variable display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed), the normal game period (production mode A) is performed. When set, the characters "Super Fish School Time End!!" are displayed for a predetermined time (three seconds) to notify the end of the time presentation period (presentation mode B). Then, from the next change, the third pattern is not displayed in a reduced size, but is changed and displayed in the normal size (see FIG. 83(a)).

In the present embodiment, the condition for setting the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set such that when a big win is made afterward (the pending winning information is a big win or a variable display of a big win is being executed). case), but it is not limited to that, it may be the case that a reservation memory is set to select a variation pattern that becomes a super reach, or a lottery unrelated to the lottery of special symbols is executed to obtain a predetermined lottery result. It may be configured to be set when As a result, it is possible to provide a case in which a big win is not achieved even though the game has shifted to the time production extension period (production mode C). As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not a big win is achieved during the extended period of time production (production mode C), so that the player's interest can be improved.

Here, in the time production period (production mode B), a specific time production (countdown production) is performed periodically (every minute) (see FIG. 91). Thus, during the time performance period, the same specified time performance (countdown performance) can be performed in synchronization with other pachinko machines 10 installed (for example, next to each other), and a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can create a sense of unity. It is possible to further enhance the effect of time presentation aimed at providing a certain presentation.

In addition, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is such that the content of the effect changes based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variable state and not the time saving state (so-called latent probability variable state), the countdown characters (“3, 2 , 1...") is displayed in red (displayed in black if it is not in the latent probability change state). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the game state is the variable probability state and not the time saving state (so-called latent variable probability state). Therefore, the player can be interested in the performance contents of the specific time performance, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, the notification mode for notifying the latent probability variable state is not limited to the one described above. For example, a pattern (image) or characters may be displayed to notify that the state is in the probability-variable-latency state. In this case, various power-on images may be corrected and used as the patterns (images). As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a pattern (image) for notifying the latent probability variable state, so the data capacity (ROM capacity) can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the specific time effect (countdown effect) described above, a countdown announcement effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is executed. This countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 . That is, it may be executed (displayed) at a timing different from the specified time effect (countdown effect) which is periodically executed (every minute). Therefore, a countdown notice effect including a specific time effect (countdown effect) and the same type of display mode (countdown) may be executed at a timing different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the same type installed elsewhere (for example, next to it). be. As a result, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved. In the countdown notice effect, after the countdown characters (“3, 2, 1 …”) are displayed, a character pattern indicating the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed, or the frame button 22 is hit repeatedly (or Pressing down) is suggested, and based on repeated hitting (or pressing) of the frame button 22, patterns and characters are displayed that suggest the degree of expectation for a big win.

In this control example, it is conceivable that the performance timing of the specific time performance (countdown performance) occurs during the execution (display) of the countdown announcement performance. In this case, an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is overlapped (or overwritten) and displayed, which may make the gaming machine difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, in this control example, the above-described avoidance flag 223i is set to ON during execution of the countdown notice effect (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when the avoidance flag 223i is ON, a specific time effect ( Countdown effect) is not executed (set) (see S2305: Yes in FIG. 114). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of the above-described problems and make the gaming machine easy for the player to understand.

In this control example, the configuration for avoiding (restricting) redundant display of effects including the countdown mode has been described with the countdown mode as an example. However, the effect of avoiding (restricting) overlapping display is not limited to the effect including the countdown mode. Of the effects including the same type of mode, other effects that may be displayed in duplicate are similarly applicable. For example, in a case where effects suggesting pressing of a button can be displayed in duplicate, it is possible to avoid (restrict) the duplicate display of effects suggesting pressing of a button.

In this control example, in order to prevent duplicate displays of effects (countdown effect, countdown notice effect) including the same type of aspect (countdown), when the countdown notice effect is being executed (displayed), a specific Avoided (restricted) the time effect (countdown effect) from being executed (displayed). However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to adjust (extend or shorten) the performance time of one of the performances including the same type of mode (countdown) or change the start timing. For example, when the specific time effect (countdown effect) is executed after 20 seconds, it is assumed that the countdown notice effect (normally effect time is 30 seconds) is executed (set). In this case, the effect time of the countdown notice effect may be shortened (for example, shortened to 15 seconds). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the overlapping display of effects including the same type of mode without hiding any one of the effects including the same type of mode. As a result, more effects can be displayed, and thus the player's interest can be enhanced.

Alternatively, by changing the start timing of one of the effects including the same type of mode (countdown), the following may be performed. For example, the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) may be delayed until the countdown notice effect ends (or until a predetermined time elapses after the end).

Furthermore, in the case of delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), the display (effect) mode that would have been set (displayed) if it had not been delayed (that is, if the start timing was not delayed) A specific time effect (countdown effect) may be started (displayed) from the display (effect) mode displayed on another pachinko machine 10 . Specifically, a case where the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed by 5 seconds will be described as an example. As described above, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is an effect in which the characters "countdown" are counted down by one every three seconds from "3". Therefore, when the delay time is 5 seconds, the display (rendering) mode displayed when there is no delay (the display (rendering) mode displayed in other pachinko machines 10) is "2" as countdown characters. is displayed (rendering). In accordance with this, the specific time performance (countdown performance) started with a delay of 5 seconds is controlled to start from a display (performance) mode in which "2" is displayed as countdown characters. Thus, the specific time performance (countdown performance) whose start timing is delayed can be displayed in synchronism with the specific time performance (countdown performance) being executed (displayed) in other pachinko machines 10. - 特許庁As a result, since the specific time performance (countdown performance) executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is executed (displayed) without deviation, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

As a method of delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), a means (clocking means) is provided to measure the period in which the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, and based on the measurement result. There is a method of setting a display (effect) mode of a specific time effect (countdown effect) that is started with a delay. As another method, during the period in which the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, a process of setting the display (effect) mode of the effect (for example, a process of updating the display pointer of the image, etc.) is executed as a control process. Even if it is, there is a method of processing so that the image and sound related to the specific time effect (countdown effect) are not output (for example, only the sound related to the specific time effect is muted).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 92 to 103. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 299, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on/off the firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 2203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display in the special symbol (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (that is, whether there is a reserved memory for the special symbol 2) (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol 2) (S204: No), the special It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (that is, the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (the reserved ball of special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), special symbol 1, special symbol 2 Since there is no held ball in both cases, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) and changed by calculation. Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203e are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

In the process of S208, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are fluctuating (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S213). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has passed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process ends. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). A lottery ( It is a process for determining the performance pattern (variation performance pattern) of the variation performance performed by the first design display devices 37A, 37B and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , stop type selection counter C3, and stop type counter CN1 (S301). Next, it is determined whether the probability is changing (S302).

If it is in the probability variation (S302: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. is obtained from the first winning random number table (see FIG. 75(a)) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with ten random numbers set in the first winning random number table (see FIG. 75(a)). As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but they are not limited to this, and different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player is allowed to win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is not during the probability change (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, so the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 Based on the value and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75(a)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one "0" is set, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random number value for the special symbol match, the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes), A display mode at the time of a big win indicating a big win is set (S306).

In the process of S306, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C). Also, the jackpot type is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 . Next, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined from the first winning type selection table (see FIG. 75(b)) (S307). Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random value is any one of "0 to 39" is the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and the value is one of "40 to 79". The jackpot type in this case is jackpot B (16R time-saving jackpot), and the jackpot type when it is any of "80 to 99" is jackpot C (2R probability variable time-shorter jackpot). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the deviation corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are set according to the determined deviation. Next, the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined based on the current number of held balls (S309). After that, the process proceeds to S310.

In the processing of S310, set a variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 (S310), set a stop type command (S311), then end this processing special symbol Return to change processing.

Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

In the stop setting process (S215), first, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) of FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a big win A, a big win B, a big win C, a small win, or a loss.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the blue LEDs are lighted in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lighted, resulting in the jackpot C. If so, turn on the yellow LED. In addition, when it is a small hit, the purple LED is lit, and when it is a loss, the red LED and the green LED are lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. It should be noted that the display color and lighting mode of the LEDs described above are not limited, and other lighting modes may be used as long as the types of each big win and small win and the variation state can be identified.

After the process of S261 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. is a special symbol jackpot (S262). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the lottery result of this time is not a big win (S262: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a small win (S266). If the current lottery result is a small win (S266: Yes), the small win flag 203j is set to ON (S267), the start of the small win is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

In the processing of S266, if the lottery result of this time is out (S266: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 1 or more (S269). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

Next, the starting prize winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing the holding process of the values when there is

When the starting winning process (FIG. 96, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

Then, there is no winning to the first winning hole 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning hole 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (503: No), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S501: Yes) and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S504). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S505).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S505, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S506) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In the processing of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, in the processing from S507 to S512, the same processing as in the processing from S501 to S506 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of S407 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 (S507: No), the look-ahead process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the look-ahead process (S513), which is one process in the starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S513).

In this look-ahead process (FIG. 97, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601; No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of fluctuation is definite change (S602), and the game state is variable (S602: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75(a)) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the game state is not probability change (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first per random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75 (a)) (S604), and S605 proceed to processing. In the process of S605, a winning information command including the result of the big hit determination executed in the processes of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this process is finished. In addition, in this look-ahead processing (S513), not only this embodiment, but also the type of variation pattern to be selected (outlier reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) is discriminated, and the winning information command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to notify

Next, referring to FIG. 98, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and includes the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric role associated with the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S701). During the win of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device displays the win, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is performed. Including during. As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S701: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is fluctuating (S702), and the second symbol display device is displayed. If the display mode is not fluctuating (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708).

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S709). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

In the process of S709, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state, so obtained in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S710). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 75(c)).

In the process of S708, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S707 and the low Based on the second winning random number table for the time of probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S711). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 75(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711 is the normal symbol win (S712), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S712: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbols (S714: Yes), the special symbols are currently hitting the jackpot. (S715). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning hole 64 as much as possible, even if the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the process of S715, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the second winning port 640 The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with is set to 1 second, and the number of opening times is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S714, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is set to 0. 2 seconds and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

In the processing of S712, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S712: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S719: Yes), the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device. is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second prize winning port 640 .

In the processing of S702, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S722). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S722, if the variable time has not passed (S722: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S723, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (FIG. 98, S106) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S724: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S725), and this process ends. When the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S725, when the electric accessory opening and closing processing (see S1105) of the main processing (see FIG. 102) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through-gate passing process (FIG. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S805), and the process ends. In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 101, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1012.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1114 of the main processing (FIG. 102), the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1013, S1014).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1013, S1014). Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014) is executed. . In the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1007: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1008). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203 .

In the processing of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Here, when the special symbol during fluctuation is stored, the display control device 114 for the sound lamp control device 113 displays the power-on fluctuation image (see FIGS. 82(b) to (C)). instructed to do so. Note that this variation instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1001) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 102), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) or the start winning process (see FIG. 96). Furthermore, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production, 1 A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). Details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S725 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Starting at devices 37A and 37B. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) has ended, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B ends the variation display being executed, in the display mode set by the processing of S306, S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 94), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B are stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device End the display, in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal design fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 98), stop design (second design) on the second design display device stop display (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1108, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 100 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1112 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1112), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1113). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1108 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initial setting processing (S1001). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1201: Yes), both the variable probability flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are set to OFF (S1202), and the opening command is set (S1203), End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1204). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1204, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1205). In the processing of S1205, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), A round number command indicating the number of rounds to be started is set (S1207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is established. It is determined (S1208). If the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1208, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not established (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is when 15 rounds are completed, the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and the standby time (three seconds in this embodiment), which is the ball-throwing time, elapses. Determined as When it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and an ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set to the time saving counter (S1217), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is A or C (S1213: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if the jackpot type is A (S1215: Yes), the time saving flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 104, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S1519 (see FIG. 106) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 106, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (S1516: Yes in FIG. 106), it executes power-off processing in S1519. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1519 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1519. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), it will transfer to S1304 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1519 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process of S1519, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off processing of S1519 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and after the execution of the power-off process in S1519 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1309), and after the power off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310). , the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S1311). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 . Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S1312), time setting processing is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1311, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1312), interrupt permission is set. (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process of S1308 is reached from S1304 via the process of S1306, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 described above will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the time setting process (S1313). This time effect setting process (S1313) is a process for setting information indicating the start time at which the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) are executed in the effect time storage area 223g. .

In the time setting process (S1313), first, time information is obtained from the RTC 292 (S1401). As for the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC 292 is a clock means having an internal battery, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set to the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. In addition, the RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to distinguish "year, month and day". Therefore, for example, on Christmas Day, the background image can be changed to a Christmas-only background image, or a special character such as Santa can be displayed.

Then, based on the time information (power-on time) acquired in the process of S1401, the normal game period (production mode A), the time production period (production mode B), and the start time at which the specific time production is executed (set) They are calculated respectively and set in the presentation time storage area 223g (S1402), and this processing ends.

The information set in the presentation time storage area 223g in the process of S1402 will be specifically described by taking as an example the case where the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00. In the effect time storage area 223g, 9:55, which is 55 minutes after the power-on time (9:00), is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. Then, the times (10:55, 11:55, . . . ) every hour from the start time of the first time effect are set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. Also, every minute from the start timing of the time production during the time production (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57...) It is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, the information indicating the time (10:00, 11:00, etc.) five minutes after the start time of the time effect is the normal game period (effect mode A). It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

In this control example, it is set to execute each time production (time production, specific time production) based on the time when the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and each time production is performed regardless of the time when the power is turned on. You may set the start time of (time production|presentation, specific time production|presentation). For example, 00 minutes after every hour may be set as the start time of the time presentation. As a result, even if the power-on time is shifted when turning on the power of a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the start time of the time performance is not shifted, and the time performance is executed in synchronization with the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加can do.

In this control example, the RTC 292 is used as the clock means, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter may be provided as the timing means as follows. When measuring (clocking) the normal game period (55 minutes), the value of the counter is periodically (for example, every second) counted up (or counted down) after the normal game period (55 minutes) is started. Measure (time) with Then, when the value of the counter reaches a value indicating 55 minutes (for example, 3300), it is determined that 55 minutes have passed. By configuring in this way, the need to provide the RTC 292 is eliminated, so the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 106, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or the current process of S1501 was executed (S1501), and 1 ms or more has passed. If not (S1501: No), the process proceeds to S1511 without performing the processes of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1502 to S1510 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1511, and S1512. By executing the processing of S1511 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1502 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1504). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be

Also, at the time of recovery from a power failure due to a power failure or the like, an effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101). . In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the reception of the effect permission command including that the special symbol is being changed, the power-on notification processing (S1504) creates a display variation pattern command, and the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the variation start command for the power-on variation image is determined by the simple command determination process (see FIG. 118(b)), and based on the variation pattern based on the received command, the power-on variation image is displayed. Performs variable display (see FIG. 82(b) or (c)). The display variation pattern command created here is for executing the variation display by the power-on variation image, which is a simple image, as described above. ) is simpler than the one selected by As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the power-on variation image can be displayed with good response when recovering from power failure.

Furthermore, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 to stop the variable display. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a stop command for display to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. In the display control device 114, the simple command determination processing (see 118(b)) determines that the stop command for display has been received, and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82(b) or (c)) is stopped.

Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1505 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring/performance processing monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the performance effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1509, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1509 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1511). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S1512. In the process of S1512, a variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the variable display setting process (S1512) is finished, next, a synchronous effect management process for executing an effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and a specific time is displayed in the time effect period (effect mode B). Specific time production processing for executing production is executed (S1514). Then, a ball-entering effect setting process for executing a ball-entering effect based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 is executed (S1515), and the process proceeds to S1516. Details of the synchronous effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the entering ball effect setting process (S1515) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

When the ball-entering effect setting process (S1515) ends, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1516 (S1516: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1518), and the power-off processing is executed (S1519). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1520), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1517), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S1511), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1601). When the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern reception process (S1602) is executed and the process returns to the main process.

Details of the variation pattern reception process (S1602) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern reception process (S1602). This variation pattern reception process (S1602) extracts a variation pattern based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, and based on the scenario of the extracted variation pattern, various accessories (vertical movement unit device ( Falling role) 400, expansion and contraction effect device (expansion role) 540, tilting motion unit (tilting role) 600, etc.) is a process of setting the operation.

In the variation pattern reception process, first, the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a falling accessory scenario in the extracted variation pattern type (S1703). In the processing of S1703, if it is determined that there is a falling accessory scenario (S1703: Yes), since it is a case where the vertical motion unit device (falling accessory) 400 is executed to move, the vertical motion unit device A falling role scenario for moving the (falling role) 400 is set (S1704). The falling role scenario set in the process of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling role) 400 for the same time as the variation time of the variation effect set based on the variation pattern type. be. By driving the vertical drive motor 431 based on this falling role scenario, the vertical movement unit device (falling role) 400 and the variable effect can be moved in synchronization (interlocking).

When the processing of S1704 is finished, it is then determined whether or not there is an opening setting for the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 (S1705). In the process of S1705, if it is determined that the door member 470 is set to be opened (S1705: Yes), the opening/closing drive motor 466 is not excited (turned off) so that the door member 470 is opened. Set (energization stop control). As a result, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening/closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force that moves the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 in the falling direction. , the door member 470 is opened. Although not shown, when the door member 470 is not set to be opened, that is, when the door member 470 is kept closed, the excitation of the opening drive motor 466 is controlled so that the opening/closing drive motor 466 stops. . As a result, when the door member 470 is not set to open, even if the vertical movement unit device (falling accessory) 400 moves in the falling direction, the static torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed. The door member 470 is kept closed and is not opened because it is excited so that the torque for maintaining the state (so-called holding torque) is maximized. It should be noted that the torque (holding torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state does not have to be maximized. It is sufficient that the torque is such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertial force generated in the opening. In this case, the current that excites the drive motor 466 for opening and closing can be made weak, so power consumption can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that there is no setting for opening the falling role (S1705: No), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling role scenario. If so (S1703: No), the process from S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707.

When the processing of S1703, S1705 or S1706 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is an expandable role scenario (S1707). In the process of S1707, when it is determined that there is an expansion and contraction accessory scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is operated so that the front plate member 546 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position. is set (S1708), and the process proceeds to S1709. On the other hand, in the processing of S1707, when it is determined that there is no expansion/contraction role scenario (S1707: No), the processing of S1708 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1709.

In the processing of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a leaning accessory scenario (S1709). In the processing of S1709, if it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is controlled to be excited so that the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves to the extended position. A leaning accessory scenario is set (S1710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1709, if it is determined that there is no leaning accessory scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process ends.

Returning to FIG. 107, the description is continued. In the processing of S1601, if no variation pattern command has been received (S1601: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1606). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, respectively. (S1607). In addition, in the processing of S1607, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is set. After the processing of S1607 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or when a lottery of special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1607. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the processing of S1607 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of S1606, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1606: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1608). In the process of S1608, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S1608: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command (lottery results of special symbols, etc.) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. (S1609), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the winning information command has not been received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not a command regarding a big win has been received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when a command regarding a big win is received (S1610: Yes), a process corresponding to the received command regarding a big win is executed (S1611), and this process ends. Commands related to big wins include, for example, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, processing corresponding to the received command related to the big win includes, for example, processing of setting an opening command for display, a command for the number of rounds for display, and an ending command for display.

In the process of S1610, when it is determined that the command regarding the big win has not been received (S1610: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S1612). In the process of S1612, if it is determined that the stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the process of stopping the variable display being executed is executed (S1613), the avoidance flag 223i is set to OFF (S1614), A stop command for display is set (S1615), and this processing ends.

The display stop command set by the process of S1615 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 106). , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When receiving the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the variable effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1616) and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. Set the command to send to

Next, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1512). This variable display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1801). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1806. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Variation pattern selection processing for selection is executed (S1803).

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, details of the variation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223j counted by the sound lamp control device 113, the variation pattern type is selected according to the effect mode. be.

In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S1901). Next, it is determined whether or not the current production mode is production mode A (normal game period) (S1902). The performance mode is determined by referring to the value of the performance mode storage area 223h. As described above, if the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is "00H", it indicates that the effect mode is A; if it is "01H", it indicates that it is the effect mode B; This indicates that the production mode is C.

In the process of S1902, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: Yes), extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) Based on the variation pattern type obtained and the production counter 223j acquired in the processing of S1901, the variation pattern of the corresponding normal game period (production mode A) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1903), and this processing is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a display variation pattern command in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1902, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode A (normal game period) (S1902: No), then the current production mode is production mode B (time production period). (S1904).

In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: Yes), extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) Based on the variation pattern type and the production counter 223j acquired in the processing of S1901, the variation pattern of the corresponding time production period (production mode B) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1905), and this processing is performed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1904, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode B (time production period) (S1904: No), the current production mode is production mode C (time production extension period). be. In this case, based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) and the production counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding time production extension period (production mode C) A variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the variation pattern selection process (S1803), since the variation pattern corresponding to the current production mode is selected, the variation display corresponding to each production period (production mode) can be executed (displayed). can be done.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description continues. After completing the processing of S1803, based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S1803, to generate a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 and to transmit the command to the display control device 114 Set (S1804). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started. After the processing of S1804 is finished, next, the advance notice selection processing for setting the advance notice effect (indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit) based on the success/failure determination result is executed (S1805). Note that this advance notice selection process is also configured so that the advance notice effect corresponding to the current effect mode is selected.

Here, details of the advance notice selection process (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S1805). This advance notice selection process (S1805) is executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) described above, and is a process for setting the advance notice effect based on the win/loss determination result according to the current effect mode.

In the advance notice selection process (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002). In the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the current effect mode (value of the effect mode storage area 223h) is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the determination result of each reserved ball and the value of the effect counter 223j, the normal notice effect, which is the notice effect of the normal game period, is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2011.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode A (normal game period) (S2002: No), then the current production mode is production mode B (time production period). (S2004).

In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the winning judgment result of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a and , and based on the value of the effect counter 223j, the time announcement effect, which is the announcement effect of the time effect period, is selected (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the time announcement effect selected in the process of S2005 is an announcement effect including a countdown display mode (countdown announcement effect) (S2006). In the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time notice effect is the countdown notice effect (S2006: Yes), the avoidance flag 223i is turned on so as not to execute the specific time effect (countdown effect). (S2007), the process proceeds to S2011. By setting the avoidance flag 223i to ON by the processing of S2007, it is possible to determine that the countdown notification effect is to be executed. When the avoidance flag 223i is ON, control is performed so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the specific time effect process (see FIG. 114) described later (S2305 in FIG. 114: Yes). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the repetition of effects (countdown notice effects, specific time effects (countdown effects)) including the same type of display mode (countdown), which confuses the player. can be prevented (suppressed).

In this embodiment, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON when the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640, and control is performed so that the specific time effect is not executed. is not limited to For example, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640 is pre-read (estimated) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. That is, the period in which the countdown notice effect is executed is pre-read (estimated). Based on the look-ahead (guess) result, it may be set so that the specified time effect (countdown effect) is not redundantly executed during the period in which the countdown notice effect is executed. As a result, the processing for executing the specific time production can be stopped before the timing at which the specific time production is started. As a result, it is possible to omit preparations (for example, image data transfer processing, etc.) for executing the specific time effect, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, the prevention (suppression) of duplication is not limited to the display mode, and it is also possible to prevent (suppress) the duplication of voices and music. Furthermore, it may be possible to prevent (suppress) the sound from being different from the display mode. For example, it prevents (suppresses) the output of a voice saying "press the button, please" even though there is no indication to press the button.

Furthermore, it is not limited to preventing (suppressing) duplication of effects including the same type of display mode, but may prevent continuous (or frequent) execution of effects including the same type of display mode. Specifically, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed in the vicinity of the period in which the countdown notice effect is executed (for example, one minute before and after). As a result, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easier for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the process of S2006, when it is determined that the selected time announcement effect is other than the countdown announcement effect (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2004, if it is determined that the current production mode is not production mode B (time production period) (S2004: No), then whether the current production mode is production mode C (time production extension period) It is determined whether or not (S2008). When it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period) (S2008: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the variation is a win. (S2009).

In the process of S2009, when it is determined that the result of the determination of whether or not the variation is a win (S2009: Yes), the super fish school announcement effect, which is a notice effect suggesting that the change will be a big win, is selected ( S2010), the process proceeds to S2011.

When the processing of S2003, S2006, S2007 or S2010 is completed, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and this processing ends. The display notice command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display advance notice command, the display control device 114 displays on the third symbol display device 81 the advance notice effect corresponding to the command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current production mode is not the production mode C (time production extension period) in the processing of S2008 (S2008: No), or in the processing of S2009, the result of determination of whether or not the variation is out. If it is determined that (S2009: No), there is no advance notice effect to be executed, so this process is terminated as it is. In the processing of S2003 and S2005, there is a case where the advance notice effect is not selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j. In this case, similarly, the present processing ends without setting the advance notice command for display.

In addition, in this control example, in the time production extension period (production mode C), the specific time production (countdown production) that is periodically (per minute) executed during the time production period (production mode B) is not executed. However, it is not limited to this, and a specific time effect (countdown effect) may be executed in the same manner as the time effect period (effect mode B). In this case, the above-described avoidance flag 223i may be used to control so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed at the timing overlapping with the countdown notice effect as in the time effect period (effect mode B). As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the countdown notice effect and the like even in the time effect extension period (the effect mode C), thereby providing a game machine that is easy for the player to understand. Further, the display mode of the specific time effect which is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C) may not include the countdown display mode. Thus, even if the specific time effect is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the effect including the same kind of display mode (countdown) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

Returning to FIG. 109, the description continues. After completing the processing of S1805, it is then determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S1806). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1806: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process proceeds to S1810. In the processing of S1810, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1810). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the synchronous effect management process (S1513), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it is displayed. Perform processing to set the mode.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), time information of "hour, minute" is first obtained from the RTC 292 (S2101). Then, it is determined whether or not a value ("00H") indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2102). If it is determined that the value (“00H”) indicating production mode A is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the transition timing to production mode B (time production period) ( (S2103). In the process of S2103, if it is determined that it is time to shift to the effect mode B (time effect period), that is, if it is determined that it is time to start the time effect (S2103: Yes), the effect mode storage area 223h Set a value ("01H") indicating the production mode B (time production period) to (S2104), set a display production mode change command based on the production mode B (time production period) (S2105), and perform this processing finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2103 that it is not the time rendering period, the processing of S2104 and S2105 is skipped, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2102, if it is determined that the value ("00H") indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is not set (S2102: No), the effect mode B ( It is determined whether or not a value (“01H”) indicating a time presentation period) is set (S2106). In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the value ("01H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the end of the time effect. is within 3 seconds, that is, within 3 seconds until the end timing of the time presentation period (the start timing of the normal game period) is determined (S2107).

In the process of S2107, when it is determined that the end timing of the time production period (the start timing of the normal game period) is within 3 seconds (S2107: Yes), the extension production for executing (displaying) the extension production Setting processing is executed (S2108). After that, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 106). Details of the extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2107, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of the time presentation, it is longer than 3 seconds until the end timing of the time presentation period (the start timing of the normal game period). , S2108 are skipped, and the process ends.

In the process of S2106, the value ("00H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is not set in the effect mode storage area 223h, that is, the current effect mode is the effect mode C (time effect extension period). When it is determined that there is (S2106: No), it is determined whether or not it is outside the extended time effect period, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the extended time effect period (effect mode C) (S2109). In the process of S2109, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: Yes), a value ("00H") indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. Then (S2110), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2111), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: No), the processing of S2110 and S2111 is skipped, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the extension effect setting process (S2108), which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the contents of this extension effect setting process (S2108).

In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S2201). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S2201: Yes), a value ("00H") indicating the performance mode A (normal game period) is set in the performance mode storage area 223h (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, at the point of time three seconds before the end of the time production period (production mode B), when the jackpot game is being executed (S2201: Yes), after the jackpot game ends Although it is controlled to shift to the game period (production mode A) (S2202 and S2203), it is not limited to this. For example, even if a jackpot game is being executed three seconds before the end of the time production period (production mode B), if the jackpot game ends before the end of the time production period (production mode B) , a time performance period (performance mode B) may be set. In addition, even if the jackpot game is being executed at the point of time 3 seconds before the end of the time presentation period (drawing mode B), if it is determined that the jackpot will occur after that (when the reserved winning prize information is the jackpot). Alternatively, after the end of the jackpot game, the game may be shifted to the time presentation extension period (drawing mode C). Thus, even if a jackpot game is being executed three seconds before the end of the time performance period (performance mode B), an extension performance or the like can be executed (displayed), so that the interest of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time production period (production mode B) (S2204: Yes), whether or not the re-variation production is set, that is, the extension production is executed ( It is determined whether or not it is decided to shift to the production mode C (S2205). When re-variation production is set, that is, when it is determined that the extension production is executed after that (shift to production mode C) (S2205: Yes), the production mode is stored in the production mode storage area 223h. A value indicating C ("02H") is set (S2206), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the re-variation effect is not set (S2205: No), then it does not shift to the time effect extension period (production mode C), and the normal game period (production mode A ), the process proceeds to S2202. As a result, at the end of the time production period (production mode B) (S2204: Yes), if the transition to the time production extension period (production mode C) is not performed (S2205: No), the production mode A (normal game period) is entered. (S2202 and S2203).

Also, in the process of S2204, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (that is, the time effect is continuously executed) (S2204: No), the winning information storage area 223a is hit. It is determined whether or not winning information is stored, or whether or not the winning/failure determination result during fluctuation is winning (S2208). In the process of S2208, if the prize winning information is stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, or if it is determined that the winning/failure determination during the change is a win (S2208: Yes), the winning change ends. The time until the time is calculated and set as the effect time (extended effect time) of the time effect extension period (S2209). Then, a re-variation effect is set (S2210), and this process is terminated.

Here, the re-fluctuation effect is an effect that suggests a shift from the time effect period to the time effect extension period and notifies (displays) the player as if a new special pattern change had started. . Specifically, a display mode in which a school of fish appears from the right side is displayed, and the variable display of the third pattern that has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is displayed again. It is changed (expanded) in a possible (easy) manner. As described above, in the present control example, when the remaining time of the time production period (production mode B) becomes 3 seconds or less, by switching to the precursor display mode, the second that has been executed (displayed) until then The variable display of the three symbols is changed to a display mode (reduced display) that is difficult for the player to see. In the re-variation effect, when the variable display of the third symbol, which has been changed (reduced) to a display mode that is difficult for the player to see, is changed (enlarged) to a viewable (easy) mode again, A display mode in which a school of fish appears from the right is displayed. As a result, since the player pays attention to the display mode of the school of fish, it is possible to vary (enlarge) the variable display of the third symbol without making the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if it is determined that the winning prize information is not stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a and the winning/failure judgment result during fluctuation is out (S2208: No), S2209 and S2210 are executed. Skip the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the specific time rendering process (S1514), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific time effect process (S1514). This specific time production process (S1514) is a process for executing (displaying) a specific time production during the time production period (production mode B).

In the specific time effect process, first, time information is obtained from the RTC 292 (S2301). Next, referring to the production mode storage area 233h, it is determined whether the current production mode is production mode B (time production period) (S2302). In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not determined that the specific time effect is to be executed in the subsequent processes. , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then the time information (current time) acquired in the process of S2301, Based on the information indicating the start time of the specific time production stored in the production time storage area 223g, it is determined whether or not it is the specific time production timing (S2303). In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that it is not the specific time production timing (S2303: No), it is not the time to execute the specific time production, so this processing is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S2303, if it is determined that the effect is for a specific time (S2303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304). In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process ends. As a result, during execution of the demonstration effect, that is, when the player is not playing a game, the effect suggests whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the variable probability game state (variable latent probability state). It is possible to prevent (suppress) a game state from being suggested to a player who is not playing by not displaying the performance for a specific time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2304 that the demonstration effect is not being executed (S2304: No), then it is determined whether or not the avoidance flag 223i is ON (S2305). In the processing of S2305, if it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is ON (S2305: Yes), it means that the countdown notice effect is being executed among the notice effects based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640. Therefore, in order not to display the specific time effect (countdown effect), which is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown), this processing is terminated as it is (that is, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not set. ).

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is turned off (S2305: No), in order to execute a specific time effect (countdown effect), a specific time effect command for display is set, and this process is executed. exit.

By the processing of S2305, when the countdown notice effect based on the winning to the second winning opening 640 is executed during execution of the specific time effect (when the avoidance flag 223i is ON), the countdown related to the specific time effect is executed. Control is performed so that the effect is not executed (S2305: Yes). As a result, since the countdown notice performance and the specific time performance (countdown performance), which are performances including the same kind of display mode (countdown), are not executed in duplicate, a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the ball entry effect setting process (S1515), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ball entry effect setting process (S1515). This ball-entering effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying a ball-entering effect based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 during the time-saving game. In this ball-entering effect, the type to be selected is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until a big win is achieved. Also, the area where the ball-entering effect is displayed is set in order from the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 to the fourth area 81d.

In the entering effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time-saving game (S2401). In the process of S2401, if it is determined that the time-saving game is not in progress (S2401: No), the ball entry effect based on the game ball entering the second winning hole 640 is not executed (displayed), so this process is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the time saving game is in progress (S2401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the game ball entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402). In this control example, when the main controller 110 enters the game ball into the second winning hole 640, a ball entry command is transmitted to the sound ramp controller 113 (not shown). In the sound lamp control device 113, upon receiving the ball entry command, the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 stores that the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, and in the processing of S2402, the second winning hole It is determined whether or not a ball has entered the 640.

In addition, not limited to this, by providing a ball entry detection switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the voice lamp control device that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640 113 may be detectable. Also, the ball entry detection switch may also be used as a switch that detects the entry of a ball into the second prize winning opening 640 used in the main controller 110 . Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if the above-described ball entry command is received from the main control device 110 and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning hole 640 (S2402: Yes), the winning information is stored. A ball-entering effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the ball-entering effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, based on the ball-entering effect selected in the process of S2403 and the display area counter 223f, the ball-entering effect command for display is set (S2404). The display-purpose entering effect command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output processing (S1502) of the main processing (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives this display-purpose entering effect command, the display control device 114 displays the entering effect in the display area corresponding to the command (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81).

When the processing of S2404 is finished, the value of the display area counter 223f is incremented by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether or not the added value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406). In the process of S2406, if it is determined that the value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406: Yes), the entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or 90) in the entering effect setting process. is set to be displayed, and the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 (S2407) so that the area where the ball-entering effect is displayed is the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or 90). End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2406 that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, it is any of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), it is necessary to initialize the value of the display area counter 223f. Therefore, the process of S2407 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, the process of S2404 can display the ball-entering effect in the area of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the display area counter 223f. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, it is displayed in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, when it is 2, it is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, In the case of , the entering effect is displayed in the first area 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the case of 4, in the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81. Then, by the processing from S2405 to S2407, the winning effect setting process (S1515) is executed, and every time the entering ball effect command for display is set, the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated. The ball-entering effect can be displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the display device 81, and after the ball-entering effect is displayed in the fourth area 81d, the ball-entering effect can be displayed again from the first area 81a. can be displayed in order. As a result, the ball-entering effect based on one ball-entering is continuously displayed until four game balls newly enter the second prize-winning hole 640, and the game balls enter the second prize-winning hole 640. Even when the ball-entering interval is very short, it is possible to secure the time during which the ball-entering effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player cannot (or is difficult to) visually recognize (recognize) the ball-entering effect.

In this control example, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. They may be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise), or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or variation is executed, or when there is prize winning information for a big win. As a result, the order of displayed ball-entering effects can be changed, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored early.

Also, the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area) of the third symbol display device 81 may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big win. For example, when the expectation of a big win is low, the ball entry effects are displayed in order (clockwise) from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. should be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation based on the display order of the ball-entering effect displayed in each area (first area 81a to fourth area). Since it is no longer necessary to see the details of the ball-entering effect displayed in , the burden on the player can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball-entering effects are displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area of the third pattern display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six regions from the first region to the sixth region) and displayed in order, or the display of the third pattern display device The number of divided areas may be reduced (for example, divided into two areas from the first area to the second area) for display.

In addition, in this control example, which of the display regions (first region 81a to fourth region 81d) of the third pattern display device 81 is to be displayed is configured to be selected by the sound lamp control device 113. , but not limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be selected in the display control device 114 . As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 116, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2501) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2601). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2602, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2602, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2603). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2501) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2601 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and then transferred to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S2601. and the processing of S2602 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2603 to S2605 without performing the processes of S2601 and S2602 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2503, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2504, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2505). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4702 in FIG. 132(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118(b)), the power-on main image and the power-on variation image (see FIG. 82), which are the images at the time of power-on, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and simple display setting processing (see S2810 in FIG. 118B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first winning hole 64 (start winning), and the instruction to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (see FIG. 82) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure recovery. Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2506, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a). FIG. 118(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2701), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 118(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801). If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S2802) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2803) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2802), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and produce a performance image corresponding to that mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2803), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2804). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2803) or the simple display setting processing (S2810). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

When the task processing is completed, effect information correction processing is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction processing (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the task processing described above, various power-on images used for display at power-on (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation Image, title image at power-on) sprite, correct the display presence/absence, display coordinate position and enlargement ratio. Note that the effect information correction process (S2805) may be configured to be executed within the task process (S2804).

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, which are determined in task processing (S2804) and effect information correction processing (S2805), and transfer setting processing (S2806). 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by , and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2808, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (loss, chance) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2801: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2809) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2810) is executed, and then S2804. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, the details of the command determination process (S2802), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2803) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2902). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2903).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S2904), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S2905) and returns to the processing of S2901.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2905) will now be described with reference to FIG. 120(a). FIG. 120(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3001).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device actually produces a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third symbol display on the third symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3003, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3005). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3006), and when the effect of moving the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is executed. A special effect correction process for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the processing of S3007 is completed, the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3005, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S3004 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 121, details of the special effect correction processing (S3007) will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing special effect correction processing (S3007). This special effect correction process (S3007) is performed when the effect in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is moved is executed. This is a process for correcting the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images displayed on the sub-display device 690).

In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received variation pattern command is the effect of moving the telescopic effect device (elastic accessory) 540 (whether or not there is a telescopic accessory scenario). (S3201). In the process of S3201, when it is determined that there is an expansion and contraction scenario (S3201: Yes), in the change, the front member 546 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position, and the third symbol This is the case where an effect that makes the display device 81 difficult to see (or invisible) is executed. In this case, from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m is set the correction information for movable stretchable role product (S3202), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the processing of S3202, the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 83(a)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is corrected and displayed on the sub display device 690. FIG. Therefore, even when the front member 546 of the extension device 540 moves to the front side of the third pattern display device 81, the player can easily visually recognize the power-on fluctuation image by looking at the sub-display device 690. can. Here, the variation image at power-on is the "O" pattern displayed on the upper right of the third pattern display device 81, as shown in FIG. 83(a). In addition to the "○" symbol, the "X" symbol is also displayed as a variation image. This variable image notifies that the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is being variably displayed by alternately displaying the "O" symbol and the "X" symbol. Then, when the "O" symbol is stopped and displayed, the winning of the special symbol is announced, and when the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is missed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3201, if it is determined that there is no stretchable accessory scenario (S3201: No), then the effect based on the received variation pattern command is the effect of moving the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9). It is determined whether or not (whether or not there is a leaning accessory scenario) (S3203). In the processing of S3203, if it is determined that there is a tilting accessory scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is moved in the variation, and the sub This is the case where an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to see is executed. In this case, the tilting accessory movement correction information is set from the correction information table 234a3 to the correction information storage area 233m (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205. By the processing of S3204, the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub-display device 690 is moved, and even if an effect is executed in which the sub-display device 690 is difficult to see, The power-on fluctuation image displayed on the pattern display device 81 can be easily visually recognized.

In addition, in the above-described processing of S3202 and S3204, by setting information for correcting the display mode (position, size) of the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the effect to be executed, a display that is easy for the player to visually recognize is set. It is controlled so that it becomes a mode. As a result, since it is not necessary to hold an image in a display mode that is easy for the player to visually recognize for each effect executed, the area of the ROM 234 can be saved.

After completing the processing of S3202 or S3204, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and this processing ends. The special effect correction flag 233n that is turned on in the process of S3205 changes the display mode (position, size, This is a flag indicating that information for correcting the By setting this special effect correction flag 233n to ON, in the effect information correction process described later, although the variation based on the stretchable role scenario and the tilting role scenario is executed, the correction information for the normal effect can be prevented (suppressed) from being stored in the correction information storage area 233m. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no leaning accessory scenario (S3203: No), this process ends.

As described above, the tilting motion unit (tilting accessory) 600 has the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50). It is possible to switch between an open state in which the player can see the sub-display device 690 and a closed state in which the player cannot see the sub-display device 690 . Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Further, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are closed depends on the role scenario in the production, as in the case of determining the movement of the telescopic role and the tilting role described above. Alternatively, an origin sensor that detects the origin positions of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 determines that these curtain members are at the origin position (closed state). The display of the sub-display device 690 may be switched to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the sub-display device 690 is displayed. As a result, even when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in a closed state, that is, when the sub-display device 690 becomes difficult to see, the display image of the sub-display device 690 can be corrected. and can be displayed on the third pattern display device.

Furthermore, in the above-described tilting motion unit (tilting accessory) 600 and elastic effect device (elastic accessory) 540, the correction information is similarly changed based on the determination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. good too. As a result, even if the action is different from the role product scenario due to the failure of the role product, etc., the state is accurately detected and various effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. It can be displayed at a position where a person can visually recognize it.

In the present embodiment, the case where the expansion/contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the case where the tilting motion unit 600 tilts have been described. The same processing as that executed in the special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed when an action scenario to operate is set. Note that even when the tilting motion unit 600 slides, a series of motion scenarios for the sliding motion are set by the audio lamp control device 113 . In that case, since the sound lamp control device 113 notifies that the variation pattern is for executing the slide motion by the display variation pattern command, in that case, the slide motion correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233m. Here, the slide motion correction information is the power-on variation image (“○” symbol (or “X”) shown in FIG. The display coordinates are set so that the variable display )) in the pattern does not move to the back side of the tilting unit 600 that slides. In the present embodiment, the moving image (see FIG. 83(a)) is displayed on the upper left of the third pattern display device 81, but if it is configured to be displayed on the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 will move from the right side. When it slides to the left, it is gradually slid (moved) to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting motion unit 600 and set to be displayed. Such coordinate information is set in the slide motion correction information. In addition, when the tilting operation unit 600 slides to the left according to the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and moves to the area where the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed, the tilting operation unit 600 The coordinates may be set so as to move to and display on the sub-display device 690 incorporated in the . With such a configuration, it is possible to display the variation image (see FIG. 83(a)) showing that the special symbol is being varied by the player in an easy-to-see manner. In the present embodiment, the object to be moved and displayed is the moving image (see FIG. 83(a)), but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be the third symbol or the reserved symbol. Alternatively, it may be a pattern such as a character. The slide motion correction information described above is set in advance in the display control device 114 corresponding to the operation scenario of the slide motion set in the sound lamp control device 113, and the coordinate information is adjusted according to the timing of the slide motion. is set so that is variably set.

In addition, in this control example, the display positions of various power-on images are corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Or, the display position of such as fluctuation pattern) may be corrected.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2904, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2906), If there is a display variation type command (S2906: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2907), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the stop type command process (S2907) will now be described with reference to FIG. 120(b). FIG. 120(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance) is handled. A stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)) is executed. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect displayed on the pattern display device 81 is set (S3102).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned off. (S3103), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3102. In the above-described task processing (S2804), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3103, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3101, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3102.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2906, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2906: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command in the unprocessed commands (S2908). In the process of S2908, when it is determined that there is a jackpot related command (S2908: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S2909), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the details of the jackpot related command processing (S2909) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S2909). This jackpot-related command processing (S2909) performs processing corresponding to various commands (opening command for display, number of rounds command for display, ending command for display) for executing the jackpot effect received from the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process for execution.

In the jackpot-related command processing (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among unprocessed commands (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is an opening command for display (S3301: Yes), the opening command process (S3302) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3303.

Details of the opening command process (S3302) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3401, time data representing the rendering time is set in the timer counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S3402. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 is finished, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the command for the number of rounds for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the ending command for display instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 16 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, in this control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81 (for 5 rounds). ) When the game ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the jackpot stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started, Control is performed so that the transfer of image data used in the opening effect is completed by the time the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect that becomes a big hit. As a result, the opening performance can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 when the variation performance for the big win is completed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped. And it doesn't make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Returning to FIG. 122, the description is continued. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S3303), and the If there is a round number command for use (S3303: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

Details of the round number command process (S3304) will now be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process (S3304). This number-of-rounds command process (S3304) is to execute a process corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3501). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3502).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3505), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 122 . In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S3303: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3305). If there is an ending command (S3305: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if there is no display ending command (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped and the process returns to the command determination process.

Details of the ending command process (S3306) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124(a) is a flow chart showing the ending command process (S3306). This ending command process (S3306) executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S3601). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3602).

Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3601, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2908, if it is determined that there is no jackpot-related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2910), and the advance notice for display is determined. If there is a command (S2910: Yes), the notice command process is executed (S2911), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(b), details of the advance notice command process (S2911) will be described. FIG. 124(b) is a flow chart showing the advance notice command process. This advance notice command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display advance notice command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the notice command process, first, the notice effect display data table indicated by the notice command for display is determined, and the decided notice effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S3701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3702).

Then, based on the advance notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3701, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the advance notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this notice command processing (S2911), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the notice effect display data table, so that the notice effect set corresponding to the effect mode in the sound lamp control device 113 is the third symbol. It will be displayed on the display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2910, if it is determined that there is no advance notice command for display (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an entering ball effect command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2912), If there is an entering ball effect command for display (S2912: Yes), the entering ball effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, with reference to FIG. 125(a), details of the entering ball effect command process (S2913) will be described. FIG. 125(a) is a flow chart showing the entering ball effect command process (S2913). This ball-entering effect command process (S2913) executes a process corresponding to the display-purpose entering-ball effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the ball-entering effect command process, first, the ball-entering effect display data table indicated by the ball-entering effect command for display is determined. Then, the decided ball-entering effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed in the display area (one of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) indicated by the command. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3802).

Then, based on the ball-entering effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3805), the entering-ball effect command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By this entering-ball effect command processing (S2913), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the entering-ball effect display data table and the display area indicated by the command, so that the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display data table buffer 233d. The ball-entering effect is displayed in each display area (first area 81a to fourth area 81d) of the third symbol display device 81 in order. As a result, the ball-entering effects are sequentially displayed in the four display areas (the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and up to four types of ball-entering effects are displayed. can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the processing of S2912, if it is determined that there is no display-use entering-ball effect command (S2912: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display-specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914). ), if there is a specific time effect command for display (S2914: Yes), specific time effect command processing is executed (S2915), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the specific time effect command process (S2915) will now be described with reference to FIG. 125(b). FIG. 125(b) is a flow chart showing the specific time effect command process (S2915). This specific time effect command process (S2915) executes a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the specific time effect command process, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the display specific time effect command is determined, and the determined specific time effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3902).

Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3905), the entering-ball effect command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

By this specific time effect command processing (S2915), the display data table buffer 233d is set based on the specific time effect display data table, so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) selected in the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed as the second effect. It will be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2914, if it is determined that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect mode change command in the unprocessed commands (S2916 ), if there is an effect mode change command for display (S2916: Yes), effect mode change command processing is executed (S2917), and the process returns to S2901.

Here, the details of the effect mode change command process (S2917) will be described with reference to FIG. 126(a). FIG. 126(a) is a flow chart showing the effect mode change command process (S2917). This effect mode change command process (S2917) executes the process corresponding to the specific time effect command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the effect mode change command process, first, the back image change flag 233p is set to ON (S4001), the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to ON (S4002), and this process is performed. exit.

With the background image change flag 233p set to ON in the process of S4001, the processes (S4910 to S4915) for changing the background image are executed in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133), which will be described later. In addition, the effect mode flag 233r that is set to ON in S4002 is referred to in the processing for changing the background image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and is set to the effect mode flag 233r. The background image is changed based on the set production mode type. Thereby, the rear image can be changed according to the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 . As a result, the rear image can be changed based on the change of the effect mode, and the player can easily recognize that the effect mode has been changed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description is continued. In the process of S2916, if it is determined that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command in the unprocessed commands (S2918), and the If there is a stop command (S2918: Yes), the stop command process is executed (S2919), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the stop command process (S2919) will now be described with reference to FIG. 126(b). FIG. 126(b) is a flow chart showing the stop command process (S2919). This stop command process (S2919) is to execute the process corresponding to the display stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to OFF (S4101), and the process ends. The special effect correction flag 233n, which is set to OFF in the process of S4101, is set in the special effect correction process (S3007) executed when the variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 as described above. 540 (see FIG. 9), or if there is a tilting role scenario in which the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable, correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233m It stores the correction information of the table 234a3 and is set to ON.

This stop command process is a process executed based on a stop command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 when each variable effect is stopped. Therefore, when the variable performance based on the telescopic accessory scenario or the tilting accessory scenario is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233n is turned off. As a result, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)), the correction information for the normal effect or the correction information for the demonstration effect is set in the correction information storage area 233m. As a result, an image whose coordinates and the like displayed based on the variable effect of the stretchable role scenario or the tilting role scenario is corrected to the original coordinates and the like is displayed.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 119 . In the process of S2918, if it is determined that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2920). If (S2920: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901.

Details of the error command processing (S2921) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S4202, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 119 . If it is determined in the process of S2920 that there is no error command (S2920: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2922), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

Other unprocessed commands include, for example, a back image change command. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

If the back image change command has been received, back image change command processing is executed (S2922). In this back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233p for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4703) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233p set by the back image change command process is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Also, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, from the set back face image discrimination flag, at that point specifies the type of the background image to be displayed in step 2, further specifies the range of the background image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and determines the RAM type (resident use) in which image data corresponding to the range of the background image is stored. video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the background image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more background image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the background image discrimination flag corresponding to the background image type indicated by the previously received background image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the process of S2901, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes ), and the processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2901 to S2922 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2809) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only stop type commands are extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 120(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

In addition, when power failure occurs during the fluctuation of the special symbol and then recovers, the MPU 201 of the above-described main control unit 110 executes the startup process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the pattern is changing, the display control device 114 (received in S1616 of command determination processing (FIG. 107, S1511)), the display control device 114 receives a variation start command for the power-on variation image output to 114, and performs simple command determination processing (S2809). , and the start of the variable display (the display data table of the power-on variable image is set in the display data table buffer 233d) is set in the simple display setting processing (S2810) executed thereafter. It should be noted that at the timing when main controller 110 outputs an instruction to start varying the power-on varying image corresponding to the special symbol that was varying when power was turned off, the power-on varying image is displayed on the power supply of resident video RAM 235 . Since it has already been transferred to the input-time variation image area 235b, the variation display is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 (display is started). In this case, the power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 82(b) to (c) are alternately displayed.

In addition, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the start-up processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command. A stop command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 to stop the variable display. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a stop command for display to the display control device 114 based on the reception of this stop command. In the display control device 114, the simple command determination processing (see 118(b)) determines that the stop command for display has been received, and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82(b) or (c)) is stopped.

Note that if the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 has been completed in the display control device 114 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the power-on varying image, only the power-on varying image is displayed at the coordinate position for normal effect on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83(a)). This is because the stop mode of the power-on varying image is defined in the display stop command for stopping the power-on varying image, and therefore the stop mode for the normal effect cannot be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 114 may determine and display the stop mode based on the stop mode (jackpot or loss) of the power-on fluctuation image. As a result, even when the variation of the power-on variation image is executed, it is possible to switch to the normal presentation from the point of time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed, and the interest of the player can be improved. .

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S3001, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3002, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the display setting process (S2803), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S4302), S4303-S4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

Details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S4401).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304), or if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S4303: No), then the process proceeds to S4305.

In S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S4501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S4505), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S4502: No), this process ends and returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 128, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S4310), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. Further, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2804), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last time stop design determination flag set by S4315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S4316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is changed to the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S4317), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2810) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the power-on fluctuation image by the power-on fluctuation image is over, for a predetermined time, the power-on fluctuation image (Fig. 82) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the details of the effect information correction process (S2805), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing effect information correction processing (S2805). This effect information correction processing (S2805) corrects the display positions of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) during normal effects and demonstration effects. It is a process for using.

In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4601: No), it means that the simple image is being displayed when the power is turned on. End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simple image display flag 233c is off (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132(a)), which will be described later. Since the normal effect can be executed, it is then determined whether or not the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

In the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is ON (S4602: No), the expansion/contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the above-described special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). or the tilting role scenario in which the tilting action unit 600 (see FIG. 9) moves is already stored in the correction information storage area 233m. This processing ends without setting the correction information.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demonstration display flag is turned off in order to set the correction information according to the effect currently being executed. (S4603).

In the processing of S4603, if it is determined that the demonstration display flag is off (S4603: Yes), the demonstration effect is not being executed, that is, the normal effect is being executed, so the correction information storage area Correction information for normal effect is set to 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S4604), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, if it is determined that the demonstration display flag is ON (S4603: No), it means that the demonstration effect is being executed, so the demonstration display is stored in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the effect information correction process (S2805), correction information for correcting the display position of various power-on images according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power-on, normal effect, demonstration effect, etc.) making settings. As a result, in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, since a common image can be used to produce an effect, the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since it is configured to correct the display mode such as the position to be displayed and the enlargement ratio, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually recognize according to each effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the details of the transfer setting process (S2806), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 132(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S4702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S4701, that is, if it is turned off (S4701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S4702), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 132(b). FIG. 132(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S4801). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4802). In the processing of S4802, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S4802 that the transfer processing has not ended (S4802: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4803. Also, as a result of the processing of S4801, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4803.

In the process of S4803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4803). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S4803, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2809 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 stores data in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image, which have already been transferred in the main process. All resident object image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

In addition, in this control example, by correcting the display positions of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, power-on title image) that are displayed when the power is turned on, configured to be available. As a result, it is not necessary to prepare images to be used when the power is turned on and when performing normal effects, so the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

Furthermore, in this control example, the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are treated as one image data, and depending on the coordinates, the third pattern display device 81 is displayed or the sub display device 690 is controlled. This eliminates the need to separately control (transfer, etc.) the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690, thereby reducing the control load. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 may be provided respectively.

Further, since the sub-display device 690 has a resolution lower than that of the third pattern display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub-display device 690 is the same as the data of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 less than quantity. Therefore, in the display control device 114, an image to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 with a small amount of image data (a title image when the power is turned on) is first stored in the resident video RAM. to the image display can be shortened.

Here, the image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 is composed of one image data as described above. Therefore, when the power is turned on, first, when the power-on title image (see FIG. 82(a)), which is the power-on image, is displayed on the sub display device 690, the area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 ( 81, 0 data may be set for the data of the area of 800 horizontal×600 vertical. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on, the image data to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 is set to match the resolution of the sub-display device 690 (see FIG. 81, image data of 400 horizontal×300 vertical). may be used to display on the sub-display device 690 . In this case, when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 690 (the main image when the power is turned on, the variation image when the power is turned on, etc.) is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 and the Using the image data (see FIG. 81, horizontal 1200×vertical 600) for display on the sub-display device 690, switching is performed between the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 for display. As a result, the amount of image data to be set to be displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the power is turned on can be reduced. can shorten the time to

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the normal image transfer setting process (S4703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2803) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4903), furthermore, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state is set to ON (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

Also, in the process of S4902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S4902: No), the process of S4903 and S4904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S4906).

In the process of S4906, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S4906 that the transfer process has not ended (S4906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to S4907. Also, as a result of the process of S4905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4907.

In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907). is turned off (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S4907: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233p is on (S4909). Then, if the back image change flag 233p is not on but off (S4909: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 223r is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag that is in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S4911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is Data does not exist. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image determination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated.

In the process of S4913, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The determination in the process of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S4913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4913 (S4913: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S4914). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing the normal image transfer processing, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the rear image is changed. Of the image data used in , image data not stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, details of the drawing process (S2807), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S2804) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated (S5001). That is, in the processing of S5001, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S2804). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1, including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the drawing process, after the process of S5002, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S5003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting "1" if the value was "0" and "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 118(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, the display image that is used when the power is turned on is corrected and used during normal presentation. As a result, since a common display image can be used when the power is turned on and when the normal presentation is performed, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690 are used in the effect in which a specific role object (the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) and the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9)) is moved. It is controlled to correct the contents of the production displayed in. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see, for example, the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed on the sub-display device 690 in an effect in which a specific accessory moves. By doing so, it is possible to make the game machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display contents.

Furthermore, when the vertical movement unit 400 is moved and the door member 470 is opened, the opening/closing drive motor 466 for keeping the door member 470 closed is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped. It is controlled (energization stop control). As a result, the door member 470 is opened by the inertial force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped without driving the opening/closing drive motor 466, so that power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on the ball entering the winning hole during the time effect period which is periodically executed, the effect to be executed during the time effect period is restricted. controlled to do so. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is the specific advance notice effect is executed, the countdown effect executed during the time effect period can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is puzzled by the repeated countdown effect during the time effect period.

Further, the ball-entering effect displayed based on the ball entering the winning hole is displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the intervals at which game balls enter a winning hole are short, the period for displaying the ball-entering performance can be lengthened, and the player can easily visually recognize the ball-entering performance. be able to.

It should be noted that this control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by any of the pachinko machines 10 of the above-described embodiments, or by combining the above-described embodiments. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 156. FIG. In the above-described first control example, the ball-entering effect that is executed in the time-saving state of normal symbols, the time effect period (production mode B) that is executed periodically (5 minutes every hour), and the time effect period By executing a wide variety of display effects, such as a specific time effect that is executed during (production mode B), the interest of the player is improved. In the first control example, the time presentation period and the specific time presentation start time are set when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, each performance (time performance, specific time performance, etc.) can be started at the same timing for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 whose power is turned on at the same timing, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be operated. It is possible to execute a production with a sense of unity.

In addition to this, in the second control example, a technique for suitably controlling the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the like will be described. Here, the accessories such as the tilting motion unit 600 are driven by a driving motor such as a stepping motor, as described above. It is known that this drive motor is more likely to have individual differences and more likely to deteriorate over time compared to the display device (the third pattern display device 81 and the sub-display device 690). In other words, when image data is set for the display device, problems such as delays in display hardly occur. (Torque is reduced) or out-of-step may occur. That is, even if the same action scenario is set, there is a possibility that the number of steps of the action and the action speed may vary, so that each pachinko machine 10 may execute different actions.

On the other hand, in the second control example, the operation status of the tilting operation unit 600, the sliding operation unit 700, etc. is checked each time the power is turned on, and if deterioration or the like occurs, a correction value for correcting the operation scenario is set. configured to set As a result, in each pachinko machine 10, it is possible to favorably execute the actions of various roles driven by the drive motors.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and that part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 136, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 for detecting the slide motion position of the slide motion unit 700 in this embodiment will be described. As described above, the base member 710 of the slide operation unit 700 includes a slide origin sensor 717 for detecting whether or not the strut member 720 is at the origin position (retracted position), and a slide origin sensor 717 for detecting whether or not the strut member 720 is at the extended position. A slide position detection sensor 718 for detection is provided (see FIG. 49). Since these are composed of the same type of sensors, only the slide position detection sensor 718 will be described here, and the description of the slide origin detection sensor 717 will be omitted.

FIG. 136(a) shows the positional relationship between the light shielding plate 726a and the slide position detection sensor 718 while the slide operation unit 700 is in the process of sliding in the direction from the origin (retracted position) to the extended position. It is a diagram showing. As shown in FIG. 136(a), the slide position detection sensor 718 is provided with a light shielding detector 718a. The light shielding detection unit 718a represents both the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit described above, and the light shielding plate 726a is determined depending on whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the light shielding detection unit 718a is received by the light receiving unit. is in the extended position.

The example of FIG. 136(a) shows a state in which the light shielding plate 726a is arranged on the right side of the light shielding detector 718a in front view. In other words, it shows a state in which the light shielding detector 718a and the light shielding plate 726a are misaligned. In this case, since there is nothing to block between the light emitting portion of the light shielding detection portion 718a and the light receiving portion, the light from the light emitting portion is received by the light receiving portion. While the light receiving portion is receiving light, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is in the L (low) state. The output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is received by the sound lamp control device 113, and if the output is L (low), it is determined that the strut member 720 has not reached the extended position.

On the other hand, when the left end of the light shielding plate 726a overlaps the right end of the light shielding detector 718a, the light emitted from the light emitting unit begins to be shielded by the light shielding plate 726a (see FIG. 136(b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 136(c), when the light blocking plate 726a is arranged to completely overlap the light blocking detection section 718a, the light emitted from the light emitting section of the light blocking detection section 718a is completely blocked. . That is, the light receiving section cannot receive light. In this case, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is set to H (high). When the sound lamp control device 113 detects that the output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), it determines that the strut member 720 is in the extended position. Here, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high) or L (low) based on the voltage value of the output signal. That is, if the voltage output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is 5V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is determined to be H (high), and if the voltage is 0V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is determined to be L. and discriminate.

Since the slide origin sensor 717 has the same structure, the output is set to H (high) when the support member 720 is at the origin position (retracted position), and the output is set to L when it is deviated from the origin position (retracted position). (low). The audio lamp control device 113 determines the rough arrangement of the support member 720 (at the origin position, at the overhang position, or between them) simply by determining whether the output of each sensor is H or L. position) can be easily grasped.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the tilting origin sensor 618 for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600 is at the origin position (inverted state) will be described. The tilt origin sensor 618 is composed of the same type of sensor as the slide origin detection sensor 717 and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a case where the effect member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600 is at the origin position (inverted state). As shown in the figure, when the effect member 620 is at the origin position (inverted state), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 side is the light emitting portion of the tilt origin sensor 618 provided on the base member 610 side. and the light-receiving part, the light emitted from the light-emitting part is blocked and does not reach the light-receiving part. That is, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to H (high). By outputting this H (high) signal to the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the production member is at the origin position (inverted state).

FIG. 138(a) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) to the left in the front view. 138(b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 tilts (swings) to the right in front view. be.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), when the effect member 620 performs a tilting motion (swinging motion) to the left in the front view, the sensor shielding part 627 provided on the effect member 620 also interlocks with the effect member 620. to the upper left. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 are displaced, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. As with the other sensors described above, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low) while the light from the light emitting section is being received by the light receiving section. By outputting this H (high) signal to the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to notify that the effect member 620 is displaced from the origin position (inverted state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138(b), when the effect member 620 performs a tilting motion (swinging motion) in the right direction in front view, the sensor shielding portion 627 provided in the effect member 620 also moves to the effect member 620. In conjunction with it, it changes to the lower right direction. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 are displaced, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. Therefore, also in this case, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low), and the audio lamp control device 113 is notified of this.

By using the tilting origin sensor 618 in this manner, it is possible to easily detect whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position (inverted state) and notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this.

In this control example, the single tilting origin sensor 618 is used to determine only whether or not the effect member 620 is at the origin position, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. A sensor may be provided for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 is at the maximum movable position when performing the tilting motion (swinging motion) to the right and left sides. By configuring in this way, when the tilting motion (swinging motion) reaches the maximum movable position, the swinging motion can be surely stopped and the swinging direction can be reversed in the opposite direction (origin direction). can. Therefore, when performing the swing motion, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the performance member 620 from moving beyond the range of motion, thereby reducing the possibility of failure or abnormal motion.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. FIG. First, FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 139, in this control example, various sensors 230 are electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 . Specifically, the various sensors 230 include at least the tilt origin sensor 618, the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide position detection sensor 718 described above. In addition to these, various sensors such as a sensor for detecting the origin position of the vertical movement unit 400 and a sensor for detecting the origin position of the composite movement unit 500 are provided. Since the various sensors 230 can accurately grasp the action status of each character, the action of the character can be controlled appropriately.

Further, in this control example, other devices constituting the device 228 are a slide drive motor 751 for causing the slide motion unit 700 to slide, and a tilting motion (swing motion) for the tilting motion unit 600. A tilting drive motor 661 is provided for this purpose. Each operating unit can be driven by these motors.

Next, the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 140(a). As shown in FIG. 140(a), in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, an operation scenario table 222c and a swing area table 222d are added. It is

The action scenario table 222c is a data table that defines action details when performing an effect using each accessory. More specifically, it is a data table that defines set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction, etc.) to be set for various drive motors corresponding to each accessory. Details of the operation scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142(a).

FIG. 141(a) is a block diagram showing the operation scenario table 222c. The action scenario table 222c stores data for each type of drivable (variable) character. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141(a), for example, when an effect to drive the slide operation unit 700 is set, the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the slide drive motor 751 When the slide operation table 222c1 that defines the setting values to be set for the tilting operation unit 600 and the effect of driving the tilting operation unit 600 are set, the setting is made for the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the tilting drive motor 661. A tilting operation table 222c2 or the like is provided that defines the set values to be used.

These will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 141(b) and 141(c). FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the slide operation table 222c1 described above. As shown in FIG. 141(b), the slide operation table 222c1 includes set values to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n that indicates the progress of setting based on the operation scenario. (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) are defined.

Here, the operating speed indicates the frequency at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the slide drive motor 751, and the signal output per second ( It is expressed by the number of pulses (pps, pulses per second). For example, if the operating speed is 100 pps, it means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 100 times per second to the slide driving motor 751 . That is, it means that the slide driving motor 751 is driven at a speed of 100 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the slide drive motor 751. In other words, the motor driver sends a signal (pulse pulse) for setting one step operation to the slide drive motor 751. ) is output. For example, the operation step count of 120 means that the slide driving motor 751 is set to perform one step operation 120 times. Further, the operating direction means the driving direction of the slide drive motor 751 (rotating direction of the motor), and can be set to two types of directions: positive direction and negative direction. In the slide drive motor 751, the direction from the retracted position (origin position) to the extended position is the positive direction, and the direction from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position) is the negative direction. By setting these set values to the motor driver for driving the slide drive motor 751, the corresponding operation can be executed accurately.

As shown in FIG. 141(b), the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n indicates an operation for sliding the strut member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the retracted position (origin position) to the extended position (outward travel). actions) are associated. Specifically, 100 pps is specified as the operating speed, 120 is specified as the number of operating steps, and the positive direction is specified as the operating direction. This setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when the slide operation unit 700 is driven in the presentation.

Note that 120 steps means the design value of the number of steps up to the projecting position. That is, it means that the strut member 720 reaches the detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718 (see FIG. 136(c)) when the slide drive motor 751 drives 120 steps as designed. Here, the operation as designed means that the slide drive motor 751 accurately performs the same operation without stepping out or idling, and various gears for transmitting the driving force of the motor to the strut member 720 are used. It means the operation when etc. are rotated accurately.

The value "02H" of the operation pointer 223n is associated with an operation (backward movement) for sliding the support member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the extended position to the retracted position (origin position). Specifically, 100 pps is specified as the operating speed, 120 is specified as the number of operating steps, and the negative direction is specified as the operating direction. This set content is output (set) to the motor driver when the slide operation unit 700 is retracted to the origin position (retreat position) in the performance. This retreat timing is defined in advance according to the type of presentation.

FIG. 141(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the tilting operation table 222c2 described above. Similarly to the slide operation table 222c1, the tilt operation table 222c2 also has set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n. stipulated. The values “01H” and “02H” of the action pointer are associated with set values for tilting (swinging) the effect member 620 to the left in the front view. That is, the motion pointer value "01H" includes a motion speed of 100 pps, a motion step count of 10 steps, and a forward motion direction as setting values for tilting from the origin position (inverted state) to the left in front view. stipulated. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 moves 10 steps leftward in front view at an operating speed of 100 pps.

In addition, the operation pointer value "02H" includes the operation speed of 100 pps, the number of operation steps of 10 steps, and the setting value for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in the front view to the origin position (inverted state). are defined respectively. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 moves 10 steps leftward in front view at an operating speed of 100 pps. By setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value "01H" and setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value "02H" after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 moves from the origin position to the right in front view. After performing the tilting motion (swinging motion) of 10 steps in the direction, the returning motion to the origin position (inverted state) is performed.

Furthermore, the values “03H” and “04H” of the action pointer are associated with set values for tilting (swinging) the effect member 620 to the right in front view. That is, the motion pointer value "03H" includes a motion speed of 100 pps, a motion step count of 10 steps, and a forward motion direction as set values for tilting from the origin position (inverted state) to the right in front view. stipulated. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 moves 10 steps rightward in front view at an operating speed of 100 pps.

In addition, the operation pointer value "02H" includes the operation speed of 100 pps, the number of operation steps of 10 steps, and the setting value for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in the front view to the origin position (inverted state). are defined respectively. When this set value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 moves 10 steps leftward in front view at an operating speed of 100 pps. By setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value "03H" and setting a setting value corresponding to the operation pointer value "04H" after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 moves from the origin position to the right in front view. After performing the tilting motion (swinging motion) of 10 steps in the direction, the returning motion to the origin position (inverted state) is performed.

By prescribing the setting contents for the motor driver in association with the value of the operation pointer 223n in this way, it is only necessary to update the value of the operation pointer 223n and set the setting value corresponding to the updated value. , the operation of the effect member 620 can be easily set.

In the action scenario table 222c, in addition to the slide action table 222c1 (see FIG. 141(b)) and the tilting action table 222c2 (see FIG. A dedicated data table is defined for each type of composite action unit 500 (not shown). By referring to the table corresponding to each accessory defined in the action scenario table 222c and outputting the set value to the corresponding motor driver, the same action can be executed each time in the corresponding effect.

In practice, motors, gears, and the like may vary in operation due to individual differences and aging deterioration. may not be possible. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, in order to absorb the influence of the variation described above, when the power is turned on, the deviation of the action of the character from the design value is measured (analyzed), and the analysis result is It is configured to correct (modify) the set value of the slide operation accordingly. In other words, it is configured to add (or subtract) a correction value for correcting individual variation and the like to the set value defined in the operation scenario table 222c. As a result, even under the influence of individual differences and aged deterioration, it is possible to execute the action of the role in each pachinko machine 10 without discomfort.

Further, in the operation scenario table 222c of this control example, an initial operation table 222c5 is defined in which the setting contents of the motor driver corresponding to each accessory are defined in the initial operation executed based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. (See FIG. 141(a)). By executing the initial action based on the initial action table 222c5, it is possible to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally. Further, when the initial motion is executed, the details of the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the tilting motion unit 600 and the details of the sliding motion of the sliding motion unit 700 are analyzed, and a correction value for correcting the motion according to the analysis result is provided. is identified. Details of the initial operation table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(a).

FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the initial operation table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 142(a), this initial action table 222c5 is associated with the value of the action pointer 223n, the type of character for which the action is to be set, and the motor driver corresponding to the character. Set values (operation speed, number of operation steps, and operation direction) are defined.

More specifically, the value "01H" of the motion pointer 223n is associated with the slide motion unit 700 as the type of the role object, and the motion in the forward direction at a motion speed of 100 pps is defined as the motion content. The number of operation steps is not defined, and the slide operation is repeated in the positive direction (toward the extended position) until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 has become H (high). That is, the flow of setting one-step operation, confirming whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 has become H (high), and setting the one-step operation again if the output remains L (low). action is repeated. The number of operation steps set until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high) is counted by the correction counter 223w. The difference from the value of 120 steps is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the setting value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. Here, when one step action is set repeatedly, a delay of, for example, 10 milliseconds is added to one step action so that the action speed is the same as when a plurality of step actions are set during a normal game. set. That is, one step operation is set every 10 milliseconds (at an operation speed of 100 pps). As a result, it is possible to make the operation mode the same as during the normal game, so that it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that an abnormality has occurred from the appearance of the operation. It should be noted that, also in the following description, when the motion is set for each step toward various sensors, the delay is set so that the motion speed is the same as during the normal game.

The values "02H" to "05H" of the action pointer 223n are associated with the tilting action unit 600 as the type of role object for which the initial action is set. As the operation content corresponding to the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223n, an operation with an operation speed of 100 pps in the positive direction and an operation step number of 10 steps is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223n, the operation until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "04H" of the operation pointer 223n, an operation of 10 steps in the negative direction at an operation speed of 100 pps is specified. 2, the operation continues until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps.

Summarizing the initial motion set for the tilting motion unit 600, when the slide motion unit 700 moves to the extended position and the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the initial motion is updated to "02H", first, The effect member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600 is moved ten steps to the left in the front view. Then, when the 10-step motion is completed, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the initial motion is updated to "03H", and motion toward the origin (that is, motion to the right in front view) is set. . This operation is repeated step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 has become H (high), similarly to the operation performed when the value of the operation pointer 223n is "01H".

Then, when it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 has become H (high), the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated to "04H", and the movement of 10 steps to the right in front view (that is, the origin position ) is set. When the 10-step motion is completed, the value of the motion pointer 223n is updated to "05H", and motion toward the origin (that is, motion to the left in front view) is set. This operation, like the operation performed when the value of the operation pointer 223n is "03H", is repeated step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 has become H (high). By executing these actions, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the tilting action (swing action) in the right direction in the front view and the left direction in the front view, which can be driven by the effect member 620 in the normal game state, can be performed normally. can be confirmed.

In the initial operation of the tilting motion unit 600, the number of motion steps until the effect member 620, which has moved away from the origin position by executing the tilting motion (swinging motion), returns to the origin position again is counted by the correction counter 223w. is counted by , and the difference from the design value is analyzed after returning to the origin position. A correction value for correcting the setting value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. That is, in this control example, when it is determined that the actual operation of either the tilting operation or the sliding operation is deviated from the designed operation, the set value (operation speed) for the sliding operation unit 700 is corrected. is configured to

The value "06H" of the motion pointer 223n is associated with the slide motion unit 700 as the type of the role object, and the motion in the forward direction at a motion speed of 100 pps is defined as the motion content. Note that, similarly to the operation when the value of the operation pointer 223n is "01H", one step operation is repeatedly set until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 has become H (high).

Although not shown, the initial action table 222c5 also defines initial actions corresponding to accessories other than the above. By executing the initial action using the initial action table 222c5, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is a defect in the character object that executes the action action in various effects when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from being played on the pachinko machine 10 in which the problem has occurred, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this control example, the initial motion is executed while the initial motion based on the initial motion table 222c5 is being executed, and a correction value for correcting the motion speed of the slide motion table 222c1 is calculated. There is no need to define the slide motion table 222c1 in the motion scenario table 222c. Instead of calculating a correction value for correcting the motion speed, a motion scenario of the slide motion during the normal game is created based on the number of motion steps of the slide motion and the swing motion during the initial motion, and stored in the RAM 223. It may be configured to store In order to describe this modification in more detail, it is assumed that the number of operation steps up to the overhanging position of the slide operation in the initial operation is 125 steps, and the number of operation steps required for one cycle of the swing operation is 45 steps. Assume that the case is determined. In this case, first, the actual number of motion steps up to the projecting position determined by the initial motion is set as the number of motion steps of the slide motion. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation is set as the operation speed during the normal game in order to execute the swing operation (3×45 steps) of exactly 3 cycles (3 times) until the slide operation of 125 steps is executed. set. That is, 100 pps×125 steps/(3×45 steps)=93 pps is set as the operating speed. Then, when an effect is set in which the slide motion and the swing motion are combined during the normal game, the number of motion steps of 125 and the motion speed of 93 pps calculated in the initial motion are applied to the strut member 720. It should be set every time for the slide operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably execute the prescribed number of times (three times) of the swing motion until the support member 720 slides to the overhanging position. Moreover, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced as compared with the case where the slide operation table 222c1 is defined in the ROM 222. FIG.

In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, a deviation from the designed operation time is determined, and a correction value for correcting the deviation is calculated. may Further, in the above modified example, the settings of the slide motion are calculated based on the number of motion steps in the initial motion, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide motion and the operation time required for the swing motion, the number of motion steps of the slide motion is such that the slide motion reaches the overhang position at the timing when the swing motion is completed three times. and the operating speed.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. The swing region table 222d is a data table referred to when tilting the effect member 620 of the tilting accessory 600 (swinging motion), and defines the directions in which the tilting motion is possible. Here, in this control example, the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the effect member 620 and the sliding motion of the support member 720 are performed in conjunction with each other. More specifically, while the strut member 720 is sliding from the origin position to the overhanging position, the effect member 620 performs three reciprocating tilting movements (swinging movements) above the strut member 720. (the left swing motion and the right swing motion are alternately performed three times each). In other words, the position at which the effect member 620 executes the swinging motion changes according to the transition of the sliding motion.

Further, as described above, the tilting motion unit 600 including the effect member 620 is disposed below the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5), and the support member 720 is the origin. The effect member 620 and the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 are configured to be close to each other in the position or overhang position. Therefore, for example, the effect member 620 swings rightward in the front view near the origin position of the slide motion, or the effect member 620 swings leftward in the front view near the overhang position of the slide motion. If the action is performed, there is a risk that the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 will collide. Therefore, in this control example, the motion direction in which the effect member 620 can perform the swing motion is defined in the swing region table 222d, thereby preventing collision (interference) between the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212. ing. Note that when both the sliding motion of the support member 720 and the tilting motion (swinging motion) of the effect member 620 are normal motions (motions as designed), the motion of the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 Operational scenarios are defined so that there is no risk of collision (interference). The swing region table 222d is useful when, for example, an irregular situation occurs, such as when the slide motion stops midway due to a problem, or when the motion speed changes midway.

Here, first, referring to FIG. 144, regarding the operation mode when both the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the supporting member 720 are normal operations (operations as designed). and explain. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of motion steps of the swing motion of the effect member 620 and the number of motion steps of the slide motion of the support member 720. FIG. In this figure, the number of steps "0" indicates the origin position of each accessory (the production member 620 and the support member 720). In addition, the range in which the number of steps of the swing motion has a positive value means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the left side of the origin position in the front view, and the range in which the number of steps has a negative value indicates that the number of steps is from the origin position. also means that the effect member 620 is arranged on the right side in the front view.

As shown in FIG. 144, one step of the swing motion to the left is performed each time the slide motion is performed by one step until the slide motion is performed by 10 steps. That is, the swing motion is performed in the direction away from the outer wall portion 212 arranged on the right side of the origin position of the slide motion. Then, when the number of steps of the sliding motion becomes 10 and the number of steps of the swinging motion becomes 10 steps in the positive direction (refer to position a in FIG. 144), the direction of the swinging motion is reversed to the negative direction. Switch the direction of the swing motion to. This swing motion in the negative direction is executed beyond the origin position of the effect member 620 . When the number of steps of the slide operation reaches 30 and the production member 620 reaches the position advanced 10 steps in the negative direction (right direction in front view) from the origin position (see position b in FIG. 144), it swings again. Reverse the direction of motion to switch to positive swing motion.

Thereafter, the sliding motion proceeds while reversing the direction of the swing motion every 20 steps (see positions c, d, and e in FIG. 144). Then, the number of operation steps of the slide operation becomes 120 steps (reaches the extended position of the slide operation), and the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the negative direction (right side of the origin position). is stopped. Also, when returning to the origin position, the strut member is returned to the origin position of the sliding operation while maintaining the relationship shown in FIG.

By executing the slide motion and the swinging motion shown in FIG. 144, the same swinging motion can be performed each time without causing the effect member 620 to collide with other structures. On the other hand, since the effect member 620 and the strut member 720 are driven by the drive motor, even if the same operation scenario is set, the corresponding relationship shown in FIG. there is a possibility. In addition, there is a possibility that the sliding motion and the swinging motion will temporarily stop due to the influence of failure, noise, or the like. Even in such a case, if the same setting values (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) as during normal operation are set, problems such as the production member 620 colliding (interfering) with the outer wall portion 212 occur. may occur. Therefore, in this control example, by providing the swing region table 222d that defines the motion directions in which the swing motion is possible according to the number of steps of the slide motion, the effect member 620 is prevented from interfering with other structures. It is configured to

Details of the swing area table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the swing region table 222d in this control example. In this control example, each time the effect member 620 reaches the origin position of the swing motion, the swing region table 222d is referenced to determine the direction of the swing motion.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), in the swing region table 222d, the directions in which the swing motion can be executed (the neck Possible swing direction) is stipulated. In addition, the relationship between the number of operation steps of the sliding operation and the possible swinging direction is determined by the sliding operation in the direction from the origin position to the overhang position (outward trip) or in the direction from the overhang position to the origin position (return trip). ) is defined by distinguishing whether it is a slide operation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142(b), in the forward slide motion (the slide motion corresponding to the value “01H” of the motion pointer), is associated with the swingable direction "left side". That is, when it is detected that the production member 620 has reached the origin position in the operation range (the number of operation steps is a range of 0 to 14) relatively close to the origin position of the slide operation, the production member 620 is viewed from the front. Swinging to the right is prohibited (restricted). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the portion of the outer wall portion 212 on the right side of the origin position of the slide operation from colliding with the effect member 620 and damaging the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 .

In addition, "both sides" is associated with the range of the number of steps of the slide motion "15 to 104" as the swingable direction. In other words, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position within the range of the number of motion steps "15 to 104", the swing motion is performed without limitation to either the right side in the front view or the left side in the front view. can be set. This is because the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 are sufficiently separated within this range of the number of motion steps, and there is no possibility of collision (interference) regardless of the motion direction.

Furthermore, the swingable direction “right” is associated with the number of operation steps “105 to 120” of the slide operation. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in a motion range relatively close to the extended position of the slide motion (range of 105 to 120 motion steps), the effect member 620 is moved to the front. Swinging to the left side of the view is prohibited (restricted). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the portion of the outer wall portion 212 on the left side of the overhanging position of the slide operation from colliding with the effect member 620 and damaging the outer wall portion 212 and the effect member 620 .

On the other hand, in the forward slide motion (the slide motion corresponding to the motion pointer value “02H”), the swingable direction “right” is associated with the range of motion steps “0 to 14” of the slide motion. The possible swing direction "both sides" is associated with the number of motion steps "15 to 104", and the possible swing direction "left side" is associated with the number of motion steps "105 to 120". By setting the motion direction of the swing motion with reference to these correspondence relationships even during the outward sliding motion, the effect member 620 can be operated without colliding with the outer wall portion 212 .

To summarize the possible swing directions, as shown in FIG. 143, the area for 15 steps (0 step to 14 step) including the origin position of the slide operation (detection position of the slide origin detection sensor 717) is on the left side (front view). It is possible to set the swing motion only in the left direction). On the other hand, in the region of 15 steps (steps 104 to 120) including the overhang position of the slide motion (detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718), the swing motion is set only to the right side (right direction in front view). becomes possible. In regions other than those described above, the swinging motion can be set without restrictions on the direction. Thus, by prescribing the direction of the swing motion corresponding to the number of steps of the slide motion, it is possible to prevent the performance member 620 from interfering with other components of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Returning to FIG. 140, the description continues. The RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example includes a step counter 223k, an operation scenario flag 223m, an operation pointer 223n, and a swing direction flag in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example. 223o, a correction value storage area 223p, an additional operation flag 223q, an origin return flag 223r, an initial operation flag 223s, a slide standby flag 223t, a swing standby flag 223u, a swing counter 223v, and a correction. A counter 223w for is added.

The step counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of action steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The reference for counting (the position where the number of action steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each accessory. The step counter 223k is configured to be able to count the number of action steps for each type of role item separately. That is, the step counter 223k has a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the production member 620, a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the support member 720, and so on, as many as the number of drive motors for driving accessories. A separate counter is provided.

Each time the step counter 223k receives an execution signal indicating that one step of operation has been executed from one of the various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10, the step counter 223k outputs the execution signal according to the type of the drive motor. The corresponding counter value is updated by 1 (see S1622 in FIG. 149). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an origin return operation is executed to return various accessories to their origin positions. 0 is set for the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223k becomes 0 can be surely set as the origin position of each role, so that the operation status (driving position) of each role can be accurately grasped. can.

The action scenario flag 223m is a flag indicating which action scenario is set among the action scenarios corresponding to the performance action of each role specified in the action scenario table 222c. The operation scenario flag 223m is composed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and each bit is associated with an operation scenario type. For example, the 0th bit of the motion scenario flag 223m corresponds to the slide motion table 222c1, and if the 0th bit is 1 (on), it means that the slide motion table 222c1 is set as the motion scenario. If it is 0 (off), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is not set. Similarly, for other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and if the corresponding operation scenario is not set, the corresponding bit is set to 0. (off).

In the operation scenario flag 223m, when an operation scenario is identified based on the variation pattern command in the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), the bit corresponding to that scenario is set to 1 (ON) ( (See S1704, S1708 and S1710 in FIG. 108). In addition, every time the variable effect in which the action scenario is set is completed, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). From this operation scenario flag 223m, it is possible to easily determine the type of the currently set operation scenario.

The action pointer 223n is a pointer used to identify the progress of the set action scenario. As described above, each data table constituting the motion scenario table 222c defines the value of the motion pointer 223n in association with the set motion content (motion speed, number of motion steps, motion direction). In this control example, the operation of setting content 1 is set to the driving motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated.

Further, the action pointer 223n can update the pointer value separately for each set action scenario. That is, the motion pointer 223n is a general term for different pointers provided for each motion scenario. Each pointer that constitutes the action pointer 223n is set to "01H" as a corresponding action scenario is newly set. 150, S5411 in FIG. 151, S5505 in FIG. 152, and S5712 and S5713 in FIG. 154). Operation content corresponding to the pointer value is set. Further, when the variable effect in which the corresponding action scenario is set is finished, the pointer value is reset to "00H". By using this action pointer 223n, the set action scenario can be accurately grasped.

The swing direction flag 223o is a flag indicating the direction of the swing motion. If the value of the swing direction flag 223o is ON, it indicates that the swing motion is being performed in the positive direction (leftward when viewed from the front). indicates that the swing motion is being performed. The swing direction flag 223o corresponds to the action indicated by the updated value of the action pointer 223n when the action scenario corresponding to the tilting action is set and the value of the action pointer 223n is updated. value (see S5507 in FIG. 152). That is, when a positive swing motion is set as the action content, the swing direction flag 223o is set to ON, and when a negative swing motion is set, the swing direction flag 223o is turned on. set to off. When the origin position is reached in the swing motion, the direction of the swing motion is identified by referring to the swing direction flag 223o. Then, it is determined based on the swing region table 222d whether or not there is no problem even if the origin is passed in the same swing motion direction.

The correction value storage area 223p is a storage area for storing correction values for correcting variations in performances due to deterioration over time and individual differences. More specifically, a correction value for correcting the motion speed of the support member 720 in accordance with the actual motion of the effect member 620 is stored. The correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p is calculated during the execution of the initial operation that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. (See S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151). The correction values are roughly divided into at least a correction value corresponding to the actual swing motion of the effect member 620 and a correction value corresponding to the actual slide motion of the strut member 720, and these are provided. The number of steps of the slide motion can be corrected according to the correction value of .

The correction value corresponding to the actual swing motion of the effect member 620 is the design value of the number of steps when the effect member 620 swings from the origin position to the right in the front view and to the left in the front view. (10 steps forward and 10 steps backward are performed in two directions, so a total of 40 steps) and the number of steps actually required to set a series of motions and return to the origin. be.

On the other hand, the correction value corresponding to the actual swing operation of the strut member 720 is the design value (120 steps) of the number of steps when the strut member 720 slides from the origin position to the extended position, and the actual number of steps. It is the ratio of the number of steps required to move from the origin position to the overhang position in the slide operation of . By correcting the setting contents of the motion scenario using these correction values, it is possible to match the mode of the sliding motion of the support member 720 with the mode of the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620 . That is, when the actual number of steps required for the swing motion is larger than the design value, it becomes necessary to set the number of steps larger than the design value, resulting in a longer swing motion execution period. Even in this case, a correction value for delaying the movement speed of the slide movement is stored in order to match the timing at which the three reciprocating swing movements are completed and the timing at which the slide movement reaches the extended position. Stored in area 223p.

On the other hand, when the actual number of steps required for the swing motion is smaller than the design value, the swing motion is completed in fewer steps than the design value, so the execution period of the swing motion is shortened. Even in this case, a correction value for increasing the speed of the slide motion is stored in order to match the timing at which the three reciprocating swing motions are completed and the timing at which the slide motion reaches the extended position. Stored in area 223p.

When setting the slide motion, the swing motion is set by multiplying the motion speed defined in the slide motion table 223c1 by the correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p. It is possible to match the timing of completion with the timing of reaching the overhanging position of the slide operation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation quality when the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are operated simultaneously.

The additional motion flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not there is an additional motion period that may be set after the number of motion steps defined in the motion scenario table 222c is completed. Here, in this control example, when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even though the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has been completed, additional operation is performed in the direction of the sensor. is configured to set This additional operation is repeatedly set step by step until the output of the corresponding sensor becomes H (high). A period during which this additional operation is set is called an additional operation period. By setting this additional operation period, even if the number of steps to detect the sensor deviates due to deterioration over time or individual differences, the sensor can be moved in the direction of the sensor without announcing an error immediately. can. The additional operation flag 223q is an abnormality detection process (see FIG. 155) that is executed when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even after the number of operation steps specified in the operation scenario table 222c has passed. , and is set to OFF when it is detected that the output of the corresponding sensor has become L (low) due to the additional operation (see S5604 in FIG. 153).

The return-to-origin flag 223r indicates that the return-to-origin operation (operation for returning the accessory that is displaced from the origin position to the origin position) that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is being executed. This is a flag indicating whether or not When the return-to-origin flag 223r is ON, it indicates that the return-to-origin operation is being performed, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the return-to-origin operation is not being performed. The return-to-origin flag 223r is set during the return-to-origin process (see FIG. 146).
It is set to ON when the return-to-origin operation is set (see S5103 in FIG. 146). On the other hand, in the return-to-origin operation, it is set to OFF when it is determined that all accessories have returned to the origin position (see S5304 in FIG. 150). By using the return-to-origin flag 223r, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the return-to-origin operation is being performed.

The in-initial-action flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not an initial action is being executed to determine whether or not each accessory operates normally after the return-to-origin action is completed. . When the in-initial-operation flag 223s is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being performed, and when it is off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being performed. The in-initial-operation flag 223s is set to ON after the return-to-origin operation is completed (see S5304 in FIG. 150), and is set to OFF when all the operations specified in the initial operation table 222c5 are completed. . By using the in-initialization flag 223s, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the initialization is being performed.

The slide standby flag 223t indicates that, in an effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, the slide motion of the support member 720 to the extended position ends before the swing motion of the effect member 620. This is a flag for determining whether it is the slide standby period or not, which is set when the This slide standby period is a period for waiting the slide motion until the swing motion is completed. and the sliding motion of the strut member 720 are set to start at the same time.

When this slide standby flag 223t is ON, it indicates that the above-described slide standby period is in effect, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is not in the slide standby period. The slide standby flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined in the slide motion process (see FIG. 156) that the slide motion is completed and the swing motion is not completed (see S5909 in FIG. 156). ). On the other hand, when both the slide motion and the swing motion are completed and the motion to return from the overhang position to the origin position is set, it is set to OFF (see S5706 in FIG. 154).

The swing standby flag 223u is set when the swing motion of the effect member 620 ends before the slide motion of the support member 720 to the extended position in the effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other. This is a flag for determining whether or not it is the swing waiting period, which is set when the camera is closed. This swing standby period is a period for waiting the swing motion until the slide motion is completed. It is set to initiate the movement and the sliding movement of the strut member 720 at the same time.

When the swing standby flag 223u is on, it indicates that the above-described swing standby period is in effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the swing standby period is not in progress. The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON when it is determined in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154) that the swing motion (tilting motion) is completed and the slide motion is incomplete. (See S5703 in FIG. 154). On the other hand, when both the slide motion and the swing motion are completed and the motion to return from the overhang position to the origin position is set, it is set to OFF (see S5911 in FIG. 156).

The swing counter 223v is a counter for counting the number of times the swing motion is executed. In this control example, based on the tilting operation table 222c2, the swinging operation is executed in each 10 steps in the horizontal direction from the origin position, and then the operation to return to the origin position is repeated three times. However, if exactly the same motion is defined for the tilting motion table 222c2 three times, the capacity of the ROM 222 may be compressed. Therefore, in this control example, only the operation contents for one swing motion are defined in the tilting motion table 222c2, and one swing motion ends (that is, the motion pointer defined in the tilting motion table 222c2 223n, the number of times of swinging is counted using the swinging counter 223v. Then, when the number of counts reaches 3, the swinging motion is terminated. 04H" are configured to be set in order. As a result, the amount of data in the tilting motion table 222c2 can be reduced, and the swinging motion can be repeated the same number of times (three times) each time.

The correction counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of steps of the actual swing motion of the effect member 620 and the number of steps of the actual sliding motion of the support member 720 in the initial motion. By comparing the number of steps counted by the correction counter 223w with the design value of the number of steps, it is possible to analyze (determine) how much the actual operation deviates from the design value. That is, it is possible to analyze (discriminate) the effects of individual differences, aged deterioration, and the like. A correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation is calculated according to the number of steps of each role counted by the correction counter 223w (see S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 156. FIG. First, FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. This start-up process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, as in the first control example.

Among the start-up processes, S1301 to S1313 are the same processes as S1301 to S1313 performed in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) in the first control example. The start-up process in the second control example differs in that an origin return process (S1321) is executed in addition to the start-up process in the first control example.

This origin return process (S1321) is executed after the processes from S1301 to S1312 are executed as in the first control example, and is a process for returning the accessory shifted from the origin position to the origin position. Then, after the origin return process (S1321) is executed, the time setting process (S1313) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, details of the origin return processing (S1321) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing origin return processing (S1321). This return-to-origin process (S1321) is a process for moving (moving) an accessory that is not located at the origin when the power is turned on, among various accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10, to the origin.

In the origin return process (S1321), first, whether there is an origin sensor (for example, the slide origin detection sensor 717, the tilt origin sensor 618, etc.) whose output is L (0 V) (that is, the light receiving part of the sensor is not shielded). It is determined whether or not (S5101). In the process of S5101, if it is determined that there is an origin sensor with an output of L (0V) (S5101: Yes), any of the accessories (the production member 620 of the tilting motion unit 600, the support member of the sliding motion unit 700 720) is not at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S5102 in order to return (move) the accessory that has shifted from the origin position to the origin position.

In the process of S5102, the action (movable) in the direction of the origin is set for the accessory corresponding to the sensor whose output is L (0V) (S5102). Then, the return-to-origin flag 223r is set to ON (S5103), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S5102, for example, the operation of twice the number of steps from the origin position to the projecting position of each accessory is set so as to reliably return to the origin position.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5101, if it is determined that there is no origin sensor with an output of L (0V) (S5101: No), it means that all accessories were already at the origin position when the power was turned on. do. That is, since it is not necessary to return (move) the role object to the origin position, each process of S5104 and S5105 for setting the initial motion of various role objects is executed.

In the process of S5104, the start of the initial action is set for various accessories (S5104), the in-initial-action flag 223s is set to ON (S5105), and the process ends. As described above, the initial operation is performed to check whether various accessories are operating normally. Since it is possible to check whether various accessories operate normally each time the power is turned on, it is possible to detect abnormalities in various accessories at an early stage.

By executing this origin return processing (S1321), all the accessories can be returned (moved) to the origin position. Since the step counter 223k of the corresponding role can be reset to 0 with the return to the origin position as a trigger, the number of operation steps of all the roles can be accurately grasped after the return to the origin. In addition, since the initial operation can be performed after returning to the origin, the same operation can be performed every time in the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the initial operation from the appearance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 147, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing main processing. This main process is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113, as in the first control example.

Among the main processes, S1501 to S1520 are the same processes as S1501 to S1520 performed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example. The main process in the second control example differs in that a role product action setting process (S1531) is executed in addition to the main process in the first control example.

This role product action setting process (S1531) is executed after the processes from S1501 to S1515 are executed as in the first control example. After execution of the role product action setting process (S1531), each process from S1516 to S1520 is executed. This role product operation setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the operation of each role product based on the selected variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, details of the above-described role product action setting process (S1531) will be described. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the role product action setting process (S1531). This role product action setting process (S1531) is, as described above, a process for setting the actions of various role products provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the role product action setting process (S1531), first, it is determined whether or not it is the action start timing of the role product (S5201). Here, the motion start timing of the character and the type of the character to be activated are specified for each variation pattern. In the process of S5201, based on the progress of the variation pattern, it is determined whether or not the operation start timing has come.

In the process of S5201, if it is determined that it is not time to start the action of the character (S5201: No), there is no need to set the action of the character, so this process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S5201, when it is determined that it is time to start the action of the character (S5201: Yes), the process proceeds to S5202 in order to set the action of the character at the start timing.

In the process of S5202, the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the action to be started (sliding action, tilting (swinging) action, initial action, etc.) is set to "01H" (S5202). Then, the action contents corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223n are read from the table corresponding to the character to be operated this time in the action scenario table 222c (S5203). Next, it is determined whether or not the operation content read in the process of S5203 is the sliding operation of the support member 720 (S5204).

In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the read motion content is a slide motion (S5204: Yes), the motion speed (pps) of the read motion content is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. A value obtained by multiplying the current correction value (both the correction value corresponding to the slide motion and the correction value corresponding to the swing motion) is set as the motion speed (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5206. As described above, this correction value is a value calculated based on the actual number of motion steps of the swing motion of the effect member 620 and the actual number of motion steps of the strut member 720 in the initial motion. By correcting the motion speed of the slide motion using this correction value, the end timing of the swing motion and the motion end timing of the slide motion can be matched.

On the other hand, in the process of S5204, if it is determined that the read motion content is not the slide motion (S5204: No), since there is no need to correct the motion, the process of S5205 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5206. .

After completing the processing of S5204 or S5205, the operation command is set based on the read operation content (or the corrected operation content) (S5206), and this processing ends. The operation command set by the process of S5206 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 . In the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221, various motors (vertical drive motor 431, open/close drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, It is sent to a control IC (not shown) of the tilt drive motor 661). Control ICs (not shown) for various motors drive and control the various motors based on the received operation commands. As a result, various accessories corresponding to various motors are moved.

Next, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, as in the first control example. This is a process for judging a command received from 110 and executing corresponding control.

Of this command determination process (S1511), in each process of S1601 to S1616, the same process as each of S1601 to S1616 executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example is executed. . The command determination process (S1511) in the second control example is different in that the processes from S1621 to S1623 are executed in addition to the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same parts as those in the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the command determination process (S1511) in the second control example, first, the processes from S1601 to S1615 are executed as in the first control example. Then, in the process of S1612, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), various motors (vertical drive also other 431, open/close drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilt drive It is determined whether or not an execution signal (execution command) output from the control IC (not shown) of the motor 661) has been received (S1621). In the process of S1621, if it is determined that the execution command has not been received from the motor driver (control IC) corresponding to each accessory, the process of S1616 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1621, if it is determined that an execution command has been received from any motor driver (control IC) (S1621: Yes), the motor driver (accessory) that outputs the operation command The step counter 223k is updated (S1622), execution command processing is executed for controlling the operation of each role according to the execution command (execution signal) (S1623), and this processing ends. By updating (adding) the step counter 223k corresponding to the motion by the processing of S1622, the state (number of motion steps) of each motion (slide motion, swing motion, etc.) can be accurately determined.

Next, details of the execution command process (S1623) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 156. FIG. First, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing execution command processing (S1623). This process is executed when an execution signal (execution command) transmitted from a control IC (not shown) of the drive motor 661) is received.

In the execution command process (S1623), first, it is determined whether or not the return-to-origin flag 223r is ON (S5301). In the process of S5301, if it is determined that the return-to-origin flag 223r is ON (S5301: Yes), the return-to-origin process (see FIG. 145) executed in the startup process of the sound lamp control device 113 described above ( 146), it means that the return-to-origin operation is being executed. Therefore, in this case, in order to determine whether or not the return-to-origin operation is completed, it is determined whether or not there is an origin sensor with an output of L (0 V) (that is, the light-receiving part of the sensor is not shielded from light). It is determined (S5302).

In the processing of S5302, if it is determined that there is an origin sensor with an output of L (0V) (S5302: Yes), one of the accessories is deviated from the origin position (that is, it is returning (moving) ), and the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is being continued, so the process is terminated as it is. In addition, when a plurality of accessories are returning to the origin, the operation stop is set in order from the accessories determined to have returned to the origin position in the processing of S5302. In addition, if there is an accessory that does not return to the origin even after the set number of steps of the return-to-origin operation has passed, an error is reported because there is a high possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally due to a failure or the like. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S5302, if it is determined that there is no origin sensor with an output of L (0V) (S5302: No), all the accessories are at the origin position (that is, return (movable) is completed). Since this is the case, the process of returning (moving) the accessory to the origin position is terminated, and the start of the initial action of each accessory is set (S5303). Then, the return-to-origin flag 223r is set to OFF, the initial operation flag 223s is set to ON (S5304), and this processing ends.

In the process of S5301, if it is determined that the return-to-origin flag 223r is not ON (S5301: No), all the accessories are returned (movable) to their origin positions, so the initial operation is performed. It is determined whether or not the flag 223s is on (S5305). In the process of S5305, if it is determined that the initial action flag 223s is ON (S5305: Yes), it means that the initial actions of various roles are being executed. is executed (S5306), and this process ends. The details of this initial operation process (S5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the initial motion flag 223s is off (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting motion (S5307). ). In the processing of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion (S5307: Yes), the tilting (swinging) motion is executed (the tilting drive motor 661 is to drive), tilting operation processing is executed (S5308), and this processing ends. Details of the tilting operation process (S5308) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155. FIG.

In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to a tilting (swinging) motion (S5307: No), then it is determined whether the received execution command is a command corresponding to a sliding motion. (S5309). In the processing of S5309, if it is determined that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the slide motion (S5309: Yes), the slide motion is executed to execute the slide motion (to drive the slide drive motor 751). After executing the process (S5310), the process ends. The details of this slide operation process (S5310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5309, if it is determined that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the slide motion (S5309: No), it means that an execution command for another role product (motion) has been received. In this case, in order to determine whether or not the action of the role corresponding to the received execution command is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the role has reached the set number of steps. It is determined (S5311). In the process of S5311, if it is determined that the set number of steps has not been reached (S5311: No), this process ends.

In the processing of S5311, if it is determined that the set number of steps has been reached (S5311: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the operation pointer 223n (corresponding to the operation) corresponding to the received execution command ( S5312). Then, the action content corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223n after the addition is read from the action scenario table 222c (S5313), the action command is set based on the read action content (S5314), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the details of the initial operation process (S5306) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing the initial operation process (S5306). This initial action process (S5306) is a process for executing initial actions of various roles.

In the initial operation process (S5306), first, 1 is added to the value of the correction counter 223w (S5401). As described above, this correction counter 223w is used to count the actual number of motion steps of the support member 720 and the actual number of motion steps of the effect member 620 in the initial motion. That is, the number of operation steps of the initial operation for the slide operation executed while the value of the operation pointer 223n is '01H' is counted, and the correction corresponding to the slide operation is performed by the ratio of the number of operation steps to the designed value of 120. Used to calculate values. In addition, the number of motion steps of the initial motion corresponding to the swing motion, which is executed between "02H" and "05H" of the motion pointer 223n, is counted, and the number of motion steps in one cycle of the swing motion is counted. The ratio to the design value of 40 is used to calculate the correction value corresponding to the swing motion.

In this control example, the value of the correction counter 223w is updated in each initial operation process (that is, even after the initial operation of the swing motion is completed). After the initial operation is finished and the calculation of the correction value is finished, the process of updating the correction counter 223w (S5401) may be skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load in the initial operation process (S5306).

When the processing of S5401 ends, the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the initial action is read out (S5402), the initial action table 222c5 is referred to based on the read value of the action pointer 223n, and the action of the corresponding role is completed. It is determined whether or not the conditions are met (S5403). In the processing of S5403, if it is determined that the condition for completing the motion of the corresponding role product is not established (S5403: No), the motion for one step is set for the corresponding role product (S5404). , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the condition for completing the action of the corresponding role object is satisfied (S5403: Yes), then whether or not the value of the action pointer 223n read in the process of S5402 is 01H. (S5405). In the processing of S5405, if it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is 01H (S5405: Yes), this means that the forward sliding motion of the strut member 720 has been completed in the initial motion (FIG. 142(a)). )reference). Therefore, in this case, the ratio of the design value (120 steps) of the number of operation steps of the slide operation to the actual number of operation steps (the count value of the correction counter 223w) (the value of the correction counter 223w divided by 120 value) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as a correction value for the slide motion (S5406). Then, the value of the correction counter 223w is initialized (S5407), and the process proceeds to S5411.

By initializing the correction counter 223w in the process of S5406, it can be used to count the actual number of motion steps in the initial motion of the swing motion to be executed next. Therefore, the counter for counting the actual number of operation steps required for the slide operation and the counter for counting the actual number of operation steps required for the swing operation can be covered by one shared counter (correction counter 223w). , the capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5405 that the value of the motion pointer 223n is not "01H" (S5405: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the motion pointer 223n is "05H" (S5408). ). In the process of S5408, if it is determined that the value of the motion pointer 223n is 05H (S5408: Yes), the initial motion of the swing motion (the motion corresponding to the values "02H" to "05H" of the motion pointer 223n) is performed. Since this means that all of them have been completed, a process of calculating a correction value corresponding to the swing motion is performed. That is, 40, which is the design value of the number of motion steps in one cycle of the swing motion, is replaced by the number of motion steps actually required for the swing motion in the initial motion (between the values "02H" and "05H" of the motion pointer 223n). The value obtained by dividing by the counted value of the correction counter 223w) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as a correction value for tilting (swinging) motion (S5409). Then, the value of the correction counter value 223w is initialized (S5410), and the process proceeds to S5411.

If it is determined in the process of S5408 that the value of the operation pointer 223n is not "05H" (that is, the value is "06H" or more) (S5408: No), the process proceeds directly to S5411.

After completing the processing of S5407, S5408 or S5410, 1 is added to the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the initial motion (S5411), and the motion corresponding to the value of the motion pointer 223n after addition is set (S5412), End this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, details of the tilting motion processing (S5308) executed in the execution command processing (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the tilting operation process (S5308). This tilting motion process (S5308) is a process for setting the tilting motion of the effect member 620 provided in the tilting motion unit 600 (see FIG. 9).

In the tilting motion process (S5308), first, it is determined whether or not the additional motion flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) motion is ON (S5501). As described above, this additional motion flag 223q is set when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even though the number of motion steps specified in the motion scenario table 222c has been completed. It indicates whether or not it is an additional operation period for additionally setting an operation.

In the process of S5501, if it is determined that the additional motion flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) motion is ON (S5501: Yes), it means that the effect member 620 is in the additional motion period, so the origin sensor An additional operation process (S5502) for executing an additional operation is executed until (the tilt origin sensor 618) is detected, and this process ends. Details of this additional operation processing (S5502) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the additional motion flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) motion is OFF (S5501: No), then tilting for tilting (swinging) the effect member 620 is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of steps of the drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (S5503). That is, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) motion (outward motion or backward motion) of the effect member 620 has been completed.

In the process of S5503, if it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has not reached the set number of steps (S5503: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5505, if it is determined that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (refer to the tilting operation table 222c2) (S5503: Yes), the operation pointer 223n of 1 This means that the tilting (swinging) motion (outward motion or return motion) of the effect member 620 corresponding to the value has been completed. It is determined from the value of the current motion pointer 223n whether or not it was a motion in the direction (S5504). That is, it is determined whether the value of the operation pointer 223n is either "01H" or "03H".

In the processing of S5504, if it is determined that the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 was the forward motion (motion in the direction opposite to the origin position) (S5504: Yes), then the effect member 620 is returned to the forward motion. The processing (S5505 to S5507) for (movable operation in the direction of the origin position) is executed.

In the processing of S5505, 1 is added to the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (head-swinging) motion (S5505), and the action content corresponding to the value of the motion pointer 223n after addition is stored in the motion scenario table 222c (tilting motion). It is read from the table 222c2) and set (S5506). Then, the value of the swing direction flag 223o is updated (inverted) to a value corresponding to the swing direction of the return trip (S5507), and this processing ends. For example, if the value of the swing direction flag 223o is 1 (swing motion in the positive direction) and the process of S5507 is executed, the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated (inverted) to 0, and the value becomes 0. (swing motion in the positive direction), the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated to 1 (inverted). As a result, the swing direction flag 223o can be updated in accordance with the reversal of the motion direction of the swing motion, so the motion direction can be accurately grasped.

On the other hand, in the process of S5504, the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 was the return motion (motion toward the origin position) (the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the effect member 620 is "02H" or " 04H") (S5504: No), it means that the effect member 620 is moved in the direction of the origin position. is H (5V) (whether the effect member 620 is at the origin position) (S5508).

In the S5508 process, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is L (0 V) (S5508: No), the tilting drive motor 661 is not driven as set, and the effect member 620 movement is hindered, the number of steps has shifted due to deterioration over time, etc., and there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred. . The details of this abnormality detection process (S5510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5508, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is H (5V) (S5508: Yes), tilting direction setting processing is executed (S5509), and this processing is executed. exit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the additional motion processing (S5502) executed in the above-described tilting motion processing (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing the additional operation process. In this additional motion processing (S5502), even if the effect member 620 provided in the tilting motion unit 600 in the above-described tilting motion processing (see FIG. 152) completes the motion of the set number of motion steps, it is moved to the origin position. (S5508: No) is executed when it is not (possibility that an abnormality has occurred), to move the effect member 620 to the origin position, or to perform an error notification.

In the additional operation process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is H (5V) (S5601). In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is not H (5 V) (S5601: No), the previous additional operation process (S5502) or the abnormality detection process (described later) (Fig. 155), the effect member 620 is displaced from the origin position even after the one-step operation set in step 155 is executed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion is 10 or more (S5605).

In the processing of S5605, if it is determined that the value of the step counter 223k is smaller than 10 (S5605: No), an additional operation for one step is set to move the effect member 620 to the origin position again. (S5606), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is 10 or more (S5605: Yes), the additional operation process (S5502) is repeatedly executed to prevent the return to the origin position, and the process of S5606 is performed. This is a case where the production member 620 (tilting drive motor 661) is not moved to the origin position even though the production member 620 (tilting drive motor 661) is moved by 10 steps or more (additional operation is performed). That is, it means that the number of operation steps sufficient to reach the origin position within the range of normal operation has been executed. Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S5607), and this processing ends.

When setting an error command, the operation of the effect member 620 is not limited to the one described above. , an error command may be set and the process may be terminated if there is a risk of contact with other accessories.

Also, the number of operation steps to be determined as an error is not limited to 10 steps, and may be arbitrarily determined according to the type of the accessory and the drive motor. For example, if a drive motor that is relatively prone to deterioration (the number of operation steps is likely to shift) is employed, the number of operation steps until an error is determined may be increased (for example, 15 times). Conversely, if a drive motor that is relatively accurate and has a long life is used, the error may be determined in a smaller number of operation steps (eg, five times).

In the processing of S5601, if it is determined that the output of the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5601: Yes), the processing of S5606 ( Alternatively, the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position by the one-step operation set by the process of S5801 of the abnormality detection process). In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) motion is updated (S5602), and the motion scenario table 222c (tilting motion table 222c2) stores the motion content corresponding to the updated value of the motion pointer 223n. is read from and set (S5603). Then, the additional motion flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) motion is set to OFF (S5604), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, details of the tilting direction setting process (S5509) executed in the above-described tilting motion process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing tilt direction setting processing. This tilting direction setting process (S5509) is executed when the effect member 620 provided in the tilting motion unit 600 reaches the origin position in the swinging motion in the above-described tilting motion process (see FIG. 152) (S5508: Yes). This is the process to be performed.

In the tilt direction setting process (S5509), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (or greater than 3) (S5701). The value of the swing counter 223v is updated by the process of S5714, which will be described later. is incremented by 1 (see S5715). Therefore, when the value of the swing counter 223v is 3, it means that the swing motion of the effect member 620 has been performed three times.

In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (S5701: Yes), this means that the swing (tilting) motion of the effect member 620 has been completed the prescribed number of times (three times). Therefore, next, it is determined whether or not the sliding motion of the support member 720 provided in the tilting motion unit 600 is (or was) the forward motion (S5702). In the processing of S5702, if it is determined that the sliding motion of the support member 720 is the return path (or was the return path) (S5702: No), then the effect member 620 will not be swung. This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the slide motion of the support member 720 is the forward trip (was the forward motion) (S5702: Yes), after the slide motion of the support member 720 (forward motion) is completed, the neck of the production member 620 In order to execute the swing motion, the process proceeds to S5703.

In the process of S5703, it is determined whether or not the sliding motion (outward motion) of the strut member 720 has been completed (S5703). More specifically, if the slide standby flag 223t is on, it is determined that the slide operation (outward movement) of the support member 720 has been completed, and if the slide standby flag 223t is off, the slide operation ( forward movement) is not completed.

In the process of S5703, if it is determined that the slide standby flag 223t is ON and the slide motion is completed (S5703: Yes), the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the slide motion is set to 02H, The value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the (head swing) motion is set to 03H (S5705). Then, based on the value of the action pointer 223n set by the process of S5705, the contents of the action are read from the action scenario table (slide action table 222c1 and tilting action table 222c2) and set (S5706). By the processing of S5706, the prop member 720 of the tilting motion unit 600 is moved in the backward direction, and the effect member 620 is set to swing (tilt) motion (three reciprocations).

After completing the processing of S5706, the slide standby flag 223t is set to OFF (S5707), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5703, if it is determined that the slide standby flag 223t is off and the slide motion is not completed (S5703: No), in order to wait until the slide motion of the strut member 720 is completed, The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON (S5704), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this processing ends.

In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the value of the swing counter 223v is not 3 (is 2 or less) (S5701: No), the process proceeds to S5709 to continue the swing (tilting) operation. .

In the process of S5709, the swing direction before reaching the origin position is specified based on the value of the swing direction flag 223o (S5709). Then, based on the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide motion and the swing area table 222d (see FIG. 142), the possible swing direction is specified (S5710).

After the process of S5710 is finished, the swing direction (advance direction) after passing the origin is specified from the swing direction before reaching the origin specified in the process of S5709, and the swing direction (advance direction) after passing the origin is determined. , S5710 (S5711). In the process of S5711, if it is determined that the swing direction (advance direction) after passing the origin is not the swingable direction (S5711: No), the swing direction (advance direction) after passing the origin is the swingable direction. , the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging (tilting) motion is updated three times (S5712), and the process proceeds to S5714.

On the other hand, in the process of S5711, if it is determined that the swinging (tilting) direction (advancing direction) after passing the origin is the swingable direction (S5711: Yes), the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging motion The value is updated once (S5713), and the process proceeds to S5714.

Here, the processing of S5712 and S5713 will be specifically described. When the tilting direction setting process (S5509) is executed, the effect member 620 is at the origin position as described above. In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swinging motion is "02H" (if the swinging direction is to the left) or "04H" (if the swinging direction is to the right). . Therefore, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated three times, 01H (left swing direction) is set when 02H (left swing direction) is set, and 04H (head swing direction is left). If 03H (swing direction is right) is set, 03H (swing direction is right) is set. That is, the value is updated to a value that causes forward movement in the same direction as the previously set swing direction. As a result, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing the origin is not a swingable direction, the forward movement is set to be performed again in the same direction.

On the other hand, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated once, if 02H (left swing direction) is set, 03H (right swing direction) is set, If "04H" (swinging direction is to the right) is set, "01H" (swinging direction is to the left) is set. That is, the value is updated to the forward movement in the direction opposite to the previously set swing direction (the direction passing through the origin position). As a result, when the swinging (advancing) direction after passing the origin is the swingable direction, the effect member 620 is set to move forward in the direction passing through the origin position in the opposite direction. It can swing (tilt) in the left-right direction around the center.

It should be noted that in the process of S5711, the determination as to whether or not the swinging (advancing) direction after passing the origin is the swivelable direction is not limited to the one described above. For example, until the production member 620 next comes to the origin position, the position where the support member 720 is to be moved is pre-read (guessed), the possible swing direction is specified, and the possible swing direction is determined. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more accurately determine the swingable direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the production member 620 contacts other components (other accessories, the outer wall portion 212, etc.).

When the process of S5712 or S5713 is completed, the operation scenario table (tilting operation table 222c2) is referred to based on the updated value of the operation pointer 223n to read and set the operation details (S5714). Then, the value of the swing counter 223v is updated (S5715), and this processing ends. The value of the swing counter 223v in the processing of S5715 is incremented by 1 when the effect member 620 reciprocates left and right once (reciprocates to the left and then to the right). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and of course 1 may be added each time the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the details of the abnormality detection setting process (S5510) executed in the above-described tilting motion process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing abnormality detection processing. This abnormality detection process (S5510) is performed when the return movement of the effect member 620 is completed in the above-described tilting movement process (see FIG. 152), that is, when the movement to the origin position is completed, the origin sensor (tilting origin sensor 618) is executed when it is determined that the effect member 620 is displaced from the origin position.

In the abnormality detection process (S5510), first, an operation command corresponding to one step operation is set for the accessory (here, the effect member 620) in which an abnormality has been detected (S5801). Then, the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the role object whose action is set by the processing of S5801 is reset to 0 (S5802), the additional action flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) action is set to ON (S5803), End this process. By the processing from S5801 to S5803, in the above-described additional motion processing (FIG. 153), additional motions of up to 10 steps are executed, and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position (see S5606 in FIG. 153). Also, in the additional motion process (FIG. 153), even if the additional motion for 10 steps is executed, if the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position, an error is reported (see S5607 in FIG. 153). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the slide operation process (S5310) executed in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing slide operation processing. This slide motion process (S5310) is executed when an execution command corresponding to the slide motion is received in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150). This process is executed when

In the slide motion process (S5310), first, it is determined whether or not the additional motion flag 223q for the slide motion is ON (S5901). In the processing of S5901, if it is determined that the additional movement flag 223q for the slide movement is ON (S5901: Yes), the return movement of the strut member 720 has ended, that is, even if the movement to the origin position has ended, Regardless, this is the case where the origin sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717) determines that the strut member 720 is not at the origin position, and an additional operation of 10 steps is executed. In this case, the additional action process (FIG. 153) described above is executed for the slide action accessory (post member 720) (S5902), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the additional motion flag 223q for the slide motion is off (S5901: No), then the number of steps set by the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide motion (the slide motion table 222c1 ) is reached (S5903).

In the processing of S5903, if it is determined that the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide motion has not reached the set number of steps (see the slide motion table 222c1) (S5903: No), the slide motion continues. is executed, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S5903, if it is determined that the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has reached the set number of steps (S5903: Yes), the strut member 720 has been moved to the origin position or the extended position. is. In this case, the corresponding sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717 or slide position detection sensor 718) is used to determine whether or not the strut member 720 is moved to the origin position or the extended position. It is determined whether or not the output is H (5V) (S5904).

In the process of S5904, if it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is L (0 V), that is, if it is determined that the support member 720 is not moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904), the abnormality detection process described above is performed. (see FIG. 155) is executed for the slide action accessory (pillar member 720) (S5905), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5904 that the output of the corresponding sensor is H (5V), that is, that the strut member 720 is moved to the origin position or the extended position (S5904: Yes), Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the slide motion is 01H (forward motion) (S5906).

In the process of S5906, when it is determined that the value of the operation pointer 223n is "02H" (return operation) (S5906: No), the timing of ending the sliding operation of the strut member 720 provided in the sliding operation unit 700. Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5906 that the value of the motion pointer 223n is 01H (outward motion) (S5906: Yes), the process proceeds to S5907 to move the support member 720 in the backward motion.

In the process of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5907). In the processing of S5907, it is determined whether or not the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 has been completed based on whether the swing standby flag 223u is ON. Specifically, when the swing standby flag 223u is on, it is determined that the tilting (swing) motion of the effect member 620 has been completed, and when the swing standby flag 223u is off, It is determined that the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 is incomplete.

In the processing of S5907, if it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is off, that is, the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 is not completed (S5907: No), the slide motion is completed. , the slide standby flag 223t is set to ON (S5908), and the process ends. The slide standby flag 223t that is set to ON by the process of S5908 is referred to when determining whether or not the slide operation is completed in the tilting direction setting process (see FIG. 154) (see S5703 in FIG. 154). .

On the other hand, in the processing of S5907, if it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is ON, that is, the tilting (swinging) motion of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5907: Yes), the tilting motion unit 600 in order to perform the return path operation, the process proceeds to S5909.

In the process of S5909, the action pointer 223n corresponding to the slide action is set to 02H (return action), and the action pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) action is set to "03H" (swinging start action to the right). Set (S5909). Then, the operation contents corresponding to the updated value of the operation pointer 223n are read from the slide operation table 222c1 and the tilt operation table 222c2 and set (S5910). After that, the swing standby flag 223u is set to OFF (S5911), and this processing ends.

As described above, in this control example, the number of actual motion steps of the swinging motion of the effect member 620 and the sliding motion of the support member 720 are analyzed when the initial motion is executed upon power-on, and the number of steps is compared with the design value. It is configured so that the difference can be distinguished. By correcting the operation speed of the slide operation according to the difference from the design value, the tilting operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 can be finished at the same timing. That is, it is possible to finish the predetermined operation contents of the effect member 620 (three times of swinging motion) until the slide motion is completed. Therefore, even if the sliding motion ends, only the swinging motion continues to be executed, or even if the swinging motion ends, the sliding motion does not end, and the sliding motion continues in a state where the effect member 620 is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variation in motion such as sagging. Therefore, when the swinging motion of the effect member 620 and the sliding motion of the support member 720 are performed in combination, the motion quality can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the possible swing directions in the swing motion are defined according to the number of steps of the slide motion. When the origin position of the swing motion is reached during the execution of the swing motion of the effect member 620, the number of steps of the current slide motion is determined, and the swing motion in the opposite direction after passing the origin is performed. It is configured to determine if it is executable. As a result, even if the corresponding relationship between the number of operation steps for the slide operation and the number of operation steps for the swing operation deviates from the corresponding relationship shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem of interference (collision) between the outer wall portion 212 and the like) and the effect member 620 .

In this control example, the number of actual operation steps of the slide operation and the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation are analyzed in the initial operation, and the correction value is calculated. The calculation timing is not limited to this. For example, even if it is determined that the player is not playing a game (during the demonstration stage), the number of actual operation steps of the slide motion and the swing motion is analyzed, and the correction value is calculated. good too. As a result, even if the number of action steps for a slide motion or a swing motion is changed during a game, a correction value can be calculated in accordance with the changed motion in the demonstration production, so that the swing motion and the slide motion can be calculated. It is possible to further improve the quality of the action in the performance action that is combined with the action. Further, for example, it may be configured to correct the action scenario of the slide action during the execution of an effect in which the slide action and the swing action are performed in combination. More specifically, for example, when a swing motion and a slide motion are executed in combination, the number of steps required for the first cycle of the swing motion is counted (or the motion time is counted). every other), the remaining number of motion steps (or motion time) required to perform a total of three cycles (three times) of the swing motion may be calculated. Then, based on the remaining number of steps for performing three cycles (three times) of the swing motion (that is, for executing the remaining two cycles of the swing motion) and the remaining number of motion steps for the slide motion. , the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected. More specifically, for example, in a state where the number of operation steps of the slide motion is 70, when one cycle of the slide motion is completed, 80 steps (two cycles) of the swing motion remain. become. In this case, a corrected value (80 steps/70 steps ×100 pps) is set as the new operating speed. Further, in the initial operation, the actual number of operation steps required for the swinging operation and the actual number of operation steps required for the sliding operation are determined in advance, and the determination result is taken into account to calculate the correction value. may Specifically, in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154), this process determines whether or not the swing counter 223v is 1 (whether or not one cycle of the swing motion has ended). Then, when it is determined that one cycle has ended, the process of determining the number of remaining motion steps of the slide motion and the swing motion may be executed. Then, the motion speed of the slide motion may be corrected according to the calculated number of remaining motion steps. As a result, the slide motion can be corrected each time the presentation is executed in which the slide motion and the swing motion are combined, so that the slide motion reaches the projecting position more reliably. It is possible to make the robot perform a prescribed number of swing motions (three times). Furthermore, in the case described above, the slide operation table 222c1 may be eliminated. Then, based on the number of motion steps (or motion time) of the effect member 620 at the end of one cycle of the swinging motion, the operation content of the support member 720 is calculated so as to match the remaining motion of the effect member 620. It may be configured as

In this control example, the operation speed of the slide operation is corrected based on the correction value. good. Specifically, for example, the operation speed is multiplied by the ratio between the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation and the design value as a correction value for the slide operation, and the overhang position is reached when the operation as designed is executed. The time and the time to reach the overhanging position in the actual operation may be matched. Specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps is 10% greater than the design value, the operation speed is increased by 10% so that the increase in the number of steps is absorbed (offset) by the operation speed, and the operation time is as designed. may be configured to reach the overhanging position. Similarly, a correction value may be calculated from the actual number of motion steps of the swing motion, and the time required for three reciprocations of the swing motion may be matched with the designed value. As a result, it is possible to finish the action of the role object in the same action time each time, and to reliably perform the same number of swing actions.

In this control example, when correcting the operation speed of the slide operation, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio between the designed number of operation steps and the actual number of operation steps. Therefore, a plurality of operation scenarios may be prepared according to the difference between the designed number of operation steps and the actual number of operation steps. By determining the amount of deviation between the designed number of operation steps and the actual number of operation steps, an operation scenario corresponding to the amount of deviation may be selected. As a result, when executing the slide motion, there is no need to recalculate the motion speed from the correction value each time. It can reduce the load.

In this control example, the correction value for correcting the operation content of the slide operation is calculated, but selectable correction values may be defined in the ROM 222 or the like in advance. Then, a correction value corresponding to the difference between the designed number of operation steps and the actual number of operation steps may be selected and used as the correction value when setting the slide operation. As a result, instead of the process of calculating the correction value, the correction value can be selected by relatively light processing of selecting the correction value corresponding to the deviation width, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced. be able to.

In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the ratio between the actual number of steps required for the slide operation and the swing operation and the designed number of steps (Typ value). not a thing For example, the time required for the slide motion and the swing motion may be measured, and the correction value may be calculated based on the ratio of the designed motion time. For example, the design operation time of the slide operation from the origin position to the overhang position by the strut member 720 is 1.2 seconds (120 steps/100 pps). When it takes 0.5 seconds (when the required time is multiplied by 1.25), 1.25 may be stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value for the slide motion.

In this control example, each time the origin position of the swing motion is reached, the possible swing direction defined in the swing region table 222d is determined according to the number of steps of the slide motion of the strut member 720, and after reaching the origin, Although it is configured to determine the swing direction, it is not limited to this configuration. For example, for each step of the swing motion, the position coordinates of the effect member 620 are calculated with the slide position taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the effect member 620 fits in the area between the origin position and the overhang position. can be configured to More specifically, for example, when the effect member 620 performs a swing motion to the right in a front view, the horizontal coordinates (coordinates in the slide motion direction) of the end point of the right end of the upper surface of the effect member 620 arranged on the rightmost side. may be calculated for each step. Then, the calculated horizontal coordinates match the horizontal coordinates of the right end of the production member 620 (10 cm to the right from the origin position) when both the production member 620 and the support member 720 are at the origin position. The swinging direction may be reversed to the origin direction (to the left when viewed from the front) while paying attention to the swinging motion. Similarly, when the effect member 620 performs a swing motion to the left in the front view, the horizontal coordinate (coordinate in the slide motion direction) of the leftmost end point of the upper surface of the effect member 620 arranged on the leftmost side is set by one step. It may be configured to be calculated every time. Then, when the horizontal coordinates of the left end of the effect member 620 (10 cm to the left from the overhang position) when the effect member 620 is at the origin position and the support member 720 is at the overhang position, the head swings to the left. The swing direction may be reversed to the origin direction (to the right when viewed from the front) while watching the movement.

The method for calculating the horizontal coordinates will be described in more detail below. In this modification, the width of the effect member 620 is 20 cm, the radius of the swing motion is 15 cm, and the rotation angle of the effect member 620 is 6 degrees ( That is, 60 degrees in 10 steps), and the horizontal distance from the origin position to the overhang position is 60 cm (that is, 0.5 cm per step). In this case, when the effect member 620 is moved rightward five steps, for example, the effect member 620 rotates 30 degrees (6 degrees×5 steps). As a result, the midpoint of the upper surface of the effect member 620 is varied in the right direction in front view by 7.5 cm (15 steps as a horizontal coordinate) (15 cm×sin 30°). The horizontal coordinates of the right end point on the upper surface of the effect member 620 are about 8.7 cm (18 steps as horizontal coordinates) to the right in front view from the center of the upper surface (10 cm×cos 30°). That is, the coordinates of the right end of the effect member 620 are located on the right side of the horizontal coordinates by 33 steps. Therefore, considering that the width of the right half of the effect member 620 at the origin position (inverted state) is 20 steps (10 cm), when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 13 steps or less from the origin position, Abort the swing motion and reverse the swing direction to the left.

In this way, the number of motion steps for the slide motion and the number of motion steps for the swing motion are converted into horizontal coordinates, and compared with the left and right horizontal coordinate thresholds (coordinates of the limit that does not interfere with the outer wall portion 212). is variable, even when the swinging motion and the sliding motion deviate from the designed motion, the swinging motion can be operated within the limit of preventing (suppressing) interference. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more lively swinging motion, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

In this control example, the effect member 620 is provided above the support member 720, and the method of correcting the motion scenario of the character in which the swinging motion and the sliding motion are performed in unison has been described, but the present invention can be applied. The role item is not limited to this configuration. It can be applied as long as it is a plurality of accessories that operate in conjunction with each other. It may be configured to execute the swing motion in synchronization with each other.

In this control example, the direction in which the swing is possible is defined, and control is performed so that the effect member 620 and other components such as the outer wall portion 212 do not collide (interfere), but the swing motion is changed in the middle of the motion. The conditions for doing so are not limited to these. For example, it may be determined whether or not the timing of reaching the overhanging position by the sliding motion and the timing of reaching the origin position from the right side of the front view of the effect member 620 deviate from each other. Then, when the timing is likely to be off, the operation content (set value) of the swing motion is corrected, and the timing of reaching the overhanging position by the sliding motion and the effect member 620 reaching the origin position from the right side in the front view. You may make it correspond with the timing which carries out. More specifically, for example, at a predetermined position (for example, 10 steps before the overhanging position) between the origin position of the sliding movement and the overhanging position, the number of remaining steps until the swinging movement is completed is determined. do. Then, the motion speed may be corrected to the motion speed at which the swing motion is completed in the remaining number of steps. For example, when it is determined that there are only 5 steps remaining to the origin position of the swing motion when there are 10 remaining steps in the slide motion, the motion speed of the swing motion is set to half (100 pps→50 pps). , it may be corrected so that the swinging motion is performed in exactly 5 steps while the sliding motion is performed in 10 steps. Further, when the number of remaining steps of the swing motion is small with respect to the slide motion, a weight may be added instead of varying the motion speed. The weight may be applied only once, or may be applied in multiple times. On the other hand, on the other hand, when it is determined that there are 20 steps remaining for the swing motion to the origin position of the swing motion when there are 10 steps remaining in the slide motion, the motion speed of the swing motion is doubled (100 pps→ 200 pps), correction may be made so that the swing motion is performed in exactly 20 steps while the slide motion is performed in 10 steps. Further, instead of determining the timing for correcting the motion content of the swing motion based on the number of steps of the slide motion, it is also possible to determine whether or not to correct the swing motion by determining the slide position using a sensor or the like. . In this way, by matching the timing at which the sliding motion ends and the timing at which the swinging motion ends, it is possible to improve the appearance quality when the effect member 620 and the strut member 720 operate in combination. can. Further, as another example of conditions for changing the swing motion in the middle of the motion, in the middle of the slide motion, the position of the slide motion (the number of remaining motion steps) and the number of swing motions are determined, and the remaining motion is determined. It may be determined whether or not the prescribed number of swings (three times) can be completed in the number of steps. If it is determined that the predetermined number of swings is not reached, the operation speed of the swing motion may be varied to correct the motion to achieve the predetermined number of swings. Note that the processing for determining the number of remaining motion steps and the number of swing motions and the processing for correcting the motion speed of the swing motion are performed when the additional motion flag 223q is set in the processing of S5901 in the slide motion processing (see FIG. 156). It may be executed after it is determined to be off (S5901: No).

In this control example, in the additional operation process (see FIG. 153), if the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H even if one additional step is performed in the direction of the sensor, an error command is set to indicate an error. Although it was configured to notify, the method of notifying the error is not limited to this. For example, the third pattern display device 81 displays an image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality, and operates the character object in which the abnormality is detected for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) in a dedicated operation mode (for abnormality detection). It may be configured such that the action of the character whose abnormality is not detected is stopped while the action is continued. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine from the appearance which accessory has an abnormality. In other words, when an error is reported to a hall clerk or the like, it is possible to easily determine that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the accessory that continues to operate.

In this control example, it is assumed that the accessories (the production member 620 and the support member 720) operate in combination. may be controlled in conjunction with each other. For example, the strut member 720 may be configured to switch the lighting patterns of the decorative parts 29 to 33 in conjunction with the sliding motion. In this case, a lighting pattern may be set in accordance with the sliding motion of the support member 720 . Alternatively, the lighting mode may be switched each time the support member 720 returns to the origin position. For example, the illumination colors of the decorative parts 29 to 33 may be switched in the order of red→green→blue→red . By configuring in this manner, the lighting color set at the time of the previous sliding operation is simply stored, and switching is performed in accordance with the start of the sliding operation, thereby simplifying the lighting control of the illumination parts 29 to 33. can do. In addition, it is possible to suppress the shift between the progress of the slide motion and the switching timing of the lighting pattern, as compared with the case where the lighting pattern is switched in accordance with the progress of the slide motion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the visual quality during the sliding operation. In addition, since it is sufficient to switch the lighting color when returning to the origin position, the sliding operation can be changed by changing the drive motor for sliding the support member 720 or by changing the mechanism such as the gear ratio. Even if the round-trip time is changed, the lighting control data before the change can be used as it is. That is, the step of changing the lighting pattern in accordance with the configuration after the change can be omitted, so the work of the designer can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 173. FIG. In the first control example described above, when an image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub-display device 690 during a normal game, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is reduced by using various power-on images. Technology to reduce it was explained.

On the other hand, in the third control example, a control method that can further increase the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance, which is one of the entertainment performances executed on the sub-display device 690, will be described. Although details will be described later, the timing effect is a effect in which the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 provided on the front frame 14 is suggested by the image displayed on the sub-display device 690. It is a kind of entertainment production executed while the variable display of special symbols is being executed. In this timing effect, points are added each time the timing indicated on the sub-display device 690 and the timing at which the player actually operates the frame button 229 match, and points are earned until the timing effect ends. If the accumulated points are equal to or higher than a predetermined reference value (norma), the player is provided with a privilege.

The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a frame button 229 is provided in place of the frame button 22 and that the sound lamp control device 113 The configuration of the provided ROM 222 and RAM 223 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. be. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 157, a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is provided with a frame button 229 on the left side of the ball rental operation unit 40 when viewed from the front, and the frame button 22 is deleted. The frame buttons 229 are composed of four types of button types: an up button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a down button DB. These four types of buttons are used in the timing effect. That is, the timing effect is configured to indicate the pressing (operating) timing of the frame button 229 and the type of button to be pressed (operated) (see FIGS. 163 and 164). When both the timing suggested by the presentation and the type of the button match, points are added.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 165, the display mode of the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the sub-display device 690 when the timing effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 163, when the timing effect is executed, a plurality of display areas (display areas 901, 902, 903, 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, 905) are displayed on the sub display device 690. FIG.

Display areas 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, and 905 displayed in the lower half of the display area of the sub-display device 690 suggest to the player the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229 and the button type to be operated. This is the display area where the display for As shown in FIG. 163, the display area 905 is composed of a vertically long rectangular pressing suggestion area 911a and four horizontally long rectangular scroll display areas 911b to 911e. The respective scroll display areas 911b to 911e are arranged vertically and displayed in this order.

Each of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e is configured so that various images can be scrolled and displayed in the left direction (in the direction of the depression suggestion area 911a) when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 163, scroll bars 912a to 912e, a bar 913a, and the like are provided as various scroll-displayed images. Points are added by pressing the button of the corresponding type at the timing when the scroll-displayed various images are scrolled to a position overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a. The scroll bar is configured such that corresponding points (10 points or 50 points) are added when the corresponding button type is pressed once at the timing when it overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. On the other hand, the repeated hitting bar is configured such that corresponding points (50 points) are added when the corresponding button is pressed ten times while overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a.

A balloon-shaped display area 901 pointing to the pressing suggestion area 911a is displayed above the pressing suggestion area 911a. In this display area 901, a character saying "PUSH the button when the bars overlap and aim for 1000 points!" is displayed. According to the display contents of the display area 901, points are added by pressing the frame button 229 at the timing when the various images scrolled and displayed in the scroll display areas 911b to 911e are scrolled to the position of the pressing suggestion area 911a. It can be easily understood by a player.

A substantially rectangular display area 902 is displayed on the upper right of the sub-display device 690 . This display area 902 displays the types of images that can be scroll-displayed in the scroll display areas 911b to 911e, and the types of images that are acquired when the button of the corresponding type is pressed (operated) at the timing when the image overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. Correspondence with possible points is displayed. Specifically, the white scroll bar indicates that the point is 50 points, the hatched scroll bar indicates that the point is 10 points, and the scroll bar that indicates the characters "Continuous hits!" It is displayed that it is 50 points. By clearly indicating the correspondence relationship between the image and the points in the display area 902, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having doubts about the increase or decrease of the points, so that the player can feel at ease with the timing presentation. You can play games inside.

A horizontally long rectangular display area 903 is displayed below the display area 902 . In this display area 903, the total points obtained in the current timing effect and the quota are displayed. In the example of FIG. 163(a), while the quota is 1000 points, it shows a state in which 100 points have been obtained so far, so the display area 902 displays the characters "points: 0100/1000". is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize the current points for the quota. Therefore, since the game can be played aiming at the quota, the willingness of the player to participate can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, when the quota is achieved in the timing effect, the present game state is notified as a privilege. In this control example, as in the first control example, a 2R probability variable jackpot is provided as the jackpot type. In addition, as a kind of loss, the same opening action as the 2R variable probability big win is provided as a small win, and it is not possible to identify whether the 2R variable probability big win or the small win is won from the performance or the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a. is configured as Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the game state after the 2R opening action of the specific winning hole 65a is executed. Therefore, in this control example, as a benefit of the timing production, if the quota is achieved at the end of the timing production, the current game state (whether the special symbol is a variable state or a low probability state) is notified. It is configured as follows. As a result, a player who wants to know the current game state can be made to actively participate in the timing presentation. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by making the privilege when the timing effect succeeds not affect the game result (notification of the current game state), whether the privilege is given purely by the skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing. You can decide whether On the other hand, if you set a benefit for which the result has already been determined (for example, a jackpot) at the start of the fluctuation (before the timing effect starts), the timing effect will start. Previously, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the manner of achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect will decrease. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to "game state notification" which does not affect the game result. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a privilege purely according to the timing of pressing the frame button 229 . In other words, when the privilege is granted, the player can feel more strongly that he/she has acquired the privilege by himself or herself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

On the left side of the display area 905, circular display areas 904a to 904d are displayed vertically. The display areas 904a to 904d are displayed so that their vertical positions are substantially the same as those of the scroll display areas 911b to 911e. In addition, the characters "top", "right", "left", and "bottom" are displayed inside these display areas 904a to 904d, respectively. These characters allow the player to easily recognize the button types corresponding to the scroll display areas 911b to 911e having substantially the same vertical positions as the display areas 904a to 904d. That is, the scroll display area 911b, which has substantially the same vertical position as the display area 904a in which the character "UP" is displayed, is a display area for suggesting the pressing (operation) timing of the up button UB. can be done. Similarly, the scroll display area 911c indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the right button RB, the scroll display area 911d indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the left button LB, and the scroll display area 911e indicates the down button DB. It is possible to easily recognize that the pressing (operation) timing of is suggested.

By executing the timing effect, the frame button 229 can be operated with the aim of achieving the quota, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 163(b) and 164(a), the display mode when the operation of the frame button 229 is detected in the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163(b) shows a display mode when the frame button 229 can be pressed (points can be obtained) at the timing when the scrolled image overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a in the timing effect. ing.

FIG. 163(b) shows the display contents when the player presses the up button UB at the timing when the white scroll bar 912a scroll-displayed in the slide display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. . As shown in FIG. 163(b), when it is detected that the player has pressed the up button UB, a display area 904a (corresponding to the up button UB) labeled with "up" lights up. As a result, the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 normally detects the player's operation (pressing), so that the player can play the game during the timing performance with more peace of mind.

A display area 921 is formed on the left side of the display areas 904a to 904d to indicate that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 229 with good timing. Since the characters "GREAT" are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 229 is correct. Furthermore, below the display area 921, characters 922 are displayed that indicate the points given by the successful pressing. The character 922 of "+50" allows the player to easily recognize the acquired points. In addition, the display in the display area 903 is updated according to the acquired points (0100/1000→0150/1000). These display contents allow the player to recognize that both the timing and button type of pressing the frame button 229 match (successful pressing). In addition, the points earned (given) and the total points up to the present can be easily confirmed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164(a), the display contents when the timing of pressing the button deviates from the suggestion display area 911a will be described. FIG. 164(a) is a diagram showing display contents when the pressing of the up button UB is detected before the scroll bar 912a reaches the pressing suggestion area 911a. Also in this case, the display area 904a (corresponding to the up button UB) to which the character "up" is attached lights up in order to notify that the pressing of the up button UB has been normally detected.

A display area 921 is formed on the left side of the display area 904a to indicate that the player has failed to press (operate) the frame button 229. FIG. Since the characters "BAD" are displayed in this display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 is incorrect. Furthermore, characters 924 are displayed below the display area 921 to indicate that a penalty has been imposed due to failure in pressing. The character 924 of "-10" makes it possible to easily recognize that points have been subtracted due to failure in pressing. Therefore, since the frame button 229 can be operated more carefully, the player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be enhanced. In addition, the display in the display area 903 is updated according to the subtracted points (0100/1000→0090/1000). By these display contents, the player can be made to recognize that the pressing of the frame button 229 has failed. In addition, it is possible to easily check the points that have been subtracted and the total points up to the present.

Next, examples of modes with different difficulty levels will be described. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when executing the timing effect, the difficulty level of the timing effect to be executed this time can be determined from among a plurality of difficulty levels. Also, the determined difficulty level is not fixed, and may be reviewed during the performance depending on the progress of the timing performance, the player's participation in the timing performance, and the like.

FIG. 164(b) is a diagram exemplifying a mode of timing effect with a high degree of difficulty. As shown in FIG. 164(b), in this modification, the higher the difficulty level, the higher the appearance rate of the scroll bars with fewer points (scroll bars 915a to 915e that give 10 points if successfully pressed). Become. In other words, the quota cannot be achieved unless the frame button 229 is pressed accurately more times. Also, the higher the difficulty, the faster the scroll speed. This makes it difficult to match the timing of pressing the frame button 229 . By providing timing effects with different degrees of difficulty, it is possible to accommodate both players who are good at pressing the frame button 229 at the right timing and players who are not good at it. That is, the difficulty level can be varied according to the player's skill. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the display mode when notifying the result of the timing effect will be described. FIG. 165(a) is a display displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the quota of 1000 points is achieved (for example, 1200 points are obtained) in the timing effect executed during the probability variation state of the special symbols. It is the figure which illustrated the content. As shown in FIG. 165(a), when it is determined that the timing effect has ended and the quota has been achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is formed inside the display area 905. be done. In this result notification area, the characters "Quota achieved!! Current state is definitely changing!!" are displayed. By this display, the player can be made to recognize that the current game state is the probability variable state of the special symbols. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the characters "current state is low probability..." are displayed instead of the characters "current state is probability variable!".

On the other hand, FIG. 165(b) illustrates display contents displayed on the sub-display device 690 when the quota of 1000 points is not reached in the timing effect (for example, only 600 points are obtained). It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 165(b), even when it is determined that the timing effect has ended and the quota has not been achieved, a result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is displayed inside the display area 905. It is formed. In this result notification area, the characters "Quota unachieved sorry..." are displayed. That is, only the fact that the quota has not been achieved in the timing effect is notified, and the current game state is not notified (no benefits are given).

In this way, by achieving the quota in the timing performance, the current game state is notified in the result notification area 916, so that the player who wants to know the current game state can actively participate in the timing performance. can be done.

In this control example, the notification of the game state is set as a privilege when the score is achieved, but the privilege in the timing effect is not limited to this. It may be a benefit that is not affected by the game result determined before the execution of the timing effect is determined. It may be configured to change the aspect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to actively participate in the timing effect in order to see the display effect in a special mode.

In this control example, when changing the difficulty level, the type and number of scroll bars and the scroll speed are changed, but the method for changing the difficulty level is not limited to this. For example, the higher the difficulty, the higher the quota points. Further, for example, as the difficulty level increases, the number of button types to be used may be increased.

In this control example, points are added by detecting 10 presses while the continuous hit bar overlaps the press suggestion area 911a, but the number of presses is not limited to 10. Absent. The number of times may be set to less than 10 times, or the number of times may be set to be greater. Further, the number of times of pressing may be changed according to the degree of difficulty. For example, the number of times of pressing may increase as the degree of difficulty increases. As a result, the method of changing the difficulty level can be diversified.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. FIG. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 158, in this control example, the frame button 229 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 . The frame button 229 is provided with four types of button types: an up button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a down button DB. As described above, these four types of buttons are used in timing effects (see FIGS. 163 and 164).

Next, referring to FIG. 159(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in this control example is provided with a timing effect selection table 222d and a depression period table 222e.

The timing effect selection table 222d is a data table that defines the mode of the timing effect, which is a kind of interest effect executed during the variable display of the special symbols. When the timing effect is executed, the timing effect selection table 222d is referenced to set the display mode (difficulty level) of the sub-display device 690 during the timing effect. The degree of difficulty means the ease of matching the timing when pressing (operating) the frame button 229 in accordance with the timing and button type indicated on the sub-display device 690 . The higher the difficulty, the more severe the timing of pressing (operating) the frame button 229, and the more pressing (operating) types of buttons are instructed in a short period of time (see FIG. 164(b)).

In addition, the timing effect of this control example is divided into three periods (early stage period, middle stage period, final stage period), and is configured so that the display mode can be set at a separate timing for each period. . More specifically, at the start of the timing effect, the mode of the opening period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the opening period of the timing effect is started. Then, at the end of the opening stage period, the mode of the middle stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the middle stage period of the timing effect is started. Furthermore, at the end of the middle stage period, the mode of the final stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the final stage period of the timing effect is started.

Details of the timing effect table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 160, the timing effect table 222d defines the effect mode of the timing effect in association with the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ indicating the difficulty level of the timing effect. More specifically, as an aspect of the opening period, the value "4" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the opening stage effect for difficulty level 5, and the value "3" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the difficulty level 4. It is associated with the early stage production. Although illustration is omitted, in the same manner below, the value "2" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the opening effect for difficulty level 3, and the value "1" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the opening effect for difficulty level 2. An opening effect is associated, and an opening effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value "0" of the difficulty level counter 223γ. In addition, it has shown that difficulty is so high that the number of difficulty is large. That is, the opening effect for difficulty level 5 is the mode with the highest difficulty level, and the opening effect for difficulty level 1 is the mode with the lowest difficulty level.

Aspects of the middle stage period are similarly defined. That is, as a form of the mid-stage period, a mid-stage effect for difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and a mid-stage effect for difficulty level 4 is associated with the value "3" of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The mid-stage presentation for difficulty level 3 is associated with the value "2" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, the mid-stage presentation for difficulty level 2 is associated with the value "1" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, A mid-stage presentation for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value "0" of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

Furthermore, the mode of the final stage period is similarly defined. That is, as a form of the mid-stage period, the value "4" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the final stage effect for difficulty level 5, and the value "3" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the final stage effect for difficulty level 4. The value "2" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the endgame effect for difficulty level 3, and the value "1" of the difficulty level counter 223γ is associated with the endgame effect for difficulty level 2, A final effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value "0" of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

Although the details will be described later, the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is timely updated according to the game status of the player. For example, when setting the aspect of the middle stage period, if it is determined that the points earned by the player in the early stage period are relatively small (for example, less than 200), the value of the difficulty counter is decremented by 1. The effect mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the latter value is set. As a result, the mode of the middle stage period can be set to a mode with a lower degree of difficulty than that of the early stage period. Giving up can be prevented (suppressed). Conversely, when it is determined that the player has acquired a relatively large number of points during the opening period, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ. As a result, when a player who is good at timing effects plays a game, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from being prolonged due to a continuation of a low difficulty mode for the player.

In this way, it is possible to select effects of different degrees of difficulty from the timing effect selection table 222d according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, so that it is possible to diversify the modes of timing effects. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, by providing different difficulty levels, it is possible to set a difficulty level suitable for each player's skill, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 159(a), the description continues. The pressing period table 222e determines whether the frame button 229 is pressed (successfully pressed) at the timing when the image of the scroll bar or the like overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. It is a data table defined in association with the elapsed time from the start. When one of the buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 is pressed during execution of the timing effect, this pressing period table 222e is referred to, and the current It is determined whether the button press of was successful or unsuccessful. Then, an effect is executed in which points are added if successful (see FIG. 163(b)), and an effect is executed in which points are subtracted (penalty is imposed) if unsuccessful (see FIG. 164(a)). )reference). Details of the pressing period table 222e will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG.

FIG. 161 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222e. As shown in FIG. 161, as the pressing period table 222e, a plurality of data tables corresponding to set periods and difficulty levels are defined. For example, an opening difficulty level 1 table 222e1 is provided as a table corresponding to the opening effect for difficulty level 1 set in the opening period. When the opening effect for difficulty level 1 is set, this opening difficulty level 1 table 222e1 is set as the corresponding pressing period table. Similarly, the same applies to the opening effect for difficulty level 2 to the opening effect for difficulty level 5, and the table 222e2 for early stage difficulty level 2 to table 222e5 for early stage difficulty level 5 are defined as corresponding pressing period tables. ing.

Furthermore, the middle stage period is the same as the early stage period. 5 table 222e10 is provided.

On the other hand, the final period has a different structure from the early stage period and the middle stage period. That is, a plurality of pressing period tables are associated with one effect mode for the final stage period. Here, a plurality of pressing period tables means tables with different widths (lengths of periods) of successful detection. Even if an effect for the final stage period of the same aspect is displayed, the difficulty level can be varied by varying the period in which success is detected. That is, the difficulty level can be diversified without increasing the display mode of the timing effect, so the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

A table with a wide range of detection of success is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired few points (for example, less than 600 points) before reaching the final stage. If the number of points acquired by the final stage period is too small, there is a risk that the player will give up on achieving the quota through the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, when setting the final stage period, it is determined whether or not the points are less than 600 points, and if less than 600 points, a pressing period table with a wide range of detecting success is selected. It is configured. As a result, the range of detection of success is widened, so that the player can more easily acquire points, so that the player can participate in the timing performance without giving up until the end.

On the other hand, a table with a narrow range of detection of success is selected when it is determined that the player has acquired a large number of points (for example, 900 points or more) before reaching the final stage. If too many points are obtained before the end of the game, the player may feel that there is no time to spare, and the operation of the frame button 229 during the end of the game may become sloppy. Therefore, in this control example, by selecting a table with a narrow range in which success is detected, the operation of the frame button 229 can be performed with a sense of tension until the end of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

When an effect in the final stage corresponding to difficulty level 1 to difficulty level 3 is selected, a pressing period table in which the range in which success is detected is normal and a pressing period in which the range in which success is detected is relatively wide is selected. A period table may be selected. For example, when the end stage effect for difficulty level 1 is selected as the effect mode of the end stage period, either the end stage difficulty level 1 normal range table 222e13 or the end stage difficulty level 1 wide range table 222e18 is selected as the pressing period table. selected.

On the other hand, when the effects of the final stage corresponding to difficulty level 4 and difficulty level 5 are selected, the pressing period table in which the range in which success is detected is normal and the range in which success is detected is In addition to a relatively wide press duration table, there is a possibility that a press duration table with a relatively narrow range of successful detections may be selected. For example, when the endgame effect for difficulty level 5 is selected as the effect mode of the endgame period, the pressing period table includes the endgame difficulty level 5 narrow range table 222e12, the endgame difficulty level 5 normal range table 222e17, and the endgame difficulty level. 5 wide range table 222e22 may be selected.

It should be noted that the reason why the pressing period table in which the success is detected in a narrow range is selected is selected only when the final period effect corresponding to difficulty level 4 or difficulty level 5 is selected. This is because there is a high possibility that a good player is playing the game. When a player who is good at timing effects is playing a game, there is a possibility that the timing effects in the normal detection range may make the player feel that the timing effects are too simple. Therefore, in this case, in addition to displaying in a mode with a high degree of difficulty, the range for detecting success is narrowed so that even a player who is good at timing effects can enjoy it. As a result, the player's desire to participate in the timing performance can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the specific contents of each table constituting the pressing period table 222e will be described by taking the table 222e3 for difficulty level 3 in the opening stages as an example. However, when the table 222e3 for the difficulty level 3 is set, the opening effect for the difficulty level 3 is set as the effect mode. ) is displayed. Therefore, when explaining the table 222e for the difficulty level 3 in the opening stage, FIG. 163 will be referred to as needed.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 222e3 for difficulty level 3 in the opening stage. As shown in FIG. 162, in the early stage difficulty level 3 table 222e3, the type of pressing period ( whether it is a success period, a failure period, or a repeated hit period) is defined. As for the types of pressing periods, an upper button UB pressing period, a right button RB pressing period, a left button LB pressing period, and a lower button DB pressing period are defined.

Specifically, in the range of 0 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds (1.499 seconds) that has elapsed since the start of the timing effect, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for all button types. . If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. Also, the range of elapsed time from 1500 milliseconds to 1699 milliseconds is associated with a success period as the depression period for the up button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, if the up button UB is operated, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and if any other button is operated, it is determined to be unsuccessful. During this period, as the display contents of the sub-display device 690, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912a in FIG. 163) displayed by scrolling in the scroll display area 911b overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911c is displayed. 911e, the scroll bar displayed by scrolling does not reach the depression suggestion area 911a.

Further, the range of elapsed time from 1700 milliseconds to 2199 milliseconds is associated with failure periods as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. Then, the elapsed time range of 2200 milliseconds to 2399 milliseconds is associated with the success period as the depression period for the down button DB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, if the down button DB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and if any other button is pressed, it is determined to be unsuccessful. During this period, the content displayed on the sub-display device 690 is that only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912e in FIG. 163) displayed by scrolling in the scroll display area 911e overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b is displayed. 911d, the scroll bar displayed by scrolling does not reach the depression suggestion area 911a.

The range of elapsed time from 2400 milliseconds to 2999 milliseconds is associated with failure periods as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. The range of elapsed time from 3000 milliseconds to 3199 milliseconds is associated with the success period as the pressing period of the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when any other button is pressed, it is determined to be a failure. During this period, the content displayed on the sub-display device 690 is such that only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912b in FIG. 163) displayed by scrolling in the scroll display area 911c overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b is displayed. , 911d, and 911e are displayed in such a state that the scroll bars have not yet reached the depression suggestion area 911a.

The range of elapsed time from 3200 milliseconds to 3799 milliseconds is associated with failure periods as pressing periods for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. Then, the elapsed time range of 3800 milliseconds to 4999 milliseconds is associated with the continuous hitting period as the depression period of the up button UB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the upper button UB is pressed ten times, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when any other button is operated, it is determined to be a failure. During this period, the contents displayed on the sub-display device 690 include only the repeated hitting bar scrolled in the scroll display area 911b (the repeated hitting bar 913a in FIG. 163) overlapping the depression suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911c. 911e, the scroll bar displayed by scrolling does not reach the depression suggestion area 911a.

The range of the elapsed time from 5000 milliseconds to 5199 milliseconds is associated with the continuous hit period as the depression period of the up button UB, and the success period as the depression period of the right button RB. On the other hand, a failure period is associated as a pressing period for other button types. Therefore, during this period, when the upper button UB is pressed a total of 10 times or the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when any other button is pressed, it is determined to be a failure. be. The content displayed on the sub-display device 690 during this period includes a repeated hit bar scrolled in the scroll display area 911b (repeat bar 913a in FIG. 163) and a scroll bar scrolled in the scroll display area 911d (see FIG. 163). 163) overlaps the push suggestion area 911a, and the scroll bars scrolled in the other scroll display areas 911d and 911e do not reach the push suggestion area 911a.

Although omitted from the drawing, the pressing period corresponding to the button type is defined for the subsequent elapsed time as well. By using the table 222e3 for the difficulty level 3 in the early stages, the pressing period can be updated in synchronization with the display mode of the timing effect. Since other tables defined in the pressing period table 222e have the same configuration, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example includes a timing effect permission flag 223α, a variable probability state flag 223β, a difficulty level counter 223γ, a timing effect pointer 223δ, a repeated hit counter 223ε, A consecutive hitting success flag 223ζ and a score counter 223η are provided.

The timing effect permission flag 223α is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to set the timing effect as the effect when selecting the variable display mode. If the timing effect permission flag 223α is ON, it indicates that the timing effect can be set as a variable effect mode, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the timing effect cannot be set.

Here, as described above, in this control example, the opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is common between the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot and the case of the small hit, and the third symbol display device 81 The production executed in is also common. For this reason, when the specific winning opening 65a performs the 2R opening operation, the 2R probability variable big hit and the transition to the probability variable state of the special symbol, or simply became a small hit, and the game state is changed. I can't tell if it wasn't. In other words, when the 2R opening action by the specific winning opening 65a has not been executed even once after the jackpot A or jackpot B is finished, the current game state is obvious to the player. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed in this case, there is a possibility that the player does not want to obtain the privilege of notifying the game state and does not participate in the timing effect. Therefore, in this control example, when the 2R opening operation by the specific winning opening 65a is not executed even once after the jackpot A or jackpot B is executed, the timing effect is set to off by setting the timing effect. It is configured so that it will not be selected (see S1827 in FIG. 173).

In addition, this timing effect permission flag 223α is set to ON when the 2R probability variable jackpot or small hit is achieved (see S1824 in FIG. 173). In addition, once the timing effect is executed, the timing effect permission flag 223α is reset to OFF (see S6412 in FIG. 172). As a result, the opportunity to execute the timing effect can be limited to only one time for one 2R opening operation by the specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, since the player can be made to work on the timing performance more seriously, the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance can be improved.

The probability variation state flag 223β is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. If this definite variable state flag 223β is ON, it indicates that it is a definite variable state of the special symbol, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is not a definite variable state. This variable probability state flag 223β is set to ON when the 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A) or the 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C) is set to ON (see S1823 and S1826 in FIG. 173), and the 16R time-saving jackpot (jackpot B). is set to OFF (see S1826 in FIG. 173). When the quota is achieved in the timing effect and the current game state is notified, the game state is notified with reference to the variable probability state flag 223β.

The difficulty level counter 223γ is a counter for identifying the difficulty level of the presentation set in each period of the timing presentation (early stage period, middle stage period, final stage period). If the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 0, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 1 is selected, if the value is 1, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected, and if the value is 2 , the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 3 is selected. Also, if the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3, the presentation mode corresponding to the difficulty level 4 is selected, and if the value is 4, the presentation mode corresponding to the difficulty level 5 is selected.

The initial value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is set to zero. That is, it is reset to 0 when the power is turned on. Further, in the case of setting the effect mode of the middle period of the timing effect, if it is determined that the player has obtained a relatively large number of points (the difficulty level is too low for the player currently playing the game), 1 is added to the counter value (see S6203 in FIG. 170). As a result, it is possible to make the difficulty level higher as the effect mode selected in the middle stage period than the effect mode in the early stage period. On the other hand, in the case of setting the presentation mode for the middle stage period, if it is determined that the number of points acquired by the player is small (the difficulty level is too high for the player currently playing the game), the counter value is subtracted by 1. (See S6207 in FIG. 170). As a result, it is possible to make the difficulty level lower than that of the presentation mode in the early stage period as the presentation mode selected in the middle stage period. Thus, by using the difficulty level counter 223γ, the difficulty level can be varied according to the skill of the player, so that the difficulty level can be adjusted to suit the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

The timing effect pointer 223δ is a pointer for indicating the elapsed time after the start of the timing effect, and is updated every 1 millisecond. During execution of the timing effect, this timing effect pointer 223[delta] is referred to, and the type of the depression period is discriminated. This timing effect pointer 223δ is periodically updated during the main processing, for example.

The repeated hit counter 223ε is a counter for counting how many times the corresponding button is pressed during the repeated hit period of the timing effect. It is determined whether or not the repeated hits are successful according to the value of the repeated hits counter 223ε. The number of repeated hits counter 223ε is incremented by 1 every time the operation of the corresponding button is detected during the repeated hits period (see S6007 in FIG. 168), and is reset to 0 when the prescribed number of repeated hits is reached during the repeated hits period (FIG. 168). (see S6011 of ). It is also reset to 0 at the end of the continuous hit period. The number of repeated hits can be accurately determined by the repeated hit counter 223ε.

The repeated hit success flag 223ζ is a flag indicating whether or not a specified number of repeated hits has been reached in the repeated hit period, and if it is ON, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has been reached. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the number of repeated hits has not been reached or the period of repeated hits has not been reached. This repeated hit success flag 223ζ is set to ON when it is determined that the predetermined number of repeated hits has been reached (see S6011 in FIG. 168), and is set to OFF when the repeated hit period ends. While the repeated hit success flag 223ζ is on, control is performed so that even if the button corresponding to the set repeated hit period is continuously pressed more than a specified number of times, it is not determined as a failure. As a result, the player can be hit repeatedly without worrying about the number of hits.

The score counter 223η is a counter for counting points (scores) obtained by the player in one timing effect. At the end of the timing effect, the value of the score counter 223η is compared with the quota of 1000 points, and it is determined whether or not the quota is achieved. This score counter 223η is updated every time the pressing of the frame button 229 is detected during the timing effect (see S6010, S6014 and S6016 in FIG. 168).

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the timing change of the display mode when the variation pattern set with the timing effect is executed will be described. First, as a premise, the timing effect has a certain probability (for example, 10 % probability).

As shown in FIG. 166, after 10 seconds have passed since the variable effect in which the timing effect is set is started, the ready-to-win effect is generated in the third symbol display device 81 . Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect (when 15 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation), the effect mode of the opening period is selected, and the timing effect of the selected effect mode starts on the sub display device 690. be done.

When 5 seconds have passed since the start of the timing production (20 seconds have passed since the start of the variation), the opening period ends, the production mode of the middle stage period is selected, and the middle stage period starts based on the selected content. . Furthermore, when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the mid-stage period (when 25 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation), the mid-stage period will end, and the production mode of the final stage period will be selected, and the final stage period will start based on the selected content. . Then, when two seconds have passed since the start of the endgame period, the endgame period ends, and the result of the current timing effect (whether or not the quota is achieved) is set to be notified. This notification is performed for one second.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 173. FIG. First, FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example.

Among the main processes, S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 are the same as S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example. Processing is performed. Also, in the main process in the third control example, when the process of S1510 ends, a timing effect process (S1541) for performing various settings during the timing effect is executed, and the process proceeds to S1511. In the process of S1511, the same process as the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example is executed, and then, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) in the first control example, the variable display setting process 2 ( S1542) is executed. When this variable display setting process 2 ends, the processes after S1513 are executed in the same manner as in the first control example.

Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1507) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 167) will now be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The frame button input monitoring/effect processing itself is also executed in the main processing (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, but since its detailed description has been omitted, it will be described again.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is being performed (S6001). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing effect is being performed (S6001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) has been detected (S6002). If it is determined that the pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) has not been detected (S6002: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6002 that the depression of the operation button (frame button 229) has been detected (S6002: Yes), the depression period table 222e corresponding to the type of button that detected the depression is read (S6003). Thereafter, based on the read pressing period table 222e and the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ, the pressing period type is specified (S6004).

When the process of S6004 is completed, it is next determined whether or not it is the continuous hitting period (S6005). If it is determined that it is the continuous hitting period (S6005: Yes), then it is checked whether the repeated hitting success flag 223ζ is on. is determined (S6006). If it is determined that the repeated hit success flag 223ζ is on (S6006: Yes), it means that the frame button has been successfully pressed a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the repeated hit period, and it is necessary to count the number of repeated hits. , the processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6006, if it is determined that the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is off (S6006: No), 1 is added to the consecutive hit number counter 223ε (S6007), and it is determined whether the value after the addition is 10 or more. is determined (S6008). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of repeated hits (10 times) has been achieved in one repeated hit period. In the process of S6008, if it is determined that the value of the number of repeated hits counter 223ε after addition is smaller than 10 (S6008: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hit counter 223ε after updating is 10 or more (S6008: Yes), it means that the predetermined number of repeated hits has been achieved, so a success effect command for display is set. As a result (S6009), an effect corresponding to successful repeated hitting is set, and 50 is added to the score counter 223η as a point (score) corresponding to successful repeated hitting (S6010). After that, the repeated hitting number counter 223ε is reset, the repeated hitting success flag 223ζ is set to ON (S6011), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S6005, if it is determined that it is not the continuous pressing period (S6005: No), then it is determined whether it is the pressing success period or not (S6012). When it is determined (S6012: No), a display failure effect command is set (S6013). By this display failure command, an effect is displayed to inform the player that the pressing timing of the frame button 229 has deviated from the timing suggested by the sub-display device 690 (see FIG. 164(a)). By informing the player of the pressing failure, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to correct the pressing timing of the frame button 229 and to make the next pressing more carefully. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. When the processing of S6013 ends, 10 is subtracted from the score counter 223η as a penalty for failure to press (S6014), and this processing ends. Note that if the value of the score counter is already 0 in the process of S6014, points are not subtracted.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6012, when it is determined that it is the pressing success period (S6012: Yes), by setting the display success effect command (S6015), the player is notified that the pressing was successful (Fig. 163(b)). With this notification, the player can recognize the timing of success, so that the frame button 229 can be operated at the same timing next time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate. Then, a point (score) corresponding to the type of the bar overlapping the depression suggesting region 911a when the depression is successful is added to the score counter 223η (S6016), and the process ends.

Next, the details of the timing effect processing (S1541) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timing effect processing (S1541) is, as described above, a process for performing various settings during the timing effect.

In this timing effect processing (S1541), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is set (S6101). finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing effect is set (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether 15 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6102), and if it is determined that 15 seconds have passed (S6102: Yes) means that it is the start timing of the timing effect, so in order to determine the aspect of the timing effect this time, first, the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read (S6103).

When the process of S6103 is completed, then, the effect mode (difficulty level) corresponding to the read counter value is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 160) (S6104). For example, if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, the difficulty level 5 opening effect is selected as the effect mode, and if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 1, the difficulty level 2 opening effect is selected. Then, a display opening mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the rendering mode selected in the process of S6104 is set (S6105). When the display control device 114 receives this display opening mode command, the sub-display device 690 starts the timing effect of the corresponding difficulty level.

When the process of S6105 ends, the table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ read out in S6103 is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6106), and the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6107). End this process. This pressing period storage area is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the processing of S6004 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 168), the pressing period table 222e stored in the pressing period storage area and the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ are referred to, and the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ is referred to. is a success period, it is determined that the frame button 229 has been successfully pressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6102 that 15 seconds have not passed since the start of fluctuation (S6102: No), it is determined whether or not 20 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation (S6108). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the middle period of the timing effect. In the processing of S6108, if it is determined that 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (it is the timing to shift to the middle stage period) (S6108: Yes), the middle stage setting process for setting the mode of the middle stage period is executed. (S6109), this processing ends. The details of this middle stage setting process (S6109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S6108, if it is determined that 20 seconds have not passed since the start of the fluctuation (not the timing to shift to the middle period) (S6108: No), then 25 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. (S6110). That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to shift from the middle period to the final period. In the process of S6110, if it is determined that 25 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6110: Yes), the end stage setting process for setting the effect mode of the end stage period is executed (S6111), and this process ends. The details of the final stage setting process (S6111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6110 that 25 seconds have not elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (S6110: No), then it is determined whether or not 27 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation (S6112). . That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to set the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect. In the process of S6112, if it is determined that the timing has passed 27 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (S6112: Yes), the notification mode setting process for setting the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect is performed. Execute (S6113) and terminate this process. The details of this notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 27 seconds have not elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (S6112: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is time to end the repeated hitting period (S6114: Yes), the repeated hitting success flag 223ζ is set to OFF (S6115), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, details of the middle stage setting process (S6109) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing this middle stage setting process (S6109). In the middle stage setting process (S6109), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read out (S6201), and it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is greater than 600 (whether relatively many points have been obtained). (S6202).

If it is determined that the read value is greater than 600 (S6202: Yes), a relatively large number of points have been obtained in the early stages, and the difficulty level may be too easy for the player currently playing the game. . Therefore, in this case, by adding 1 to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ (S6203), control is performed so that an effect with a higher degree of difficulty than that during the opening period is set as the effect mode during the middle stage. As a result, it is possible to change the mode of presentation (difficulty) to match the skill of the player during the timing presentation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing presentation can be improved. After the process of S6203 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

If it is determined in the process of S6202 that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or less (S6202: No), then it is determined whether or not the read value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 50 (S6204). If it is determined that the read value is smaller than 50 (S6204: Yes), it indicates that the player's acquired points in the opening period are extremely small. That is, the difficulty level of the timing effect in the opening period is too difficult, and the player may not be able to keep up with the timing effect, or may abandon the timing effect itself. In this case, by setting the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ to 0 (S6205), control is performed so that the effect mode with the lowest difficulty level is selected as the effect mode set after the mid-stage period. As a result, players who had difficulty matching the timing of pressing because the difficulty level in the early stage was too high, or who had the impression that it would be difficult just by looking at the presentation mode in the early stage, gave up the timing presentation. It is possible to improve the player's desire to participate in the timing performance. When the processing of S6205 ends, the processing moves to S6209.

In the process of S6204, if it is determined that the read value of the score counter 223η is 50 or more (S6204: No), then it is determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (a player participating in the timing effect (S6206). In the process of S6206, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206: Yes), the difficulty level is too high for the player, so if the player continues at this pace, the score will be significantly lower than the quota. It means that there is a high possibility that In this case, there is a risk that the player will decide that the quota cannot be achieved during the timing performance and give up participating in the timing performance. In addition, although he participated in the timing production this time to the end, there is a possibility that he will give up participating in the timing production from the next time onwards because the acquired points are too low for the quota. Therefore, in order to prevent these situations, 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ in the processing of S6207 (S6207). As a result, the degree of difficulty after the mid-game period can be made easier, so that the players who did not acquire many points in the early-game period can be motivated to participate in the timing performance. When the processing of S6207 ends, the processing moves to S6209.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6206 that the value of the read score counter 223η is 200 or more (S6206: No), the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read (S6208), and the process proceeds to S6209.

In the process of S6209, based on the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, a mid-stage effect mode is selected from the effect selection table 222d (S6209), and an early stage mode command for display is issued to notify the display control device 114 of the selected mode. is set (S6210). Then, the data table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read out from the pressing period table 222e (S6211), the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6212), and this processing ends.

By executing this mid-stage setting process, it is possible to change the mode of presentation after the mid-stage period to a mode of difficulty that better matches the skill of the player, according to the points the player has acquired in the early stage period. , the player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171, the details of the final stage setting process (S6111) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. This final stage setting process (S6111) is, as described above, a process for setting the effect mode of the final stage period of the timing effect.

In the final stage setting process (S6111), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read out (S6301), and it is determined whether or not the value is greater than 900 (S6302). That is, it is determined whether or not 900 points or more are obtained by the end of the middle stage period. If it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is greater than 900 (S6302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is greater than 3 (S6303).

When it is determined that the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less (S6303: No), a table with normal success periods is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6304), and the process proceeds to S6309. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is greater than 3 (S6303: Yes), a table for a narrow range with a narrow success period corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e ( S6304), the process proceeds to S6309.

The purpose of setting the table with different lengths of success periods according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is to match the difficulty level with the player. That is, if a relatively high-difficulty effect mode (difficulty level 4 or difficulty level 5) is set even after the mid-stage period, there is a high possibility that the skill of the player is high. Then, the transition to the process of S6303 is performed when a relatively large number of points have been acquired, so there is a risk that even the current difficulty level may be too easy for the player. Therefore, in order to make the level of difficulty even more difficult for a player with high skill, the range of success is configured to be narrower than the early stage period and the middle stage period. As a result, a highly skilled player can be provided with a more difficult timing effect, so that the player's interest in the timing effect can be improved.

On the other hand, if the process proceeds to S6303 while the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less, there is a possibility that a large number of points have been obtained by chance despite relatively low skill. In this case, if the difficulty level is increased, there is a risk that pressing the frame button 229 will fail consecutively in the final stage, and that the timing effect will have a bad impression. In particular, even though the score of 1,000 points, which is the quota, was exceeded at the start of the final stage production, if the player fails continuously during the final stage period and falls below the quota at the end of the production due to the accumulation of penalties, the player's There is a possibility that the motivation for the timing performance will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this control example, when the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less, which is presumed to indicate a low skill, the range of the success period is kept normal even if relatively many points are obtained. are doing. As a result, it is possible to improve the motivation for the timing performance for a player with low skill.

If it is determined in the process of S6302 that the value of the score counter 223η is 900 or less (S6302: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is less than 600 (S6306). In the process of S6306, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6206: Yes), a wide range table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6307), The process proceeds to S6309. This is because, if the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600, the number of points the player has acquired by the mid-stage period is relatively small, and there is a high possibility that the difficulty level is too high for the player. Therefore, in this case, by selecting a depression period with a wide success period, it is possible to increase the possibility that the pressing of the frame button 229 will be determined to be successful. That is, it is possible to match the difficulty level to the player. In addition, by widening the success period in the final stage period, it becomes easier for the player to succeed in pressing the button, so that the player can be given the illusion that he is in good shape (has mastered the trick). Therefore, even if the quota is not reached, it is possible to create the illusion that more points can be obtained next time due to the response during the final stage. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the next timing performance.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6306 that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or more (S6306: No), the normal range table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e ( S6308), the process proceeds to S6309. In the process of S6309 executed after any one of the processes of S6304, S6305, S6307, and S6308 is executed, the data table read out from the pressing period table 222e is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6309). exit.

By this final stage setting processing, the range of the success period of the final stage period can be varied to match the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player by the end of the middle stage period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the details of the notification mode setting process (S6113) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing this notification mode setting process (S6113). As described above, this notification mode setting process is a process for setting the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect.

In the notification mode setting process (S6113), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6401), and it is determined whether or not the value is 1000 or more (S6402). That is, in the timing effect, it is determined whether or not the quota of 1000 points has been achieved. In the processing of S6402, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 1000 (that is, the quota could not be achieved in this timing effect) (S6402: No), then the display control device 114 A failure notification mode (see FIG. 165) is set (S6403).

When the process of S6303 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404). If the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404: Yes), the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is set to 0 (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less, there is a high possibility that the player gave up early just by visually recognizing the aspect of the opening period. Therefore, in this case, in the next timing presentation, it is possible to select the presentation mode with the easiest degree of difficulty to make the player feel that the quota is likely to be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the next timing performance.

On the other hand, if the value of the score counter 223η is greater than 50 (S6404: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6412. If the value of the score counter 223η is greater than 50, it means that the player did not meet the quota after participating in the timing effect. Therefore, in this case, the player's desire to participate can be improved by lowering the difficulty level selected in the next timing effect by one level.

In the process of S6402, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 1000 or more (the quota of the timing production is achieved), the variable probability state flag 223β is read (S6407), and the current state is the probability variable state of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (whether the probability variation state flag 223β is ON) (S6408). Then, when it is determined that the variable probability state is determined (S6408: Yes), the notification mode for reporting the variable probability state to the display control device 114 is set, and the process proceeds to S6411. On the other hand, in the process of S6408, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the probability variable state (the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S6408: No), the notification for informing the special symbol in the low probability state (normal state) The mode is set (S6409), and the process proceeds to S6411.

In the process of S6411, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, which is the maximum value, the value is kept at 4. In the process of S6412, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to OFF, it is set so that the timing effect is not selected until the next 2R probability variable big hit or small hit (S6412), and this process ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variable display setting process 2 (S1542), the processes in S1801 to S1810 are the same as the processes in S1801 to S1810 executed in the variable display setting process (S1512, see FIG. 109) in the first control example. Processing is performed.

In addition, in the variation display setting process 2 (S1542) in this control example, when the process of S1805 is completed, it is determined whether the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot C (2R probability variation jackpot) is notified by the variation pattern command. It is determined (S1821). In the process of S1821, if it is determined that it is a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit C (S1821: Yes), it means that it moves to the probability variation state of the special symbol, so the probability variation state flag 223β is set to ON ( S1823), the process proceeds to S1824.

On the other hand, in the process of S1821, if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit C (S1821: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern corresponding to the small hit (S1822). If it is determined to be a corresponding variation pattern (S1822: Yes), the process proceeds to S1824. In the process of S1824, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to ON, setting is made so that the mode of the timing effect can be selected as the interest effect in the subsequent variable effect (S1824), and the process proceeds to the process of S1806.

In the process of S1822, if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern corresponding to a small hit (S1822: No), then it is determined whether it is a variation pattern corresponding to a big hit A or a big hit B (S1825). In the process of S1825, when it is determined that neither the variation pattern corresponding to the big win A nor the variation pattern corresponding to the big win B is determined (S1825: No), the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to either the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1825: Yes), the probability variation state flag 223β is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot type (S1826). That is, if it is a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), the probability variable state flag 223β is set to ON, and if it is a jackpot B (16R short-time jackpot), the probability variable state flag 223β is set to OFF. Next, the timing effect permission flag 223α is set to OFF (S1827), and the processes after S1806 are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to execute a timing effect in which points can be obtained by operating a plurality of types of buttons with good timing. It is configured to notify the game state. As a result, the player who wants to know the current game state can be made to actively participate in the timing performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, by making the privilege when the timing effect succeeds not affect the game result (notification of the current game state), whether the privilege is given purely by the skill of the player's pressing (operation) timing. You can decide whether On the other hand, if you set a benefit for which the result has already been determined (for example, a jackpot) at the start of the fluctuation (before the timing effect starts), the timing effect will start. Previously, the result of the timing effect (whether or not the manner of achieving the quota can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect in which the quota cannot be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect will decrease. On the other hand, in this control example, the privilege given when the quota is achieved in the timing effect is set to "game state notification" which does not affect the game result. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not to give a privilege purely according to the timing of pressing the frame button 229 . In other words, when the privilege is granted, the player can have a stronger feeling that he/she has acquired the privilege by himself/herself. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

Further, in this control example, the difficulty level can be changed according to the player's point acquisition status during execution of the timing effect. That is, it is configured to determine the player's skill from the point acquisition situation, and change the presentation mode to a degree of difficulty more matched to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of difficulty from being too difficult, or conversely, the degree of difficulty from being too easy, thereby reducing the willingness to participate in the timing performance. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the timing effect is completed, the difficulty level of the next timing effect is changed to a difficulty level that better matches the player according to the point acquisition status of the player. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

In this control example, when setting three types of periods, the opening stage period, the middle stage period, and the final stage period, the effect mode is selected according to the skill of the player and the state of participation in the timing effect. However, the period is not limited to three types. For example, it may be configured to set the presentation mode for each of the five types of periods. By increasing the period, the player's skill or the like can be determined more accurately, and an effect mode matching the skill can be provided. Conversely, the period may be shortened. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced because the number of times of processing for determining the player's skill or the like can be reduced.

In this control example, when setting three types of periods, the opening stage period, the middle stage period, and the final stage period, the effect mode is selected according to the skill of the player and the state of participation in the timing effect. However, the difficulty level of one or more periods may be fixed, and the difficulty level of only a part of the period may be variable according to the player's skill or the like. More specifically, for example, the difficulty level of the opening period may be set to a production mode with a relatively easy difficulty level. As a result, it is possible to make the player who has visually recognized the aspect of the opening stage have the impression that the quota is likely to be easily achieved by the timing performance, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved. .

In this control example, based on the operation of the 10th frame button 229 during the repeated hitting period, it is determined that the repeated hitting is successful and points are added. is not limited to 10 operations. An arbitrary value can be set according to the length of the repeated hitting period and the length of the repeated hitting bar. Further, the number of times that it is determined that the successive hits are successful may be varied according to the set effect mode. For example, in the case of a presentation mode with a low difficulty level (for example, a difficulty level of 1), the number of times that it is determined that the consecutive hits are successful is set to less than 10 times (for example, 6 times). , In the case of a production mode with a relatively high degree of difficulty (for example, a degree of difficulty of 4 or 5), the number of times that it is determined that the repeated hits are successful is set to a number greater than 10 (for example, 15). may As a result, it is possible to differentiate the difficulty not only by the display pattern of the scroll bar and the range of the success period, but also by the number of times it is determined that the consecutive hits were successful, so there is more variety to vary the difficulty. can have

In this control example, based on the operation of the frame button 229 a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the repeated hitting period, it is determined that the repeated hitting is successful and points are added. The operation may be configured to be determined as repeated hits. For example, by continuing to press the button of the corresponding type for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds or longer) during the repeated hitting period, it is determined that the repeated hitting has been successful in the same manner as when the button has been repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times (10 times). good too. As a result, even a player who is not good at repeated hits can acquire points by determining repeated hits simply by continuing to press (long press) the frame button 229, thereby reducing the burden on the player. . In this case, the points given for performing repeated hits a predetermined number of times (10 times) during the repeated hit period are higher than the points given for simply continuing to press (long press) the frame button 229 during the repeated hit period. may be configured to increase the number of By configuring in this way, advanced players with high skill are allowed to actively hit repeatedly, and players with low skill (who are not good at repeated hits) are encouraged to press and hold to earn points as much as possible. can let That is, it is possible to provide various methods of participating in the continuous hitting period according to the player's skill, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

In this control example, a plurality of periods are provided as periods for setting the difficulty level of the timing effect. It may be configured to be fluidly variable. As a result, the player's operation status can be reflected in the difficulty level in real time.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the opening period is set to a difficulty level presentation mode corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a relatively easy difficulty level (for example, difficulty level 2) may be set during the opening period regardless of the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ. By configuring in this way, a relatively simple performance mode can be set for at least a fixed period (until the end of the opening stage period) from the start of the timing performance, so that the player can participate in the timing performance more easily. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

In this control example, the notification of the game state is used as the benefit of the timing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol may be notified by a timing effect. In other words, it may be configured such that when the quota is achieved in the timing performance, a big win is announced. In this case, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the timing effect is selected, the timing effect of the effect mode in which the quota cannot be achieved may be selected. More specifically, for example, when the timing effect is executed in the case of the deviation of the special symbol, the total points that can be acquired by the scroll bar and the continuous hit bar that are scrolled between the beginning period and the end period are It may be constructed so as to obtain 900 to 990 points at maximum, and in the case of winning a special symbol, for example, it may be constructed so as to select a pattern capable of obtaining 1000 to 1200 points at maximum. That is, as the effect modes defined in the timing effect selection table 222d, a big win effect mode and a losing effect mode corresponding to each period and each difficulty level may be defined separately. Then, when setting the effect mode of each period in the timing effect process (see FIG. 169), It may be configured such that the effect mode is selected by discriminating the result of the variable effect (whether it is a big win or a loss). By configuring in this way, the degree of difficulty in the timing performance can be matched with the skill of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the timing performance can be improved. In addition, by changing the upper limit of the points that can be acquired in the mode for big wins and the mode for failure, it is possible to prevent the quota from being achieved despite the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure ( control). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player because the jackpot is not started even though the quota has been achieved, and the player can participate in the timing performance with peace of mind.

In this control example, the timing effect is not set until at least one small win or big win C occurs after the end of the big win A or B, but the conditions for executing the timing effect are as follows. It is not limited to this. For example, the ease with which the timing effect is selected may be changed according to the number of held balls. Specifically, it may be configured such that the timing effect is more likely to be selected as the number of held balls increases, and is less likely to be selected as the number of held balls is smaller. As described above, the timing effect of this control example requires that the plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and down button DB) forming the frame button 229 be pressed with good timing. For this reason, it is difficult to participate in the timing effect with one hand, and it is easier to successfully press down the button when participating with both hands. That is, there is a possibility that the player who intends to achieve the quota in the timing performance will temporarily release the operating handle 51 and participate in the timing performance. Therefore, when participating in the timing performance in a state in which the number of pending balls is small, it is not possible to increase the number of pending balls during the timing performance. be. In other words, there is a possibility that the game efficiency will deteriorate. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the timing performance is difficult to set under the condition that the number of reserved balls is small, the player can be made to shoot balls under the condition that the number of reserved balls is small, so that the reserved balls can be easily accumulated. Therefore, game efficiency can be improved. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is large, the number of held balls may increase further by continuing to hit balls during fluctuation, and there is a possibility that the number of hit balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of held balls may be detected. be. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of reserved balls from overflowing by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the timing effect that makes it easy to achieve the quota by participating with both hands.

In this control example, the timing effect is configured such that a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 are pressed with good timing. However, the number of buttons is not limited to four. For example, an effect of pressing a single frame button with good timing may be executed as the timing effect. By configuring in this way, while operating the handle 51 with one hand, the player can participate in the timing performance with the other hand, so that the player can participate in the timing performance without lowering the game efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance. Also, by reducing the types of buttons to be operated in the timing effect, the game can be made easier to understand. On the other hand, the types of buttons to be operated may be more than those in this control example. As the number of buttons to be operated increases, the degree of difficulty of the timing performance can be increased, so that a player having high skill in the timing performance can be satisfied. Incidentally, the skill of the player may be determined from the point acquisition status, the total points acquired in the previous timing effect, or the like, and the number of buttons to be used may be increased or decreased according to the skill. That is, when it is determined that the skill is low or that the player did not participate at all in the previous game, for example, a timing effect is executed in a mode in which the player can participate by pressing only one type of button. may set a mode of timing effect using four types of buttons. By constructing in this way, it is possible to visually recognize that the degree of difficulty has been lowered, so that the willingness to participate in the game can be increased for players with low skills.

In this control example, when the variable effect with the timing effect set is executed, the timing effect is configured to start 5 seconds after the reach occurs, and is configured to be executed for 14 seconds. However, the start period and duration of the timing effect are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be configured to execute the timing effect using all the variable time. Even if the timing effect is executed in the sub display device 690, the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed in the third pattern display device 81, so even if the timing effect is executed by spending all the fluctuation time, the special pattern is executed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the fact that the lottery result is overlooked. Therefore, since the timing effect can be executed for a longer period of time, the interest of the player can be further improved.

In this control example, the timing effect is executed during execution of the variable effect, but the execution period of the timing effect is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the timing effect during the big hit (special game state). In this case, it may be configured such that by achieving the quota in the timing effect, it is notified that the game will shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the end of the big win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the work during the big win from becoming a mere task for winning prize balls, so that the interest in the game during the big win can be improved. In this case, if the player fails to achieve the quota in spite of the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), for example, the low probability state of the special symbol is notified during the notification period of the timing effect, and the subsequent jackpot. It may be configured to perform a reverse performance at the ending of , and to inform the probability change state of the special symbol. As a result, even if the quota cannot be achieved in the timing performance, the game can be played in anticipation of the occurrence of the reversal performance in the ending period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

<Modification of Third Control Example>
Next, a modification of the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 198. FIG. In the third control example described above, the present game state is notified as a privilege when the quota is achieved in the timing effect. In addition, the points obtained by the player are discriminated in the middle of the timing effect, and the difficulty level is changed according to the skill of the player.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the third control example, the privilege given when the quota of the timing effect is achieved is set to the special symbol jackpot. That is, when the quota is achieved in the timing production, the special symbol jackpot is started after the end of the variable production. Along with this, when the timing effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the loss, the player is made difficult to achieve the quota. More specifically, in the timing effect executed in the variable effect corresponding to the loss, when the player has earned a predetermined or more points (400 points or more) in the opening period, the mode of the timing effect is changed to the game. It is configured to switch the pressing timing to a mode in which the user is likely to make a mistake. More specifically, the music played in the timing effect and the timing (success period) at which each scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion region 911a are shifted. As a result, when the frame button 229 is pressed in time with the rhythm of the music, it is determined to be a failure, so the timing of pressing can be confused. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from achieving the quota in the variable performance corresponding to the loss, the player is distrusted by the fact that the jackpot is not started even though the quota has been achieved. can be prevented (suppressed) from being held. Also, during the early stage period, the timing performance is executed in a mode in which the rhythm of the music and the success period match, and after the middle stage period, the music and the success period are shifted, so that the player is more likely to fail by pressing after the middle stage period. It is configured as follows. As for how to shift the timing, there are provided a pattern in which the success period is set at timing earlier than the rhythm of the music, and a pattern in which the timing is set later than the rhythm of the music. These can be used properly according to the habits of the player. That is, in the case of a player who tends to operate the frame button 229 relatively early, if the success period is advanced with respect to the rhythm of the music, the player's habit (tendency to operate the frame button 229 early) will be satisfied. There is a possibility that it will be easier to get points if there is a match. Conversely, in the case of a player who tends to operate the frame button 229 relatively late, if the success period is delayed with respect to the rhythm of the music, the player's habit (operating the frame button 229 late) tendencies), and there is a possibility that it will be easier to earn points. Therefore, in this modified example, it is determined whether the player tends to operate the frame button 229 early or late, and the success period is set at the timing when it becomes more difficult to succeed according to the player's habit. The timing is staggered.

Further, in this modified example, one aspect can be selected from a plurality of kinds of aspects as the effect aspect in the final stage period. More specifically, an aspect in which there are relatively many points that can be acquired (that is, the success period is set many times) and an aspect in which there are relatively few points that can be acquired (that is, the success period is set many times ) modes can be selected. In the variable performance corresponding to the loss, when the points acquired by the player by the end of the middle stage period are a predetermined number or more (750 points or more), the timing performance is completed by setting a mode in which the number of points that can be acquired is small. This prevents the player from achieving the quota of 1000 points by the time the game is played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the situation in which the player achieves the quota in the variable performance corresponding to the loss.

The pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the third control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 187, a method for discriminating the player's habit (tendency) when pressing the frame button 229 in this modified example will be described. In this modified example, as described above, during the mid-stage period of the variable effect corresponding to the loss, the player can easily press the frame button 229 during the failure period by shifting the music played during the timing effect from the success period. It consists of That is, it is configured so as to make it difficult to reach the quota in the variable performance corresponding to the loss. Further, in shifting the success period, the method of shifting is changed according to the player's habit (tendency) when pressing the frame button 229 . Specifically, for a player who tends to press the frame button 229 early, the success period is delayed relative to the rhythm of the music, and for a player who tends to press the frame button 229 late, the success period is delayed relative to the rhythm of the music. speed up the success period. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to acquire points in the variable performance corresponding to the loss, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the problem of achieving the quota when the loss occurs.

The habit (tendency) of the player is determined in the opening period. More specifically, the number of times the player pressed the frame button 229 relatively early and the number of times the player pressed the frame button 229 relatively late in the success period (the period in which the scroll bar overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a) set in the opening stage period. Count the number of times you did it. If the number of times of early pressing is large, it is determined that the player has a habit (tendency) of pressing early, and the success period is delayed from the rhythm of the music after the middle stage period. On the other hand, if the number of times of late pressing is large, it is determined that the player has a habit (tendency) of late pressing, and the success period is made earlier than the rhythm of the music after the middle stage period.

A relatively slow tempo song is set as the song played in the opening period, and the success period is also set at a timing that matches the tempo of the song. If a song with a fast tempo is set in the early stage and a large number of scroll bars matching the tempo of the song are displayed continuously, the player will not be able to keep up with the tempo, and the frame button will not be displayed. 229 may be seriously pressed and lost. In this case, even if the tendency of the player in the opening period is grasped (aggregated), the timing of pressing the button 229 may deviate due to the fact that the player seriously pressed the frame button 229 in time with the rhythm or could not keep up with the tempo. Since it is not possible to distinguish whether or not the character is strong, there is a risk that it may be determined as a habit (tendency) different from the actual habit (tendency) of the player. On the other hand, in this modified example, music with a tempo (rhythm) that allows most of the players to press the frame button 229 in time with the rhythm of the music is set. As a result, each player's habit (tendency) when pressing the frame button 229 can be determined more accurately.

As shown in FIG. 187, each success period in the opening period is divided into three sections: an early success section, a just success section, and a late success section. The early success section is 0.08 seconds from the start of the success period in the success period set for 0.2 seconds. In this early success section, the sub-display device 690 is in a display mode in which part of the scroll bar and the right side of the depression suggestion area 911a are overlapped (see HK in FIG. 187). When the player presses the corresponding button type in this early success section, it is counted as an early press.

Also, 0.04 seconds from 0.08 seconds to 0.12 seconds in the success period is a just success section. In this just-success section, the sub-display device 690 has a display mode in which the scroll bar completely overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a (see JK in FIG. 187). When the player presses the corresponding button type in this just success section, it means that the frame button 229 is pressed at the just timing, so neither the number of early presses nor the number of late presses is counted.

Furthermore, 0.08 seconds between 0.12 seconds and 0.2 seconds in the success period is a late success section. In this late success section, the left side of the scroll bar on the sub-display device 690 is displayed to the left beyond the left end of the depression suggestion area 911a (see OK in FIG. 187). When the player presses the corresponding button type in this late success section, the late press is counted.

It should be noted that whether it is an early success section, a just success section, or a late success section is defined in the depression period table 222e provided in the ROM 222 in this modification. That is, in the second control example described above, whether it is a success period or a failure period is defined in association with the elapsed time from the start of the timing effect and the button type of the frame button 229, but this control In the example, in addition to these, divisions of the success period (early success period, just success period, or late success period) are defined. In this control example, depending on the pressing period table 222e, the elapsed time (the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ), and the type of button operated by the player, whether the player pressed the button earlier or later. I am judging whether it has been done.

Thus, in this modification, each success period set in the opening period is divided into an early success section, a just success section, and a late success section, and the player operates the frame button 229 in each section. It is configured to count the number of times that This makes it possible to determine whether the player tends to press the frame button 229 early or late. Therefore, when shifting the rhythm of the music and the success period after the mid-stage period, it is possible to shift in a manner contrary to the player's tendency. That is, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to press the frame button 229 during the success period, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from achieving the quota in the variable performance corresponding to the loss. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189, the correspondence relationship between the depression period (success period and failure period) after the middle period and the rhythm of music will be described. First, FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the rhythm of a piece of music and the success period when they match. Incidentally, the case where the rhythm and the success period are made to match is the opening period in the timing production, the case where the timing production is set in the variation production corresponding to the big win, and the like.

The upper part of FIG. 188 shows changes in the pitch of the music played in the timing effect over time, and the lower part of FIG. shown in As shown in FIG. 188, the success period corresponding to each of the up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and down button DB coincides with the timing at which the musical piece under the timing effect becomes a new pitch. For example, in FIG. 188, the up button UB has three success periods, each of which is "mi" (the leftmost note), "do" (the second note from the left), and "shi" (the rightmost note). It is set at the timing that matches the timing of the pitch of the note).

Similarly, the success period of the right button RB is provided once, and is set at the timing that coincides with the pitch of "G" (the third note from the right) in the music. In addition, the left button LB has two success periods, each of which coincides with the pitch of "la" (the third note from the left) and "do" (the fourth note from the left) in the song. It is set when In addition, the success period of the down button DB is provided once, and is set at the timing that coincides with the timing of the pitch of "B" (the second note from the right) in the music.

By matching the timing at which the pitch of the music changes with the success period in this way, it is possible to determine success by operating the frame button 229 in time with the rhythm of the music. Therefore, the player can easily operate the frame button 229 in time.

In this control example, whether the success periods are matched or shifted is varied depending on the setting timing of the pressing periods (failure period and success period). That is, by varying the period from the end of the early stage period to the setting of the pressing period (and effect mode) of the middle stage period, the rhythm of the music and the success period are matched or shifted. With this configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a table in which the rhythm of music matches the success period and a table in which the rhythm of the song and the success period do not match, as the pressing period table 222e. Since it is only necessary to vary the setting timing when setting , the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Similarly, since it is not necessary to prepare a mode in which the rhythm of the music and the success period match and a mode in which the success period coincides as the display mode of the timing effect, the capacity of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. can be done.

As for the setting timing of the pressing period (and the effect mode of the middle stage period), three types of offset periods are provided: 0.5 seconds, 1 second, and 1.5 seconds after the end of the opening period. Here, even if the pressing period and the setting timing of the production mode in the middle period are changed, the display mode of the sub-display device 690 does not become abnormal, so the display mode in the early stage period is based on the case where the setting timing is delayed. is set. That is, the display mode for at least 1.5 seconds after the end of the opening period is defined for the display data table corresponding to the opening period. As a result, the sub-display device 690 can continue to normally display the presentation mode of the timing presentation even during the period from the end of the early stage period to the setting of the middle stage period.

In this control example, the rhythm of the music and the success period can be matched by setting the depression period of the middle stage period (and the effect mode of the middle stage period) one second after the end of the opening period. It is That is, the offset t1 shown in FIG. 188 means 1 second.

Next, with reference to FIG. 189, an example in which the success period is set later than the timing of the music in the middle period will be described. As described above, the case in which the success period is set later means that the frame button 229 has a habit (tendency) of pressing the frame button 229 earlier than the rhythm of the music during the initial stage period of the variable effect corresponding to the loss. This is the case when it is determined to be a person.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the success period is delayed with respect to the rhythm of the song, the period (offset period) from the end of the early period until the pressing period (and effect mode) of the middle period is set t2 (1.5 seconds) is selected. That is, an offset period that is 0.5 seconds longer than the offset t1 shown in FIG. 188 is selected. As a result, the setting timing of the depression period in the middle period is delayed by 0.5 seconds from the timing that matches the rhythm of the music (see FIG. 188). That is, the success period can be delayed with respect to the rhythm of the music. Therefore, the player who has pressed the frame button 229 in rhythm in the opening period continues to press the frame button 229 in rhythm in the same manner as in the opening period, thereby causing the player to press the frame button 229 in the failure period. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from achieving the quota in the timing effect set for the variable effect corresponding to the loss.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the modification of the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the third control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 190(a), the ROM 222 timing effect selection table 222d provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. This timing effect selection table 222d is a data table in which timing effect modes are defined, like the timing effect selection table 222d in the third control example described above. When starting each period of the timing effect (early stage period, middle stage period, and final stage period), the display mode of each period is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the effect mode defined in the timing effect selection table 222d. Set the command to notify. The data table storage area 233b in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is configured to store a display data table corresponding to the display mode of each period of the timing effect, like the variable display data table. Based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 reads the corresponding display data table from the data table storage area 233b and sets it as the display mode.

As shown in FIG. 190(a), the timing effect selection table 222d of this modified example defines selectable effect modes in association with each period of the timing effect. More specifically, an opening effect is defined for the opening period. At the start of the timing effect, the opening effect is read from the timing effect selection table 222d and notified to the display control device 114.例文帳に追加

In addition, a mid-stage production is defined for the mid-stage period. This middle stage effect is read out from the timing effect selection table 222d and notified to the display control device 114 when the offset period set after the end of the opening period has passed. As described above, the offset period differs depending on the type of variable effect (whether it is a variable effect corresponding to a big win or a variable effect corresponding to a loss) and the player's habit (tendency) when pressing the frame button 229. is selected. Specifically, in the case of the variable effect corresponding to the big win, t1 (1 second) is set as the offset period after the end of the opening stage period. When 1 second is set as the offset period, the rhythm (change in pitch) of the music played in the timing effect and the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion region 911a are configured to match. On the other hand, when it is determined that a player who has a habit (tendency) to press the frame button 229 early (in an early success section) is playing a game during the variable effect corresponding to the loss, the offset period is set to t2 (1.5 seconds). This makes it possible to delay the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a with respect to the rhythm of the music. That is, since the player can easily fail to press the button, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the achievement of the quota in the variation effect corresponding to the failure. Furthermore, when it is determined that the player who has the habit (tendency) to press the frame button 229 late (in the early success section) is playing the game during the variable effect corresponding to the loss, the offset is performed. t3 (0.5 seconds) is set as the period. As a result, the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion region 911a can be advanced with respect to the rhythm of the music. That is, since the player can easily fail to press the button, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the achievement of the quota in the variation effect corresponding to the failure.

As for the endgame period, two types of selectable effects are defined: a normal endgame effect and a failure endgame effect. The endgame normal production is a production in which there are relatively many points that can be acquired, and when the timing production is set for the fluctuation production corresponding to the big hit, or in the fluctuation production corresponding to the loss, the middle stage period ends. Selected if you have earned few points (less than 750 points) by then. On the other hand, the final stage failure effect is a mode in which the points that can be acquired are relatively small, and is selected when the number of points acquired by the end of the middle stage period is large (750 points or more) in the variable effect corresponding to the loss. be done. By providing a plurality of obtainable performance modes, points are adjusted in the final stage period even if the player has acquired a relatively large number of points by the end of the middle stage period in the variable performance corresponding to the loss. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the achievement of the quota (acquisition of 1000 points or more) in spite of the variable effect corresponding to the loss.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190(b), points obtainable in each table defined in the timing effect selection table 222d will be described. FIG. 190(b) shows the points (maximum earned points) obtained when the player presses the corresponding button type in all success periods for each effect mode defined in the timing effect selection table 222d. Fig. 3 shows. As shown in FIG. 190(b), in the opening effect, a white scroll bar is displayed nine times and a continuous hit bar is displayed once. If any of these scroll bars are successfully pressed, 50 points are given (see the payout table in FIG. 163(a)), so the maximum points earned in the opening effect are 500 points (9 times x 50 points + 1). times x 50 points).

In addition, in the production for the middle stage, a hatched scroll bar is displayed 15 times, a white scroll bar is displayed twice, and a continuous hit bar is displayed twice. If the hatched scroll bar is successfully pressed, 10 points are given (see the payout table in FIG. 163(a)), so the maximum points earned in the mid-game presentation is 350 points (15 times x 10 points + 2 times x 50 points + 2 times x 50 points).

Furthermore, in the end stage normal production, the hatched scroll bar is displayed 10 times and the white scroll bar is displayed 3 times, so the maximum points earned is 250 points (10 times x 10 points + 3 times x 50 points). be. On the other hand, in the final stage failure effect, the hatched scroll bar is displayed only 10 times, so the maximum score is 100 points (10 times×10 points).

In this control example, when the timing effect is set in the variable effect corresponding to the big hit, the normal effect for the final stage is set. By setting the normal effect for the final stage, a maximum of 1100 points (500 points + 350 points + 250 points) can be obtained in total in the timing effect. You can get points. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance. Also, when the player's acquired points are less than 750 points at the end of the mid-stage period in the variable performance corresponding to the loss, the normal performance for the final stage is set. This is because, even if the maximum points obtained in the endgame normal presentation are achieved, the quota of 1000 points cannot be reached. When it is determined that the quota cannot be achieved, by setting a production mode (normal end stage production) that makes it easier to acquire a relatively large number of points, even if the quota cannot be achieved, this time Since it is possible to easily make the player feel that he has reached a regrettable point in the timing performance, the motivation for the next timing performance can be increased.

On the other hand, in the variable performance corresponding to the loss, when the remaining points until the quota is achieved at the end of the middle stage period is 250 points or less, the failure performance for the final stage is set. If the normal performance for the final stage is set and the player acquires 250 points, which is the maximum acquisition point, a situation occurs in which the jackpot is not awarded even though the quota has been achieved, and the player is affected. This is because there is a risk of causing a sense of distrust. Therefore, in this modified example, when it is determined that the number of remaining points for the quota is small at the end of the middle stage period, an effect for final stage failure with a small number of points that can be acquired is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the player from achieving 1000 points, which is the quota of the timing effect, in the variable effect corresponding to the loss.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), in this modification, in the early stage period, compared to the other periods (the middle stage period and the final stage period), the scroll bar (white scroll bar) with more points that can be acquired It is designed to have a high occurrence rate. That is, since it is configured such that a larger number of points can be obtained with a smaller number of successes in the early stages, it can be made to feel that the difficulty level is low. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the quota can be easily achieved in the timing presentation from the display contents (combination of the displayed scroll bars) in the early stage period, so that the timing presentation is started. Immediately after that, the player can be made to actively participate in the timing presentation. In addition, by making it easier to acquire points (reducing the difficulty) in the early stage period and allowing more points to be acquired, even if pressing the frame button 229 somewhat fails in the middle stage period or the final stage period, From the impression that a large amount of points were acquired during the period, it can be made to feel that it can be fully recovered. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from giving up the achievement of the quota (abandoning the participation in the timing performance) in the middle of the timing performance, and allowing the player to continue to participate in the timing performance until the end.

In addition, in this modified example, the player's desire to participate in the timing performance is improved by making the difficulty level relatively low in the early stages, but the configuration for improving the participation desire is not limited to this. Absent. For example, if it is determined that the player is not actively participating in the timing effect by determining the player's participation status, the display mode may be switched to a display mode that facilitates the player's participation. As a method of judging the participation status, for example, counter means for counting the total number of times the player presses the frame button 229 during the timing effect is provided, and a predetermined period (for example, two seconds) has elapsed since the start of the timing effect. If the count value of the counter means (the number of presses by the player) is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 5 or less) before the game elapses, it may be determined that the player is not actively participating in the timing effect. . In addition, as a display mode in which the player can participate more easily, for example, among a plurality of button types that form the frame button 229, it may be switched to an effect mode in which only a single button type can participate. As a result, the game can be switched to a simpler game, in which points can be obtained simply by pressing the button type 1 with good timing, so that the player who has been avoiding the timing performance can be motivated to participate. Further, as another example of a display mode in which the player can easily participate, for example, a continuous bar may be displayed. The scroll bar has a short period of overlap with the push-suggestion region 911a, and it is relatively difficult to press the frame button 229 at the right timing. , can make the player feel that it is easy to get points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the timing performance for the players who have not actively participated until the middle of the game.

In order to realize these, a display mode (display data table) for switching may be separately prepared in the character ROM of the display control device 234 as the display mode of the timing effect. Further, a pressing period table corresponding to the switching display mode may be separately provided in the pressing period table 222e. Then, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the timing effect, the number of times the player presses the frame button 229 in the current timing effect is read. , a mode for switching may be set. That is, by notifying the display control device 114 of the display mode for switching, the display mode can be switched, and the pressing period table for switching can be read from the pressing period table 222e and stored in the pressing period storage area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190(c), the depression period table 222e provided in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. Similar to the pressing period table 222e in the third control example, the pressing period table 222e is pressed (successfully pressed) at the timing when the scroll bar overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a when the frame button 229 is pressed. It is a data table that defines whether or not it is determined in association with the elapsed time (the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ) from the start of the timing effect.

As shown in FIG. 190(c), in this control example, the pressing period table 222e includes an early period table 222e31, a middle period table 222e32, an end period normal table 222e33, and an end period failure table 222e34. consists of

The early stage period table 222e31 is a data table that defines the success period and failure period for each button type in the early stage period in association with the elapsed time (the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ). is set in conjunction with By setting the opening effect defined in the timing effect selection table 222d and the opening period table 222e31 at the same timing, the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion region 911a on the sub display device 690 and the success period are set. can be matched. In addition, in the early stage period table 222e31, divisions are defined for each success period. In other words, it defines whether it is an early success section, a just success section, or a late success section. The habit of the player (whether he tends to press it early or tends to press it later) is discriminated according to the classification defined in the opening period table 222e31 and the timing at which the player presses the frame button 229. can do.

Similarly, the middle stage period table 222e32 is a data table that defines the pressing period in the middle stage period, and is selected together with the setting of the middle stage effect when the offset period set at the end of the early stage period ends. Further, the final stage period normal table 222e33 is a data table that defines the depression period in the final stage period, and is selected when the final stage normal effect is set in the final stage period. Further, the final stage period failure table 222e34 is a data table defining the depression period in the final stage period, and is selected when the final stage failure effect is set in the final stage period. Thus, by providing the pressing period table corresponding to the effect mode, the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a can be matched with the success period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 191 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 191, in the RAM 223 in this modified example, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third control example, an early number counter 223π, a late number counter 223ρ, and an offset storage area 223σ are added. .

The early number counter 223π is a counter for counting the number of times the player presses the corresponding button type in the early success section in the opening period of the timing effect. The advance number counter 223π is set to 0 as an initial value. In addition, every time it is detected that the player has pressed the corresponding button type in the early success section during the initial period of the timing effect, 1 is added to the value (see S7003 in FIG. 193). When the opening period ends, the value of this early number counter 223π is compared with the value of the late number counter 223ρ, which will be described later. likely) is determined, and the corresponding offset period is set (see S7107 and S7108 in FIG. 195). This early number counter 223π is reset (initialized) to 0 while setting the notification of the result in the timing effect (see S6425 in FIG. 198).

The late number counter 223ρ is a counter for counting the number of times the player presses the corresponding button type in the late success section in the early period of the timing effect. The initial value of the delay counter 223ρ is set to zero. In addition, every time it is detected that the player has pressed the corresponding button type in the late success section during the initial period of the timing effect, 1 is added to the value (see S7005 in FIG. 193). When the opening period ends, the value of this late number counter 223ρ and the value of the early number counter 223π are compared to determine the player's habit (whether the frame button 229 tends to be pressed early or pressed late). likely) is determined, and the corresponding offset period is set (see S7107 and S7108 in FIG. 195). This delayed number counter 223ρ is reset (initialized) to 0 while setting the notification of the result in the timing effect (see S6425 in FIG. 198).

The offset storage area 223σ is a storage area for storing an offset period from the end of the opening stage effect to the depression period corresponding to the middle stage effect and the setting of the effect mode. As described above, the offset period is determined based on the value of the late number counter 223ρ and the value of the early number counter 223π at the end of the opening period. (S7102, S7107, S7108 in FIG. 195). When the offset period stored in the offset storage area 223σ has passed, the pressing period corresponding to the middle stage period and the effect mode are set.

<Regarding the control process of the sound ramp control device in the modified example of the third control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the modified example of the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 198. FIG. First, FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1561) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this modification. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1561) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 168) in the third control example, and monitors the input of the frame button 229. , is a process for setting the corresponding effect when the input is confirmed.

In the processing of S6001 to S6011, S6013, and S6014 of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1561), S6001 to S6011 of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 168) in the third control example respectively. , S6013, and S6014 are executed. In addition, in the present modification, if it is determined in the process of S6005 that the pressing (operation) of the frame button 229 is not during the continuous pressing period (S6005: No), whether the current period is the failure period is determined. is determined (S6021).

In the process of S6021, if it is determined that it is not in the failure period (S6021: No), it means that the corresponding button type was pressed in the success period. (S6022) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S6021, when it is determined that it is the failure period (S6021: Yes), the processing after S6013 is executed.

Next, details of the above-described success processing (S6022) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this success processing (S6022), first, it is determined whether or not it is the beginning period (S7001), and if it is determined that it is not the beginning period (that is, the middle stage or the end period) (S7001: No) , the process proceeds to S7006.

On the other hand, in the process of S7001, if it is determined that the current period is the beginning period (S7001: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 229 was detected in the early success section of the success period. It is determined (S7002). Then, if it is determined to be in the early success section (S7002: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the early counter 223π (S7003), and the process proceeds to S7006. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7002 that it is not the early success section (S7002: No), then it is determined whether or not the current is the late success section (S7004). Then, when it is determined that it is a delaying success section (S7004: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the delaying number counter 223ρ (S7005), and the process proceeds to S7006. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7004 that it is not the late success section (S7004: No), the processing proceeds directly to S7006.

In the processing of S7006, by setting a success effect command for display (S7006), the display mode (see FIG. 163(b)) of the sub-display device 690 for informing the player that the pressing has succeeded is set. . This notification allows the player to recognize the timing of success. When the process of S7006 ends, the point (score) corresponding to the type of the bar that overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a when the depression is successful is added to the score counter 223η (S7007), and this process ends. do.

By executing this success process, the early number counter 223π and the late number counter 223ρ can be updated according to the type of the section in which the frame button 229 was successfully pressed. It is possible to accumulate habit (tendency) data when pressing 229. Therefore, when setting the display mode after the mid-stage period and the pressing period, it is possible to set according to the habit (tendency) of the player.

Next, the timing rendering process 2 (S1562) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 198. FIG. This timing effect process 2 (S1562) is a process executed in place of the timing effect process (see FIG. 169) in the third control example in the main process, and is executed to make various settings during the timing effect. be done.

Of the timing effect process 2 (S1562), the processes of S6101, S6102, S6105, S6114, and S6115 are the same as the processes of S6101, S6102, S6105, S6114, and S6115 in the third control example. executed.

In addition, in the timing effect processing 2 (S1562) in this modified example, it is determined that 15 seconds have passed since the start of the variation (S6102: Yes), and when it is time to start the timing effect, first, the music for the timing effect is played. Set (S6021). That is, a command (audio music command) for instructing the audio output device 226 to output music for timing effects is set. The audio music command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process of the main process executed by the MPU 221 (see S1502 in FIG. 167), the voice output device 226 is output for Upon receiving this audio music command, the audio output device 226 starts outputting the music indicated by this audio music command (music for timing effect).

When the process of S6121 ends, then, the mode of the opening stage effect is selected as the effect mode from the timing effect selection table 222d (S6122), and as in the third control example, the display opening stage for notifying the selected effect mode is displayed. A mode command is set (S6105). The display opening mode command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see S1502 in FIG. 167), the display output device 114. In the display control device 114, the display of the timing effect is started on the sub-display device 690 by receiving the display opening mode command.

After the processing of S6105 is completed, the opening period table 222e31 is then read from the pressing period table 222e (S6123), and the read opening period table 222e31 is stored in the pressing period storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. (S6124), and the process ends. In the process of S6004 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 192), the opening period table 222e31 stored in the pressing period storage area is referenced to determine whether or not the frame button 229 has been successfully pressed. be done. Further, as described above, the early stage period table 222e31 also defines success period sections (early success section, just success section, and late success section). In the success process, based on the initial period table 222e31 stored in the pressing period storage area, it is determined which section the success period is, and various counters (early number counter 223π, late number counter 223ρ ) is updated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6102 that 15 seconds have not passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6102: No), then it is determined whether 19 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6125). Here, 19 seconds is the end timing of the opening period in this modified example. As described above, the display data table stored in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 for setting the display mode of the opening period has a display mode for at least 1.5 seconds after the end of the opening period ( display effects) are extra stipulated. For this reason, even if the presentation mode for the middle stage period is set after an offset period of 0.5 to 1.5 seconds after the end of the opening period, the display on the sub-display device 690 may be interrupted during the offset period. can be prevented (suppressed).

In the processing of S6125, if it is determined that 19 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation (S6125: Yes), then the offset for setting the offset period according to the result of the fluctuation effect, the habit (tendency) of the player, etc. Setting processing is executed (S6126), and this processing ends. Details of this offset setting process (S6126) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6125 that 19 seconds have not passed since the start of fluctuation (S6125: No), it is determined whether or not the offset period set by the offset setting process (S6126) has passed (S6127). . If it is determined that the offset period has elapsed (S6127: Yes), middle stage setting processing 2 for making various settings for the middle stage period is executed (S6128), and this processing ends. The details of this middle stage setting process 2 (S6128) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S6127, if it is determined that the offset period has not elapsed (S6127: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the middle stage period (S6129). Note that the end timing of the middle stage period is 5 seconds after the offset period has passed. In the processing of S6129, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the middle stage period (S6129: Yes), end stage setting processing 2 for setting the end stage period in the timing effect is executed (S6130), and this processing ends. . The details of this final stage setting process 2 (S6130) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S6129, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the middle period (S6129: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the final period (S6131). The ending timing of the final stage period is two seconds after the end of the middle stage period. In the process of S6131, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the final period (S6131: Yes), the notification mode setting process 2 for setting the notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect is executed ( S6132), the process ends. The details of this notification mode setting process 2 (S6132) will be described later with reference to FIG. Furthermore, in the processing of S6131, if it is determined that the end timing of the final stage period has not come (S6131: No), the processing after S6114 is executed. As described above, the processes of S6114 and S6115 are the same as the processes of S6114 and S6115 of the timing effect process (see FIG. 169) in the third control example, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, details of the offset setting process (S6126) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This offset setting process (S6126) is a process for setting the offset period from the end of the opening period to the setting of the middle stage period according to the habit (tendency) of the player.

In this offset setting process (S6126), first, it is determined whether or not the variation performance corresponding to the loss is being executed (S7101), and it is not the variation performance corresponding to the loss (that is, the variation performance corresponding to the jackpot). ) (S7101: No), the normal offset period t1 (1 second) is set as the offset period (S7102), and this process ends. When this normal offset period t1 (1 second) is set, the depression period and the effect mode of the sub display device 690 are set at the time when 1 second has elapsed after the end of the opening period. By setting the middle stage period at this timing, as described above, the rhythm of the music (change in pitch) and the success period (and the timing when the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a) match (see FIG. 188). reference). Therefore, the player can easily acquire points by operating the frame button 229 in time with the rhythm. Therefore, the quota can be easily achieved in the timing performance at the time of the big win. Therefore, by achieving the quota and winning the jackpot, the player can feel as if he/she has won the jackpot by himself/herself through his/her hard work during the timing performance, so that the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance is improved. be able to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7101, if it is determined that the variation effect corresponding to the deviation is being executed (S7101: Yes), the value of the score counter 223η is read (S7103), and whether the value is less than 400 (S7104). Then, if it is determined that the value is less than 400 (S7104: Yes), the process proceeds to S7102 described above. That is, the offset value (t1) is set so that the success period is set at the timing that matches the rhythm of the music even after the mid-stage period. If the value of the score counter 223η is less than 400 (that is, the player has less than 400 points in the early stage period), all the points (350 points + 250 points) that can be acquired in the middle stage period and the final stage period are acquired. Even if it does, it is less than the quota of 1000 points. Therefore, in this case, a mode is set in which points can be easily obtained simply by pressing a button in time with the rhythm of the music. As a result, it is possible to obtain more points within a range where the quota cannot be achieved. It can make you feel like you can achieve your quota.” Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the next timing performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7104, if it is determined that the value of the read score counter 223η is 400 or more (S7104: No), the offset period corresponding to the player's habit (tendency) when pressing the frame button 229 is executed (S7105 to S7108). That is, the values of the advance number counter 223π and the delay number counter 223ρ are read out (S7105), and it is determined whether or not the value of the advance number counter 223π is greater than the value of the delay number counter 223ρ (S7106). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the player has a high percentage of pressing the frame button 229 in the early success section in the opening period (the player tends to operate the frame button 229 earlier than displayed).

In the processing of S7106, if it is determined that the value of the early counter 223π is equal to or less than the value of the late counter 223ρ (S7106: No), the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion region 911a This means that there is a tendency for the frame button 229 to be pressed a little later than the timing at which the frame button 229 is pressed. Therefore, in this case, by making the success period earlier than the rhythm of the music, the player who tends to press the frame button 229 later is more likely to fail. That is, a relatively short offset period t3 (0.5 seconds) is set as the offset period (S7107), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7106, if it is determined that the value of the advance number counter 223π is larger (S7106: Yes), the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion region 911a (timing that matches the rhythm of the music). This means that there is a tendency for the frame button 229 to be pressed slightly earlier. Therefore, in this case, by delaying the success period from the rhythm of the music, the player who tends to press the frame button 229 early will be more likely to fail. That is, a relatively long offset period t2 (1.5 seconds) is set as the offset period (S7108), and this processing ends.

In this way, in the variable effect corresponding to the loss, the habit (tendency) of the player pressing the frame button 229 is analyzed (determined), and according to the analysis result (determination result), the player can make a frame during the success period. By setting the offset period during which it is difficult to press the button 229, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from achieving the quota in spite of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the loss.

In addition, by configuring the pressing period after the mid-stage period and the presentation mode to be set after the offset period set in this process has elapsed, it is possible to prevent an increase in variations in the pressing period and the presentation mode. can be done. That is, since it is not necessary to separately prepare a table in which the rhythm of music matches the success period and a table in which the rhythm of music and the success period do not match as the depression period table 222e, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. can be done. Similarly, as the presentation mode (display data table) after the middle stage, there is a display mode in which the rhythm of the music and the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a, and a display mode in which the rhythm of the song and the scroll bar overlap the depression suggestion area 911a Since there is no need to separately prepare the overlapping timing and the display mode in which there is a deviation, the capacities of the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

Next, the middle stage setting process 2 (S6128) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This middle stage setting process 2 (S6128) is executed in the timing effect process 2 (see FIG. 194), and as described above, is a process for performing various settings for the middle stage period in the timing effect.

In the processes of S6210 and S6212 of the middle stage setting process 2 (S6128), the same processes as the processes of S6210 and S6212 of the middle stage setting process (see FIG. 170) in the third control example are executed. . In addition, in the middle stage setting process 2 (S6128) in this modified example, first, the middle stage effect is selected as the effect mode from the timing effect selection table 222d (S6221), and the process selected mode is displayed as in the third control example. A display middle stage mode command to be notified to the control device 114 is set (S6210). Thereby, the display mode of the intermediate period can be set.

When the process of S6210 is completed, the middle period table 222e32 is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6222), and the read middle period table 222e32 is stored in the pressing period storage area (not shown) (S6212). Thereby, it is possible to set the success period in accordance with the display mode of the intermediate period.

By executing this middle stage setting process 2 (S6128), the display mode of the middle stage period and the pressing period can be set at the same timing. That is, the success period can be set at the timing when the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion area 911 a displayed on the sub display device 690 .

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 197, the details of the end stage setting process 2 (S6130) will be described. This end stage setting process 2 (S6130) is executed in the timing effect process 2 (see FIG. 194), and as described above, is a process for performing various settings for the end stage period in the timing effect.

In the final stage setting process 2 (S6130), first, it is determined whether or not the variation production corresponding to the loss is being executed (S6311), and if the variation production corresponding to the loss is being executed (S6311: Yes) , the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6301), and it is determined whether or not the value is 750 or more (S6312). Then, when it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is 750 or more (S6312: Yes), processing for setting the quota of 1000 points to an unattainable (difficult to achieve) presentation mode (S6313 to S6315). to run.

More specifically, from the timing effect selection table 222d, the effect for final stage failure is selected as the effect mode (S6313), and the display final stage failure mode command for notifying the selected mode to the display control device 114 is set ( S6314). Then, in order to set the pressing period that matches the notified display mode (effect mode), the final stage period failure table 222e34 is read out from the pressing period table 222e and stored in the pressing period storage area (S6315), and this process ends. do. As a result, the maximum points that the player can acquire in the final stage period can be limited to 100 points. As described above, in this modification, a maximum of 500 points can be acquired in the early stage period, and a maximum of 350 points can be acquired in the middle stage period (see FIG. 190 (b)). Therefore, 100 points can be acquired in the final period. By doing the following, it is possible to reliably prevent (suppress) the quota from being achieved in the variation effect corresponding to the deviation. In other words, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the fact that the jackpot is not started after the quota is achieved, so that the player can enjoy the timing performance with peace of mind. .

On the other hand, in the process of S6311, if it is determined that the variation effect corresponding to the deviation is not being executed (that is, the variation effect corresponding to the jackpot is being executed) (S6311: No), or the score counter in the process of S6312 If it is determined that the value of 223η is smaller than 750 (S6312: No), the processing (S6316 to S6318) for setting the normal mode in which relatively many points can be obtained is executed as the effect mode for the final period. do. Specifically, from the timing effect selection table 222d, a normal endgame effect is selected as the effect mode (S6316), and a normal endgame mode command for display is set for notifying the selected mode to the display control device 114 (S6317). ).

When the processing of S6317 is completed, in order to set the pressing period that matches the notified display mode (effect mode), the normal table 222e33 for final stage period is read from the pressing period table 222e and stored in the pressing period storage area (S6318). , the process ends. This makes it possible to obtain more points in the final stage period. Therefore, in the case of the variable effect corresponding to the big win (S6311: No), the quota can be achieved more easily, and the player's motivation for the timing effect can be improved. In addition, when the value of the score counter 223η is less than 750 in the variable effect corresponding to the loss (S6311: Yes and S6312: No), more points can be obtained within a range where the quota cannot be achieved. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who has not achieved the quota of the timing effect have the impression of "It was a pity" and the impression of "I think I will be able to achieve the quota next time". Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the next timing performance. In this way, by the end stage setting process 2 (S6130), it is possible to set the effect mode of the timing effect according to the number of points the player has acquired by the end of the middle stage period.

Next, the details of the notification mode setting process 2 (S6132) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This notification mode setting process 2 is executed in the timing effect process 2 (see FIG. 194), and as described above, is a process for setting the notification mode according to the result of the timing effect.

In the processes of S6401 and S6402 of the notification mode setting process 2 (S6132), the same processes as the processes of S6401 and S6402 of the notification mode setting process (see FIG. 172) in the third control example are executed. be done. Further, in the notification mode setting process 2 (S6132) in this control example, when it is determined in the process of S6402 that the value of the score counter 223η is 1000 or more (the player has achieved the quota) (S6402: Yes), A notification mode for notifying a jackpot is set for the display control device 114 (S6421), and the process proceeds to S6425.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6402, if it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is less than 1000 (the player has not achieved the quota) (S6402: No), then the variable effect currently being executed becomes a big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a corresponding variable effect (S6422). In the processing of S6422, if it is determined that the variation effect corresponds to the big win (S6422: Yes), it means that the player could not achieve the quota despite the big win. Therefore, in this case, after the failure notification mode (see FIG. 165) is once displayed, the notification mode in which the mode in which the big win is reported (reversal effect notification mode) is displayed for the display control device 114. It is set (S6423). In this way, by setting the reversal effect, it is possible to make the player aware that the jackpot will be won even if the quota is not achieved. After the process of S6423 ends, the process proceeds to S6425.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6422, if it is determined that the current variation effect is not a big hit (that is, it is a variation effect corresponding to the loss) (S6422: No), the notification mode at the time of failure (see FIG. 165) is displayed. to the display control device 114 (S6424), and the process proceeds to S6425. By setting the notification mode at the time of failure, it is possible to make the player recognize that the quota has not been achieved in the timing performance.

In the process of S6425, which is executed after any one of the processes of S6421, S6423, and S6424 is completed, the values of various counters (score counter 223η, advance number counter 223π, and delay number counter 223ρ) are set to 0. Initialization is performed by setting, and this processing ends. By executing the notification mode setting process 2 (S6132), the player can easily understand the result of the timing effect.

As described above, in the modified example of the third control example, the privilege given when the quota of the timing effect is achieved is set to the special symbol jackpot. Along with this, when the timing performance is executed in the variable performance corresponding to the loss, the player is configured to become difficult to achieve the quota.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device is configured to be able to execute a display effect in which various display images such as patterns and characters are displayed, thereby improving interest. Some of these conventional gaming machines execute a display effect or the like indicating whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player is awarded as a display effect. However, since such display effects are only selected by lottery, there is a problem that if the game is played continuously for a certain period of time, a series of effects will appear and the game will become monotonous.

Further, some of the above-described conventional gaming machines are provided with a production button for receiving an operation from a player, and display a plurality of suggestive images suggesting the operation of the production button during a predetermined display effect, so that the game can be played. There is something that encourages players to participate (hereinafter referred to as "player participation type production"). In this player-participation type effect, the score is added by operating the effect button in accordance with the timing suggested by the suggestive image, and when the score exceeds the reference point, the player receives a privilege (for example, , hit) is given.

However, whether or not it will be a win is already determined by a lottery executed before the start of the player-participation type presentation. For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to be able to achieve the reference point only in the case of winning, and there is no choice but to change the display mode of the player-participation type effect in the case of winning and in the case of losing. rice field. Therefore, there is a problem that it is possible to predict whether the game is a win or a loss from the display mode of the player-participation type performance, and it is difficult to increase the willingness of the player to participate.

On the other hand, in this modification, in the timing effect executed in the variable effect corresponding to the failure, the success period after the mid-stage period is set so as to be shifted from the rhythm of the music played during the timing effect. there is As a result, the pressing timing of the player who has acquired points by operating the frame button 229 according to the rhythm in the early stage period can be disturbed, so that it is difficult for the player to acquire points after the middle stage period. can do. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from achieving the quota in the variable performance corresponding to the loss, the player is made to feel distrust by not starting the jackpot even though the quota is achieved. It is possible to prevent (suppress) from being lost.

In addition, in this modified example, as the method of shifting the timing, a method of shifting the success period is set earlier than the rhythm of the music, and a method of shifting the timing is set later than the rhythm of the music. can be selected. These are used properly according to the player's habit (tendency) when pressing the frame button 229 . That is, in the case of a player who tends to operate the frame button 229 relatively early, delaying the success period with respect to the rhythm of the music makes it more difficult for the player to operate the frame button 229 during the success period. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, in the case of a player who tends to operate the frame button 229 relatively late, by advancing the success period with respect to the rhythm of the music, it becomes more difficult for the player to operate the frame button 229 during the success period. It is configured to be As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect in such a manner that it is difficult for each player to press the frame button 229 during the success period, taking into account the habit (tendency) of the player. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the achievement of the quota in production. Note that, in this modification, the period in which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a and the success period are completely matched, and the success period and the rhythm of the music are shifted. Configure. With this configuration, if the user presses the frame button 229 according to the display on the sub-display device 690 without being distracted by the music, the corresponding points are added. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression that "I am trying to make him fail unfairly" even when he is out. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance.

Further, in this modified example, one aspect can be selected from a plurality of kinds of aspects as the effect aspect in the final stage period. More specifically, an aspect in which there are relatively many points that can be acquired (that is, the success period is set many times) and an aspect in which there are relatively few points that can be acquired (that is, the success period is set many times ) modes can be selected. In the variable performance corresponding to the loss, when the points acquired by the player by the end of the middle stage period are a predetermined number or more (750 points or more), the timing performance is completed by setting a mode in which the number of points that can be acquired is small. This prevents the player from achieving the quota of 1000 points by the time the game is played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the situation in which the player achieves the quota in the variable performance corresponding to the loss.

In this modification, after the mid-stage period, by shifting the rhythm of the music played during the timing effect and the timing at which the success period is set, it is configured so that the player is less likely to press the frame button 229 during the success period. However, the configuration for preventing (suppressing) the achievement of the quota in the variable performance corresponding to the deviation is not limited to this. For example, the difficulty level of the timing effect may be changed according to whether or not it is a variable effect corresponding to the loss. Here, as a method of changing the difficulty level, for example, similar to the above-described third control example, there is a method of varying the number of scroll bars and the width of the pressing suggestion area 911a (the length of the successful period). . That is, if the difficulty level is increased, more scroll bars with less points (10 points) (hatched scroll bars) may be displayed, or the depression suggestion area 911a may be narrowed (shorter success period). good. The more scroll bars with less points are displayed, the more times the frame button 229 must be successfully pressed to achieve the quota, so the difficulty level can be made more difficult. In addition, the narrower the push suggestion area 911a (shorter the success period), the more difficult it becomes to press the frame button 229 in time with the success period of the push suggestion area 911a. can. In order to realize these difficulty level changing methods, a plurality of tables with different difficulty levels (tables with different numbers of scroll bars to be displayed) are used as the display data table for setting the presentation mode (display mode) of the timing presentation. and tables with different widths of the pressing suggestion area 911a) are stored in the character ROM 234, and a plurality of display data tables with different degrees of difficulty can be stored in the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Just do it. Further, the pressing period table 222e may be provided with a data table for setting the pressing period corresponding to the display mode of each display data table used for the timing effect. In this way, by preparing the display data table of the display mode according to the difficulty level and the data table for setting the pressing period according to the display mode of each display data table, when changing the difficulty level In addition, the difficulty level can be easily changed simply by setting a corresponding difficulty level display data table and a depression period corresponding to the display data table.

As in the third control example, the difficulty level may be selected (changed) multiple times during the execution period of the timing effect, or may be set only once in one timing effect. (For example, it may be configured to be set at the start of the timing effect). Further, the difficulty level is not limited to setting simply depending on whether the variable performance being executed is a variable performance corresponding to a big win or a variable performance corresponding to a loss. For example, the difficulty level may be varied according to the player's skill (acquired points). More specifically, for example, it may be configured such that the more points acquired in the early stage period, the harder the difficulty level after the middle stage period. As a result, the timing presentation can be executed with a degree of difficulty corresponding to the skill of the player within a range in which the quota cannot be achieved. Therefore, the quota can be left unachieved while more points are earned, so that it is possible to have the impression that "it was regrettable" or that "it seems that the quota can be achieved next time". Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the next timing performance.

Further, as another method of varying the difficulty level in order to prevent (suppress) achievement of the quota in the variable effect corresponding to the failure, the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion region 911a may be shifted from the success period. . Here, if the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a and the success period are completely shifted, the player surely presses the frame button 229 at the timing at which the depression suggestion area 911a overlaps the scroll bar. In spite of the fact that the user feels that the button is pressed, it is determined that the pressing operation has failed, and there is a risk that the user will feel distrustful of the timing effect. For this reason, for example, while the period in which the scroll bar and the pressing suggestion area 911a are completely overlapped (see JK in FIG. 187) is matched with the success period, the success period is shortened in terms of time. Alternatively, it may be configured to shift to the slow side. Also, the shifting direction may be varied according to the player's habit (tendency) when pressing the frame button 229 . That is, similarly to the modified example of the third control example, whether the player tends to press the frame button 229 in the early success section or in the late success section is determined by the depression state ( Analysis is performed based on the values of the advance number counter 223π and the value of the delay number counter 223ρ. Then, the success period may be shifted to the side in which it is difficult for the player to succeed in pressing the button due to the habit (tendency) of the player. That is, in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 229 early, the success period is shifted to the later side after the mid-stage period, and in the case of a player who tends to press the frame button 229 later, The success period may be shifted to the early side after the mid-stage period. As a result, when the player continues to press the frame button 229 at the same timing as in the opening period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to press it during the failure period. It can be prevented (suppressed).

In this modified example, the rhythm of the music (change in pitch) and the timing at which the scroll bar overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a are shifted so that the player is unlikely to achieve the quota in the variable effect corresponding to the failure. , but not limited to these. For example, at least part of the scroll bar scrolled from the right side of the sub-display device 690 may be hidden before reaching the push suggestion area 911a (during the scroll display). With this configuration, the player must press the frame button 229 by predicting the timing of reaching the pressing suggestion area 911a from the scroll speed before the display disappears. Pressing 229 can be made more difficult. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from achieving the quota in the case of the variable effect corresponding to the loss. In addition, the aspect of hiding during scrolling can also be set during execution of a variable effect corresponding to a big win. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling that the game has become more difficult only in the case of a big hit or a loss by hiding the display during scrolling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the players from lowering their willingness to participate in the middle of the timing performance, and to allow them to participate until the end. Furthermore, in the case of a big win, the scroll bar may be hidden during the scroll display, but the success period may be extended. In addition, it may be configured so that the success period is shortened in the case of failure. By configuring in this way, in the case of a big win, it can be easily judged as a success by determining the timing from the scroll speed before the scroll bar disappears. On the other hand, in the case of misalignment, even if the timing is determined from the scroll speed, it is likely to be determined as a failure. Therefore, with the timing performance set in the variable performance corresponding to the big win, it is possible to easily achieve the quota, and at the same time, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the quota from being achieved in the variable performance corresponding to the loss. .

In this modification, regarding the habit (tendency) when the player presses the frame button 229 in the opening period, the number of times the player presses the frame button 229 in the early success section (see FIG. 187) (See FIG. 187), the determination is made by comparing with the number of times the player presses the frame button 229, but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, the number of times the player presses the frame button 229 in the just success period (see FIG. 187) is also counted, and the number of times the player presses the frame button 229 in the success period is counted. The player's habit (tendency) may be determined from the ratio of the number of times the is pressed. That is, for example, when the ratio of pressing the frame button 229 in the early success section exceeds 50%, it is determined that the player has a habit (tendency) to press the frame button 229 in the late success section. If the ratio of pressing the button exceeds 50%, it may be determined that the player has a habit (tendency) to press the button later. In the modified example of the third control example, for example, even if the frame button 229 is pressed only once in the late success section in the opening period, and all the presses in the other success periods were in the just success section, It is determined that the player tends to press the frame button 229 late (see S7106 in FIG. 195). On the other hand, by determining the player's habit (tendency) from the rate at which the frame button 229 is operated in each of the early success section and the late success section, the player's tendency can be analyzed more accurately.

In this control example, in the variable effect corresponding to the failure, the press period is shifted 0.5 seconds earlier or later than the rhythm of the music according to the player's habit (tendency). , but not limited to these. If the timing makes it difficult for the player to press the frame button 229, the shift time can be arbitrarily determined. In addition, it is not necessary to shift the pressing period uniformly by the same amount of time. In the timing effect of 1, the depression period may be randomly delayed or accelerated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to press during the success period, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the achievement of the quota despite the variation effect corresponding to the loss.

In this modification, the points that can be acquired during the opening period are 500 points, the points that can be acquired during the middle stage period are 350 points, and the points that can be acquired during the final stage period are 250 points or 100 points. The timing performance quota is set to 1000 points, but the points and quota for each period can be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the quota cannot be achieved in the fluctuation performance corresponding to the deviation.

In this modified example, the timing effect is set without any particular limitation in the variable effect, but the timing effect may be limited. For example, the ease with which the timing effect is selected may be changed according to the number of held balls. Specifically, it may be configured such that the timing effect is more likely to be selected as the number of held balls increases, and is less likely to be selected as the number of held balls is smaller. As described above, the timing effect of this control example requires that the plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and down button DB) forming the frame button 229 be pressed with good timing. For this reason, it is difficult to participate in the timing effect with one hand, and it is easier to successfully press down the buttons by participating with both hands. That is, there is a possibility that the player who intends to achieve the quota in the timing performance temporarily releases the operation handle 51 and participates in the timing performance. Therefore, when participating in the timing performance in a state in which the number of pending balls is small, the number of pending balls cannot be increased during the timing performance, so there is a risk that the lottery for the special symbol will be interrupted after the end of the variable performance in which the timing performance is set. be. In other words, there is a possibility that the game efficiency will deteriorate. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the timing performance is difficult to set under the condition that the number of reserved balls is small, the player can be made to shoot balls under the condition that the number of reserved balls is small, so that the reserved balls can be easily accumulated. Therefore, game efficiency can be improved. On the other hand, if the number of held balls is large, the number of held balls may increase further by continuing to hit balls during fluctuation, and there is a possibility that the number of hit balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of held balls will be detected. be. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of reserved balls from overflowing by increasing the frequency of occurrence of the timing effect that makes it easy to achieve the quota by participating with both hands.

In this control example, the timing effect is configured such that a plurality of buttons (up button UB, right button RB, left button LB, and down button DB) constituting the frame button 229 are pressed with good timing. However, the number of buttons is not limited to four. For example, an effect of pressing a single frame button with good timing may be executed as the timing effect. By configuring in this way, while operating the handle 51 with one hand, the player can participate in the timing performance with the other hand, so that the player can participate in the timing performance without lowering the game efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the timing performance. Also, by reducing the types of buttons to be operated in the timing effect, the game can be made easier to understand. On the other hand, the types of buttons to be operated may be more than those in this control example. As the number of buttons to be operated increases, the degree of difficulty of the timing performance can be increased, so that a player having high skill in the timing performance can be satisfied.

In this control example, the timing effect is executed during execution of the variable effect, but the execution period of the timing effect is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the timing effect during the big hit (special game state). In this case, it may be configured such that by achieving the quota in the timing effect, it is notified that the game will shift to the probability variable state of the special symbol after the end of the big win. Then, when the timing effect is set for the 16R normal jackpot, the same control as the control executed in the variable effect corresponding to the loss in the modified example of the third control example may be performed. In other words, it suffices to perform control to prevent (suppress) the achievement of the quota in the 16R normal jackpot. By setting the timing performance in the big win, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the time during the big win becomes a mere work for obtaining prize balls, so that the interest in the game during the big win can be improved. In this case, if the player fails to achieve the quota in spite of the 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A), for example, the low probability state of the special symbol is notified during the notification period of the timing effect, and the jackpot after that. It may be configured to perform a reverse performance at the ending of , and to inform the probability change state of the special symbol. As a result, even if the quota cannot be achieved in the timing performance, the game can be played in anticipation of the occurrence of the reversal performance in the ending period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

In the third control example and the modified example of the third control example, the pressing period table 222e defines the pressing period (success period, failure period, etc.) in association with the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ. is not limited to The pressing period may be defined in association with a clock timer that counts the elapsed time from the start of an effect such as a variable effect. By configuring in this way, the timing effect pointer 222e can be omitted, so the capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

In this modified example, the habit (tendency) of the player when pressing the frame button 229 is determined in the initial period of the timing effect. is not limited to For example, before the timing effect is started, a period (game explanation period) for explaining the game nature of the timing effect is set. It may be configured to discriminate the habit (tendency) of the player while prompting the operation to recognize the method of participating in the timing effect. In this case, when prompting the player to perform an operation, a piece of music with a certain tempo may be played, and a plurality of scroll bars may be displayed at a certain interval and at a certain speed according to the tempo of this piece of music. good. As a result, the player can be made to operate the frame button 229 at regular intervals, so that the habit (tendency) of the player can be grasped more accurately.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 186. FIG. In the above-described first control example, a control example in which each character performs a variable action independently or in combination has been described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a suitable method for controlling a role object in which variable operation and lighting operation are performed in combination will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that a rotating lighting unit 800 is added as an accessory that performs a movable effect such as a variable effect. , the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice ramp control device 113 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice ramp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. This is the point. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186, front views of the game board 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board 13 when the rotary lighting unit 800 is at the retracted position, and FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 when the rotary lighting unit 800 is at the extended position. . When the rotary lighting unit 800 is outside the execution period of the effect in which the variable action is performed, it is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 185 . On the other hand, when an effect in which the rotary lighting unit 800 performs a variable operation is set, the rotary lighting unit 800 is arranged at the extended position shown in FIG. is done.

As shown in FIG. 185, the retracted position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is the bottom left of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 185, when the rotary lighting unit 800 is placed at the retracted position, only the upper right portion of the rotary lighting unit 800 is slightly visible, and most of it is hidden behind other components and cannot be seen from the front. Become. On the other hand, the projecting position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is below the third pattern display device 81 as shown in FIG. In this case, most of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be viewed from the front by the player.

Next, the configuration of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 178. FIG. First, FIG. 175(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary lighting unit 800 in this control example, and FIG. 175(b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the left side.

As shown in FIG. 175(a), the rotating lighting unit 800 has a substantially circular rotating member 820 that can rotate about a rotating shaft 822 on the front side, and a lighting unit that can be turned on and off on the back side. A device 810 is provided. Rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f. These through-holes 821a to 821f are circular with the same diameter, and are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) on the circumference centered on the rotating shaft 822 . As a result, every time the rotary member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the same shape (appearance) is obtained (six-fold symmetry). Further, the rotating member 820 is made of a translucent material (for example, PS material). Therefore, even when the portions other than the rear side of the through holes 821a to 821f are lit, the general lighting condition can be visually recognized from the front side.

The lighting device 810 is provided with an insertion opening 812 for inserting the rotating shaft 822 of the rotating member 820 (see FIG. 175(b)). Through this insertion hole 812 , a rotating shaft 822 is physically connected to a drive motor for rotating the rotating member 820 . That is, only the rotating member 820 is rotated by the driving motor, and the lighting device 810 is not rotated.

The lighting device 810 has a light guide plate on the front side, and LEDs on the back side of the light guide plate (inside the lighting device 810). By turning on the LED inside, the player can visually recognize the light of the LED through the light guide plate. In addition, the LEDs are evenly arranged on the back side of the light guide plate so as to illuminate the entire front side, and by lighting all the LEDs, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks evenly illuminated.

In addition, a plurality of regions capable of locally emitting circular light are provided on the front side of the lighting device 810 . That is, six circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are provided. These circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are shaped like circles having substantially the same diameter as the through holes 821a to 821f. In addition, they are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) in a circle around the insertion hole 812 . The circumference on which the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are arranged and the circumference on which the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged have substantially the same diameter. All the through holes are configured to completely overlap on the front side of all the circular lighting regions by having the through holes reach the front side of any one of the circular lighting regions.

In order to cause the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f to emit light locally, for example, the light guide plate is divided from the other regions at the circumference of each of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f A partition may be provided inside so that the light from the LED provided in the area does not leak to other areas. Then, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f may be configured to be individually controllable. With this configuration, when all the LEDs are lit, the front side of the lighting device 810 appears to be lit as a whole, while the LEDs provided in any of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are independent. By illuminating the area, it is possible to give the appearance that only that area is illuminated in a circular shape.

Here, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are composed of red LEDs and white LEDs, and the LEDs provided in the other regions are composed only of white LEDs. . When lighting the lighting device 810 as a whole, it is possible to make the whole lighting device 810 look white by lighting all the white LEDs. On the other hand, when only some or all of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are to be lit, the red LED provided in the corresponding area is set to be lit.

Next, a lighting control method of lighting device 810 for each rotation speed of rotating member 820 will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178. FIG. Here, first, an outline of an effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 will be described. In this control example, as an effect using the rotary lighting unit 800, each time the rotary member 820 rotates and the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f overlap each other (that is, Each time the rotary member 820 rotates by 60 degrees, an effect is provided in which the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are lit in red one by one. In this effect, the number of circular lighting areas in a red lighting state suggests the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable effect. Therefore, the player can confirm the state of the rotary lighting unit 800 in anticipation that as many circular lighting areas as possible will be lit. During this period, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is set to a relatively slow speed (for example, a rotation speed of 60 degrees per second) so that the player can easily visually recognize the number of circular lighting regions that are lit. ) is set (low speed rotation state is set).

In addition, the low-speed rotation state described above continues until the rotating member 820 rotates once. One rotation of the rotating member 820 accelerates the rotational speed. Then, when the rotation speed reaches a predetermined speed or higher (for example, one rotation or more per second), the lighting device 820 is switched to the full lighting state. Note that the rotation speed is continuously accelerated even after the rotation speed reaches a predetermined speed or higher (for example, one rotation or more per second). Then, when it is determined that the rotational speed has reached a relatively high speed (three revolutions per second) (high-speed rotation state has been entered), the lighting device 810 is set to intermittently light in the same phase on the front side. (That is, all white LEDs are set to repeat turning on and off at a constant frequency). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, but the lighting frequency and the lighting period of this intermittent lighting are set so that the rotation direction of the rotating rotating member 820 looks like reverse rotation due to the so-called wagon wheel effect. set.

After the appearance of reverse rotation, the same number of circular lighting regions that were lit in the low-speed rotation state are lit again in accordance with the lighting frequency of the intermittent lighting. Even in this high-speed rotation state, the number of lights in the circular lighting area may be increased. Therefore, since the player can be made to confirm the performance to the end, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In this control example, as the operation of the rotating lighting unit 800, only the rotating operation of the rotating member 820 is specified in the operation scenario. The lighting device 810 is configured to determine the rotation speed from the actual rotation operation of the rotating member 820 and switch the lighting mode. More specifically, the action scenario corresponding to the effect of operating the rotary lighting unit 800 includes first moving the rotary lighting unit 800 from the retracted position (see FIG. 185) to the extended position (see FIG. 186). stipulated. When the movement to the overhanging position (see FIG. 186) is completed (the sensor detects that the overhanging position has been reached), the operation scenario includes a rotation operation in which the rotating member 820 rotates at a low speed. is stipulated. Further, an operation to accelerate the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is defined as an operation when a predetermined period of time (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed after setting the low-speed rotation state. Then, as an operation to be set after the operation of accelerating the rotation speed, an operation of decelerating the rotation speed and stopping the rotation of the rotating member 820 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 6 seconds) has passed in the high-speed rotation state is defined, As a subsequent operation, an operation of moving the rotary lighting unit 800 to the retracted position is defined. In this manner, only the operation of the rotating member 820 is defined in the operation scenario, and the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 is varied according to the speed of the rotating member 820, thereby rotating the rotating member 820 and lighting the lighting device 810. It is possible to suppress the deviation from the lighting control of . That is, when the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is changed, the lighting mode can be changed more reliably, so the visual quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a lighting control method in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation) will be described. First, FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in which the visual quality deteriorates in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation), and FIG. It is the figure which showed the example of lighting control. That is, a control method for preventing the appearance as shown in FIG. 176 during low speed rotation (during low speed operation) and making the appearance as shown in FIG. 177 will be described.

FIG. 176 is a diagram exemplifying lighting control in which the visual quality deteriorates in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation), as described above. This example shows a case where the rotary member 820 rotates 60 degrees in a state where two circular lighting regions are lit in a low-speed rotation state.

When the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged to overlap the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f, the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f become visible through the through holes 821a to 821f. FIG. 176(a) shows a state in which the through holes 821e and 821f overlap with two circular lighting regions respectively set to the lighting state.

FIG. 176(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the rotation member 820 rotates and the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are out of alignment. In this bad example, the next lighting position is turned on before the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are matched. The red light leaked from the circular lighting area halfway. Therefore, the appearance quality is degraded. This is because the through holes 821a to 821f change continuously according to the amount of rotation of the rotating member 820, while the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are fixed. That is, since the lighting positions of the circular lighting regions cannot continuously follow the through holes 821a to 821f, when the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are deviated from the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f, Appearance quality deteriorates.

FIG. 176(c) shows that the rotary member 820 rotates 60 degrees while the lighting conditions of the circular lighting regions are maintained as shown in FIG. It shows the case where the position of 811f and the position of 811f match again. In this case, as in FIG. 176(a), the two circular lighting regions set in the lighting state overlap the through holes 821e and 821f, so the light from the circular lighting regions can be clearly seen from the front. can be visually recognized. Thus, when one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are turned on at a rotational position where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f do not match, the visual quality deteriorates. (See FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, in this control example, lighting control is performed so as to achieve the lighting state shown in FIG. 177 in order to improve appearance quality.

FIG. 177 is a diagram exemplifying a lighting control method in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation) in this control example. As shown in FIG. 177, in this control example, only when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f match, control is performed so that the corresponding circular lighting regions are lit. (see FIGS. 177(a) and 177(c)), and in other intermediate positions, all the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are set to the off state. By configuring in this way, it is prevented that one or more circular lighting regions are lit in a state in which the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are misaligned, resulting in an incomplete appearance. (suppression) can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance quality in the low-speed rotation state (during low-speed operation).

Whether or not the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f match can be detected by a rotation sensor (not shown). This rotation sensor is configured so that the output becomes H every time the rotating member 820 rotates by 60 degrees. For example, even if the through hole 821a matches (overlaps) the position of the circular lighting region 811a, it matches (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811b, and it matches the circular lighting region 811c. It matches (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811f, matches (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811d, and matches (overlaps) the circular lighting region 811e. Similarly, the output is set to H even in the state of being (overlapping). On the other hand, when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are misaligned, the output is set to L.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, a lighting control method in a high-speed rotation state (during high-speed operation) will be described. As described above, during high-speed rotation, all the white LEDs are set to repeatedly turn on and off at a constant frequency (24 Hz). In addition, one lighting period is configured to be extremely short (for example, ON DUTY 0.5%), and the length is such that the arrangement of the rotating member 820 can be visually recognized at the moment of lighting (the rotation cannot be recognized). It is configured to be a period of

As shown in FIG. 178, in the high-speed rotation state, every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees, the entire lighting device 810 momentarily lights up in white (all lights up). In the high-speed rotation state, the rotating member 820 rotates three times per second (1080 degrees per second), whereas the lighting frequency is set to 24 Hz (24 times per second) (1080 degrees/24 times per second). = 45 degrees). On the other hand, since the lighting device 810 is turned off except for the momentary lighting period, the rotating member 820 also disappears. Therefore, the rotating rotating member 820 cannot be visually recognized continuously from the player's line of sight, and is perceived as a 24-Hz frame advance.

178, when the lighting device 810 is momentarily turned on in the arrangement shown in FIG. ) is recognized by the player, but since the lighting period is momentary (ON DUTY 0.5%), the player can only recognize the placement of the rotating member 820 and cannot recognize the rotation direction. . After that, the lighting device 810 is set to the off state until the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (see FIG. 178(b)), so the player cannot see the rotating member 820 during this period.

In the next 24 Hz period (that is, when the arrangement of FIG. 178(b) is reached), the lighting device 810 momentarily enters the full lighting state again. Also in this case, since the lighting period is sufficiently short as in the arrangement of FIG. Then, turning off is set again until the next 24 Hz period (see FIG. 178(d)), and when the next 24 Hz period is reached, all lighting is instantaneously set and the arrangement of FIG. 178(e) is recognized by the player. be done. After that, the arrangement of the rotating member 820 is recognized at 24 Hz by the same control.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 820 is configured to have the same shape (appearance) every time it rotates 60 degrees (six-fold symmetry). By actually recognizing only the arrangement of the rotating member 820, the direction of rotation can be misidentified. 178(a), the through holes 821a to 821f are rotated clockwise (positive direction) by 45 degrees to arrive at the arrangement shown in FIG. 178(c). Regardless, it can be recognized as if the rotating member 820 has rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise. This is because the through-hole 821a and the through-hole 821f cannot be visually distinguished from each other, so the position closest to the through-hole 821a in FIG. ) can be recognized (misidentified) as the through hole 821a.

After that, similarly, by continuously recognizing that the player is rotating in the direction in which the apparent amount of rotation is the smallest, the original rotating direction and the rotating direction recognized by the player can be reversed. In this way, by configuring so that the rotation direction is changed only by switching the lighting control, it is possible to omit changing the rotation direction of the rotating member 820 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) an excessive load from being applied to the drive motor due to sudden stop or sudden reversal in order to change the rotation direction. can. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer period of time.

In this control example, the lighting device 810 is set to full lighting each time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees in the high-speed rotation state (that is, at 24 Hz), but the frequency for lighting the lighting device 810 is limited to this. not a thing In the high-speed rotation state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 820 from one full lighting to the next full lighting is greater than 30 degrees (that is, half of 60 degrees, which is the interval between adjacent through holes), and 60 degrees (that is, the interval between adjacent through holes). That is, the angle when comparing the arrangement of one through-hole before rotation and the arrangement of the through-hole adjacent to the one through-hole on the opposite side of the rotation direction (that is, on the left side) after rotation is It is only necessary that one through-hole is smaller than the actual rotation angle. By configuring in this way, it is possible to misunderstand that the lighting device 810 has moved (rotated) in a direction with a small movement angle (a small movement distance). It can be seen as if the hole is moved to the position of the through hole that is adjacent to the opposite side. Therefore, without changing the rotation speed or rotation direction, it is possible to make the driver feel as if the motor is rotating in the opposite direction only by controlling the lighting. , the pachinko machine 10 that can operate stably for a longer period of time can be provided.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 174, the RAM 223 in this control example has a lighting state counter 223θ, a lighting position storage area 223ι, a lighting set flag 223κ, and an initial identification flag 223λ in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example. , a speed identification timer 223μ, a previous value storage area 223ν, and a speed storage area 223ξ are added.

The lighting state counter 223θ is a counter that indicates the type of lighting state of the lighting device 810, and can indicate different lighting states according to the counter value. Specifically, "01H" means a lighting state (see FIG. 177) for performing lighting control in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation), and "02H" means a low speed rotation state to a high speed rotation state. "03H" means the lighting state (full lighting state) at the time of acceleration of the rotation speed, and "03H" means the lighting state (see FIG. 178) in the high speed rotation state (during high speed operation). means On the other hand, if the counter value is "00H", it means that the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is not performed. This lighting state counter 223θ is updated at the timing of switching the lighting state (see S6613 in FIG. 181, S6805 in FIG. 183, and S6909 in FIG. 184). This lighting state counter 223θ is referred to in the lighting control process (see FIG. 180) executed in the main process, and lighting control is set according to the counter value.

The lighting position storage area 223ι is an area in which information indicating the lighting state of each of the circular lighting regions 821a to 821f is stored. The lighting position storage area 223ι consists of, for example, 1 byte, and the 0th to 5th bits correspond to the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f, respectively. If each bit constituting the lighting position storage area 223ι is 1 (on), it indicates that the corresponding circular lighting region is in the lighting state, and if it is off, it indicates that it is in the light-out state. The information stored in the lighting position storage area 223ι is stored every time it detects that the output of the rotation sensor has become H in the low speed rotation state or the high speed rotation state (arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and circular Each time the positions of the lighting regions 811a to 811f overlap), the value is updated (see S6608 and S6610 in FIG. 181 and S6911 and S6912 in FIG. 184). Also, all values are cleared at the timing when the effect using the rotating lighting unit 800 ends.

The lighting setting completion flag 223κ is a flag indicating whether or not the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H. If the lighting set completion flag 223κ is ON, it indicates that the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor becoming H, and if it is OFF, the lighting state has not been updated. indicates that When the H output of the rotation sensor is detected while the lighting set flag 223κ is off, the lighting state is updated and the lighting set flag 223κ is set to on (S6612 in FIG. 181, S6914 reference). Also, after the lighting state is updated, when the L output of the rotation sensor is detected for the first time, it is set to OFF (see S6604 and S6611 in FIG. 181 and S6911 in FIG. 184). By controlling to update the lighting state with reference to the lighting set completion flag 223κ, it is possible to prevent the lighting state from being updated multiple times while the output of the rotation sensor is H. be able to.

The first identified flag 223λ is a flag indicating whether or not the reference value (the value of the speed identification timer 223μ) for identifying the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 has been acquired. If the first identified flag 223λ is on, it indicates that the reference value (the value of the speed identification timer 223μ) for identifying the rotation speed has already been acquired, and if it is off, the reference value has not yet been obtained. indicates that If the first time identified flag 223λ is ON, the rotation speed is calculated based on the already acquired reference value (see S6701 in FIG. 182). On the other hand, if the first identified flag 223λ is off, the flag is set on after the reference value for identifying the rotational speed is acquired (see S6703 in FIG. 182). By using the first time identified flag 223λ, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 can be accurately determined.

Speed identification timer 223 μ is a timer used to calculate the rotational speed of rotating member 820 . This speed identification timer 223μ is updated periodically (every 1 millisecond), for example, during the main process. The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated by determining the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H to when the output next becomes H from the difference in the value of the speed identification timer 223μ.

The previous value storage area 223ν is a storage area for storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ when the H output of the rotation sensor is detected. Next, when the rotation sensor outputs H, the time required to rotate by 60 degrees is determined by the difference between the value stored in the previous value storage area 223ν and the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ. is calculated. Based on this calculated time, the rotational speed is calculated (S6706 in FIG. 182). The data stored in the previous value storage area 223ν is overwritten with the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ after the rotation speed is calculated each time the rotation speed identification process (see FIG. 182) is executed. .

The speed storage area 223 ξ is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 . The data stored in the speed storage area 223ξ is overwritten every time the rotation speed is calculated in the rotation speed identification process (see S6706 in FIG. 182). Based on the information corresponding to the rotational speed stored in the speed storage area 223ξ, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is determined, and lighting control of the lighting device 810 is performed according to the rotational speed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 184. FIG. First, FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in this control example. Among the main processes, the processes of S1501 to S1520 are the same as the processes of S1501 to S1520 in the first control example.

In addition, in the main process of this control example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process of S1510 ends, the speed identification timer 223μ is updated by adding 1 (S1551), and the process proceeds to S1511. This speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the speed of the rotating member 820 as described above.

In addition, in the main process of this control example, after the ball-entering effect setting process of S1515 ends, lighting control process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 is executed (S1552). Then, after the lighting control process (S1552) is executed, the processes of S1516 to S1520 are executed, and this process ends.

Next, details of the lighting control process (S1552) will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184. FIG. First, FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the lighting control process (S1552). This lighting control process (S1552) is a process for controlling the lighting state of lighting device 810 according to the speed of rotating member 820. FIG.

In the lighting control process (S1552), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter value 223θ is "01H" (S6501). In the processing of S6501, if it is determined that the lighting state counter value 223θ is 01H (S6501: Yes), low speed processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low speed rotation state is executed. is executed (S6502), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6501 that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not "01H" (S6501: No), then it is determined whether or not the value 223θ of the lighting state counter is "02H". (S6503). If it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is "02H" (S6503: Yes), the lighting state is set for the acceleration state during the transition from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state. Acceleration processing is executed (S6504), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6503 that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not "02H" (S6503: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is "03H" ( S6505). In the processing of S6505, if it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is "03H" (S6505: Yes), high speed processing for setting the lighting state in the high speed rotation state of the rotating member 820 is executed. (S6506), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not “03H” (S6505: No), the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “00H” and there is no need to control the lighting device 810. , the process ends.

Next, details of the above-described low speed process (S6502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the low speed processing (S6502). As described above, the low speed processing (S6502) is processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low speed rotation state.

In the low speed processing (S6502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (high) (S6601). : No), then it is determined whether or not the lighting set completion flag 223κ is ON (S6602). In the process of S6602, if it is determined that the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is off (S6602: No), the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at positions shifted from the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f. , and the lighting device 810 has already been set to the off state, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S6602, if it is determined that the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is ON (S6602: Yes), the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are lit while any one of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f is lit. Since it means that the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at the shifted positions, the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are all turned off (S6603). This prevents the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f from being displaced from the through holes 821a to 821f (see FIG. 176(b)) when there is a circular lighting region set in the lighting state. (Suppression) can be performed, so the appearance quality can be improved. When the process of S6603 ends, the lighting set completion flag is set to OFF (S6604), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223κ is ON (S6605). 223κ is on (S6605: Yes), the lighting state has already been set, and there is no need to set the lighting state again, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S6605: No), the position where the output of the rotation sensor is H (positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f and , and the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f), but the lighting state has not yet been set. Therefore, in this case, first, rotation speed identification processing for identifying the rotation speed of rotating member 820 is executed (S6606). The details of this rotational speed identification process (S6606) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S6606 ends, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed is higher than 1 rotation per second (S6607). Therefore, in order to set the lighting state illustrated in FIG. Among them, it is determined whether or not the number of bits whose value is 1 (ON) matches the target value (expectation) of the current effect (S6609).

In the process of S6609, if it is determined that the number of bits with a value of 1 (on) is less than the target value (S6609: No), the bit with a value of 0 (off) is set to 1 in the next higher bit. is set to 1 (S6610), and the process proceeds to S6611. Through the processing of S6610, the number of circular lighting regions set in the lighting state can be increased by one. On the other hand, if the number of bits whose value is 1 (on) matches the target value (expectation), the process of S6610 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6611.

In the process of S6611, among the bits of the lighting position storage area 223ι, the lighting positions (circular lighting regions) corresponding to the bits that are ON are set to be lit in red, and the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is set to ON. (S6611), this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of S6607, if it is determined that the rotation speed is higher than 1 rotation per second (S6607: Yes), the rotating member 820 enters an acceleration state during transition from the low-speed rotation state to the high-speed rotation state. Therefore, all the white EDs provided inside the lighting device 810 are set to the lighting state (S6612). Then, the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is set to "02H" (S6613), the first time identified flag 223λ is set to OFF (S6614), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this low-speed processing, the lighting state described above with reference to FIG. 177 can be set in the low-speed rotation state, so that the visual quality can be improved.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 182, the rotational speed identification process (S6606) described above will be described. This rotation speed identification process (S6606) is a process for identifying (calculating) the rotation speed of rotating member 820, as described above. In this rotational speed identification process (S6606), first, it is determined whether or not the first identified flag 223λ is ON (S6701).

In the processing of S6701, if it is determined that the first identified flag 223λ is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S6701: No), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is stored in the previous value storage area 223ν ( S6702), the first identified flag 223λ is set to ON (S6703), and this processing ends. As described above, by storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ in the previous value storage area 223ν, it is possible to easily calculate the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees in the next rotation speed identification process. be able to.

On the other hand, in the process of S6701, if it is determined that the first identified flag 223λ is ON (S6701: Yes), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is read (S6704), and the read value and the previous value storage area is calculated (S6705). This difference represents the time from when the output of the rotation sensor was previously H to when it is H again this time. That is, it means the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees. When the processing of S6705 ends, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated from the calculated difference (the time required to rotate 60 degrees), and is stored in the speed storage area (S6706), and this processing ends. do. An appropriate lighting state can be set according to the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 calculated by this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the aforementioned acceleration process (S6504) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the acceleration process (S6504). This acceleration processing (S6504) is processing for setting the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state.

In the acceleration process (S6504), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6801). ), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6801, if it is determined that the output is H (S6802: Yes), the rotation speed described above is performed to determine whether or not the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 has reached the speed of the high-speed rotation state. Speed identification processing (S6802) is executed. Since this rotational speed identification process is merely the same as the rotational speed identification process described with reference to FIG. 182, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the processing of S6802 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is 3 rotations per second (S6803). (S6803: No), this processing is terminated as it is because the state has not shifted to the high-speed rotation state.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6803, if it is determined that the rotation speed of the rotating member is 3 rotations per second (S6803: Yes), it means that the state has transitioned to the high-speed rotation state. switch. That is, a command for setting a lighting mode with a lighting frequency of 24 Hz and an on-duty of 0.5% is set to the LED driver of the lighting device 810 (S6804). Thereafter, "03H" is set as the value of the lighting state counter 223θ to indicate that the state has transitioned to the high-speed rotation state (S6805), the first time identified flag 223λ is set to off (S6806), and this processing ends. do. With this acceleration processing, it is possible to immediately identify the transition to the high-speed rotation state and switch the lighting state.

Next, the high-speed processing (S6506) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This high-speed processing (S6506) is processing for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the high-speed rotation state, as described above. In this high-speed processing, first, it is determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901). , whether or not the lighting set completion flag 223κ is ON (S6902).

In the process of S6902, if it is determined that the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is off (S6902: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6902 that the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is ON (S6902: Yes), the lighting state of the circular lighting region in which lighting of the red LED is set is canceled (turned off) (S6903). ), the lighting set completion flag 223κ is set to OFF (S6904), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6901, if it is determined that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), it is determined whether or not the lighting set flag 223λ is ON. If it is (S6905), it means that the lighting state has already been set, and there is no need to set the lighting state again, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lighting set flag 223λ is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S6905: No), then the lighting period in the high speed rotation state (24 Hz, ON DUTY period of 0.5%) (S6906), and if it is not the lighting period (S6906: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S6906, if it is determined that it is the lighting period (24 Hz, ON DUTY period of 0.5%) in the high-speed rotation state (S6906: Yes), then the high-speed rotation state ends from the rotation speed of the rotating member 820. Rotational speed identification processing is executed to determine whether or not (S6907). This rotation speed identification processing (S6907) is the same processing as the rotation speed identification processing (S6606) described above with reference to FIG. 182, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the rotation speed identification process (S6907) ends, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotation speed is less than 3 rotations per second (S6908). Since this means that the high-speed rotation state has ended based on the operation scenario and the rotation member 820 has started to decelerate toward stopping rotation, the processing of S6909 to S6911 for setting the end of the lighting state is executed. That is, all LEDs are set to be turned off (S6909), and the lighting state counter 223θ is set to "00H" to indicate that the lighting control of the lighting device 810 has ended (S6910). Then, the lighting set completion flag 223κ is set to OFF, all the data in the lighting position storage area 223ι are cleared to 0 (S6911), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S6908, if it is determined that the rotation speed is not less than 3 rpm (the rotation speed of the high-speed rotation state is maintained) (S6908: No), first, the lighting position storage area The data of each bit of 223ι is shifted to the lower bit side (S6912). That is, the data is shifted in the direction opposite to the low speed rotation state. Then, the data after the shift is referred to, and the red LED provided at the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the bit whose value is 1 (on) is set to the ON state (S6913). Then, the lighting set completion flag 223κ is set to ON (S6914), and this process ends.

By executing the process of S6913, the red LEDs provided in the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are controlled separately from the white LEDs controlled in the lighting state illustrated in FIG. The degree of expectation of the jackpot can be displayed again. Also, the red LED is lit only when the white LED is lit and the output of the rotation sensor is H. set. This is because the rotation angle of the rotary member 820 in one cycle of lighting is 45 degrees, and the circular lighting regions are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees, so the least common multiple of these is 180 degrees. Here, as described above, when the rotating member 820 rotates clockwise by 45 degrees in the high-speed rotation state, it appears as rotated counterclockwise by 15 degrees from the player's eye level. Therefore, when the rotary member 820 rotates clockwise by 180 degrees, it appears as if it has rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the player's point of view. Therefore, by executing the processing of S6912 and S6913, each time the rotation of one circular lighting area appears counterclockwise, the lighting position of the red LED is made to follow the appearance of the player and rotate counterclockwise. You can move one around. Therefore, in the high-speed rotation state, it is possible to make it look as if the rotation direction has been changed only by lighting control without changing the rotation direction or the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 . In addition, a lighting effect of a red LED indicating the degree of anticipation can be performed in accordance with the appearance of starting to rotate in the opposite direction. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, the rotating lighting unit 800 that combines the rotating operation and the lighting operation is added to the configuration. This rotary lighting unit 800 is composed of a rotating member 820 that rotates and a lighting device 810 that is fixed in orientation. The red light emitted from the lighting areas 811a to 811f is made visible to the player, and an effect is performed in which the degree of expectation for the big win is reported according to the number of light emitting locations. However, if one or a plurality of circular lighting regions are lit while the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are deviated, there is a possibility that the appearance may be incomplete. Therefore, in this control example, only when the positions of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f match, the corresponding circular lighting regions are controlled to light, and when the positions are misaligned, the lighting device 810 is configured to be entirely extinguished. By configuring in this way, the visual quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

Further, in this control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 can be determined according to the detection frequency of the rotation sensor, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 can be changed according to the rotation speed. Instead of setting the rotation control of the rotating member 820 and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 independently according to the elapsed time, the actual rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is determined and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is changed. By doing so, lighting control that matches the actual operation of the rotating member 820 can be executed.

In this control example, the lighting device 810 is arranged on the back side of the rotary member 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged on the back side of the rotating member 820 to display an image indicating the degree of expectation of a big win for each through-hole position. As a result, as compared with the case where the lighting device 810 is arranged, it is possible to execute an effect with a higher degree of freedom, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this control example, six through-holes 821a to 821f are provided in the rotary member 820, but the number of through-holes can be determined arbitrarily. Further, the configuration in which the lighting state of the lighting device 810 can be visually recognized from the front side of the rotary member 820 is not limited to the through hole penetrating to the rear side. For example, instead of the through holes, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like may be arranged so that the lighting mode on the back side can be visually recognized. Further, by making the thickness of the rotating member 820 thinner than that of other portions, it may be configured such that the lighting state on the back side is easier to see than other portions.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the embodiments described above, the front rail portion 715 is formed in a single arc shape, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed from a plurality of circular arcs, and the direction of adjacent circular arcs may be reversed (wavy shape). In this case, the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed, and the attitude of the effect member 620 is made unstable, so that the effect of rattling the effect member 620 can be performed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the production member 620 forms an inverted state, the center of gravity G of the production member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support portion 613, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity may be arranged obliquely above the first shaft support portion 613 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the left lower plate member 320 has been described as being horizontal in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the widthwise outer side. In this case, the speed of the ball flowing into the upper surface of the left lower plate member 320 from the outside in the width direction of the board can be reduced by the acceleration in the direction of gravity, and the deceleration time of the ball can be shortened.

In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as an elongated hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the positional deviation between the slide hole 643 and the slide shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by expanding and contracting the transmission member 640. FIG. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the position of the contact portion 644 can be switched between two positions has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously variable (movable). In this case, the change rate of the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the case where the attitude of the tip end swinging member 6556 changes between two positions has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture of the tip end swinging member 6556 may be changed in multiple stages. In this case, the amount of swinging of the expansion and contraction production device 6540 can be formed in a plurality of types, and the variation of production can be increased.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Of course, each of the above-described embodiments and control examples, or a combination thereof, may be used. Furthermore, although it is composed of a plurality of controllers, it may be composed of one integrated controller or several integrated controllers.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Example of Technical Concept for Changing Driving Force Transmission with Deformed Long Hole 553 of Rotating Arm Member 550>
A crank member that rotates about a first shaft and has a protrusion protruding at a position eccentric to the first shaft, and an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted are provided at a first position and separated from the first position. an arm member movably formed between a second position and a driving device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first shaft; The driving force is transmitted to the arm member when the protrusion is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing the moving direction of the protrusion, and the arm member is moved from the first position to the second position. and a non-transmission area connected to the transmission area and blocking the transmission of the driving force. A1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine includes a crank member provided with a projection projecting at a position eccentric from a rotating shaft, and an arm member provided with an insertion portion through which the projection of the crank member is inserted. , there is a gaming machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-000306). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the crank member and the arm member are always interlocked. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the timing of starting the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member cannot be shifted. In this case, when starting the crank member, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, and there is a problem that the size of the driving device is increased.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes the transmission area and the non-transmission area connected to the transmission area, the crank can be rotated while the protrusion is inserted into the non-transmission area. By starting the member, the timing for driving the arm member and the timing for starting the crank member can be shifted. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the protrusion enters the transmission area from the non-transmission area. As a result, the driving force required for starting the crank member can be suppressed, and the size of the driving device can be reduced.

The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves through the non-transmission area. For example, when the arm member is moved, it is exemplified by a case where it is moved by gravity or elastic force generated by an elastic spring for assistance.

Examples of the insertion portion include a recess having a bottomed recess shape and an elongated through hole.

In the game machine A1, the crank member is formed to be capable of rotating one or more rotations, and the insertion portion serves as the transmission area when the crank member is rotated in one rotation direction. A gaming machine A2 comprising a selection area that becomes the non-transmitting area when the game machine is rotated in another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, it is possible to change the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member according to the rotation direction of the crank member. As a result, by reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotation speed of the crank member, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase. can increase the variation in speed of the arm members.

In the game machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the protrusion and an inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion that faces the movement direction of the protrusion when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. A game machine A3 characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing a margin portion that is filled with the selected area.

In addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is formed by providing the insertion portion with a margin, so that the game machine A3 has other functions for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member. A member can be made unnecessary, and the material cost can be reduced.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position and the second position is formed as a terminal position of the movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the terminal position formed as the terminal position When the arm member is arranged at either one of the second positions, the arm member directed to the other opposite to either the first position or the second position formed as the terminal position A gaming machine A4 characterized in that a bounce suppression mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, when the arm member is arranged at either the first position or the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, It is possible to suppress the driving force that the driving device needs to generate in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side of the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the driving device can be improved.

As the bounce suppression mechanism, when using the attractive force of a magnet, when suppressing the movement with a claw-shaped member, and when the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed in the axial direction of the crank member, the arm A case where an insertion portion of a member is formed is exemplified.

In the case of attracting with a magnet, the magnet is required as a separate member, but it is possible to generate different magnitudes of attracting force depending on the internal composition of the magnet, and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

If the claw-shaped member is used to suppress the movement, a driving device for operating the claw-shaped member is required, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically blocked by the claw-shaped member.

When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the protrusion of the crank member from the arm member is directed toward the shaft of the crank member, there is no need to dispose a separate member for suppressing the movement of the arm member, Bouncing of the arm member can be mechanically suppressed.

In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is arranged at least one of the first position and the second position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position where the non-transmission area is connected to the transmission area is the A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by making the circumscribed circle of the protrusion about the rotation axis of the crank member substantially the same.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the bounce suppression mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is arranged at the first position or the second position. As a result, the arm member can be smoothly changed from the moving state to the stopped state.

In addition, in the bounce suppression mechanism, the load applied from the insertion portion to the protrusion is directed toward the rotating shaft of the crank member, so it is possible to suppress the load applied in the rotation direction of the crank member, thereby suppressing the load on the drive device. can do.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the insertion portion near the connection position where the non-transmission region is connected to the transmission region is the same as that of the crank member. The circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis is substantially the same, and a biasing force is applied to move the arm member from the first position toward the second position, and the non-transmission region of the insertion portion is applied. At least one of an inner recess portion protruding inside the insertion portion and an outer recess portion projecting outside the insertion portion and having a size capable of accommodating the projection portion is formed on the side surface on the first position side. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that:

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is arranged at the first position, the outer shape of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centered on the rotation axis of the crank member, and a biasing force is applied to the arm member to move the arm member from the first position toward the second position. In this case, the protrusion of the crank member is arranged in the non-transmission region of the insertion portion, so that the arm member is prevented from moving by the protrusion and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the protrusion is moved through the non-transmitting region so that the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess are arranged to face each other, the arm member is moved. That is, when the protrusion is arranged to face the inner recess, the protrusion pushes the inner recess and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protrusion is arranged to face the outer recess, the protrusion is accommodated in the outer recess and the arm member is moved toward the crank member.

As a result, the projection of the crank member moves in the non-transmission region, and the movement of the arm member differs in movement width from the movement of the arm member that occurs when the projection moves in the transmission region due to the rotation of the crank member. can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the driving device and change the movement width of the arm member.

That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the driving device according to the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control load on the driving device increases, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the movement of the arm member with different movement widths is formed by moving the protrusion of the crank member in the non-transmission area and arranging the protrusion and the inner recess or the outer recess so as to face each other. be. Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. Further, by narrowing the formation interval between adjacent inner recessed portions or outer recessed portions, the arm member can be caused to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

The mode in which the protrusion can be accommodated may be a mode in which the entire protrusion is included in the recess, or a mode in which a part of the protrusion is included in the recess.

<An example of the technical concept of limiting the swing width of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 by the arc-shaped hole 554>
A movable member that can move along a predetermined movement trajectory and can be arranged at a first position and a second position that are different from each other; a stopper member that limits the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the member and changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or at the second position; A gaming machine B1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a movable member that is formed to be movable and a stopper member that limits the movement width of the movable member (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-016623). reference). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the stopper member is immovably fixed, separate stopper members are prepared for the case where the movable member is arranged at the first position and the case where the movable member is arranged at the second position. Therefore, there is a problem that the space for arranging the stopper member becomes wide.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the stopper member when the movable member is arranged at the first position is arranged at the second position. It can also be used as a stopper member in the case. Thereby, the space for arranging the stopper member can be suppressed.

Further, the stopper member changes the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or at the second position, so that variations in the movement width of the movable member are increased. be able to.

Examples of the stopper member include a projecting portion that protrudes from the transmission member and abuts against the movable member, and an inner wall portion of a recess that is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member.

Examples of modes of movement include linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, rocking movement, rotational movement, and the like. Further, the width of movement in each mode of movement means, for example, in the case of linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc., the actual movement distance or the linear distance between two points. In the case of , etc., it means the actual movement distance, movement angle, and the like.

In the game machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member that is pivotally supported on a first shaft and that expands and contracts in the radial direction of the first shaft, , the extension length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement trajectory is formed in an arc shape centering on the first axis, and the stopper member is provided when the intermediate member is in a predetermined extension state. A gaming machine B2, wherein the movable member extends along the predetermined movement locus.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported so as to be able to swing about the first axis and is formed to be able to expand and contract in the radial direction of the first axis. Equipped with members. Therefore, the radius of curvature of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member about the first axis can be changed by the length of the intermediate member in the expansion/contraction direction.

Here, the stopper member extends along a predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined elastic state (the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member and the intermediate member in the predetermined elastic state). is assumed to be the same as the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member in the case of . In this case, the movable member is moved along the stopper member when the intermediate member is brought into a predetermined expansion/contraction state, and the movable member can be moved in the extension direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

On the other hand, if the intermediate member is set to a different expansion/contraction state than the predetermined expansion/contraction state, the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be made different from the curvature of the stopper member in the extending direction. The trajectory and the extension direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the moving width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, by changing the expansion/contraction state of the intermediate member, it is possible to change the movement width of the movable member.

In the game machine B2, the movable member includes a projection projecting toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the projection is inserted, and the projection is inserted into the insertion portion. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that the movable member and the stopper member interlock with each other in an extending/contracting direction of the intermediate member in an inserted state, and the movable member abuts against the insertion portion.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the protrusion of the movable member is inserted into the insertion portion of the stopper member, so that the movable member and the stopper member interlock in the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member. , the driving device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the driving device for moving the stopper member can be used together. Further, the insertion portion restricts the movement of the movable member by coming into contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper that restricts movement of the movable member and a function that interlocks the movable member and the stopper member. As a result, it is possible to consolidate functions.

A game machine B4 characterized in that, in the game machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side by the expansion and contraction of the intermediate member.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side due to the expansion and contraction of the intermediate member. Thereby, the moving width of the movable member can be changed between when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion and when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion.

That is, when the first shaft is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement locus follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement trajectory and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be widened. On the other hand, when the first shaft is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement trajectory of the protrusion when the movable member is moved along a predetermined movement trajectory is substantially reversed from the shape of the insertion portion), the protrusion The angle formed by the movement trajectory of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion becomes large, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be narrowed.

In the game machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so as to be able to change its posture while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. is changed, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member is changed.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3 or B4, the position of contact between the movable member and the insertion part is changed by changing the posture of the insertion part while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member. In this case, it is possible to change the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member while maintaining the stretched state of the intermediate member.

In any one of game machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion that allows the projection portion to enter and exit along the movement trajectory, and the projection portion is separated from the insertion portion via the groove portion. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that a state can be formed, and the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that engages with the stopper member in the separated state.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the protrusion is separated from the insertion portion through the groove, and the movable member can be moved in the separated state. A positioning aid is provided for engagement with the stop member. Therefore, the formation range of the stopper member can be made smaller than the movement range of the movable member, the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state can be reduced. can be prevented. That is, even if the projecting portion is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member is suppressed by the positioning assistance portion, so that the projection portion can be returned to the insertion portion.

<An example of the technical concept of supporting two points of the production member 620 that is supported in an inverted position>
a base member, a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on the base member and moves upward from a predetermined position, a driving device that generates a driving force for displacing the movable member, and is connected to the movable member. and a transmission member for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving device to the movable member, wherein the transmission member is swingably supported by a shaft support portion formed in the base member, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the length from the pivotal support portion to the connecting position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connection position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a movable member that is displaceably supported by a support portion formed in a base member and moves upward from a predetermined position is driven by transmission of a driving force through a gear (for example, See JP-A-2011-120640). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the driving device is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution of the driving device (for example, one step in a stepping motor) is determined by the support portion of the movable member. to the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the positional adjustment of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes more difficult as the center of gravity of the movable member moves away from the supporting portion in the radial direction.

Further, when the center of gravity of the movable member deviates to one side from the inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion, a driving force is generated to displace the movable member in the opposite direction, thereby causing the movable member to stand upside down. Even if an attempt is made to maintain the state, if the driving force causes the center of gravity to shift to the other side, the direction of the driving force and the direction of gravity will coincide, resulting in a large displacement of the movable member.

Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the supporting portion, it becomes more difficult to stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the supporting portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the driving device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is supported by the shaft support portion of the base member and connected to the movable member, The length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the pivot portion is formed shorter than the length from the connecting position of the movable member and the connecting member to the supporting portion. Therefore, even if the movable member is elongated in the radial direction of the supporting portion, it is possible to suppress the amount of movement of the center of gravity of the movable member when the driving device is operated in the minimum unit of control resolution of the driving device. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged directly above the support portion.

The manner in which the movable member is supported by the base member includes a manner in which the movable member is pivotably supported by the base member, a manner in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, and others. A combined aspect and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine C1, a game characterized in that the length of an arm of the transmission member from the pivotal support portion to a connection position with the movable member is shortened as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the more the movable member displaced about the support part moves upward from the predetermined position, the more the transmission member from the shaft support part to the connection position with the movable member. Arm length is shortened. Therefore, compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant, the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved.

For example, when the number of revolutions of the driving device that rotates the transmission member is constant, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first length. A description will be made assuming that the second length is fixed at a second length shorter than the length of . At a constant number of rotations of the drive device, the transmission is better when the transmission member is fixed at the first length than when the transmission member arm length is fixed at the second length. The movement speed of the center of gravity of the movable member increases when the member is arranged in a predetermined phase.

Here, in the vicinity of the predetermined position, the movable member is quickly operated at the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the first arm length, and near the inverted state, the speed generated when the transmission member is set to the second arm length Consider a case where it is desired to move the movable member slowly at . As a method for that purpose, it is conceivable to change the rotation speed of the driving device in the middle, but this method cannot be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the driving device. Further, even if the number of revolutions of the driving device can be changed, if the number of revolutions is to be changed midway, a detection sensor is required to detect the timing of the change, which increases the cost. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the arm length from the shaft support portion where the transmission member is supported to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is such that the transmission member is at a predetermined position. It is formed in such a manner that it is shortened as it moves upward from . Therefore, the transmission member can be set to have the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to have the second arm length near the inverted state, so that the degree of freedom in designing the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

As a configuration in which the length of the arm from the shaft support portion to the connection position between the transmission member and the movable member is fixed, a case where a projection projecting from the transmission member is inserted into and connected to the movable member is exemplified. be. In addition, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a projection projecting from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, For example, the member is provided with an elongated hole in a portion supported by the support portion, and an insertion shaft is formed through the elongated hole from the base member.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member has a protrusion projecting in a direction parallel to the support, and the transmission member is an elongated hole extending in a radial direction of the shaft support. A gaming machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted.

In the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion extends in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the projection portion of the transmission member is inserted through the insertion portion, thereby connecting the transmission member and the movable member. are connected, the moving direction of the connecting position is restricted to the radial direction of the pivot portion. Therefore, it is possible to mechanically change the length from the shaft support portion to the connecting position of the transmission member with the movable member as the transmission arm swings.

Examples of the insertion portion include elongated holes that are formed through the hole, recessed portions that are formed as bottomed recesses, and the like.

A gaming machine C4 in the gaming machine C3, wherein the pivotal support is arranged vertically above the support, and the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged on a straight line connecting the support and the projection.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, when the movable member takes a posture in which the projection is arranged vertically above the support, the center of gravity of the support, the pivot, the projection and the movable member is Formed on a vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is applied vertically downward to the support portion and the pivot portion. As a result, no rotational force is applied to the movable member, so that the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the driving device is cut off. Thereby, the load on the driving device can be reduced.

A game machine C5 is characterized in that, in the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and rotation of the driving device is reduced by the worm gear.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the worm gear slows down the rotation of the driving device, thereby controlling the driving device. The movement width of the movable member can be greatly reduced when operating with the minimum unit of resolution of . In addition, since the direction of transmission of force via the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating due to the load from the transmission member side, thereby improving the drive device. It is possible to reduce the load on the driving device when the motor is stopped.

In any one of game machines C1 to C5, an urging device is provided in which an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the supporting portion is generated in both directions of displacement of the movable member, and the urging force is A game machine C6 characterized in that the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the direction of displacement in an inverted state arranged vertically above the support portion, and increases as the movable member is displaced from the inverted state.

According to the game machine C6, in any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force that moves the center of gravity of the movable member above the supporting portion, and the biasing force is such that the center of gravity of the movable member It increases as the movable member is displaced from the state (inverted state) arranged vertically above the support portion. That is, the urging force can be minimized in the inverted state.

Therefore, by increasing the urging force when moving the movable member upward from the predetermined position, it is possible to reduce the burden on the driving device that moves the movable member upward from the state in which the movable member is arranged at the predetermined position.

Further, the biasing force is generated in both directions of displacement of the movable member, and is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from a predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, even if the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes the inverted state, the posture of the movable member is changed to the inverted state by the biasing force. can be directed to This makes it easy to stop the movable member in an inverted state.

In the gaming machine C6, the movable member can form a first state in which the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from vertically above the support portion, and a second state in which the center of gravity is displaced by the predetermined amount or more. The game machine C7 is characterized in that the rate of change in the biasing force when the displacement is the same is greater in the second state than in the first state.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of the game machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than the first state on the inverted state side in which the center of gravity of the movable member is arranged vertically above the support portion. In the second state of being displaced, the rate of change in biasing force for the same displacement is greater. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state in which the movable member is arranged in the second state, it is possible to reduce the load on the driving device at the time of starting. Moreover, since the acceleration of the movable member can be reduced when the movable member is arranged near the inverted state, it is possible to easily stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<An example of the technical concept in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes during oscillation>
a movable member movably formed between a first position and a second position; a driving device for generating a driving force for moving the movable member; and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position. and an urging device that generates an urging force in response to a rate of change in the urging force generated when the movable member is arranged in a first urging region from the first position to a predetermined position. When the member is arranged in a second urging region that is connected to the first urging region and is separated from the first position, the rate of change in the urging force is formed to be large. A gaming machine D1 characterized by:

Here, in game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine that uses an urging force from an urging device such as an elastic spring as an auxiliary force when moving a movable member with a driving force generated by a driving device (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011. -120640). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the biasing force of the biasing device is proportionally increased according to the amount of displacement of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the biasing device by changing the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that That is, it has been difficult to make the movement of the movable member smoother by suppressing the biasing force in one region, and to increase the biasing force to make the movement of the movable member more rapid in another region.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rate of change in the biasing force biased toward the first position is higher than that in the case where the movable member is disposed in the first biasing region. It is made larger when placed in the active region. That is, for example, when starting the movable member stopped at the second position toward the first position (second biasing region), a sufficient biasing force can be obtained from the biasing device, while the movable member is moved to the first position. When arranged in the urging region, the change in urging force is suppressed, and the movable member can be operated supplely (slowly).

In addition, as a mode in which the rate of change in the biasing force of the biasing device is changed by the arrangement of the movable members, the number of biasing devices that generate a biasing amount on the movable member increases in the middle, or the number of biasing devices increases. A case where the elastic spring is formed from an elastic spring and the spring constant of the elastic spring is changed by the arrangement of the movable member is exemplified.

In the game machine D1, the urging device is a pair of long members arranged on a pair of surfaces intersecting the moving direction of the movable member and sandwiching the movable member in the moving direction. are arranged on both sides of the movable member so as to face each other, and the other end, which is the end opposite to the one end, is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed; a main body sandwiched between the pair of elongated members, and a main body formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of elongated members and contacting at least one of the pair of elongated members in the movement direction of the main body. a contact portion formed to be able to contact, the contact portion being connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member engages the pair Among the elongated members, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member is abutted and biased, and the movable member contacts the other elongated member. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the abutting portion abuts and is given an urging force.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the change in the rate of change in the biasing force of the biasing device is achieved by shifting the contact timing between the movable member and the pair of long members for each long member. can be formed by Therefore, it is not necessary to change the biasing force of the biasing device by control or prepare a separate member for improving the biasing force.

That is, since the movement of the pair of long members is restricted at the other end, one of the long members on the side closer to the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves. The other elongated member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first urging region, when the movable member moves, the other elongated member arranged on the opposite side of the moving direction of the movable member stays in place.

On the other hand, in the second urging region, the other elongated member is brought into contact with the contact portion by moving the movable member. As a result, a biasing force is also generated from the other elongated member. Therefore, it is possible to increase the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region.

Examples of elastic springs include coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, and the like.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the urging device is a pair of long members arranged on a pair of surfaces intersecting the moving direction of the movable member and sandwiching the movable member in the moving direction. are arranged opposite to both side surfaces of the movable member, and the other end opposite to the one end is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, and the movable member is a main body sandwiched between the pair of elongated members; and at least one of the pair of elongated members formed on the opposite side of the main body with respect to the pair of elongated members in the moving direction of the main body. and an abutment portion formed so as to be able to abut on the movable member, the abutment portion being connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is arranged in the first urging region, the movable member Of the pair of elongated members, one of the elongated members on the side closer to the movable member due to the movement of the movable member abuts and is applied with a biasing force, and the movable member is subjected to the second biasing force. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that, when arranged in the area, the intermediate portion of the one long member is pressed against the abutment portion arranged on the side of the one long member with respect to the body portion.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, the change in the rate of change in the biasing force is formed by pressing the intermediate portion of one of the long members against the contact portion. That is, one of the long members already deformed by the movement of the movable member is further deformed starting from the intermediate portion pressed against the contact portion, thereby causing a change in the rate of change in the biasing force. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to deformation is shorter than in the deformation starting from the other end, so the rate of change in the biasing force with respect to the amount of movement of the movable member is reduced. increase. This makes it possible to increase the change in the biasing force with respect to the amount of movement of the movable member in the second biasing region. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate of change in the biasing force.

In the gaming machine D3, the one elongated member has a first bending point that is bent toward the contact portion side that is arranged oppositely, and the one elongated member is bent at the first bending point. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being pressed against a contact portion.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, one of the elongated members abuts against the abutting portion arranged opposite to the first bending point, so that the one of the elongated members abuts. It is stretched by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip portion of the biasing device that applies the biasing force to the movable member can be separated from the other end of the elongated member or the first bending point, which is the starting point of the biasing force. Therefore, the moment applied to the movable member from the biasing device can be increased in the second biasing region.

In the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged area that is enlarged in the movement direction as it separates from the other end of the elongated member, and one of the movable member and the elongated member is expanded in the tip enlarged area. A game machine D5 characterized in that the end of the game machine D5 is abutted against.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlarged area, and the movable member and one end of the long member are brought into contact with each other in the tip enlarged area. Therefore, when one elongated member is stretched by being pressed against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the elongated member separates from the other end of the elongated member. direction to increase the amount of deformation of the elongated member. Therefore, the biasing force applied from the biasing device to the movable member can be increased.

A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D2 to D5, the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion can be changed.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D2 to D5, variations in the change in the biasing force generated by the long member can be increased. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change in the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<An example of technical concept in which a plurality of outlets are provided and the buffer ribs 322 are formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside a game area formed so that a ball can flow down, a board accessory placed in contact with the lower edge of the game area and a ball formed on one side in the width direction of the board accessory are played. A first out port that is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second out port that is an opening formed on the other side in the width direction of the inner-board accessory that is opposite to the one side in the width direction and is an opening for discharging the ball from the game area. , wherein the first out port and the second out port include a lower plate portion extending from the lower side surface of the opening to the front and having a guide surface on the upper surface, and the guide surface of the lower plate portion The surface includes cushioning ribs extending in the direction of the opening of the corresponding side of the first outlet or the second outlet, and is raised from the guide surface on the outside in the width direction. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the aspect ratio of the cushioning ribs is formed to decrease toward the outer side in the width direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a plurality of outlets are provided (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 9-192301). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is preferable to reduce the size of each outlet to the extent that the number of outlets increases, because it is preferable to secure the space for arranging attackers, etc., but if the outlets are made too small, There is a problem that the discharge of game balls may be delayed.

For example, if the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the front side of the out port is equal to or greater than the vertical width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port. Also, for example, when the side surface of the accessory is arranged on the side surface in the width direction of the out port and becomes a wall, the ball flowing into the front side of the out port from the width direction collides with the side surface of the accessory and rebounds in the width direction. At this time, if the amount of rebound in the width direction becomes equal to or greater than the width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the cushioning ribs are formed on the guide surface formed on the lower plate portion, so that the bounce of the ball can be suppressed and the ball can be decelerated. That is, when a ball collides from above and below, the cushioning ribs bend and deform, so that the cushioning ribs act as a cushion to suppress the bouncing of the ball. Also, when the ball collides from the left and right, the ball is damped by being stuck in the buffer ribs.

Here, the cushioning ribs extending in the opening direction are weak against loads from the left and right directions, and may be damaged by collision with balls from the left and right directions.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the guide surface has a stepped portion on the outside in the width direction, the ball flowing down from the left and right toward the buffer rib falls from above the stepped portion to the buffer rib. . In this case, it is possible to increase the vertical component of the direction in which the ball collides with the buffer ribs, thereby suppressing damage to the buffer ribs.

In addition, since the stepped portion has a function of blocking the ball moving in the lateral direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from rebounding beyond the lateral width of the out port.

Since the buffer ribs are formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to obtain a large rebound suppressing effect in the vicinity of the center in the width direction of the game area where the falling balls tend to concentrate. As a result, the ball can be discharged smoothly from the out port. In addition, by aligning the curve of the lower side of the game area with the lower surface of the buffer rib, the arrangement position of the out port can be downwardly corrected.

Here, the reason why the effect of suppressing the bounce of the ball increases as the height of the cushioning rib increases is that the amount of deflection of the cushioning rib increases. In other words, the greater the amount of deflection of the buffer ribs, the more the cushioning effect works and the more easily the rebound can be suppressed. Therefore, it is preferable to keep the aspect ratio of the buffer rib constant in the left-right direction (the length in the vertical direction is constant) for the effect of suppressing rebound.

On the other hand, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs is fixed (the length in the vertical direction is fixed), it is necessary to increase the formation height of the stepped portion, and the path of the sphere to the stepped portion is also upward. As a result, the game area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer ribs is reduced at the widthwise outer side of the game area where the falling balls are difficult to concentrate, and the widthwise center of the game area where the falling balls are easy to concentrate. In , the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer rib is increased. As a result, it is possible to achieve both improvement in ball ejection efficiency and securing of a game area.

Extending in the direction of the opening is not particularly limited, and means extending along the direction of the opening in a shape such as a straight line, a waveform, or a chevron.

In the game machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the guide surface has an outer inclined portion that is downwardly inclined to the outside in the width direction of the game area.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with the outer inclined portion, the speed of the ball flowing into the guide surface from the outside in the width direction can be reduced by the gravitational acceleration, and the ball can be moved. Deceleration time can be shortened.

A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1 or E2, a non-flowing region is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port and the second out port, in which balls cannot flow down.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, since the ball flowing obliquely downward from the non-flowing area toward the guide surface is restricted, the ball does not flow down to the guide surface. The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the direction in which the falling ball rebounds. Thereby, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port and the second out port can be narrowed.

In the gaming machine E3, the non-downflow area is provided with an opening/closing device that is arranged in the game area and that can be opened and closed to the front side, and is arranged above at least one of the first outlet and the second outlet. , a game machine E4 formed on the front side of the opening/closing device.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the non-flow region is formed by the opening/closing device. As a result, the space generated by suppressing the opening dimension of the first outlet or the second outlet in the direction toward the non-downstream area can be used as the installation space for the opening/closing device.

When the opening/closing device is in the closed state, the ball flowing down in front of the opening/closing device is caused to flow downward in the game area. It has a function to flow down. Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a non-flowing area, as compared with the case where the balls flow down irregularly by colliding with a nail or the like.

A gaming machine E5 in any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, wherein a direction adjusting rib extending in the opening direction is provided on the upper bottom surface of the first outlet or the second outlet.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port is provided with a direction adjusting rib extending in the opening direction in a rib shape. , the resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Feature F group> (Use the image at power-on even during normal operation)
display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display mode displayed by the display control means and setting means for reading out the display data from the storage means and setting the data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, wherein initial settings of a game are executed in the storage means. Initial display data corresponding to an initial image to be displayed when the image is displayed is stored, and the setting means reads the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display means. The game machine F1 is characterized in that the initial display data read in the initial setting is used as display data to be displayed on the display means in an effect executed after the completion of the initial setting.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine, various effects images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to enhance the interest of the game. In such a game machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on the display device is stored in advance in a storage means, and when the image is displayed, the corresponding image information is read out from the storage means and image processing is performed. After applying, the image is displayed on the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598). However, as the amount of image information increases in the gaming machine described above, the amount of image data used in the gaming machine increases, increasing the capacity of storage means for storing data, and increasing the load due to the process of reading the data. There was a problem. Due to such problems, an improvement in image display control has been demanded.

According to the game machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for effects after the completion of the initial setting, the display data can be shared, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display There is an effect that control can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the display means is composed of first display means and second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means is the first display means or the second display means. and the setting means reads out the initial display data from the storage means in the initial setting and uses it as display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means. In the effect executed after the initial setting, the initial display data read out in the initial setting is set as display data for displaying on either one of the first display means and the second display means. The game machine F2 is characterized by:

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, it is possible to share the display data for the display means composed of the first display means and the second display means, and display control can be performed. This has the effect of reducing the load.

In the game machine F2, the initial display data is set such that the display areas of the first display means and the second display means are set as one display area.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so there is an effect that the display control can be simplified.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a determination means for determining the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination result determined by the determination means are shown. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information, wherein the identification information is displayed in the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and in the dynamic display after completion of the initial setting. A game machine F4 characterized in that it is composed of normal identification information.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the player can be made to recognize that it is the initial setting.

In the gaming machine F4, the initial image is a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a display including a game information image showing game content displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by comprising at least an image.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, the initial image is composed of the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and the display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be notified of the contents of the game and the results of determination at the same time even during initial setting.

In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the initial identification information displayed on the first display means during the initial setting consists of a smaller amount of data than the normal identification information. F6.

According to the game machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of less display data than the normal identification information, the control load at the time of initial setting can be reduced, and the initial identification information can be read and displayed quickly. effective.

In any one of the game machines F4 to F6, the second display means has a smaller display area than the first display means, and when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, the second display means displays , a game machine F7, wherein a display image including the game information image displayed in the initial image is displayed.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F4 to F6, when the game is not played for a predetermined period, the initial display data is used to display the game information image on the second display means. Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and the content of the game can be notified.

In the gaming machine F7, when the game is not played for the predetermined period, the display data corresponding to the display image displayed on the first display means among the initial images is set to non-display. A gaming machine F8 characterized by:

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to non-display, so that the first display means can display a different image. be.

In any one of the game machines F2 to F8, when the setting means sets the initial display data read out in the initial setting to the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting, The display data corresponding to the second display means is set to non-display, and when setting the second display means, the display data corresponding to the first display means is set to non-display. A game machine F9 characterized by.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means can independently perform display using the initial display data. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F9, the setting means sets the initial display data read out in the initial setting to the first display means in the effect executed after the initial setting. A game machine F10 characterized in that it is set to be displayed in different display positions.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F9, it is possible to show to the player as if the display is different from the display displayed in the initial setting, and the initial display data can be used in a wide variety of ways. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic group G> (Positions of ○ and × are changed depending on the content of fluctuation between the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
a first display means capable of displaying identification information; a second display means different from the first display means; and dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means dynamic display means for displaying; privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means; A game machine G1, further comprising switching display means for switching between the first display means and the second display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means.

Here, for example, by providing a plurality of display means for performing the production of the game machine and performing a variable production or a jackpot production on each display means, a synergistic production using the plurality of display means can be performed. There is known a gaming machine intended to enhance the interest of players (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-081256). However, in the gaming machine described above, there has been a demand for improved convenience using a plurality of display devices. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for an improvement in convenience.

According to the gaming machine G1, the effect (dynamic display of identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is switched between the first display means and the second display means by the switching display means. It can be displayed by switching. As a result, the identification information can be displayed at a position where the player can easily see it according to the state of the game, and there is an effect that convenience can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, a first drive means capable of driving to a first position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed on the first display means, and a dynamic display on the second display means. and a second driving means drivable to a second position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information, and the switching display means is provided when the first driving means is at the first position. the identification information is displayed on the second display means, and when the second driving means is at the second position, the identification information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine G2 characterized by:

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the first drive means and the second drive means can suppress the problem of obstructing the recognition of the identification information.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second display means has moving means capable of moving on the front side of the first display means, and the switching display means moves the second display means by the moving means. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that, when the identification information is displayed on the second display means, the game machine G3 is characterized in that it is switched so that the identification information is displayed on the second display means.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the identification information is prevented from being visually recognized by the second display means.

In any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display modes displayed on the first display means and the second display means are displayed in one display area. A gaming machine G4, characterized in that the gaming machine G4 is composed of synthetic display data corresponding to the second display means.

According to the game machine G4, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set by combined display data in any one of the game machines G1 to G3, thereby reducing the control load. be.

In the gaming machine G4, coordinate information is set for setting the respective display areas of the first display means and the second display means as one display area, and the combined display data is the The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it is composed of display data for displaying respective coordinates corresponding to the coordinate information.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, there is an effect that the display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Characteristic group H> (fall control)
A game machine comprising: a movable member having a movable portion movable at least between a first position and a second position; and driving means for driving the movable member to a third position and a fourth position, wherein: a regulating means for regulating the movement from the position to the second position; and the movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state in which the regulation by the regulating means is released based on the establishment of a first condition. The member is driven by the driving means, and the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position while being regulated by the regulating means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A game machine H1 characterized by having drive control means for driving by means.

Here, for example, by moving a movable accessory provided in the game machine, the degree of expectation for a big win is suggested. In such a gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the player by increasing the number of movable patterns of movable accessories (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079687). In this case, it is necessary to use many driving devices (for example, motors) in order to increase the number of movable patterns of the movable accessory, resulting in an increase in power consumption. Due to such problems, suppression of power consumption has been demanded.

According to the game machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable part can be moved by the drive vibration or the like, so power consumption is increased compared to the case where the movable part is electrically moved. has the effect of suppressing

The game machine H2 is characterized in that, in the game machine H1, it has a movable means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the driving means drives the movable member to the fourth position, so that even when the movable part moves to the second position, the movable means moves the movable member to the fourth position. There is an effect that it can be returned to the 1 position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by an inertial force (acceleration) that drives the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

In the game machine H1 or H2, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player and a predetermined effect indicating whether or not the privilege is given by the privilege giving means are provided. effect execution means for executing during a performance period, and the drive control means moves the movable member to the third position when a movable condition is satisfied during the period during which the effect is executed by the effect execution means. to the fourth position, and when an effect indicating that the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means is executed, it is easy to drive in a state in which the regulation by the regulation means is released. A gaming machine H3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the movable member is likely to be driven to the fourth position in a state in which the regulation is released in the effect that the privilege is likely to be provided. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that a privilege will be awarded when the movable position is reached.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the drive control means moves the movable member in the same operation in a state in which the regulation by the regulation means is released and in a state in which the regulation is regulated. Gaming machine H4.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the determination of whether or not the movable member is restricted due to the difference in the operation of driving the movable member. Here, the operation means a difference in speed, a driving pattern, a difference in driving direction, and the like.

In any one of game machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is positioned between the third position and the fourth position when driving the movable member from the third position to the fourth position. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position for a predetermined period.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, by temporarily stopping, the effect that the movable part can be easily moved to the second position by inertia force etc. when it is not excited. There is

In any one of game machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is located below the third position, and the drive means reciprocates between the third position and the fourth position. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being configured to be able to

According to the game machine H6, one of the effects of the game machines H1 to H5 is that the movable part can be easily moved by the downward gravity.

The game machine H7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the moving means is composed of a stepping motor, and the regulating means energizes the stepping motor in a stopped state.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the moving means and the regulating means can be configured by stepping motors, and there is an effect that the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature Group I> (Avoids execution of similar effects)
an effect execution means capable of executing an effect; a specific period setting means for setting a specific period during which the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means; and a specific condition determining means for determining whether a specific condition that can be executed by the execution period of the effect is satisfied when executing the effect, and the effect executing means is determined by the specific condition determining means. The game machine I1 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on determination that the specific condition is satisfied.

Here, for example, when a certain amount of time has passed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on, by shifting to a specific effect different from the normal general effect and displaying the regular effect that is executed periodically, Gaming machines have been proposed for the purpose of increasing the interest of players (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-252534). In this case, in the regular performance that is executed periodically, when the performance with sound and image similar to the regular performance is executed, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the regular performance is being executed. There was a problem that the player was confused. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

According to the gaming machine I1, during the period in which the specific effect is executed, whether or not the specific effect can be executed is determined before the execution, so that the confusion of the player due to the malfunction of the execution timing of the effect can be suppressed, and the game can be easily understood by the player. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine I1 has a clock means capable of clocking clock information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the timing of the predetermined clock information by the clock means. A gaming machine I2 characterized by at least setting.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the start of the specific period is set based on the clocking of the predetermined clock information, so the specific period is set at the same time in the other game machines. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the effect execution means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determining means performs the normal effect based on the normal effect being executed. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it determines whether a specific condition is established.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, establishment of the specific condition is determined based on the normal effect, so the specific effect is determined in consideration of the relationship between the specific effect and the normal effect. There is an effect that it can be executed.

The gaming machine I3 has operation means that can be operated by a player and detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, and at least one of the specific effect and the normal effect includes and an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is satisfied when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. Game machine I4 to play.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific presentation and the normal presentation are executed at the same time, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easier for the player to understand. effective.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I4, a dynamic display executing means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on establishment of a start condition, and a specific identification that gives advantageous benefits to the player. special game state setting means for setting a special game state, which is a game state in which information is likely to be displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestive effect indicating whether or not the special game state is set. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that a special game state is set by a specific performance, and to make the player interested in the specific performance. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period each time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. The execution means executes the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the setting of the specific period, and the specific condition determination means determines the specific condition A gaming machine I6 characterized by comprising a delay means for delaying the specific effect and causing the effect executing means to execute the specific effect when it is determined that the condition is not established.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines I2 to I5, even when the specific condition is not established, the specific performance is delayed and executed, thereby giving more confusion to the player. It has the effect of suppressing the

<Feature J group> (0.125 second production)
information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; discrimination means for discriminating stored information; display means for displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means; and when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means , privilege granting means for granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player; performance mode output means for outputting a predetermined performance; pre-discrimination means for discriminating the acquired information; and effect execution means for outputting a effect based on the result of discrimination by the pre-discrimination means to the effect mode output means; The output means has a plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set, and the effect executing means, when executing the output of the new effect, the output area in which the effect was previously output. A game machine J1 characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output area different from the output area.

Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting hole and the number of reserved memories increases, the reserved random number information is determined in advance (read ahead), and the determination result is a predetermined result (jackpot). etc.), the game machine aims to increase the player's expectation of whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold will be a big win by executing an effect that suggests that the For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). In such a game machine, if the efficiency of the game is improved by shortening the variable time, the period of presentation of the lottery results, etc. is also shortened, which makes it difficult for the player to understand. To solve this problem, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that is easy for a player to understand even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

According to the gaming machine J1, a plurality of output areas are set in which an effect based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means (an effect suggesting the determination result of suspension) is output. The next effect is output to an output area different from the output area where the effect was output. As a result, even if the determination result of the preliminary determination means is newly acquired during execution of the performance, the performance being executed can be reproduced by displaying the performance based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means in a different output area. It is possible to execute a new performance based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means without terminating the process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the gaming machine J1, a predetermined order is set for the plurality of output areas, and the effect executing means, when executing a new effect, outputs the output area next to the output area that previously output the effect. A game machine J2 characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed for the output areas in the order corresponding to the order of the game machine J2.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine J1, the effects are sequentially output according to the order set in the output areas, so that the problem that the output areas of the latest effects and the new effects overlap is eliminated. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is composed of display means for displaying a predetermined display mode that is the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of small areas as the output areas. A gaming machine J3 characterized by having a set area.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of effects can be displayed at the same time by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the performance period can be set longer.

In the game machine J2 or J3, the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to a predetermined number, and the information acquisition means stores information stored in the storage means when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired. Even if the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means, the effect execution means The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that an effect is output to the output area corresponding to the next order of the output area.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect of the game machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that the player can feel as if more information has been acquired.

In the game machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the effect content to be executed by the effect execution means is determined based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means for the information, and If the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquiring means, the effect content determination for determining the effect contents to be executed by the effect executing means based on the determination result other than the specific determination result. A game machine J5 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of the game machine J3, there is an effect that the player can play the game as if the information has been acquired.

In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determining means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the effect output is executed by the effect executing means. A game machine J6 characterized in that it has end means for forcibly ending the performance being executed when the performance that is not executed is being executed.

According to the game machine J6, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output to the same output area, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the game machine J5, the effect content determination means determines the effect period together with the effect content, and the effect execution means places the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the newly determined effect. The game machine J7 is characterized in that, when the performance that has not elapsed is being executed, the performance being executed is overwritten and the newly determined performance is executed.

According to the game machine J7, in addition to the effects of the game machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output to the same output area, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristics K Group> (Combinedly operating accessories are operated under one operating condition)
a first movable means movable within a first movable range; a second movable means different from the first movable means movable within a second movable range; and a first movable means with respect to the first movable means Operation of first movable setting means for setting a pattern, second movable setting means for setting a second movable pattern for the second movable means, and movement of the first movable means by the first movable pattern and the operation of the second movable means that moves according to the second movable pattern, the first or second movable pattern is set so that the operational condition is established when the operational condition is not satisfied. determining means for determining correction data for correcting at least one of the movable patterns; and correcting means for correcting at least one of the first or second movable patterns based on the correction data determined by the determining means. A gaming machine K1 characterized by comprising:

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can perform a wide variety of effects by varying a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it may become difficult to appropriately set the operation. Further, among the game machines described above, there are those that combine and vary a plurality of variable members in one performance, and that are capable of executing a wider variety of performance operations. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may deviate from each other, resulting in a deterioration in operational quality.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first movable means is moved within the first movable range, and the second movable means different from the first movable means is moved within the second movable range. A first movable pattern is set for the first movable means by the first movable setting means, and a second movable pattern for the second movable means is set by the second movable setting means. The operating condition is established when the operating condition corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that is movable according to the first movable pattern and the operation of the second movable means that is movable according to the second movable pattern is not established. Correction data for correcting at least one of the first and second movable patterns is determined by the determining means. At least one of the first and second movable patterns is corrected by the correction means based on the correction data determined by the determination means.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of an operation contrary to the operation conditions, so there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be preferably moved.

The game machine K1 is characterized in that it comprises an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are movable in at least the predetermined movable effect. Game machine K2 to play.

According to the gaming machine K2, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. Also, the first movable means and the second movable means are movable in at least a predetermined movable effect.

Thereby, it is possible to operate the first movable means and the second movable means that are moved in a predetermined movable effect in accordance with the operating conditions. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the performance of an action contrary to the operating conditions in the predetermined movable effect, it is possible to improve the operational quality of the first movable means and the second movable means in the predetermined movable effect. There is

In the game machine K1 or K2, the game machine K3 is characterized in that the second movable means is arranged in association with the first movable means and is movable together with the first movable means.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured in association with the first movable means and is movable together with the first movable means. There is an effect that it is possible to perform an operation with a sense of unity with the operation of the second movable means.

In any one of game machines K1 to K3, storage means for storing a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination means; and information determining means for determining information necessary to establish the operating conditions based on the respective movable positions with the movable means, wherein the determining means determines based on the information determined by the information determining means. , a gaming machine K4, wherein the correction data is determined from the storage means.

According to the game machine K4, in any one of the game machines K1 to K3, a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination means are stored in the storage means. When the operating condition is not satisfied, the information determining means determines information necessary for establishing the operating condition based on the respective movable positions of the first movable means and the second movable means, and determines the information. Correction data is determined from the storage means by the determination means based on the information determined by the means.

As a result, when the operating condition is not satisfied, the movable pattern can be corrected by the process of determining the correction data from the storage means with a relatively light processing load, so that the processing load can be reduced. There is

In any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the determination means corrects the movement pattern of the second moving means so that the movement condition satisfies the movement condition when the movement condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it determines data.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the operating condition is not satisfied, the determining means determines the correction data for correcting the movement pattern of the second moving means so that the operation condition is satisfied, so that the second moving means is corrected. There is an effect that the operation quality can be improved without the

The game machine K5 comprises period setting means for setting an activation period for confirming operation contents of the first movement setting means and the second movement setting means based on power-on of the game machine, and the determination means determines the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern so that the operating condition is satisfied when the operating condition is not satisfied in the closing period; A game machine K6, wherein a movable pattern set after the insertion period is over is corrected based on the correction data determined by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period setting means sets an on period for confirming the operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means based on power-on of the game machine, and the operating conditions are established during the on period. If not, the determining means determines correction data for correcting the second movable pattern so that the operating condition is satisfied. Based on the determined correction data, the movable pattern set after the closing period ends is corrected by the correction means.

As a result, after the closing period ends, it is possible to set the movable pattern corrected to the state in which the operating condition is satisfied. That is, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be moved in a state where the operating conditions are established during most of the time the game machine is in operation.

<Characteristic group L> (Adjusting the action of one role to the other)
A first movable means movable within a first movable range, a second movable means different from the first movable means movable within a second movable range, the first movable means and the second movable means and movable control means for moving based on predetermined movable data, wherein first movable data corresponding to a predetermined first movable pattern is set for the first movable means. 1 movable setting means; determining means for determining movable data for the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data; A gaming machine L1, further comprising: second movement setting means for setting the movement control means to move the second movement means according to the movement data determined by the determination means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines include a variable member that is variable by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can perform a wide variety of effects by varying a plurality of variable members (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the number of variable members is increased, there is a possibility that it may become difficult to appropriately set the operation. Further, among the game machines described above, there are those that combine and vary a plurality of variable members in one performance, and that are capable of executing a wider variety of performance operations. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may deviate from each other, resulting in a deterioration in operational quality.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the first movement data corresponding to the first movement pattern predetermined for the first movement means is set by the first movement setting means. Based on the set first movable data, the determining means determines movable data for the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern. The second movable setting means sets the second movable means to be movable by the movable control means according to the movable data determined by the determining means.

As a result, the second movable means can be moved in an operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means, so there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be preferably moved.

The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that it comprises an effect executing means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are movable in at least the predetermined movable effect. game machine L2.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, the following effects are produced. That is, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. Then, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved in at least a predetermined movable effect.

As a result, the second movable means can be moved in a motion corresponding to the motion of the first movable means in a predetermined motion effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the motion quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved in a predetermined movable effect.

In game machine L1 or L2, game machine L3 is characterized in that said second movable means is configured in association with said first movable means and is configured to be movable together with said first movable means. .

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured in association with the first movable means and is movable together with the first movable means. There is an effect that it is possible to perform an operation with a sense of unity with the operation of the second movable means.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the determining means, based on the completion of the operation of the first moving means that moves in the first moving pattern, moves the moving part in the first moving pattern. A game machine L4, characterized in that the movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means is determined.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the first movable pattern is movable based on the completion of the operation of the first movable means that is movable in the first movable pattern. Since the motion data for the second motion means corresponding to the motion of the first motion means is determined by the determination means, the motion data can be determined in consideration of the series of motions of the first motion pattern. Therefore, the second movable means can be operated in a mode more suitable for the operation of the first movable means, so that the operational quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be further improved.

The game machine L4 includes period setting means for setting an initial setting period for performing initial settings based on power-on of the game machine, and the first movable setting means, based on the setting of the initial setting period, A gaming machine L5, characterized in that it sets the first movable data.

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machine L4, the following effects are produced. That is, the period setting means sets an initial setting period for performing initial setting based on power-on of the gaming machine. Then, the first movable data is set by the first movable setting means based on the setting of the initial setting period.

As a result, the movable data corresponding to the operation of the first movable means moved in the first movable pattern during the initial setting period can be determined. There is an effect that it can be moved by an operation corresponding to the moving means.

In the gaming machine L5, a movement determining means for determining whether or not to move the first moving means after the end of the initial setting period, and when the movement determining means determines to move the first moving means. and specific movement setting means for setting specific movement data corresponding to a predetermined specific movement pattern, wherein the determination means determines the second movement for setting the movement corresponding to the specific movement pattern. A gaming machine L6, characterized in that it determines movable data of means.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of the game machine L5, the following effects are produced. That is, after the end of the initial setting period, the movement determining means determines whether or not to move the first moving means. is set by the specific movement setting means. The determining means determines movable data for the second movable means for setting the motion corresponding to the specific movable pattern.

As a result, the second movable means can be moved in an operation corresponding to a specific movement pattern, so that the quality of the movements of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L6, the determining means determines the timing at which the operation of the first moving means set to at least the first moving pattern ends, and the timing at which the operation of the second moving means ends. The game machine L7 is characterized in that the movable data is determined so that the values match.

According to the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L6, at least the timing of the end of the operation of the first movable means in which the first movable pattern is set and the end of the operation of the second movable means Since the moving data is determined by the determining means so as to match the timing of the first moving means and the moving timing, the motion quality of the first moving means and the second moving means can be determined at the motion end timing, which is one of the timings that the player pays the most attention to. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In any one of game machines L1 to L3, the motion determination means determines that the movable amount of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data has reached a predetermined movable amount. The game machine L8 is characterized in that the operation of the first movable means is determined based on the above.

According to the game machine L8, in addition to the effects of the game machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means that moves in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data becomes a predetermined movable amount. Since the motion of the first movable means is discriminated by the motion discriminating means based on , there is an effect that the motion of the second movable means can correspond to the motion of the first movable means more finely.

In the gaming machine L8, the determining means moves the second moving means corresponding to the operation from when the moving amount of the first moving means reaches the predetermined moving amount to when the first moving pattern ends. A gaming machine L9 characterized in that it determines data.

According to the game machine L9, in addition to the effects of the game machine L8, the second movable means corresponds to the operation from when the movable amount of the first movable means reaches the predetermined movable amount until the first movable pattern ends. is determined by the determining means, it is possible to make the operation of the second movable means correspond to the operation of the first movable means when the predetermined movable amount is reached. Therefore, there is an effect that the operational quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

In the gaming machine L10, second movable data corresponding to a second movable pattern predetermined for the second movable means based on the setting of the first movable data by the first movable setting means A gaming machine L11 characterized by comprising movable setting means for setting the .

According to the game machine L11, in addition to the effects of the game machine L10, based on the fact that the first movement data is set by the first movement setting means, the predetermined second movement is set for the second movement means. Since the second movable data corresponding to the pattern is set by the movable setting means, the second movable means is operated in the second movable pattern even before the movable amount of the first movable means reaches the predetermined movable amount. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second movable means from being in a stopped state until the predetermined movable amount is reached, so there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic group M> (Lighting control of LED for accessories)
A movable means having a plurality of visual recognition parts configured to be movable within a predetermined movable range and configured such that the light emission form from the back side can be visually recognized from the front side; Light-emitting means having a light-emitting portion capable of emitting light from the visible portion in a predetermined light-emitting manner, movable control means capable of controlling the movement of the movable means, and at least a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means. a determinable movable pattern determination means, and when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means, the movable part is positioned at a light emitting position where the visible part faces the light emitting part of the light emitting means. light emission control means capable of controlling at least light emission with a specific light emission pattern for causing the light emitting portion to emit light when the light emitting portion is positioned, and extinguishing the light when the movable means is moved from the light emitting position by a predetermined amount. Game machine M1.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means operated by motors or the like. Among such gaming machines, there is one that can execute a wide variety of effect operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-012194). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, with the diversification of the variable means, it may become difficult to preferably move each of the variable means of complicated construction. Further, among the above-described conventional game machines, there is one in which the light emission mode of a light emitting device composed of an LED or the like is changed in accordance with the movement of the variable means. In such a game machine, by causing the light-emitting device to emit light in accordance with the operation of the variable means, it is possible to execute a more impactful presentation operation. However, in this conventional game machine, the operation of the variable means and the light emission mode of the light emitting device may be out of sync. In such a case, there is a risk that the visual quality of the performance action will be degraded.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the movable means is movable within a predetermined movable range. The movable means includes a plurality of visual recognition portions configured so that the light emission mode from the back side can be visually recognized from the front side. Light-emitting means having a light-emitting part capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode is provided on the back side of the movable means. The movable means is movable controlled by the movable control means, and the specific movable pattern is determined by at least the movable pattern determination means as the movable pattern to be moved by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means, the light emitting part is caused to emit light when the movable part is positioned at the light emitting position where the visible part faces the light emitting part of the light emitting means, and the movable means is activated. Light emission is controlled by at least the light emission control means in a specific light emission pattern which is emitted when the light emitting device is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitting section from emitting light when the visual recognition section and the light emitting section are deviated from each other, so that the appearance quality of the movable means can be improved when the light emitting means emits light. Therefore, there is an effect that the light emitting means and the movable means can be favorably operated.

A gaming machine M2, wherein the movable means is composed of a rotating body rotatable about a predetermined rotating shaft in the gaming machine M1.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, the movable means is composed of a rotating body that can rotate about a predetermined rotation axis. , and the arrangement other than the light emitting position are alternately repeated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to operate with a high-quality appearance each time at a light emitting position that may be arranged multiple times.

In the game machine M1 or M2, the movable pattern determination means can determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern. wherein, when the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission control means controls the light emission of the light emission means with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern. M3.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable pattern determining means determines one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission control means controls light emission of the light emitting means in a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern.

As a result, light emission can be controlled with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, so that the appearance of the movable means can be changed more greatly according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily visually determine in which movement pattern the movement is made.

A gaming machine M4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern is set to have a higher movable speed than the specific movable pattern.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the predetermined movable pattern is set to a faster movable speed than the specific movable pattern, so that the movable pattern of the movable means can be easily determined from the movable speed. has the effect of being able to

A game machine M5 in the game machine M3 or M4, wherein the predetermined light emission pattern is a light emission pattern that causes the light emission means to emit light even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emission position.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3 or M4, if light emission is controlled in a predetermined light emission pattern, the light emission means will emit light even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emission position. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize the difference in the light emission mode of the light emission means between the specific light emission pattern and the predetermined light emission pattern.

In any one of game machines M1 to M5, the movable means is composed of a rotating body rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis, and the viewing section is arranged on a predetermined circumference about the predetermined rotation axis. It is provided at a plurality of locations at equal intervals, the movable means has rotational symmetry corresponding to the number of locations of the visual recognition portion, and the number of light emitting portions is the same as the number of locations of the visual recognition portion. A gaming machine M6 characterized in that it is provided with a number of locations of .

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M2 to M5, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable means is composed of a rotating body rotatable about a predetermined rotating shaft. The visual recognition portions are provided at a plurality of locations at equal intervals on a predetermined circumference around the predetermined rotation axis. Further, the movable means has rotational symmetry corresponding to the number of visible parts. The light-emitting portions are provided at the same number of locations as the number of locations of the visual recognition portions.

Accordingly, when the variable means is rotating, the light emitting position is set at every constant rotation angle, so that the appearance quality before and after reaching the constant rotation angle can be improved in the specific movable pattern.

In the game machine M6, the light emission control means controls, as the specific light emission pattern, each time the rotating body reaches the light emission position, the number of locations of the light emission portions that emit light at the previous light emission position is greater than or equal to that of the light emission portions. A gaming machine M7 characterized in that it controls the number of light emitting units to emit light.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of the game machine M6, the following effects are produced. That is, as the specific light emission pattern, each time the rotating body reaches the light emission position, the light emission control means emits light from the number of light emission portions equal to or greater than the number of light emission portions that were emitting light at the previous light emission position. controlled by

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily recognize that the movable pattern and the light emitting pattern have been switched according to the change in appearance.

In any one of game machines M3 to M7, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determination means includes a high-speed movable pattern set to a higher movable speed than the predetermined movable pattern, and the light emission control means The game machine M6 is characterized in that, when the predetermined movable pattern is shifted to the high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting unit is controlled to emit light at each predetermined cycle.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines M3 to M7, the following effects are produced. That is, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determining means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is shifted to the high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting means controls the light emitting section to emit light at predetermined intervals.

As a result, it is possible to more easily recognize that the high-speed movable pattern has been achieved, depending on the period at which the light-emitting portion emits light.

In the game machine M6, the predetermined period is shorter than the period in which the movable means set with the high-speed moving pattern is in the light emitting position, and is the period between the light emitting position and the next light emitting position. A gaming machine M7 characterized by being longer than the time required to reach a point.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine M7, the predetermined cycle is shorter than the cycle in which the movable means set with the high-speed movement pattern is in the light emitting position, and moves from one light emitting position to the next light emitting position. Since it is configured to be longer than the time to reach the midpoint between the rotation The angle of the position where the visual recognition part adjacent to the direction opposite to the direction is arranged by rotation during the predetermined period becomes smaller. That is, it is possible to misidentify the visually recognizing portion adjacent to the opposite side of the rotating direction at each predetermined cycle as the visually recognizing portion that was recognized before the predetermined cycle passed, so that the rotating direction of the movable means appears to rotate in the opposite direction. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it look like the direction of rotation has been changed without changing the operation of the variable means, so there is an effect that the load on the variable means can be reduced.

In the game machine M7, the light emission control means causes the light emission means to emit light in a third light emission pattern in which the respective light emission portions are caused to emit light in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the light emission control means causes the light emission control means to emit light in the third light emission pattern in which the respective light emission portions emit light in a predetermined order, the light emission can be performed in a more interesting manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature N group> (Mini game control)
In a gaming machine provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and specific control execution means that executes specific control when the operation means is operated according to a predetermined operation rule, a condition establishment means for establishing a specific condition at a plurality of timings; and a first operation for executing the specific control when the operation means is operated in a state where the specific condition is established as the predetermined operation rule. A first state in which a rule is set, and a second operation rule in which the specific control is not executed when the operating means is operated in a state where the specific condition is satisfied is set as the predetermined operation rule. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising switching means for switching between the two states at least based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device is configured to be able to execute a display effect in which various display images such as patterns and characters are displayed, thereby improving interest. Some of these conventional gaming machines execute a display effect or the like indicating whether or not a winning game advantageous to the player is awarded as a display effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-325886). ).

However, since such display effects are only selected by lottery, there is a problem that if the game is played continuously for a certain period of time, a series of effects will appear and the game will become monotonous.

Further, some of the above-described conventional gaming machines are provided with a production button for receiving an operation from a player, and display a plurality of suggestive images suggesting the operation of the production button during a predetermined display effect, so that the game can be played. There is something that encourages players to participate (hereinafter referred to as "player participation type production"). In this player-participation type effect, the score is added by operating the effect button in accordance with the timing suggested by the suggestive image, and when the score exceeds the reference point, the player receives a privilege (for example, , hit) is given.

However, whether or not it will be a win is already determined by a lottery executed before the start of the player-participation type presentation. For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to be able to achieve the reference point only in the case of winning, and the display mode of the player participation type presentation has to be changed depending on the case of winning and the case of losing. rice field. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's willingness to participate because it is possible to predict whether the player will win or lose from the display mode of the player-participation type presentation.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine N1, the specific condition is established by the condition establishing means at a plurality of predetermined timings during the predetermined period. As a predetermined operation rule, a first state in which a first operation rule is set in which a specific control is executed when the operating means is operated in a state in which a specific condition is satisfied; A second state in which a second operation rule is set such that specific control is not executed when the operation means is operated in the established state is switched by the switching means based on at least the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Thereby, it is possible to switch whether or not specific control is executed when the operation means is operated in a state in which a specific condition is satisfied depending on whether the state is the first state or the second state. Therefore, the player can be expected to operate the operating means in a state where the specific condition is satisfied, expecting that the game is in the first state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous. Moreover, there is an effect that the ease with which a specific control is executed can be varied by a simple control of switching between the first state and the second state.

The gaming machine N1 includes effect execution means for executing a timing suggestion effect for suggesting an operation timing according to the predetermined operation rule, and the specific control execution means executes the operation timing suggested by the timing suggestion effect. A gaming machine N2, characterized in that the specific control is executed when the operation means is operated in N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect executing means executes a timing suggestion effect for suggesting an operation timing according to a predetermined operation rule. Further, when the operation means is operated at the operation timing suggested by the timing suggestion effect, the specific control execution means executes the specific control.

As a result, the player can be made to perform an operation at the timing suggested by the timing suggestive effect in anticipation of execution of the specific control, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the timing suggestive effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine N1 or N2, timing determination means for determining operation timing based on the operation of the operation means by the player during the predetermined period; an operation rule setting means for setting, as a second operation rule, an operation rule for executing the specific control when the operation means is operated at a timing different from the operation timing determined by the timing determination means; A gaming machine N3 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation timing is discriminated by the timing discriminating means based on the operation of the operating means by the player during the predetermined period. Further, when switching to the second state by the switching means, as a second operation rule, when the operation means is operated at an operation timing different from the operation timing determined by the timing determination means, an operation in which specific control is executed. A rule is set by the operation rule setting means.

As a result, when the state is switched to the second state, the specific control is not executed unless the operation is performed at a timing different from the timing at which the player operated. can be made difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of specific control in the second state.

In the gaming machine N3, as the second operation rule, a delay operation rule that the specific control is executed when the operation means is operated at a timing later than the predetermined timing at which the specific condition is satisfied; and an early operation rule for executing the specific control when the operating means is operated at a timing earlier than the predetermined timing at which the specific condition is satisfied. Game machine N4.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N3, there is a delay operation rule in which specific control is executed when the operation means is operated at a timing later than a predetermined timing at which a specific condition is satisfied. , and an early operation rule that specific control is executed when the operation means is operated at a timing earlier than a predetermined timing at which a specific condition is satisfied is defined as at least the second operation rule. As a result, there is an effect that the operation rule set in the second state can be diversified.

In the game machine N4, the timing determination means determines at least whether the operation means is operated in the first half of the state 1 in which the specific condition is satisfied, and the operation rule setting means is the timing determination means. The game machine N5 sets the delay operation rule when it is determined that the operation means has been operated in the first half of one state in which the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by at least the timing determining means whether or not the operating means is operated in the first half of the one state in which the specific condition is satisfied, and the timing determining means determines whether the operating means is operated in the first half of the one state in which the specific condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the delay operation rule is set by the operation rule setting means.

As a result, it is possible to switch to an operation rule in which specific control is not executed unless a player who has performed an operation in the first half of a state in which a specific condition is established does not operate the operating means at a timing later than the establishment of the specific condition. can. That is, for the player who operates the operation means early, the operation rule is set such that the specific control is not executed unless the operation is performed at a timing that makes it difficult for the player to perform the specific control in the second state. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of game machines N1 to N5, storage means for storing a predetermined determination value; determination means for determining whether the determination value is a predetermined specific value based on the elapse of the predetermined period of time; notification means for executing specific notification indicating a state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination value is determined to be a specific value by the determination means, wherein the specific control is performed by the storage means; A game machine N6, characterized in that the control is such that the predetermined judgment value stored in the game machine N6 is updated so as to approach the specific value.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines N1 to N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined judgment value is stored by the storage means. Based on the elapse of the predetermined period, the determination means determines whether the determination value is a predetermined specific value, and the determination by the determination means that the determination value is the specific value gives the player a A specific notification indicating favorable conditions is performed by the notification means. In specific control, the predetermined judgment value stored in the storage means is controlled to be updated so as to approach a specific value.

As a result, the player can be made to operate the operating means in a state where the specific condition is satisfied, expecting that the predetermined judgment value reaches the specific value and that the specific notification is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the desire to participate in the game of the player can be improved.

In a game machine N6, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming a specific lottery result. and execution means, wherein the specific notification is notification indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means has become the specific lottery result.

According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result. be. As the specific notification, a notification indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means has become a specific lottery result is performed.

As a result, the player can be made to operate the operating means with a stronger expectation that a specific notification will be made. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate can be further improved.

In the gaming machine N7, the switching means switches to the second state when a lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result. .

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N7, when the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the specific lottery result, the switching means switches to the second state. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a specific notification from being made even though the lottery result is not obtained.

<Characteristic group O> (Change the difficulty level of the mini-game by changing the display mode)
Operation means operable by the player, effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed according to the operation of the operation means, and when the operation effect is executed by the effect execution means, valid period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation of the operating means is valid; and when the operating means is operated during the valid period and a predetermined first condition is satisfied, a predetermined discrimination value is sent to the player. discrimination value updating means capable of executing either one of a first update for updating to an advantageous value and a second update for updating to a value disadvantageous to the player compared to the first update; a first update period during which the first update is likely to be performed by the discriminant value updating means, and a second update period during which the first update is less likely to be performed than the first update period, with respect to the effective period of a first effect mode that makes it easier for the player to operate the operation means during the first update period as the mode of the operation effect, and the second effect mode compared to the first effect mode The game machine O1 is characterized by comprising an effect mode setting means capable of setting any one of a second effect mode in which the player is difficult to operate the operation means during one update period.

According to the gaming machine O1, setting the first effect mode makes it easier to operate the operation means in the first update period, while setting the second effect mode makes it easier to operate the operation means in the first update period. is difficult to operate, there is an effect that the ease with which the first update is executed can be varied according to the aspect of the operation effect.

In the gaming machine O1, the operation effect includes a timing suggestion mode indicating operation timing for the player to operate the operation means, and the determination value updating means is adapted to determine whether the timing at which the operation means is operated corresponds to the operation timing. The first update is likely to be executed when it corresponds to the operation timing set in the performance, and the first update is difficult to be executed when the timing at which the operation means is operated does not correspond to the operation timing. A gaming machine O2 characterized by:

According to the game machine O2, it is possible to easily determine the operation timing at which the first update is likely to be executed according to the timing suggesting mode, so there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate in the operation presentation can be improved.

In a game machine O1 or O2, an advantageous condition determining means for determining establishment of an advantageous condition, and a privilege for giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the advantageous condition is determined to be established by the game condition determining means. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that it comprises an imparting means, and the effect executing means executes the operation effect indicating the determination result by the advantageous condition determining means.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, when an advantageous condition is established, there is a possibility that the discrimination value becomes a specific value in the operation presentation. That is, since there is a possibility that a specific effect will be executed, it is possible to have the player participate in the operation effect in anticipation of the execution of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

In the gaming machine O3, the effect mode setting means sets the first effect mode when the advantageous condition is determined by the advantageous condition determining means, and sets the first effect mode when the advantageous condition is not determined. A game machine O4, characterized in that it sets the second effect mode.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O3, when the advantageous condition is not determined, the first effect mode is set, so the operating means is operated during the first updating period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not an advantageous state is determined according to the ease of operation during the first update period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player to participate in the operation presentation.

In the game machine O3 or O4, there is provided a determination means for determining whether the predetermined determination value is a specific value based on the expiry of the valid period, and the determination means determines that the predetermined determination value is the specific value. specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect suggesting the advantageous state based on the determination that the predetermined determination value is higher than the second update; The gaming machine O5 is characterized in that it is updated so as to easily reach the specific value.

According to the game machine O5, the more the first update is executed, the more likely the predetermined determination value becomes a specific value. When a specific value is reached, a specific effect is executed. As a result, the player can operate the operating means in anticipation that the predetermined discrimination value will become a specific value. Therefore, there is an effect that the willingness to participate in the operation performance of the player can be improved.

Game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A game machine Z1 in any one of M1 to M8, N1 to N8, and O1 to O5, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A game machine Z2 in any one of M1 to M8, N1 to N8, and O1 to O5, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J7, K1 to K6, L1 to L11, A game machine Z3 in any one of M1 to M8, N1 to N8, and O1 to O5, wherein said game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device is configured to be able to execute a display effect in which various display images such as patterns and characters are displayed, thereby improving interest. Some of these conventional gaming machines execute a display effect or the like indicating whether or not a winning game that is advantageous to the player is to be given as a display effect (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-325886).
However, since such display effects are only selected by lottery, there is a problem that if the game is played continuously for a certain period of time, a series of effects will appear and the game will become monotonous.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 includes operation means that can be operated by the player, and specific control execution means that executes specific control when the operation means is operated according to a predetermined operation rule. and a condition establishing means for establishing a specific condition at a plurality of predetermined timings during a predetermined period of time, and as the predetermined operation rule, when the operating means is operated while the specific condition is established, A first state in which a first operation rule is set in which the specific control is executed when the operation is performed, and a predetermined operation rule, which is a state in which the operation means is operated in a state in which the specific condition is satisfied. switching means for switching between a second state in which a second operation rule is set in which the specific control is not executed, and a second state, based on at least the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, provided with an effect execution means for executing a timing suggestion effect for suggesting an operation timing according to the predetermined operation rule, and performing the specific control. The means executes the specific control when the operation means is operated at the operation timing suggested by the timing suggestion effect.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, further comprising timing determining means for determining operation timing based on the operation of the operating means by the player during the predetermined period. and, when the switching means switches to the second state, as the second operation rule, the specific control is performed when the operation means is operated at a timing different from the operation timing determined by the timing determination means. and an operation rule setting means for setting an operation rule for executing the.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein, as the second operation rule, the operation means is operated at a timing later than the predetermined timing at which the specific condition is established. a delay operation rule under which the specific control is executed when the specific condition is satisfied; operating rules are defined at least.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, wherein the timing determination means determines at least whether the operation means is operated in the first half of the state 1 in which the specific condition is established. and the operation rule setting means sets the delay operation rule when the timing determination means determines that the operation means is operated in the first half of one state in which the specific condition is satisfied. is.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the specific condition is established by the condition establishing means at a plurality of predetermined timings during the predetermined period. As a predetermined operation rule, a first state in which a first operation rule is set in which a specific control is executed when the operating means is operated in a state in which a specific condition is satisfied; A second state in which a second operation rule is set such that specific control is not executed when the operation means is operated in the established state is switched by the switching means based on at least the establishment of a predetermined condition.
As a result, the player can be expected to operate the operating means in a state in which the specific condition is satisfied, expecting that the game is in the first state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect executing means executes a timing suggestion effect for suggesting an operation timing according to a predetermined operation rule. Further, when the operation means is operated at the operation timing suggested by the timing suggestion effect, the specific control execution means executes the specific control.
As a result, the player can be made to perform an operation at the timing suggested by the timing suggestive effect in anticipation of execution of the specific control, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the timing suggestive effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation timing is discriminated by the timing discriminating means based on the operation of the operating means by the player during the predetermined period. Further, when switching to the second state by the switching means, as a second operation rule, when the operation means is operated at an operation timing different from the operation timing determined by the timing determination means, an operation in which specific control is executed. A rule is set by the operation rule setting means.
As a result, when the state is switched to the second state, the specific control is not executed unless the operation is performed at a timing different from the timing at which the player operated. can be made difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of specific control in the second state.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, when the operation means is operated at a timing later than the predetermined timing at which the specific condition is satisfied, the specified and an early operation rule according to which the specific control is executed when the operating means is operated at a timing earlier than the predetermined timing at which the specific condition is satisfied. It is stipulated as a rule. As a result, there is an effect that the operation rule set in the second state can be diversified.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, the following effects are obtained. That is, it is determined by at least the timing determining means whether or not the operating means is operated in the first half of the one state in which the specific condition is satisfied, and the timing determining means determines whether the operating means is operated in the first half of the one state in which the specific condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the delay operation rule is set by the operation rule setting means.
As a result, it is possible to switch to an operation rule in which specific control is not executed unless a player who has performed an operation in the first half of a state in which a specific condition is established does not operate the operating means at a timing later than the establishment of the specific condition. can. That is, for the player who operates the operation means early, the operation rule is set such that the specific control is not executed unless the operation is performed at a timing that makes it difficult for the player to perform the specific control in the second state. It has the effect of being able to

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of production execution means)

Claims (1)

a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter;
a determination means capable of executing a predetermined determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means;
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result;
a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the privilege is likely to be granted and a second game state in which the privilege is more difficult to be granted than in the first game state;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
a specific period setting means for setting a specific period during which a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect indicating that the first game state is set during execution of the specific effect,
The suggested production is
It can be executed when a discrimination game based on the discrimination is being performed in a state where the specific period is set,
It is not executed when the specific period is not set, or when the discrimination game is not performed while the specific period is set ,
When a standby effect that can be set when the game based on the determination is not executed in a state where the specific period is set is executed, it is not executed,
The gaming machine is capable of executing a special effect based on the ball entering the ball entering means and the execution condition being established,
The suggestive effect is not executed during the period during which the special effect is executed, and is executed when the specific period continues after the period during which the special effect is executed ends. A gaming machine characterized in that it is capable of

Images